project manual & specifications addition and renovations

Project Manual & Specifications

Addition and Renovations to Office Building for

Calcasieu Parish Sheriffs Office Lake Charles, Louisiana

Project No. 1666

Tony Mancuso, Sheriff November 3, 2017

H. Curtis Vincent – Steven D. Shows, Architects A Professional Corporation

www.vsarchitects.com

1502 South Huntington Street Phone (337) 527-8137 Sulphur, Louisiana 70663 Fax (337)528-2609

Associated Design Group Mechanical & Electrical

Consulting Engineers 3909 West Congress St., Suite 202

Lafayette, Louisiana 70506 Phone (337) 234-5710

Addition and Renovations to Office Building for Calcasieu Parish Sheriff’s Office Lake Charles, Louisiana

1

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Division Section Title Pages

DIVISION 0 – BIDDING DOCUMENTS Advertisement for Bids Instructions to Bidders Insurance Requirements Scope of Work Bid Form Bid Bond Form Subcontractor Listing Contractor’s Compliance Certificate on State & Local Residency Requirements Contractor’s Compliance Certificate on Electrical Subcontractors Non-Collusion Affidavit of Prime Bidder Affidavit (R.S. 38:2224 2190 2290-2296) Attestation Form (R.S. 38:2227) Affidavit Form(R.S. 38:2212.10) State & Local Residency Requirements Form Electrical Subcontractors Certification Form General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, AIA Document A201-2007 Supplementary Conditions Contract Form Performance and Payment Bond Form Louisiana Department of Revenue Form R-1020 Change Order Form Recommendation of Acceptance Form Beneficial Occupancy Form Special Provisions (Completion Time & Liquidated Damages)

DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01100 SUMMARY 201250 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 201290 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 401310 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 601330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 801400 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 701420 REFERENCES 201700 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 801731 CUTTING AND PATCHING 301770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 4

DIVISION 02 – SITE CONSTRUCTION 02411 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 5 DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 04 – MASONRY


2

048100 LOAD BEARING MASONRY 16

DIVISION 05 – METALS 05400 RETROFIT ROOF FRAMING SYSTEM 8

DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 06100 06402

ROUGH CARPENTRY INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

4 8

DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07210 072600 07410 07600 07841 07842 07920

BUILDING INSULATION VAPOR RETARDER STANDING SEAM ROOF PANELS FLASHING AND SHEETMETAL THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS JOINT SEALANTS

4 2

14 7 6 5 4

DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS 08111 08710 08800 08801

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES DOOR HARDWARE GLAZING FIRE-RESISTANT GLAZING

9 17 8 5

DIVISION 09 – FINISHES 09111 09250 09310 09511 09651 09653 09681 09911 09912 09931

NON-LOAD BEARING STEEL FRAMING GYPSUM BOARD CERAMIC TILE ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS RESILIENT FLOOR TILE RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES CARPET EXTERIOR PAINTING INTERIOR PAINTING WOOD STAINS AND TRANSPARENT FINISHES

4 7 8 7 4 5 4 6 6 4

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES 10431 SIGNS 4 10432 PLAQUE 3 10522 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 4 10523 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 3 10801 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 3 DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS


3

12492 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 4 DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 14 – CONVEYING SYSTEMS NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL 15000 MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 12 15100 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 9 15200 INSULATION 3 15300 WATER SUPPLY 1 15350 WASTE WATER DISPOSAL 1 15500 PLUMBING 3 15535 REFRIGERANT PIPING AND SPECIALTIES 7 15700 AIR CONDITIONING, HEATING AND VENTILATING 5 15750 AIR DISTRIBUTION 3 15800 TEMPERATURE CONTROLS 4 15900 TESTING, ADJUSTING & BALANCING 5 DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL 16001 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 13 16030 ACCEPTANCE TESTING 5 16050 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 8 16400 ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 7 16401 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDY 5 16402 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY 8 16403 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE ARC-FLASH STUDY 6 16455 GROUNDING 4 16472 TELE/DATA RACEWAY SYSTEM 1 16495 TRANSFER SWITCHES 6 16500 LIGHTING FIXTURES 4 16550 OCCUPANCY SENSORS 2 16621 EMERGENCY GENERATOR - DIESEL 8 16722 INTELLIGENT COMMUNICATING FIRE DETECTION SYSTEM (FIRE WARDEN 100) 22

ADVERTISEMENT The Calcasieu Parish Sheriff’s Office, Louisiana, does hereby advertise for sealed bids and will open same on: 1. Wednesday, December 6, 2017. 2. At the Calcasieu Parish Sheriff’s Office, Purchasing Department, 5400 Broad Street, Lake

Charles, Louisiana, 70615, at the hour of 2:00 p.m. Central Time Zone 3. For the Addition and Renovations to Office Building for the Calcasieu Parish Sheriff’s

Office. 4. Contract documents, including drawings and technical specifications, are on file at the

office of H. Curtis Vincent-Steven D. Shows, Architects, APC, 1502 South Huntington Street, Sulphur, Louisiana, 70663, or by calling 337/527-8137. Access to electronic bidding is available through www.bidsync.com. Complete documents may be obtained from the Project Architect upon deposit of $60.00 for each set of documents. Deposit is fully refundable for the first set of documents to all bona fide prime* bidders upon return of the documents in good condition no later than ten (10) days after receipt of bids. The deposit of all other set of documents will be refunded fifty percent (50%) upon return of documents as stated above.

*Prime bidders is defined as licensed Building Contractors bidding this job as such.

5. Preference is given to materials, supplies, and provisions that are produced, manufactured,

or grown in Louisiana, quality being equal to articles offered by competitors outside the State.

6. All bids must be accompanied by bid security equal to five percent (5%) of the sum of the base bid and all alternates, and must be in the form of a certified check or cashier’s check drawn on a bank insured by the FDIC, or a Calcasieu Parish Sheriffs Office Bid Bond Form contained in contract documents, shall be written by a surety or insurance company currently on the U.S. Department of the Treasury Financial Management Service list of approved bonding companies which is published annually in the Federal Register, or by a Louisiana domiciled insurance company with at least an A- rating in the latest printing of the A.M. Best's Key Rating Guide to write individual bonds up to ten percent of policyholders' surplus as shown in the A.M. Best's Key Rating Guide or by an insurance company in good standing licensed to write bid bonds which is either domiciled in Louisiana or owned by Louisiana residents, all in accordance with LSAR.S. 38:2218. No Bid Bond indicating an obligation of less than five percent (5%) by any method is acceptable. If bid is submitted electronically, an electronic bid bond as described in LSA--R.S. 38:2212 E.(1) per the standards adopted by the office of the governor, division of administration and the office of the information technology as provided for in LAC 4:XV.701 will be required.

ADVERTISEMENT Addition and Renovations to Office Building for Calcasieu Parish Sheriffs Office Page 2 7. The successful bidder shall be required to furnish a Performance and Payment Bond in an

amount equal to 100% of the Contract amount, shall be written by a surety or insurance company currently on the U.S. Department of the Treasury Financial Management Service list of approved bonding companies which is published annually in the Federal Register, or by a Louisiana domiciled insurance company with at least an A- rating in the latest printing of the A.M. Best's Key Rating Guide to write individual bonds up to ten percent of policyholders' surplus as shown in the A.M. Best's Key Rating Guide or by an insurance company in good standing licensed to write bid bonds which is either domiciled in Louisiana or owned by Louisiana residents, all in accordance with LSAR.S. 38:2219.

8. Bids shall be accepted only from contractors who are licensed under LSAR.S. 37:2150-

2163 for the classification of “Building Construction.” No bid may be withdrawn for a period of forty-five (45) days after receipt of bids, except under the provisions of LSAR.S. 38:2214.

9. The Owner reserves the right to reject any and all bids for just cause as permitted by LA

R.S. 38:2214B. The ability of an Entity to reject any bid is applicable only when administered in accordance with the Public Bid Law. In accordance with LSAR.S. 38:2212B.(1), the provisions and requirements of this Section, and those stated in the bidding documents shall not be waived by any entity.

10. The public shall incur no obligation to the Contractor until the Contract between the Calcasieu Parish Sheriffs Office and the Contractor is fully executed.

11. Official action on this bid will be taken within forty-five (45) days by the Calcasieu Parish

Sheriffs Office, except as may be extended by mutual written consent with the lowest responsible bidder.

12. All bids must be plainly marked and should contain the following on the outside of the

envelope: BID FOR “Addition and Renovations to Office Building for Calcasieu Parish Sheriffs

Office VS Project No. 1666”

Tony Mancuso, Sheriff Calcasieu Parish Sheriff’s Office

RUN: Lake Charles American Press – November 9, 2017 November 16, 2017 November 23, 2017

INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

CPPJ-Revised 2015/06

ARTICLE I

Definitions

1.1 The bidding documents include the following: Front End Documents-Bid Packages for Construction Advertisement for Bids Instructions to Bidders Insurance Requirements Scope of Work Louisiana Uniform Public Work Bid Form Louisiana Uniform Public Work Unit Price Form Bid Bond Subcontractor Listing Contractor Compliance Certificate on State & Local Residency Requirements Contractor Compliance Certificate on Electrical Subcontractors Non-Collusion Affidavit of Prime Bidder Affidavit (R.S. 38:2224 2190 2290-2296) Attestation Form (R.S. 38:2227) Affidavit Form (R.S.38:2212.10) Monthly Form State & Local Residency Requirements Monthly Form Electrical Subcontractors Certification General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, AIA Document A201-2007 Supplementary Conditions Contract Form Performance and Payment Bond Form Louisiana Department of Revenue Form R-1020 Change Order Form Recommendation of Acceptance Form Beneficial Occupancy Form Specifications Drawings Addenda issued during bid period and acknowledged in Bid Form Special Provisions Roofing Manufacturing Warranty & Approved Applicator Letter (if applicable) Verification of Items in Supplementary Conditions 1.1.1 Forms turned in with the bid. The Bid Form and Bid Bond Form are the only

forms that are turned in by the date and time specified. 1.1.2 Forms turned in within ten (10) days after the bid opening. The Subcontractor’s

Listing, the Contractor Compliance Certificate on State and Local Residency Requirements, the Contractor Compliance Certificate on Electrical Sub-contractors, the Non-Collusion Affidavit of Prime Bidder, the Affidavit (LSA—

INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 2


R.S. 38:2224 2190 2290-2296), Attestation Form (R.S. 38:2227), Affidavit Form (R.S. 38:2212.10), and the Roofing Manufacturing Warranty and Approved Applicator Letter (if applicable). These forms can be sent to the Project Architect, on behalf of the Calcasieu Parish Sheriff’s Office.

1.2 All definitions set forth in the General Conditions of the Contract for

Construction, AIA Document A201-2007, or in other Contract Documents are applicable to the Bidding Documents.

1.3 Addenda are written on graphic instruments issued by the Architect prior to the

opening of bids which modify or interpret the bidding documents by additions, deletions, clarifications, corrections, and prior approvals.

1.4 A Bid is a complete and properly signed bid to do the work or designated

portion thereof for the sums stipulated therein supported by data called for by the Bidding Documents.

1.5 Base Bid is the sum stated in the Bid for which the Bidder offers to perform the

work described as the Base, to which work may be added for sums stated in Alternate Bids.

1.6 An Alternate Bid (or Alternate) is an item on the bid form that may either

increase or decrease the quantity of work or change the type of work within the scope of the project, material, or equipment specified in the bidding documents or both.

1.7 A Unit Price Form shall be used if the contract includes unit prices and will be

made a part of the bid documents, if applicable. 1.8 A Bidder is one who submits a bid for a prime contract with the Owner for the

work described in the proposed contract documents. 1.9 A Sub-Bidder is one who submits a bid to a Bidder for materials and/or labor for

a portion of the work. 1.10 Where the word “Architect” is used in any of the Documents, it shall refer to the

Prime Designer of the project, an Architect or Engineer. 1.11 The executed Contract between the parties shall include all plans, specifications,

instructions, general conditions, any addenda issued, and the proposal, including alternates, unit prices, and allowances (if applicable) of the bid.



ARTICLE II

Bidder’s Representation 2.1 Each Bidder by making his bid represents that: 2.1.1 He has read and understands the Bidding Documents and his bid is made in

accordance therewith. 2.1.2 He has visited the site and has familiarized himself with the local conditions

under which the work is to be performed. 2.1.3 His bid is based upon the materials, systems, and equipment described in the

Bidding Documents as advertised and as modified by Addenda. 2.2 The Bidder must be fully qualified under any state or local licensing law for

Contractors in effect at the time and at the location of the work before submitting his bid. In the State of Louisiana, Revised Statutes 37:2150 et.seq. will be considered, if applicable. The Contractor shall be responsible for determining that all of his Sub-Bidders or prospective Subcontractors are duly licensed in accordance with law.

ARTICLE III

Bidding Documents

3.1 Copies 3.1.1 Bidding Documents may be obtained from the Architect for a deposit as stated in

the Advertisement for Bids. The deposit will be refunded as stated in the Advertisement for Bids. No deposits will be refunded on Bidding Documents returned later than ten (10) days after receipt of Bids.

3.1.2 Complete sets of Bidding Documents shall be used in preparing bids; neither the Owner nor the Architect assumes any responsibility for errors of misinterpretation resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents.

3.1.3 In accordance with LSAR.S. 38:2212 E., Public entities shall provide, as an

additional bidding option, a uniform and secure electronic interactive system for the submittal of bids for public works requiring competitive bidding. The Calcasieu Parish Sheriff’s Office has implemented the procedures related to this requirement that electronic bidding be an option for contractors to submit bids on all CPSO projects.



3.1.4 The Owner or Architect, in making copies of the Bidding Documents available

on the above terms, do so only for the purpose of obtaining bids on the work and do not confer a license or grant for any other use.

3.2 Interpretation or correction of Bidding Documents. 3.2.1 Bidders shall promptly notify the Architect of any ambiguity, inconsistency or

error which they may discover upon examination of the Bidding Documents or of the site and local conditions.

3.2.2 Bidders, requiring clarification or interpretation of Bidding Documents, shall

make a written request to the Architect to reach him at least seven days prior to the date of receipt of bids.

3.2.3 Any interpretation, correction or change of the Bidding Documents will be made

by Addendum. Interpretations, corrections or changes of the Bidding Documents made in any other manner will not be binding, and Bidders shall not rely upon such interpretations, corrections or changes.

3.3 Substitutions 3.3.1 The materials, products, and equipment described in the Bidding Documents

establish a standard of required function, dimension, appearance, and quality to be met by any proposed substitution.

3.3.2 No substitution will be considered unless written request for approval has been

submitted by the Proposer and has been received by the Architect no later than seven (7) working days prior to the date for receipt of bids. Each such request shall include the name of the material or equipment for which it is to be substituted and a complete description of the proposed substitute including model numbers, drawings, cuts, performance and test data, and other information necessary for an evaluation. A statement setting forth any changes in other materials, equipment or work that incorporation of the substitute would require shall be included. The burden of proof of the merit of the proposed substitute is upon the Proposer. The Architect’s decision of approval or disapproval of a proposed substitution shall be final.

3.3.3 If the Architect approves any proposed substitution, such approval will be set

forth in an Addendum. Bidders shall not rely upon approvals made in any other manner.



3.4 Addenda 3.4.1 Addenda will be mailed, emailed, or faxed to all who are known by the Architect

to have received a complete set of Bidding Documents. 3.4.2 Copies of Addenda will be made available for inspection wherever Bidding

Documents are on file for that purpose. 3.4.3 Addenda shall not be issued within a period of seventy-two (72) hours prior to

the advertised time for the opening bids, excluding Saturdays, Sundays, and any other legal holidays; however, if the necessity arises to issue an addendum modifying plans and specifications within the seventy-two (72) hour period prior to the advertised time for the opening of bids, then the opening of bids shall be extended exactly one week, without the requirement of re-advertising. The Calcasieu Parish Sheriff’s Office shall be consulted prior to the issuance of such an Addendum, and shall approve such issuance.

3.4.4 Each Bidder shall ascertain from the Architect prior to submitting his bid that he

has received all Addenda issued, and he shall acknowledge their receipt on the Bid Form.

ARTICLE IV

Bidding Procedures

4.1 Form and Style of Bids. 4.1.1 Bids shall be submitted on the forms provided by the Architect. 4.1.2 All blanks on the Bid Form shall be filled in by typewriter or manually in ink or

electronically, if requested. 4.1.3 Where so indicated by the makeup of the Bid Form, sums shall be expressed in

both words and figures, and in case of discrepancy between the two, the written words shall govern.

4.1.4 Any interlineations, alteration or erasure must be initialed by the signer of the

Bid or his authorized representative. 4.1.5 Bidders are cautioned to complete all Alternates or Unit Prices should such be

required in the Bid Form. Failure to submit alternate prices will render the bid informal and may cause its rejection.



4.1.6 Bidder shall make no additional stipulation on this Bid Form nor qualify his Bid in any other manner.

4.1.7 The bidding documents shall only require the following information at the time

designated in the advertisement for bid opening: Bid Security or Bid Bond, Acknowledgment of Addenda, Base Bid, Alternates, Signature of Bidder, Name, Title, and Address of Bidder, Name of Firm or Joint Venture, Corporate Resolution or written evidence of the authority of the person signing the bid and Louisiana Contractors License Number, and unit price information on public works projects where required. Written evidence of authority of the person signing the bid for public works shall be submitted at the time of bidding. Written evidence of authority and all supporting documents detailed in R.S. 38:2212 (5).

4.1.8 On any Bid in excess of Fifty Thousand Dollars ($50,000), the Contractor shall

certify that he is licensed under R.S. 37:2150-2163 and show his license number on the Bid above his signature of his duly authorized representative as well as on the outside of the Bid envelope.

4.2 Bid Security 4.2.1 All bids must be accompanied by bid security equal to five percent (5%) of the

sum of the base bid and all alternates, and must be in the form of certified check or cashier’s check drawn on a bank insured by the FDIC, or a Police Jury Bid Bond Form contained in contract documents, shall be written by a surety or insurance company currently on the U.S. Department of the Treasury Financial Management Service list of approved bonding companies which is published annually in the Federal Register, or by a Louisiana domiciled insurance company with at least an A- rating in the latest printing of the A.M. Best's Key Rating Guide to write individual bonds up to ten percent of policyholders' surplus as shown in the A.M. Best's Key Rating Guide or by an insurance company in good standing licensed to write bid bonds which is either domiciled in Louisiana or owned by Louisiana residents. No Bid Bond indicating an obligation of less than five percent (5%) by any method is acceptable.

Bid security furnished by the Contractor shall guarantee that the Contractor will,

if awarded the work according to the terms of his bid, enter into the Contract and furnish the Performance and Payment Bonds as required by these Contract Documents, within fifteen (15) days after written notice that the instrument is ready for signature.

Should the Bidder refuse to enter into such Contract or fail to furnish such bonds,

the amount of the bid security shall be forfeited to the Owner as liquidated damages, not as penalty.



4.2.2 The Owner will have the right to retain the bid security of Bidders until either (a)

the Contract has been executed and bonds have been furnished, or (b) the specified time has elapsed so that Bids may be withdrawn, or (c) all bids have been rejected.

4.3 Submission of Bids 4.3.1 Electronic Submission. In accordance with LSAR.S. 38:2212 E., Public entities

shall provide, as an additional bidding option, a uniform and secure electronic interactive system for the submittal of bids for public works requiring competitive bidding. The Calcasieu Parish Sheriff’s Office has implemented the procedures related to this requirement that electronic bidding be an option for contractors to submit bids on all CPSO projects.

4.3.2 Bids shall be sealed in an opaque envelope and will be received until the time

specified and at the place specified in the Advertisement for Bids. It shall be the specific responsibility of the Bidder to deliver his sealed bid to Calcasieu Parish Sheriff’s Office at the appointed place and prior to the announced time for the opening of bids. Late delivery of a bid for any reason, including late delivery by U. S. Mail, or express delivery, shall disqualify the bid. The bid envelope shall be identified on the outside with the name of project, and name, address, and license number of the Bidder. If the Bid is sent by mail, the sealed envelope shall be enclosed in a separate mailing envelope with the notation “Bid Enclosed” on the face thereof. Such bids shall be sent by Registered or Certified Mail, Return Receipt Requested, addressed to 5400 Broad Street, Lake Charles, LA 70615.

Bids shall be deposited at the designated location prior to the time on the date for receipt of bids indicated in the Advertisement for Bids, or an extension thereof made by Addendum. Bids received after the time and date for receipt of bids will be returned unopened.

Bidder shall assume full responsibility for timely delivery at location designated for receipt of bids.

Oral, telephonic, or telegraphic bids or modifications to bids, with the exception of the electronic procedures provided for herein, are invalid and will not receive consideration. Owner will not consider notation written on outside of Bid Envelope which has the effect of amending the Bid.

4.4 Modification or Withdrawal of Bid



4.4.1 A Bid may not be modified, withdrawn or canceled by the Bidder during the time stipulated in the Advertisement for Bids, for the period following the time and bid date designated for the receipt of bids, and Bidder so agrees in submitting his bid, except in accordance with LSAR.S. 38:2214 C., which states, in part, Bids containing patently obvious mechanical, clerical or mathematical errors may be withdrawn by the Contractor, if clear and convincing sworn, written evidence of such errors is furnished to the public entity within forty-eight hours of the bid opening excluding Saturdays, Sundays, and legal holidays.

4.4.2 Prior to the time and date designated for receipt of Bids, Bids submitted early

may be modified or withdrawn only by notice to the party receiving bids at the place and prior to the time designated for receipt of bids.

4.4.3 Withdrawn Bids may be resubmitted up to the time designated for the receipt of

Bids provided that they are then fully in conformance with these Instructions to Bidders.

4.4.4 Bid Security shall be in an amount sufficient for the Bid as modified or

resubmitted.

ARTICLE V

Consideration of Bids 5.1 Opening of Bids 5.1.1 The properly identified bids received on time will be opened publicly and read

aloud, and a tabulation abstract of the amounts of the Base Bid and any Alternates and/or unit prices, if applicable, will be made available to Bidders.

5.2 Rejection of Bids 5.2.1 The Owner reserves the right to reject any and all bids for just cause as permitted by

LA R.S. 38:2214 (B). The ability of an Entity to reject any bid is applicable only when administered in accordance with the Public Bid Law. In accordance with LSAR.S. 38:2212 B.(1), the provisions and requirements of this Section and those stated in the bid documents shall not be waived by any entity. The Owner shall have the right to reject any or all bids and in particular to reject a Bid not accompanied by any required bid security or data required by the Bidding Documents or a Bid in any way incomplete or irregular.



5.3 Acceptance of Bid 5.3.1 Determination of the low bidder shall be on the basis of the sum of the Base Bid

and Alternates accepted. The Owner reserves the right to accept Alternates in any order, which does not affect determination of the lower Bidder.

5.3.2 It is the intent of the Owner to award a contract to the lowest responsible Bidder

in accordance with the requirements of the Bidding Documents, and if the bid does not exceed the funds available.

ARTICLE VI

Post Bid Information

6.1 Forms required within ten (10) days after the bid opening. 6.1.1 The apparent low bidder shall submit to the Calcasieu Parish Sheriff’s Office, or

the Project Architect, on behalf of the Calcasieu Parish Sheriff’s Office, within ten (10) days after the bid opening, a list of all Subcontractors or other persons or organizations (if any) proposed for the principal portions of the work. Also, the Contractor shall provide a designation of the work to be performed by the Contractor with his own forces.

6.1.2 See enclosed Subcontractor’s Listing Form. The specifications on projects of

public improvement shall set forth those categories of subcontractors whose names must be submitted and shall provide that no subcontractor whose name has not been included on the list submitted by the apparent low bidder to the Calcasieu Parish Sheriff’s Office, or the Project Architect, on behalf of the Calcasieu Parish Sheriff’s Office, within ten (10) days after the bid opening, may be engaged in connection with the project as bid or perform work in connection therewith unless any change or modification has been approved by the Calcasieu Parish Sheriff’s Office, or unless the general contractor has submitted to the Calcasieu Parish Sheriff’s Office an affidavit in the appropriate format certifying that he has entered into bona fide written contracts with the listed subcontractors. In the latter case, Calcasieu Parish Sheriff’s Office approval of any modification will not be required, but notice of the change must be given to the Calcasieu Parish Sheriff’s Office prior to the actual change.

6.1.3 In addition to the list of names of subcontractors submitted in conjunction with a

project of public improvement, the subcontractor’s license number and federal identification number shall also be provided.

6.1.4 See enclosed Contractor Compliance Certificate on State & Local Residency

Requirements. There shall be a requirement that not less than eighty percent



(80%) of the persons employed in fulfilling of this contract be residents of the State of Louisiana. In addition, there shall be a requirement that not less than fifty percent (50%) of the persons employed in fulfilling of this contract be residents of Calcasieu Parish in accordance with LAR.S. 38:2225.1 B. (1) and (2). The Calcasieu Parish Sheriff’s Office further requests that not less than eighty percent (80%) of the persons employed in fulfilling of this contract be residents of Calcasieu Parish. This form shall be executed and submitted to the Calcasieu Parish Sheriff’s Office, or the Project Architect, on behalf of the Calcasieu Parish Sheriff’s Office, within ten (10) days after the bid opening by the apparent low bidder.

6.1.5 See enclosed Contractor Compliance Certificate on Electrician Subcontractors.

There shall be a requirement that any party bidding to perform electrical work of any nature under this contract shall not be deemed a “responsible bidder” unless it certifies that it will employ electricians on the project(s) in question who are certified as participating in a program of training and education or as having successfully completed such programs that are conducted or supervised by the National Joint Apprenticeship and Training Committee of the Electrical Industry and the Louisiana Department of Labor, Office of Regulatory Services, Labor Programs Section, Apprenticeship Division. The electrical sub-contractor shall provide through the general contractor on a monthly basis a signed certificate on a form provided by the Parish verifying compliance with the provisions of this section. This form shall be executed and submitted to the Calcasieu Parish Sheriff’s Office, or the Project Architect, on behalf of the Calcasieu Parish Sheriff’s Office, within ten (10) days after the bid opening by the apparent low bidder.

6.1.6 See enclosed Non-Collusion Affidavit of Prime Bidder. The apparent low bidder

shall execute the Non-Collusion Affidavit of Prime Bidder, and it must be submitted to the Calcasieu Parish Sheriff’s Office, or the Project Architect, on behalf of the Calcasieu Parish Sheriff’s Office, within ten (10) days after the bid opening.

6.1.7 See enclosed Affidavit (RS 38:2224, 2190, 2290-2296). The apparent low bidder

shall execute an affidavit, in accordance with LSA—R.S. 38:2290-2296 as amended, to the effect that he has not entered in to a collusive agreement with any other person, firm or corporation in regard to any bid submitted to the Calcasieu Parish Sheriff’s Office, or the Project Architect, on behalf of the Calcasieu Parish Sheriff’s Office, within ten (10) days after the bid opening.

6.1.8 See enclosed Attestation Form (R.S.38:2227). The apparent low bidder shall

execute an attestation, in accordance with LSA—R.S. 38:2227 to the effect that he has have past criminal convictions and it must be submitted to the Calcasieu



Parish Sheriff’s Office, or the Project Architect, on behalf of the Calcasieu Parish Sheriff’s Office, within ten (10) days after the bid opening.

6.1.9 See enclosed Affidavit Form (RS 38:2222.10). The apparent low bidder shall

execute an affidavit, in accordance with LSA—R.S. 38:2222.10 (C). that he is registered and participates in a status verification system, that he shall continue during the term of the contract, and shall require all subcontractors to submit a sworn affidavit verifying compliance. This form must be submitted to the Calcasieu Parish Sheriff’s Office, or the Project Architect, on behalf of the Calcasieu Parish Sheriff’s Office, within ten (10) days after the bid opening.

6.2 At the preconstruction conference, the Contractor shall submit the following

information to the Architect: A breakdown of the contract cost into divisions of the C.S.I. No payments will be made to the Contractor until this is received.

ARTICLE VII

Performance and Payment Bonds

7.1 Bonds Required 7.1.1 The successful bidder shall be required to furnish a Performance and Payment

Bond in an amount equal to 100% of the Contract amount, shall be written by a surety or insurance company currently on the U.S. Department of the Treasury Financial Management Service list of approved bonding companies which is published annually in the Federal Register, or by a Louisiana domiciled insurance company with at least an A- rating in the latest printing of the A.M. Best's Key Rating Guide to write individual bonds up to ten percent of policyholders' surplus as shown in the A.M. Best's Key Rating Guide or by an insurance company in good standing licensed to write bid bonds which is either domiciled in Louisiana or owned by Louisiana residents.

7.2 Time of Delivery and Form of Bond 7.2.2 Bond shall be in the form furnished by the Calcasieu Parish Sheriff’s Office,

entitled Performance and Payment Bond, a copy of which is included in the Contract Documents.

7.2.3 The Bidder shall require the Attorney-in-Fact, who executes the required bond

on behalf of the surety to affix thereto a certified and current copy of his power of attorney.



ARTICLE VIII

Contract 8.1 Form to be Used 8.1.1 Form of the Contract to be used shall be furnished by the Calcasieu Parish

Sheriff’s Office, a copy of which is bound in the Bidding Documents. 8.2 Award 8.2.1 Before award of the contract, the successful Bidders shall furnish to the Owner a

certified copy of the minutes of the corporation of partnership meeting which authorized the party executing the Bid to sign on behalf of the Contractor.

ARTICLE IX

Insurance Requirements

SEE ATTACHED INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS

ARTICLE X

Completion Time & Liquidated Damages

The completion of the Contract must be within the time stated in the Special Provisions section included in these bid documents, subject to such extensions as may be granted under AIA Document A201-2007, Paragraph 8.3, Delays and Extensions of Time in the General Conditions and the Supplementary Conditions, or the Contractor will be subject to pay to the Owner, Liquidated Damages in the amount as stated in the Special Provisions section included in these bid documents.

ARTICLE XI

Pre-Bid Conference 11.1 If deemed necessary, a pre-bid conference may be held at the Calcasieu Parish

Sheriff’s Office at least ten days before the date for receipt of bids. The Architect shall coordinate the setting of the date, time, and place for the pre-bid conference and shall invite, in writing, the Owner and all who have received sets of the Bidding Documents to attend. The purpose of the pre-bid conference is to familiarize Bidders with the requirements of the Project and the intent of the Contract Documents, and to receive comments and information from interested Bidders.



11.2 Any revision of the Bidding Documents, made as a result of the pre-bid

conference, shall not be valid unless included in an Addendum issued in accordance with Paragraph 3.4 of the Instructions to Bidders.

ARTICLE XII

Local Preference

12.1 The Calcasieu Parish Sheriff’s Office has gone on official record encouraging

General Contractors and Subcontractors domiciled in Calcasieu Parish to participate in this project, and further, expressing the preference of the CPSO that such Calcasieu Parish businesses obtain the work through the bid process. Also, the Calcasieu Parish Sheriff’s Office expresses its desire that fair wages be paid to employees working on the contract.

ARTICLE XIII

Use of Minority Subcontractors

13.1 The Calcasieu Parish Sheriff’s Office has gone on official record to encourage

General Contractors to award at least ten percent (10%) of their subcontracted work to minority contractors.

13.2 For the purposes of this Article, minority shall be defined as stipulated by

LAR.S. 38:2233.2E. (1) (2) which are as follows:

E. (1) “Minority” means a person who is a citizen or lawful permanent resident of the United States and who is: (a) American Indian or Alaskan Native: having origins in any of the original peoples of North America. (b) Asian American: having origins in any of the original peoples of the Far East, Southeast Asia, the Indian subcontinent, or the Pacific Islands. (c) Black: having origins in any of the black racial groups of Africa. (d) Female. (e) Hispanic: of Mexican, Puerto Rican, Cuban, Central or South American, or other Spanish or Portuguese culture or origin regardless of race. (2) “Minority business enterprise” or “Minority-owned business” means a small business organized for profit performing a commercially useful function which is



owned and controlled by one or more minority individuals or minority business enterprises. “Owned and controlled” means a business in which one or more minorities or minority business enterprises own at least fifty-one percent or in the case of a corporation at least fifty-one percent of the voting stock and control at least fifty-one percent of the management and daily business operations of the business.

ARTICLE XIV

Sales and Use Tax Exemption

14.1 In accordance with applicable rules adopted and promulgated by the Louisiana Department of Revenue, the Owner shall designate the contractor and all subcontractors as its agents for the purchase and lease of materials, supplies or equipment for the project. The contractor and all subcontractors shall accept the agency designation. The designation and acceptance thereof shall be made on the form prescribed by the Louisiana State Department of Revenue which form shall be part of the contract between the Owner, the Calcasieu Parish Sheriff’s Office, and the contractor. A copy of this form is hereby made part of these front end documents. The agency relationship between the Owner and the contractor and all subcontractors shall relieve the contract and subcontractors (1) from paying any state or local sales or state or local use taxes on materials, supplies or equipment which is affixed to and/or made a part of the real estate of the project or work or which is permanently incorporated into the project or work and, (2) from paying any state or local use taxes on any materials, supplies or equipment which is leased and used exclusively for the project or work. Accordingly, in preparing their bids and computing costs, the contract and subcontractors shall not consider sales and/or use taxes which would otherwise be due. The contractor and subcontractors shall furnish a copy of such certificate to all vendors or suppliers of any of the materials, supplies or equipment described above. The contractor and subcontractors shall make all purchases and leases on behalf of and as the agent of the Calcasieu Parish Sheriff’s Office. Rules and regulations of the Louisiana Department of Revenue shall prevail over any conflicting provisions or specifications of the contract.



ARTICLE XV

Drug Screen Testing

15.1 By submittal of this bid, contractor hereby certifies that it has in place and

employs a pre-employment drug screen test for each employee of contractor and administers periodic random drug screen testing for each such employee and agrees that it will not enter into any subcontractor agreement, whether verbal or written, unless said subcontractor has in place and employs pre-employment drug screen testing and periodic random drug screen testing. All such pre-employment drug screen testing and random testing shall meet or exceed the standards for drug screen testing as promulgated by the Associated General Contractors of Louisiana.


Project: Addition and Renovations to Office Building for Calcasieu Parish Sheriff’s Office Lake Charles, Louisiana Project No.: VS – 1666 Scope of Work: Renovate existing office space and restrooms as indicated on sheet A-2. Add new office space and restrooms of approximately 8,850 sq.ft. The existing metal roof shall be replaced as Add Alternate #1.


LOUISIANA UNIFORM PUBLIC WORK BID FORM TO: Calcasieu Parish Sheriff’s Office

5400 E Broad Street Lake Charles, Louisiana 70615

BID FOR: Addition and Renovations to Office Building for Calcasieu Parish Sheriff’s Office

5716 E Broad Street Lake Charles, Louisiana 70615 VS Project No. 1666

The undersigned bidder hereby declares and represents that she/he; a) has carefully examined and understands the Bidding Documents, b) has not received, relied on, or based his bid on any verbal instructions contrary to the Bidding Documents or any addenda, c) has personally inspected and is familiar with the project site, and hereby proposes to provide all labor, materials, tools, appliances and facilities as required to perform, in a workmanlike manner, all work and services for the construction and completion of the referenced project, all in strict accordance with the Bidding Documents prepared by:H. Curtis Vincent-Steven D. Shows, Architects, A Professional Corporation and dated: November 3, 2017

Bidders must acknowledge all addenda. The Bidder acknowledges receipt of the following ADDENDA: (Enter the number the

Designer has assigned to each of the addenda that the Bidder is acknowledging) __________________________________________ .

TOTAL BASE BID: For all work required by the Bidding Documents (including any and all unit prices designated “Base Bid” * but not alternates) the sum of:

Dollars ($ ) ALTERNATES: For any and all work required by the Bidding Documents for Alternates including any and all unit prices designated as alternates in the unit price description. Alternate No. 1 (Add Alternate - Replace Existing Metal Roof ) for the lump sum of: Dollars ($ ) Alternate No. 2 (None) for the lump sum of: Dollars ($ ) Alternate No. 3 (None) for the lump sum of: Dollars ($ ) NAME OF BIDDER:

ADDRESS OF BIDDER:

LOUISIANA CONTRACTOR’S LICENSE NUMBER:

NAME OF AUTHORIZED SIGNATORY OF BIDDER:

TITLE OF AUTHORIZED SIGNATORY OF BIDDER:

SIGNATURE OF AUTHORIZED SIGNATORY OF BIDDER **:

DATE: _______________________

* The Unit Price Form shall be used if the contract includes unit prices. Otherwise it is not required and need not be included with the form. The number of unit prices that may be included is not limited and additional sheets may be included if needed.

** If someone other than a corporate officer signs for the Bidder/Contractor, a copy of a corporate resolution or other signature authorization shall be required for submission of bid. Failure to include a copy of the appropriate signature authorization, if required, may result in the rejection of the bid unless bidder has complied with La. R.S. 38:2212(B)5.

BID SECURITY in the form of a bid bond, certified check or cashier’s check as prescribed by LA RS 38:2218.A is attached to and made a part of this bid.


BID BOND FOR

Addition and Renovations to Office Building for Calcasieu Parish Sheriff’s Office Date: ________________ KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:

That of , as Principal, and , as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the Calcasieu Parish Sheriff’s Office (Obligee), in the full and just sum of five (5%) percent of the total amount of this proposal, including all alternates, lawful money of the United States, for payment of which sum, well and truly be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally firmly by these presents.

Surety represents that it is listed on the current U. S. Department of the Treasury Financial Management Service list of approved bonding companies as approved for an amount equal to or greater that the amount for which it obligates itself in this instrument or that it is a Louisiana domiciled insurance company with at least an A - rating in the latest printing of the A. M. Best's Key Rating Guide. If surety qualifies by virtue of its Best's listing, the Bond amount may not exceed ten percent of policyholders' surplus as shown in the latest A. M. Best's Key Rating Guide.

Surety further represents that it is licensed to do business in the State of Louisiana and that this Bond is signed by surety's agent or attorney-in-fact. This Bid Bond is accompanied by appropriate power of attorney.

THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH that, whereas said Principal is herewith submitting its proposal to the Obligee on a Contract for: ________________________________________________________________________________

NOW, THEREFORE, if the said Contract be awarded to the Principal and the Principal shall, within such time as may be specified, enter into the Contract in writing and give a good and sufficient bond to secure the performance of the terms and conditions of the Contract with surety acceptable to the Obligee, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise this obligation shall become due and payable.

PRINCIPAL (BIDDER) SURETY BY: BY: AUTHORIZED OFFICER-OWNER-PARTNER AGENT OR ATTORNEY-IN-FACT(SEAL)

PROJECT: Addition and Renovations to Office Building for Calcasieu Parish Sheriff’s Office VS# 1666


SUBCONTRACTOR LISTING (See Post Bid Information, Article VI for further instructions.)

Page ____ of _____ Pages

Work Description Subcontractor & Location

√ if minority

Phone #

LA. Contractor’s License #

Federal I.D. #

THIS FORM MUST BE SUBMITTED TO THE OWNER, OR

PROJECT ARCHITECT/ENGINEER ON BEHALF OF THE OWNER, WITHIN TEN (10) DAYS AFTER THE BID OPENING.


CONTRACTOR COMPLIANCE CERTIFICATE ON STATE & LOCAL RESIDENCY REQUIREMENTS

In accordance with Article VI, I hereby certify that this construction firm will comply with the requirements that certain percentages of state and local residents be hired on this project in accordance with the provisions of LSAR.S. 38:2225.1 B. (1) and (2). I acknowledge that the Calcasieu Parish Sheriff’s Office has invoked its authority under the provisions of the statutes, which are as follows: B. (1) When a participating political subdivision lets a contract for a public works

project that is to be administered by or paid for, in whole or in part, by said political subdivision’s funds, the governing authority of the political subdivision may require, as a condition of letting the contract, that not less than eighty percent of the persons employed in fulfilling that contract be residents of the State of Louisiana.

(2) In addition, when the governing authority of Calcasieu Parish may, upon a finding that there is substantial cause to counteract grave economic and social ills, require, as a condition of letting contracts for public works to be paid for solely with parish funds, that no less than fifty percent of the persons employed in fulfilling that contract be residents of Calcasieu Parish. Notwithstanding the provisions of this Paragraph, management personnel and persons whose skills are unavailable for performing the work may be excluded from the requirements of this Paragraph, as said governing authority may determine and provide for in the bid specifications.

I will complete the “Contractor’s Monthly Certification Affidavit” similar to that

enclosed in these bid documents submit same at the required times during the course of this project.

____________________________________________ BIDDER BY: ________________________________________ ____________________________________________

Name & Title ____________________________________________

Address Date: _____________________

THIS FORM MUST BE SUBMITTED TO THE OWNER, OR PROJECT ARCHITECT, ON BEHALF OF THE OWNER, WITHIN

TEN (10) DAYS AFTER THE BID OPENING.


CONTRACTOR COMPLIANCE CERTIFICATE ON ELECTRICAL SUBCONTRACTORS

In accordance with Article VI, I, the undersigned, do hereby certify that this construction firm will comply with the following requirement of the Calcasieu Parish Sheriff’s Office:

Any party bidding to perform electrical work of any nature under this contract shall not be deemed a “responsible bidder” unless it certifies that it will employ electricians on the project(s) in question who are certified as participating in a program of training and education or as having successfully completed such programs that are conducted or supervised by the National Joint Apprenticeship and Training Committee of the Electrical Industry and the Louisiana Department of Labor, Office of Regulatory Services, Labor Programs Section, Apprenticeship Division. The electrical sub-contractor shall provide through the general contractor on a monthly basis a signed certificate on a form provided by the Parish verifying compliance with the provisions of this section.

I will require the electrical subcontractor(s) to submit a signed certificate on the form provided by the Calcasieu Parish Sheriff’s Office on a monthly basis, and said certificate will be submitted by this firm along with the monthly invoice and other appropriate documents. _________________________________________ BIDDER BY: _____________________________________ _________________________________________ NAME & TITLE _________________________________________ ADDRESS DATE: ______________________

THIS FORM MUST BE SUBMITTED TO THE OWNER, OR THE PROJECT ARCHITECT, ON BEHALF OF THE OWNER, WITHIN TEN (10)

DAYS AFTER THE BID OPENING.


NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT OF PRIME BIDDER STATE OF LOUISIANA PARISH OF CALCASIEU _____________________________________, being first duly sworn, deposed and says that (1) He is ________________ of __________________________________________, the Bidder that has submitted the attached Bid: (2) He is fully informed respecting the preparations and contents of the attached Bid and of all pertinent circumstances respecting such Bid: (3) Such Bid is genuine and is not a collusive or sham Bid: (4) Neither the said Bidder nor any of its officers, partners, owners, agents, representatives, employees or parties in interest, including this affiant, has in any way colluded, conspired, connived or agreed, directly or indirectly with any other Bidder, firm or person to submit a collusive or sham Bid in connection with the Contract for which the attached Bid has been submitted or to refrain from bidding in connection with such Contract, or has in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by agreement or collusion or communications or conference with any other Bidder or to fix any overhead, profit or cost element of the Bid price or the Bid price of any other Bidder, or to secure through the collusion, conspiracy, connivance or unlawful agreement any advantage against the CALCASIEU PARISH SHERIFF’S OFFICE, or any person interested in the proposed Contract; and (5) The price or prices quoted in the attached Bid are fair and proper and are not tainted by any collusion, conspiracy, connivance or unlawful agreement on the part of the Bidder or any of its agents, representatives, owners, employees or parties in interest, including this affiant.

Company Name: ____________________________________ By: ________________________________________________

__________________________________ Title

SUBSCRIBED AND SWORN TO BEFORE ME, NOTARY PUBLIC, on this _____ day of

_______________________, 20___.

___________________________________________

NOTARY PUBLIC My Commission Expires: __________________________ THIS FORM MUST BE SUBMITTED TO THE OWNER, OR THE PROJECT ARCHITECT, ON BEHALF OF THE OWNER, WITHIN

TEN (10) DAYS AFTER THE BID OPENING.

AFFIDAVIT (RS 38:2224, 2190, 2290-2296)


CALCASIEU PARISH SHERIFF’S OFFICE PROJECT NO. 1666 NAME: Addition and Renovations to Office Building for Calcasieu Parish Sheriffs Office LOCATION: 5716 E Broad Street, Lake Charles, Louisiana 70615 STATE OF LOUISIANA PARISH OF CALCASIEU Before me, the undersigned authority, duly commissioned and qualified within and for the State and the Parish aforesaid, personally came and appeared _________________________, representing ______________________________________, who, being by me first duly sworn deposed and said that he has read this affidavit and does hereby agree under oath to comply with all provisions herein as follows:

PART I Section 2224 of Part I of Chapter 10 of Title 38

of the LA. Revised Statutes of 1950 as amended. (1) That affiant employed no person, corporation, firm, association, or other

organization, either directly or indirectly, to secure the public contract under which he received payment, other than persons regularly employed by the affiant whose services in connection with the construction of the public building or project or in securing the public contract were in the regular course of their duties for affiant; and

(2) That no part of the contract price received by affiant as paid or will be paid to any

person, corporation, firm, association, or other organization for soliciting the contract, other than the payment of their normal compensation to persons regularly employed by the affiant whose services in connection with the construction of the public building or project were in the regular course of their duties for affiant.

PART II

Section 2190 of the Part I of Chapter 10 of Title 38 of the LA. Revised Statutes of 1950 as amended.

That affiant, if he be an architect or engineer, or representative thereof, does not own a substantial financial interest, either directly or indirectly, in any corporation, firm partnership, or other organization which supplies materials for the construction of a public building or project when the architect or engineer has performed architectural or engineering services, either directly or indirectly, in connection with the public building or project for which the materials are being supplied.

AFFIDAVIT (RS 38:2224, 2190, 2290-2296)


For the purpose of this section, a “substantial financial interest” shall exclude any interest in stock being traded on the American Stock Exchange or the New York Stock Exchange. That affiant, if subject to the provisions of this section, does hereby agree to be subject to the penalties involved for the violation of this section.

PART III That affiant does hereby state that he has read and agrees to comply with and be subject to the provisions of Part V of Chapter 10 of Title 38 of the Louisiana Revised Statutes of 1950, being Sections 2290 through 2296 of Title 38 as amended. ______________________________________ SWORN TO AND SUBSCRIBED before me on this ____ day of _______________,

20____.

__________________________________________ NOTARY PUBLIC

THIS FORM MUST BE SUBMITTED TO THE OWNER, OR THE PROJECT ARCHITECT, ON BEHALF OF THE OWNER, WITHIN TEN (10) DAYS AFTER

THE BID OPENING.


ATTESTATION FORM (R.S. 38:2227)

(Past Criminal Convictions of Bidders)

Addition and Renovations to Office Building for Calcasieu Parish Sheriff’s Office NAME OF PROJECT

Appearer, as a Bidder on the above-entitled Public Works Project, does hereby attest that: LA. R.S. 38:2227 PAST CRIMINAL CONVICTIONS OF BIDDERS A. No sole proprietor or individual partner, incorporator, director, manager, officer, organizer, or member who

has a minimum of a ten percent (10%) ownership in the bidding entity named below has been convicted of, or has entered a plea of guilty or nolo contendere to any of the following state crimes or equivalent federal crimes:

(a) Public bribery (R.S. 14:118) (c) Extortion (R.S. 14:66)

(b) Corrupt influencing (R.S. 14:120) (d) Money laundering (R.S. 14:230) B. Within the past five years from the project bid date, no sole proprietor or individual partner, incorporator,

director, manager, officer, organizer, or member who has a minimum of a ten percent (10%) ownership in the bidding entity named below has been convicted of, or has entered a plea of guilty or nolo contendere to any of the following state crimes or equivalent federal crimes, during the solicitation or execution of a contract or bid awarded pursuant to the provisions of Chapter 10 of Title 38 of the Louisiana Revised Statutes:

(a) Theft (R.S. 14:67) (b) Identity Theft (R.S. 14:67.16)

(c) Theft of a business record (R.S.14:67.20)

(d) False accounting (R.S. 14:70) (e) Issuing worthless checks

(R.S. 14:71)

(f) Bank fraud (R.S. 14:71.1) (g) Forgery (R.S. 14:72) (h) Contractors; misapplication of payments (R.S. 14:202) (i) Malfeasance in office (R.S. 14:134)

____________________________________ ________________________________________________ NAME OF BIDDER NAME OF AUTHORIZED SIGNATORY OF BIDDER ____________________________________ _________________________________________________ DATE TITLE OF AUTHORIZED SIGNATORY OF BIDDER

__________________________________________________________ SIGNATURE OF AUTHORIZED

SIGNATORY OF BIDDER

THIS FORM MUST BE SUBMITTED TO THE OWNER, OR THE PROJECT ARCHITECT, ON BEHALF OF THE OWNER, WITHIN TEN (10) DAYS AFTER THE BID OPENING.


AFFIDAVIT FORM (R.S. 38:2212.10(C))

(Verification of Employees E-Verify)

Addition and Renovations to Office Building for Calcasieu Parish Sheriff’s Office NAME OF PROJECT

Appearer, as a Bidder on the above-entitled Public Works Project, does hereby attest that: LA. R.S. 38:2212.10 Verification of Employees (E-Verify) A. Appear is registered and participates in a status verification system (E-Verify) to verify that all employees in

the state of Louisiana are legal citizens of the United States or are legal aliens.

B. If awarded the contract, Appearer shall continue, during the term of the contract, to utilize a status verification system (E-Verify) to verify the legal status of all new employees in the state of Louisiana.

C. If awarded the contract, Appearer shall require all subcontractors to submit to it a sworn affidavit verifying

compliance with Paragraphs (A) and (B) of this Subsection.

____________________________________ ________________________________________________ NAME OF BIDDER NAME OF AUTHORIZED SIGNATORY OF BIDDER ____________________________________ _________________________________________________ DATE TITLE OF AUTHORIZED SIGNATORY OF BIDDER

__________________________________________________________ SIGNATURE OF AUTHORIZED

SIGNATORY OF BIDDER ____________________________________ WITNESS ____________________________________ WITNESS

__________________________________________________________ NOTARY PUBLIC

THIS FORM MUST BE SUBMITTED TO THE OWNER, OR THE PROJECT ARCHITECT, ON BEHALF OF THE OWNER, WITHIN TEN (10) DAYS AFTER THE BID OPENING.

MONTHLY FORM CONTRACTOR COMPLIANCE FOR LOCAL AND STATE RESIDENCY REQUIREMENTS


NOTE: this Contract Compliance Executed Form shall be submitted on a monthly basis to the Calcasieu Parish Sheriff’s Office along with the Contractor’s Monthly Request for Payment. It must be properly completed, executed, totaled, and certified on the last page of this form by the authorized agent.

Page _____ of _____ Pages General Contractor/Location Subcontractor/Location

Total # In Work

Force this Project

Total # Calcasieu Residents in Work

Force on this Project

% of Calcasieu Residents in Work


Total # of Louisiana Residents in Work


% of Louisiana Residents in Work


MONTHLY FORM CONTRACTOR COMPLIANCE FOR LOCAL AND STATE RESIDENCY REQUIREMENTS


NOTE: this Contract Compliance Executed Form shall be submitted on a monthly basis to the Calcasieu Parish Sheriff’s Office along with the Contractor’s Monthly Request for Payment. It must be properly completed, executed, totaled, and certified on the last page of this form by the authorized agent.

Page _____ of _____ Pages General Contractor/Location Subcontractor/Location

Total # in Work

Force this Project

Total # Calcasieu Residents in Work


% of Calcasieu Residents in Work


Total # of Louisiana Residents in Work


% of Louisiana Residents in Work


TOTALS

I, the undersigned, do hereby certify that the information provided herein of the total work force on this project listed below for the month of __________________, 20___, is true and correct and in compliance with Article XII of the Contract Documents. PROJECT: _______________________________________ GENERAL CONTRACTOR: __________________________________________ SIGNATURE OF AGENT: __________________________________________________TITLE: _____________________________________

MONTHLY FORM ELECTRICAL SUBCONTRACTOR’S CERTIFICATION

(See Post Bid Information, Article VI for further instructions)


NOTE: this electrical subcontractor’s certification shall be properly filled out, executed, and submitted by the electrical subcontractor(s) through the general contractor on a monthly basis, and must be attached to the monthly invoice submitted by the general contractor to the Calcasieu Parish Sheriff’s Office. Electrical subcontractor(s) may make more copies of this form, if additional pages are necessary.

PROJECT: _________________________________________________ MONTH OF ________________, 20____. Page _____ of _____ Pages

NAME OF EMPLOYEES IN WORK FORCE

THIS MONTH

PARTICIPATING/COMPLETED TRAINING & EDUCATION

PROGRAM (please check one) YES NO

CERTIFIED BY: __________________________________ DATE: __________________

Document A201TM

– 2007General Conditions of the Contract for Construction

Init.

/

AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 18:05:09 on 11/02/2017 under Order No. 7424715143 which expires on 05/12/2018, and is not for resale.User Notes: (3B9ADA17)

1

for the following PROJECT:(Name and location or address)Addition and Renovations to Office Building for Calcasieu Parish Sheriff's 5716 E Broad Street Lake Charles, Louisiana 70615VS Project No. 1666

THE OWNER:(Name, legal status and address)Calcasieu Parish Sheriff's Office 5400 E Broad StreetLake Charles, Louisiana 70615

THE ARCHITECT:(Name, legal status and address)H. Curtis Vincent-Steven D. Shows, Architects, A Professional Corporation 1502 South Huntington StreetSulphur, Louisiana 70663

TABLE OF ARTICLES

1 GENERAL PROVISIONS

2 OWNER

3 CONTRACTOR

4 ARCHITECT

5 SUBCONTRACTORS

6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS

7 CHANGES IN THE WORK

8 TIME

9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION

10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY

11 INSURANCE AND BONDS

12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK

13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS

14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT

ADDITIONS AND DELETIONS: The author of this document has added information needed for its completion. The author may also have revised the text of the original AIA standard form. An Additions and Deletions Report that notes added information as well as revisions to the standard form text is available from the author and should be reviewed. A vertical line in the left margin of this document indicates where the author has added necessary information and where the author has added to or deleted from the original AIA text.

This document has important legal consequences. Consultation with an attorney is encouraged with respect to its completion or modification.

Init.

/


2

15 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES

Init.

/


3

INDEX(Topics and numbers in bold are section headings.)

Acceptance of Nonconforming Work9.6.6, 9.9.3, 12.3Acceptance of Work9.6.6, 9.8.2, 9.9.3, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 12.3Access to Work3.16, 6.2.1, 12.1Accident Prevention10Acts and Omissions3.2, 3.3.2, 3.12.8, 3.18, 4.2.3, 8.3.1, 9.5.1, 10.2.5, 10.2.8, 13.4.2, 13.7, 14.1, 15.2Addenda1.1.1, 3.11Additional Costs, Claims for3.7.4, 3.7.5, 6.1.1, 7.3.7.5, 10.3, 15.1.4Additional Inspections and Testing9.4.2, 9.8.3, 12.2.1, 13.5Additional Insured11.1.4Additional Time, Claims for3.2.4, 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.10.2, 8.3.2, 15.1.5Administration of the Contract3.1.3, 4.2, 9.4, 9.5Advertisement or Invitation to Bid1.1.1Aesthetic Effect4.2.13Allowances3.8, 7.3.8All-risk Insurance11.3.1, 11.3.1.1Applications for Payment4.2.5, 7.3.9, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5.1, 9.6.3, 9.7, 9.10, 11.1.3Approvals2.1.1, 2.2.2, 2.4, 3.1.3, 3.10.2, 3.12.8, 3.12.9, 3.12.10, 4.2.7, 9.3.2, 13.5.1Arbitration8.3.1, 11.3.10, 13.1, 15.3.2, 15.4 ARCHITECT4Architect, Definition of4.1.1Architect, Extent of Authority2.4, 3.12.7, 4.1, 4.2, 5.2, 6.3, 7.1.2, 7.3.7, 7.4, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.3, 9.8, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 12.1, 12.2.1, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4, 15.1.3, 15.2.1Architect, Limitations of Authority and Responsibility2.1.1, 3.12.4, 3.12.8, 3.12.10, 4.1.2, 4.2.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.10, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 5.2.1, 7.4, 9.4.2, 9.5.3, 9.6.4, 15.1.3, 15.2

Architect’s Additional Services and Expenses2.4, 11.3.1.1, 12.2.1, 13.5.2, 13.5.3, 14.2.4Architect’s Administration of the Contract3.1.3, 4.2, 3.7.4, 15.2, 9.4.1, 9.5Architect’s Approvals2.4, 3.1.3, 3.5, 3.10.2, 4.2.7Architect’s Authority to Reject Work3.5, 4.2.6, 12.1.2, 12.2.1Architect’s Copyright1.1.7, 1.5Architect’s Decisions3.7.4, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.11, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 4.2.14, 6.3,7.3.7, 7.3.9, 8.1.3, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 13.5.2, 15.2, 15.3Architect’s Inspections3.7.4, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 13.5Architect’s Instructions3.2.4, 3.3.1, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 13.5.2Architect’s Interpretations4.2.11, 4.2.12Architect’s Project Representative4.2.10Architect’s Relationship with Contractor1.1.2, 1.5, 3.1.3, 3.2.2, 3.2.3, 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.4.2, 3.5, 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.9.2, 3.9.3, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 3.16, 3.18,4.1.2, 4.1.3, 4.2, 5.2, 6.2.2, 7, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 10.2.6, 10.3, 11.3.7, 12, 13.4.2, 13.5, 15.2Architect’s Relationship with Subcontractors1.1.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.4, 4.2.6, 9.6.3, 9.6.4, 11.3.7Architect’s Representations9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.10.1Architect’s Site Visits3.7.4, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 13.5Asbestos10.3.1Attorneys’ Fees3.18.1, 9.10.2, 10.3.3Award of Separate Contracts6.1.1, 6.1.2Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for Portions of the Work5.2Basic Definitions1.1Bidding Requirements1.1.1, 5.2.1, 11.4.1Binding Dispute Resolution9.7, 11.3.9, 11.3.10, 13.1, 15.2.5, 15.2.6.1, 15.3.1, 15.3.2, 15.4.1Boiler and Machinery Insurance11.3.2Bonds, Lien7.3.7.4, 9.10.2, 9.10.3Bonds, Performance, and Payment7.3.7.4, 9.6.7, 9.10.3, 11.3.9, 11.4

Init.

/


4

Building Permit3.7.1Capitalization1.3Certificate of Substantial Completion9.8.3, 9.8.4, 9.8.5Certificates for Payment4.2.1, 4.2.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.1, 9.6.6, 9.7, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4, 15.1.3Certificates of Inspection, Testing or Approval13.5.4Certificates of Insurance9.10.2, 11.1.3Change Orders1.1.1, 2.4, 3.4.2, 3.7.4, 3.8.2.3, 3.11, 3.12.8, 4.2.8, 5.2.3, 7.1.2, 7.1.3, 7.2, 7.3.2, 7.3.6, 7.3.9, 7.3.10,8.3.1, 9.3.1.1, 9.10.3, 10.3.2, 11.3.1.2, 11.3.4, 11.3.9, 12.1.2, 15.1.3Change Orders, Definition of7.2.1CHANGES IN THE WORK2.2.1, 3.11, 4.2.8, 7, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.4, 8.3.1, 9.3.1.1, 11.3.9Claims, Definition of15.1.1CLAIMS AND DISPUTES3.2.4, 6.1.1, 6.3, 7.3.9, 9.3.3, 9.10.4, 10.3.3, 15, 15.4Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims15.4.1Claims for Additional Cost3.2.4, 3.7.4, 6.1.1, 7.3.9, 10.3.2, 15.1.4Claims for Additional Time3.2.4, 3.7.4, 6.1.1, 8.3.2, 10.3.2, 15.1.5Concealed or Unknown Conditions, Claims for3.7.4Claims for Damages3.2.4, 3.18, 6.1.1, 8.3.3, 9.5.1, 9.6.7, 10.3.3, 11.1.1, 11.3.5, 11.3.7, 14.1.3, 14.2.4, 15.1.6Claims Subject to Arbitration15.3.1, 15.4.1Cleaning Up3.15, 6.3Commencement of the Work, Conditions Relating to2.2.1, 3.2.2, 3.4.1, 3.7.1, 3.10.1, 3.12.6, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 6.2.2, 8.1.2, 8.2.2, 8.3.1, 11.1, 11.3.1, 11.3.6, 11.4.1,15.1.4Commencement of the Work, Definition of8.1.2Communications Facilitating Contract Administration3.9.1, 4.2.4Completion, Conditions Relating to3.4.1, 3.11, 3.15, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 8.2, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10, 12.2, 13.7, 14.1.2COMPLETION, PAYMENTS AND9Completion, Substantial

4.2.9, 8.1.1, 8.1.3, 8.2.3, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10.3,12.2, 13.7Compliance with Laws1.6, 3.2.3, 3.6, 3.7, 3.12.10, 3.13, 4.1.1, 9.6.4, 10.2.2, 11.1, 11.3, 13.1, 13.4, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 13.6, 14.1.1, 14.2.1.3, 15.2.8, 15.4.2, 15.4.3Concealed or Unknown Conditions3.7.4, 4.2.8, 8.3.1, 10.3Conditions of the Contract1.1.1, 6.1.1, 6.1.4Consent, Written3.4.2, 3.7.4, 3.12.8, 3.14.2, 4.1.2, 9.3.2, 9.8.5, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 11.3.1, 13.2, 13.4.2, 15.4.4.2Consolidation or Joinder15.4.4CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS1.1.4, 6Construction Change Directive, Definition of7.3.1Construction Change Directives1.1.1, 3.4.2, 3.12.8, 4.2.8, 7.1.1, 7.1.2, 7.1.3, 7.3,9.3.1.1Construction Schedules, Contractor’s3.10, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 6.1.3, 15.1.5.2Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts5.4, 14.2.2.2Continuing Contract Performance15.1.3Contract, Definition of1.1.2CONTRACT, TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE5.4.1.1, 11.3.9, 14Contract Administration3.1.3, 4, 9.4, 9.5Contract Award and Execution, Conditions Relating to3.7.1, 3.10, 5.2, 6.1, 11.1.3, 11.3.6, 11.4.1Contract Documents, Copies Furnished and Use of1.5.2, 2.2.5, 5.3Contract Documents, Definition of1.1.1Contract Sum3.7.4, 3.8, 5.2.3, 7.2, 7.3, 7.4, 9.1, 9.4.2, 9.5.1.4, 9.6.7, 9.7, 10.3.2, 11.3.1, 14.2.4, 14.3.2, 15.1.4, 15.2.5Contract Sum, Definition of9.1Contract Time3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.10.2, 5.2.3, 7.2.1.3, 7.3.1, 7.3.5, 7.4, 8.1.1, 8.2.1, 8.3.1, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.3.2, 12.1.1, 14.3.2, 15.1.5.1, 15.2.5Contract Time, Definition of8.1.1CONTRACTOR3

Init.

/


5

Contractor, Definition of3.1, 6.1.2Contractor’s Construction Schedules3.10, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 6.1.3, 15.1.5.2Contractor’s Employees3.3.2, 3.4.3, 3.8.1, 3.9, 3.18.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 10.2, 10.3, 11.1.1, 11.3.7, 14.1, 14.2.1.1Contractor’s Liability Insurance11.1Contractor’s Relationship with Separate Contractors and Owner’s Forces3.12.5, 3.14.2, 4.2.4, 6, 11.3.7, 12.1.2, 12.2.4Contractor’s Relationship with Subcontractors1.2.2, 3.3.2, 3.18.1, 3.18.2, 5, 9.6.2, 9.6.7, 9.10.2, 11.3.1.2, 11.3.7, 11.3.8Contractor’s Relationship with the Architect1.1.2, 1.5, 3.1.3, 3.2.2, 3.2.3, 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.4.2, 3.5, 3.7.4, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 3.16, 3.18, 4.1.3, 4.2, 5.2,6.2.2, 7, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 10.2.6,10.3, 11.3.7, 12, 13.5, 15.1.2, 15.2.1Contractor’s Representations3.2.1, 3.2.2, 3.5, 3.12.6, 6.2.2, 8.2.1, 9.3.3, 9.8.2Contractor’s Responsibility for Those Performing the Work3.3.2, 3.18, 5.3, 6.1.3, 6.2, 9.5.1, 10.2.8Contractor’s Review of Contract Documents3.2Contractor’s Right to Stop the Work9.7Contractor’s Right to Terminate the Contract14.1, 15.1.6Contractor’s Submittals3.10, 3.11, 3.12.4, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 9.2, 9.3, 9.8.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 11.1.3, 11.4.2Contractor’s Superintendent3.9, 10.2.6Contractor’s Supervision and Construction Procedures1.2.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.12.10, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 6.1.3, 6.2.4, 7.1.3, 7.3.5, 7.3.7, 8.2, 10, 12, 14, 15.1.3Contractual Liability Insurance11.1.1.8, 11.2Coordination and Correlation1.2, 3.2.1, 3.3.1, 3.10, 3.12.6, 6.1.3, 6.2.1Copies Furnished of Drawings and Specifications1.5, 2.2.5, 3.11Copyrights1.5, 3.17Correction of Work2.3, 2.4, 3.7.3, 9.4.2, 9.8.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.1, 12.1.2, 12.2Correlation and Intent of the Contract Documents1.2Cost, Definition of7.3.7Costs

2.4, 3.2.4, 3.7.3, 3.8.2, 3.15.2, 5.4.2, 6.1.1, 6.2.3,7.3.3.3, 7.3.7, 7.3.8, 7.3.9, 9.10.2, 10.3.2, 10.3.6,11.3, 12.1.2, 12.2.1, 12.2.4, 13.5, 14Cutting and Patching3.14, 6.2.5Damage to Construction of Owner or Separate Contractors3.14.2, 6.2.4, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.5, 10.4, 11.1.1, 11.3,12.2.4Damage to the Work3.14.2, 9.9.1, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.5, 10.4, 11.3.1, 12.2.4Damages, Claims for3.2.4, 3.18, 6.1.1, 8.3.3, 9.5.1, 9.6.7, 10.3.3, 11.1.1, 11.3.5, 11.3.7, 14.1.3, 14.2.4, 15.1.6Damages for Delay6.1.1, 8.3.3, 9.5.1.6, 9.7, 10.3.2Date of Commencement of the Work, Definition of8.1.2Date of Substantial Completion, Definition of8.1.3Day, Definition of8.1.4Decisions of the Architect3.7.4, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.11, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 15.2, 6.3, 7.3.7, 7.3.9, 8.1.3, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.4, 9.5.1, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 13.5.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4, 15.1, 15.2Decisions to Withhold Certification9.4.1, 9.5, 9.7, 14.1.1.3Defective or Nonconforming Work, Acceptance, Rejection and Correction of2.3, 2.4, 3.5, 4.2.6, 6.2.5, 9.5.1, 9.5.2, 9.6.6, 9.8.2, 9.9.3, 9.10.4, 12.2.1Definitions1.1, 2.1.1, 3.1.1, 3.5, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 3.12.3, 4.1.1, 15.1.1, 5.1, 6.1.2, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 8.1, 9.1, 9.8.1Delays and Extensions of Time3.2, 3.7.4, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.4, 8.3, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.3.2, 10.4, 14.3.2, 15.1.5, 15.2.5Disputes6.3, 7.3.9, 15.1, 15.2Documents and Samples at the Site3.11Drawings, Definition of1.1.5Drawings and Specifications, Use and Ownership of3.11Effective Date of Insurance8.2.2, 11.1.2Emergencies10.4, 14.1.1.2, 15.1.4Employees, Contractor’s3.3.2, 3.4.3, 3.8.1, 3.9, 3.18.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 10.2, 10.3.3, 11.1.1, 11.3.7, 14.1, 14.2.1.1Equipment, Labor, Materials or1.1.3, 1.1.6, 3.4, 3.5, 3.8.2, 3.8.3, 3.12, 3.13, 3.15.1, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 6.2.1, 7.3.7, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 9.5.1.3, 9.10.2, 10.2.1, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.1, 14.2.1.2

Init.

/


6

Execution and Progress of the Work1.1.3, 1.2.1, 1.2.2, 2.2.3, 2.2.5, 3.1, 3.3.1, 3.4.1, 3.5, 3.7.1, 3.10.1, 3.12, 3.14, 4.2, 6.2.2, 7.1.3, 7.3.5, 8.2, 9.5.1, 9.9.1, 10.2, 10.3, 12.2, 14.2, 14.3.1, 15.1.3Extensions of Time3.2.4, 3.7.4, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3, 7.4, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.3.2, 10.4, 14.3, 15.1.5, 15.2.5Failure of Payment9.5.1.3, 9.7, 9.10.2, 13.6, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2Faulty Work(See Defective or Nonconforming Work)Final Completion and Final Payment4.2.1, 4.2.9, 9.8.2, 9.10, 11.1.2, 11.1.3, 11.3.1, 11.3.5, 12.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3Financial Arrangements, Owner’s2.2.1, 13.2.2, 14.1.1.4Fire and Extended Coverage Insurance11.3.1.1GENERAL PROVISIONS1Governing Law13.1Guarantees (See Warranty)Hazardous Materials10.2.4, 10.3Identification of Subcontractors and Suppliers5.2.1Indemnification3.17, 3.18, 9.10.2, 10.3.3, 10.3.5, 10.3.6, 11.3.1.2, 11.3.7Information and Services Required of the Owner2.1.2, 2.2, 3.2.2, 3.12.4, 3.12.10, 6.1.3, 6.1.4, 6.2.5, 9.6.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.2, 9.10.3, 10.3.3, 11.2, 11.4, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 14.1.1.4, 14.1.4, 15.1.3Initial Decision15.2Initial Decision Maker, Definition of1.1.8Initial Decision Maker, Decisions14.2.2, 14.2.4, 15.2.1, 15.2.2, 15.2.3, 15.2.4, 15.2.5Initial Decision Maker, Extent of Authority14.2.2, 14.2.4, 15.1.3, 15.2.1, 15.2.2, 15.2.3, 15.2.4, 15.2.5Injury or Damage to Person or Property10.2.8, 10.4Inspections3.1.3, 3.3.3, 3.7.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.6, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 12.2.1, 13.5Instructions to Bidders1.1.1Instructions to the Contractor3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.8.1, 5.2.1, 7, 8.2.2, 12, 13.5.2Instruments of Service, Definition of1.1.7Insurance3.18.1, 6.1.1, 7.3.7, 9.3.2, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 11Insurance, Boiler and Machinery

11.3.2Insurance, Contractor’s Liability11.1Insurance, Effective Date of8.2.2, 11.1.2Insurance, Loss of Use11.3.3Insurance, Owner’s Liability11.2Insurance, Property10.2.5, 11.3Insurance, Stored Materials9.3.2INSURANCE AND BONDS11Insurance Companies, Consent to Partial Occupancy9.9.1Intent of the Contract Documents1.2.1, 4.2.7, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 7.4Interest13.6Interpretation1.2.3, 1.4, 4.1.1, 5.1, 6.1.2, 15.1.1Interpretations, Written4.2.11, 4.2.12, 15.1.4Judgment on Final Award15.4.2Labor and Materials, Equipment1.1.3, 1.1.6, 3.4, 3.5, 3.8.2, 3.8.3, 3.12, 3.13, 3.15.1, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 6.2.1, 7.3.7, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 9.5.1.3, 9.10.2, 10.2.1, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.1, 14.2.1.2Labor Disputes8.3.1Laws and Regulations1.5, 3.2.3, 3.6, 3.7, 3.12.10, 3.13, 4.1.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.1, 10.2.2, 11.1.1, 11.3, 13.1, 13.4, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 13.6, 14, 15.2.8, 15.4Liens2.1.2, 9.3.3, 9.10.2, 9.10.4, 15.2.8Limitations, Statutes of12.2.5, 13.7, 15.4.1.1Limitations of Liability2.3, 3.2.2, 3.5, 3.12.10, 3.17, 3.18.1, 4.2.6, 4.2.7,4.2.12, 6.2.2, 9.4.2, 9.6.4, 9.6.7, 10.2.5, 10.3.3, 11.1.2, 11.2, 11.3.7, 12.2.5, 13.4.2Limitations of Time2.1.2, 2.2, 2.4, 3.2.2, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12.5, 3.15.1, 4.2.7, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4.1, 6.2.4, 7.3, 7.4, 8.2, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.3.3, 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.6, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 9.10, 11.1.3, 11.3.1.5, 11.3.6, 11.3.10, 12.2, 13.5, 13.7, 14, 15Loss of Use Insurance11.3.3Material Suppliers1.5, 3.12.1, 4.2.4, 4.2.6, 5.2.1, 9.3, 9.4.2, 9.6, 9.10.5Materials, Hazardous10.2.4, 10.3Materials, Labor, Equipment and

Init.

/


7

1.1.3, 1.1.6, 1.5.1, 3.4.1, 3.5, 3.8.2, 3.8.3, 3.12, 3.13,3.15.1, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 6.2.1, 7.3.7, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 9.5.1.3, 9.10.2, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.1, 14.2.1.2Means, Methods, Techniques, Sequences and Procedures of Construction3.3.1, 3.12.10, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 9.4.2Mechanic’s Lien2.1.2, 15.2.8Mediation8.3.1, 10.3.5, 10.3.6, 15.2.1, 15.2.5, 15.2.6, 15.3,15.4.1Minor Changes in the Work1.1.1, 3.12.8, 4.2.8, 7.1, 7.4MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS13Modifications, Definition of1.1.1Modifications to the Contract1.1.1, 1.1.2, 3.11, 4.1.2, 4.2.1, 5.2.3, 7, 8.3.1, 9.7, 10.3.2, 11.3.1Mutual Responsibility6.2Nonconforming Work, Acceptance of9.6.6, 9.9.3, 12.3Nonconforming Work, Rejection and Correction of2.3, 2.4, 3.5, 4.2.6, 6.2.4, 9.5.1, 9.8.2, 9.9.3, 9.10.4, 12.2.1Notice2.2.1, 2.3, 2.4, 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.7.2, 3.12.9, 5.2.1, 9.7, 9.10, 10.2.2, 11.1.3, 12.2.2.1, 13.3, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 14.1, 14.2, 15.2.8, 15.4.1Notice, Written2.3, 2.4, 3.3.1, 3.9.2, 3.12.9, 3.12.10, 5.2.1, 9.7, 9.10, 10.2.2, 10.3, 11.1.3, 11.3.6, 12.2.2.1, 13.3, 14, 15.2.8, 15.4.1Notice of Claims3.7.4, 10.2.8, 15.1.2, 15.4Notice of Testing and Inspections13.5.1, 13.5.2Observations, Contractor’s3.2, 3.7.4Occupancy2.2.2, 9.6.6, 9.8, 11.3.1.5Orders, Written1.1.1, 2.3, 3.9.2, 7, 8.2.2, 11.3.9, 12.1, 12.2.2.1, 13.5.2, 14.3.1OWNER2Owner, Definition of2.1.1Owner, Information and Services Required of the2.1.2, 2.2, 3.2.2, 3.12.10, 6.1.3, 6.1.4, 6.2.5, 9.3.2, 9.6.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.2, 9.10.3, 10.3.3, 11.2, 11.3, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 14.1.1.4, 14.1.4, 15.1.3Owner’s Authority1.5, 2.1.1, 2.3, 2.4, 3.4.2, 3.8.1, 3.12.10, 3.14.2, 4.1.2, 4.1.3, 4.2.4, 4.2.9, 5.2.1, 5.2.4, 5.4.1, 6.1, 6.3, 7.2.1,

7.3.1, 8.2.2, 8.3.1, 9.3.1, 9.3.2, 9.5.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 10.3.2, 11.1.3, 11.3.3, 11.3.10, 12.2.2, 12.3, 13.2.2, 14.3, 14.4, 15.2.7Owner’s Financial Capability2.2.1, 13.2.2, 14.1.1.4Owner’s Liability Insurance11.2Owner’s Relationship with Subcontractors1.1.2, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 9.6.4, 9.10.2, 14.2.2Owner’s Right to Carry Out the Work2.4, 14.2.2Owner’s Right to Clean Up6.3Owner’s Right to Perform Construction and to Award Separate Contracts6.1Owner’s Right to Stop the Work2.3Owner’s Right to Suspend the Work14.3Owner’s Right to Terminate the Contract14.2Ownership and Use of Drawings, Specifications and Other Instruments of Service1.1.1, 1.1.6, 1.1.7, 1.5, 2.2.5, 3.2.2, 3.11, 3.17, 4.2.12, 5.3Partial Occupancy or Use9.6.6, 9.9, 11.3.1.5Patching, Cutting and3.14, 6.2.5Patents3.17Payment, Applications for4.2.5, 7.3.9, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.3, 9.7, 9.8.5, 9.10.1, 14.2.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3Payment, Certificates for4.2.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.1, 9.6.6, 9.7, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 13.7, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4Payment, Failure of9.5.1.3, 9.7, 9.10.2, 13.6, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2Payment, Final4.2.1, 4.2.9, 9.8.2, 9.10, 11.1.2, 11.1.3, 11.4.1, 12.3, 13.7, 14.2.4, 14.4.3Payment Bond, Performance Bond and7.3.7.4, 9.6.7, 9.10.3, 11.4Payments, Progress9.3, 9.6, 9.8.5, 9.10.3, 13.6, 14.2.3, 15.1.3PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION9Payments to Subcontractors5.4.2, 9.5.1.3, 9.6.2, 9.6.3, 9.6.4, 9.6.7, 14.2.1.2PCB10.3.1Performance Bond and Payment Bond7.3.7.4, 9.6.7, 9.10.3, 11.4Permits, Fees, Notices and Compliance with Laws2.2.2, 3.7, 3.13, 7.3.7.4, 10.2.2

Init.

/


8

PERSONS AND PROPERTY, PROTECTION OF10Polychlorinated Biphenyl10.3.1Product Data, Definition of3.12.2Product Data and Samples, Shop Drawings3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7Progress and Completion4.2.2, 8.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 14.1.4, 15.1.3Progress Payments9.3, 9.6, 9.8.5, 9.10.3, 13.6, 14.2.3, 15.1.3Project, Definition of1.1.4Project Representatives4.2.10Property Insurance10.2.5, 11.3PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY10Regulations and Laws1.5, 3.2.3, 3.6, 3.7, 3.12.10, 3.13, 4.1.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.1, 10.2.2, 11.1, 11.4, 13.1, 13.4, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 13.6, 14, 15.2.8, 15.4Rejection of Work3.5, 4.2.6, 12.2.1Releases and Waivers of Liens9.10.2Representations3.2.1, 3.5, 3.12.6, 6.2.2, 8.2.1, 9.3.3, 9.4.2, 9.5.1,9.8.2, 9.10.1Representatives2.1.1, 3.1.1, 3.9, 4.1.1, 4.2.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.10, 5.1.1,5.1.2, 13.2.1Responsibility for Those Performing the Work3.3.2, 3.18, 4.2.3, 5.3, 6.1.3, 6.2, 6.3, 9.5.1, 10Retainage9.3.1, 9.6.2, 9.8.5, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions by Contractor3.2, 3.12.7, 6.1.3Review of Contractor’s Submittals by Owner and Architect3.10.1, 3.10.2, 3.11, 3.12, 4.2, 5.2, 6.1.3, 9.2, 9.8.2Review of Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples by Contractor3.12Rights and Remedies1.1.2, 2.3, 2.4, 3.5, 3.7.4, 3.15.2, 4.2.6, 5.3, 5.4, 6.1, 6.3, 7.3.1, 8.3, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.2.5, 10.3, 12.2.2, 12.2.4, 13.4, 14, 15.4Royalties, Patents and Copyrights3.17Rules and Notices for Arbitration15.4.1Safety of Persons and Property10.2, 10.4

Safety Precautions and Programs3.3.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 5.3, 10.1, 10.2, 10.4Samples, Definition of3.12.3Samples, Shop Drawings, Product Data and3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7Samples at the Site, Documents and3.11Schedule of Values9.2, 9.3.1Schedules, Construction3.10, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 6.1.3, 15.1.5.2Separate Contracts and Contractors1.1.4, 3.12.5, 3.14.2, 4.2.4, 4.2.7, 6, 8.3.1, 12.1.2Shop Drawings, Definition of3.12.1Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7Site, Use of3.13, 6.1.1, 6.2.1Site Inspections3.2.2, 3.3.3, 3.7.1, 3.7.4, 4.2, 9.4.2, 9.10.1, 13.5Site Visits, Architect’s3.7.4, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 13.5Special Inspections and Testing4.2.6, 12.2.1, 13.5Specifications, Definition of1.1.6Specifications1.1.1, 1.1.6, 1.2.2, 1.5, 3.11, 3.12.10, 3.17, 4.2.14Statute of Limitations13.7, 15.4.1.1Stopping the Work2.3, 9.7, 10.3, 14.1Stored Materials6.2.1, 9.3.2, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.4Subcontractor, Definition of5.1.1SUBCONTRACTORS5Subcontractors, Work by1.2.2, 3.3.2, 3.12.1, 4.2.3, 5.2.3, 5.3, 5.4, 9.3.1.2,9.6.7Subcontractual Relations5.3, 5.4, 9.3.1.2, 9.6, 9.10, 10.2.1, 14.1, 14.2.1Submittals3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 7.3.7, 9.2, 9.3, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 11.1.3Submittal Schedule3.10.2, 3.12.5, 4.2.7Subrogation, Waivers of6.1.1, 11.3.7Substantial Completion4.2.9, 8.1.1, 8.1.3, 8.2.3, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10.3,12.2, 13.7Substantial Completion, Definition of9.8.1

Init.

/


9

Substitution of Subcontractors5.2.3, 5.2.4Substitution of Architect4.1.3Substitutions of Materials3.4.2, 3.5, 7.3.8Sub-subcontractor, Definition of5.1.2Subsurface Conditions3.7.4Successors and Assigns13.2Superintendent3.9, 10.2.6Supervision and Construction Procedures1.2.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.12.10, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 6.1.3, 6.2.4, 7.1.3, 7.3.7, 8.2, 8.3.1, 9.4.2, 10, 12, 14, 15.1.3Surety5.4.1.2, 9.8.5, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 14.2.2, 15.2.7Surety, Consent of9.10.2, 9.10.3Surveys2.2.3Suspension by the Owner for Convenience14.3Suspension of the Work5.4.2, 14.3Suspension or Termination of the Contract5.4.1.1, 14Taxes3.6, 3.8.2.1, 7.3.7.4Termination by the Contractor14.1, 15.1.6Termination by the Owner for Cause5.4.1.1, 14.2, 15.1.6Termination by the Owner for Convenience14.4Termination of the Architect4.1.3Termination of the Contractor14.2.2TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT14Tests and Inspections3.1.3, 3.3.3, 4.2.2, 4.2.6, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 10.3.2, 11.4.1, 12.2.1, 13.5TIME8Time, Delays and Extensions of3.2.4, 3.7.4, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.4, 8.3, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.3.2, 10.4, 14.3.2, 15.1.5, 15.2.5Time Limits

2.1.2, 2.2, 2.4, 3.2.2, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12.5, 3.15.1, 4.2, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 6.2.4, 7.3, 7.4, 8.2, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.3.3,9.4.1, 9.5, 9.6, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 9.10, 11.1.3, 12.2, 13.5, 13.7, 14, 15.1.2, 15.4Time Limits on Claims3.7.4, 10.2.8, 13.7, 15.1.2Title to Work9.3.2, 9.3.3Transmission of Data in Digital Form1.6UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK12Uncovering of Work12.1Unforeseen Conditions, Concealed or Unknown3.7.4, 8.3.1, 10.3Unit Prices7.3.3.2, 7.3.4Use of Documents1.1.1, 1.5, 2.2.5, 3.12.6, 5.3Use of Site3.13, 6.1.1, 6.2.1Values, Schedule of9.2, 9.3.1Waiver of Claims by the Architect13.4.2Waiver of Claims by the Contractor9.10.5, 13.4.2, 15.1.6Waiver of Claims by the Owner9.9.3, 9.10.3, 9.10.4, 12.2.2.1, 13.4.2, 14.2.4, 15.1.6Waiver of Consequential Damages14.2.4, 15.1.6Waiver of Liens9.10.2, 9.10.4Waivers of Subrogation6.1.1, 11.3.7Warranty3.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 9.10.4, 12.2.2, 13.7Weather Delays15.1.5.2Work, Definition of1.1.3Written Consent1.5.2, 3.4.2, 3.7.4, 3.12.8, 3.14.2, 4.1.2, 9.3.2, 9.8.5, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 11.4.1, 13.2, 13.4.2, 15.4.4.2Written Interpretations4.2.11, 4.2.12Written Notice2.3, 2.4, 3.3.1, 3.9, 3.12.9, 3.12.10, 5.2.1, 8.2.2, 9.7, 9.10, 10.2.2, 10.3, 11.1.3, 12.2.2, 12.2.4, 13.3, 14, 15.4.1Written Orders1.1.1, 2.3, 3.9, 7, 8.2.2, 12.1, 12.2, 13.5.2, 14.3.1, 15.1.2

Init.

/


10

ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS§ 1.1 BASIC DEFINITIONS§ 1.1.1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTSThe Contract Documents are enumerated in the Agreement between the Owner and Contractor (hereinafter the Agreement) and consist of the Agreement, Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications, Addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract, other documents listed in the Agreement and Modifications issued after execution of the Contract. A Modification is (1) a written amendment to the Contract signed by both parties, (2) a Change Order, (3) a Construction Change Directive or (4) a written order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Architect. Unless specifically enumerated in the Agreement, the Contract Documents do not include the advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, sample forms, other information furnished by the Owner in anticipation of receiving bids or proposals, the Contractor’s bid or proposal, or portions of Addenda relating to bidding requirements.

§ 1.1.2 THE CONTRACTThe Contract Documents form the Contract for Construction. The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, representations or agreements, either written or oral. The Contract may be amended or modified only by a Modification. The Contract Documents shall not be construed to create a contractual relationship of any kind (1) between the Contractor and the Architect or the Architect’s consultants, (2) between the Owner and a Subcontractor or a Sub-subcontractor, (3) between the Owner and the Architect or the Architect’s consultants or (4) between any persons or entities other than the Owner and the Contractor. The Architect shall, however, be entitled to performance and enforcement of obligations under the Contract intended to facilitate performance of the Architect’s duties.

§ 1.1.3 THE WORKThe term “Work” means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents, whether completed or partially completed, and includes all other labor, materials, equipment and services provided or to be provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor’s obligations. The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Project.

§ 1.1.4 THE PROJECTThe Project is the total construction of which the Work performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part and which may include construction by the Owner and by separate contractors.

§ 1.1.5 THE DRAWINGSThe Drawings are the graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents showing the design, location and dimensions of the Work, generally including plans, elevations, sections, details, schedules and diagrams.

§ 1.1.6 THE SPECIFICATIONSThe Specifications are that portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written requirements for materials, equipment, systems, standards and workmanship for the Work, and performance of related services.

§ 1.1.7 INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICEInstruments of Service are representations, in any medium of expression now known or later developed, of the tangible and intangible creative work performed by the Architect and the Architect’s consultants under their respective professional services agreements. Instruments of Service may include, without limitation, studies, surveys, models, sketches, drawings, specifications, and other similar materials.

§ 1.1.8 INITIAL DECISION MAKERThe Initial Decision Maker is the person identified in the Agreement to render initial decisions on Claims in accordance with Section 15.2 and certify termination of the Agreement under Section 14.2.2.

§ 1.2 CORRELATION AND INTENT OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS§ 1.2.1 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work by the Contractor. The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all; performance by the Contractor shall be required only to the extent consistent with the Contract Documents and reasonably inferable from them as being necessary to produce the indicated results.

Init.

/


11

§ 1.2.2 Organization of the Specifications into divisions, sections and articles, and arrangement of Drawings shall not control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of Work to be performed by any trade.

§ 1.2.3 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, words that have well-known technical or constructionindustry meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meanings.

§ 1.3 CAPITALIZATIONTerms capitalized in these General Conditions include those that are (1) specifically defined, (2) the titles of numbered articles or (3) the titles of other documents published by the American Institute of Architects.

§ 1.4 INTERPRETATIONIn the interest of brevity the Contract Documents frequently omit modifying words such as “all” and “any” and articles such as “the” and “an,” but the fact that a modifier or an article is absent from one statement and appears in another is not intended to affect the interpretation of either statement.

§ 1.5 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE§ 1.5.1 The Architect and the Architect’s consultants shall be deemed the authors and owners of their respective Instruments of Service, including the Drawings and Specifications, and will retain all common law, statutory and other reserved rights, including copyrights. The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, and material or equipment suppliers shall not own or claim a copyright in the Instruments of Service. Submittal or distribution to meet official regulatory requirements or for other purposes in connection with this Project is not to be construed as publication in derogation of the Architect’s or Architect’s consultants’ reserved rights.

§ 1.5.2 The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors and material or equipment suppliers are authorized to use and reproduce the Instruments of Service provided to them solely and exclusively for execution of the Work. All copies made under this authorization shall bear the copyright notice, if any, shown on the Instruments of Service. The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, and material or equipment suppliers may not use the Instruments of Service on other projects or for additions to this Project outside the scope of the Work without the specific written consent of the Owner, Architect and the Architect’s consultants.

§ 1.6 TRANSMISSION OF DATA IN DIGITAL FORMIf the parties intend to transmit Instruments of Service or any other information or documentation in digital form, they shall endeavor to establish necessary protocols governing such transmissions, unless otherwise already provided in the Agreement or the Contract Documents.

ARTICLE 2 OWNER§ 2.1 GENERAL§ 2.1.1 The Owner is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The Owner shall designate in writing a representative who shall have express authority to bind the Owner with respect to all matters requiring the Owner’s approval or authorization. Except as otherwise provided in Section 4.2.1, the Architect does not have such authority. The term “Owner” means the Owner or the Owner’s authorized representative.

§ 2.1.2 The Owner shall furnish to the Contractor within fifteen days after receipt of a written request, information necessary and relevant for the Contractor to evaluate, give notice of or enforce mechanic’s lien rights. Such information shall include a correct statement of the record legal title to the property on which the Project is located, usually referred to as the site, and the Owner’s interest therein.

§ 2.2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER§ 2.2.1 Prior to commencement of the Work, the Contractor may request in writing that the Owner provide reasonable evidence that the Owner has made financial arrangements to fulfill the Owner’s obligations under the Contract. Thereafter, the Contractor may only request such evidence if (1) the Owner fails to make payments to the Contractor as the Contract Documents require; (2) a change in the Work materially changes the Contract Sum; or (3) the Contractor identifies in writing a reasonable concern regarding the Owner’s ability to make payment when due. The Owner shall furnish such evidence as a condition precedent to commencement or continuation of the Work or

Init.

/


12

the portion of the Work affected by a material change. After the Owner furnishes the evidence, the Owner shall not materially vary such financial arrangements without prior notice to the Contractor.

§ 2.2.2 Except for permits and fees that are the responsibility of the Contractor under the Contract Documents, including those required under Section 3.7.1, the Owner shall secure and pay for necessary approvals, easements, assessments and charges required for construction, use or occupancy of permanent structures or for permanent changes in existing facilities.

§ 2.2.3 The Owner shall furnish surveys describing physical characteristics, legal limitations and utility locations for the site of the Project, and a legal description of the site. The Contractor shall be entitled to rely on the accuracy of information furnished by the Owner but shall exercise proper precautions relating to the safe performance of the Work.

§ 2.2.4 The Owner shall furnish information or services required of the Owner by the Contract Documents with reasonable promptness. The Owner shall also furnish any other information or services under the Owner’s control and relevant to the Contractor’s performance of the Work with reasonable promptness after receiving the Contractor’s written request for such information or services.

§ 2.2.5 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor one copy of the Contract Documents for purposes of making reproductions pursuant to Section 1.5.2.

§ 2.3 ’OWNER S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORKIf the Contractor fails to correct Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents as required by Section 12.2 or repeatedly fails to carry out Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Owner may issue a written order to the Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, the right of the Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to a duty on the part of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the Contractor or any other person or entity, except to the extent required by Section 6.1.3.

§ 2.4 ’OWNER S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORKIf the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and fails within a ten-day period after receipt of written notice from the Owner to commence and continue correction of such default or neglect with diligence and promptness, the Owner may, without prejudice to other remedies the Owner may have, correct such deficiencies. In such case an appropriate Change Order shall be issued deducting from payments then or thereafter due the Contractor the reasonable cost of correcting such deficiencies, including Owner’s expenses and compensation for the Architect’s additional services made necessary by such default, neglect or failure. Such action by the Owner and amounts charged to the Contractor are both subject to prior approval of the Architect. If payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amounts, the Contractorshall pay the difference to the Owner.

ARTICLE 3 CONTRACTOR§ 3.1 GENERAL§ 3.1.1 The Contractor is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The Contractor shall be lawfully licensed, if required in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. The Contractor shall designate in writing a representative who shall have express authority to bind the Contractor with respect to all matters under this Contract. The term “Contractor” means the Contractor or the Contractor’s authorized representative.

§ 3.1.2 The Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

§ 3.1.3 The Contractor shall not be relieved of obligations to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents either by activities or duties of the Architect in the Architect’s administration of the Contract, or by tests, inspections or approvals required or performed by persons or entities other than the Contractor.

Init.

/


13

§ 3.2 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR§ 3.2.1 Execution of the Contract by the Contractor is a representation that the Contractor has visited the site, become generally familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be performed and correlated personal observations with requirements of the Contract Documents.

§ 3.2.2 Because the Contract Documents are complementary, the Contractor shall, before starting each portion of the Work, carefully study and compare the various Contract Documents relative to that portion of the Work, as well as the information furnished by the Owner pursuant to Section 2.2.3, shall take field measurements of any existing conditions related to that portion of the Work, and shall observe any conditions at the site affecting it. These obligations are for the purpose of facilitating coordination and construction by the Contractor and are not for the purpose of discovering errors, omissions, or inconsistencies in the Contract Documents; however, the Contractor shall promptly report to the Architect any errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered by or made known to the Contractor as a request for information in such form as the Architect may require. It is recognized that the Contractor’s review is made in the Contractor’s capacity as a contractor and not as a licensed design professional, unless otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents.

§ 3.2.3 The Contractor is not required to ascertain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, or lawful orders of public authorities, but the Contractor shall promptly report to the Architect any nonconformity discovered by or made known to the Contractor as a request for information in such form as the Architect may require.

§ 3.2.4 If the Contractor believes that additional cost or time is involved because of clarifications or instructions the Architect issues in response to the Contractor’s notices or requests for information pursuant to Sections 3.2.2 or 3.2.3, the Contractor shall make Claims as provided in Article 15. If the Contractor fails to perform the obligations of Sections 3.2.2 or 3.2.3, the Contractor shall pay such costs and damages to the Owner as would have been avoided if the Contractor had performed such obligations. If the Contractor performs those obligations, the Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner or Architect for damages resulting from errors, inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract Documents, for differences between field measurements or conditions and the Contract Documents, or for nonconformities of the Contract Documents to applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities.

§ 3.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES§ 3.3.1 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using the Contractor’s best skill and attention. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for, and have control over, construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract, unless the Contract Documents give other specific instructions concerning these matters. If the Contract Documents give specific instructions concerning construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, the Contractor shall evaluate the jobsite safety thereof and, except as stated below, shall be fully and solely responsible for the jobsite safety of such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures. If the Contractor determines that such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures may not be safe, the Contractor shall give timely written notice to the Owner and Architect and shall not proceed with that portion of the Work without further written instructions from the Architect. If the Contractor is then instructed to proceed with the required means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures without acceptance of changes proposed by the Contractor, the Owner shall be solely responsible for any loss or damage arising solely from those Owner-required means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures.

§ 3.3.2 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of the Contractor’s employees, Subcontractors and their agents and employees, and other persons or entities performing portions of the Work for, or on behalf of, the Contractor or any of its Subcontractors.

§ 3.3.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for inspection of portions of Work already performed to determine that such portions are in proper condition to receive subsequent Work.

§ 3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS§ 3.4.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide and pay for labor, materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation, and other

Init.

/


14

facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work, whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work.

§ 3.4.2 Except in the case of minor changes in the Work authorized by the Architect in accordance with Sections 3.12.8 or 7.4, the Contractor may make substitutions only with the consent of the Owner, after evaluation by the Architect and in accordance with a Change Order or Construction Change Directive.

§ 3.4.3 The Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good order among the Contractor’s employees and other persons carrying out the Work. The Contractor shall not permit employment of unfit persons or persons not properly skilled in tasks assigned to them.

§ 3.5 WARRANTYThe Contractor warrants to the Owner and Architect that materials and equipment furnished under the Contract will be of good quality and new unless the Contract Documents require or permit otherwise. The Contractor further warrants that the Work will conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents and will be free from defects, except for those inherent in the quality of the Work the Contract Documents require or permit. Work, materials, or equipment not conforming to these requirements may be considered defective. The Contractor’s warranty excludes remedy for damage or defect caused by abuse, alterations to the Work not executed by the Contractor, improper or insufficient maintenance, improper operation, or normal wear and tear and normal usage. If required by the Architect, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment.

§ 3.6 TAXESThe Contractor shall pay sales, consumer, use and similar taxes for the Work provided by the Contractor that are legally enacted when bids are received or negotiations concluded, whether or not yet effective or merely scheduled to go into effect.

§ 3.7 PERMITS, FEES, NOTICES AND COMPLIANCE WITH LAWS§ 3.7.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall secure and pay for the building permit as well as for other permits, fees, licenses, and inspections by government agencies necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work that are customarily secured after execution of the Contract and legally required at the time bids are received or negotiations concluded.

§ 3.7.2 The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities applicable to performance of the Work.

§ 3.7.3 If the Contractor performs Work knowing it to be contrary to applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, or lawful orders of public authorities, the Contractor shall assume appropriate responsibility for such Work and shall bear the costs attributable to correction.

§ 3.7.4 Concealed or Unknown Conditions. If the Contractor encounters conditions at the site that are (1) subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions that differ materially from those indicated in the Contract Documents or (2) unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature, that differ materially from those ordinarily found to exist and generally recognized as inherent in construction activities of the character provided for in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall promptly provide notice to the Owner and the Architect before conditions are disturbed and in no event later than 21 days after first observance of the conditions. The Architect will promptly investigate such conditions and, if the Architect determines that they differ materially and cause an increase or decrease in the Contractor’s cost of, or time required for, performance of any part of the Work, will recommend an equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. If the Architect determines that the conditions at the site are not materially different from those indicated in the Contract Documents and that no change in the terms of the Contract is justified, the Architect shall promptly notify the Owner and Contractor in writing, stating the reasons. If either party disputes the Architect’s determination or recommendation, that party may proceed as provided in Article 15.

§ 3.7.5 If, in the course of the Work, the Contractor encounters human remains or recognizes the existence of burial markers, archaeological sites or wetlands not indicated in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall immediately suspend any operations that would affect them and shall notify the Owner and Architect. Upon receipt of such notice, the Owner shall promptly take any action necessary to obtain governmental authorization required to resume

Init.

/


15

the operations. The Contractor shall continue to suspend such operations until otherwise instructed by the Owner but shall continue with all other operations that do not affect those remains or features. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time arising from the existence of such remains or features may be made as provided in Article 15.

§ 3.8 ALLOWANCES§ 3.8.1 The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum all allowances stated in the Contract Documents. Items covered by allowances shall be supplied for such amounts and by such persons or entities as the Owner may direct, but the Contractor shall not be required to employ persons or entities to whom the Contractor has reasonable objection.

§ 3.8.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,.1 Allowances shall cover the cost to the Contractor of materials and equipment delivered at the site and

all required taxes, less applicable trade discounts;.2 Contractor’s costs for unloading and handling at the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit and

other expenses contemplated for stated allowance amounts shall be included in the Contract Sum but not in the allowances; and

.3 Whenever costs are more than or less than allowances, the Contract Sum shall be adjusted accordingly by Change Order. The amount of the Change Order shall reflect (1) the difference between actual costs and the allowances under Section 3.8.2.1 and (2) changes in Contractor’s costs under Section 3.8.2.2.

§ 3.8.3 Materials and equipment under an allowance shall be selected by the Owner with reasonable promptness.

§ 3.9 SUPERINTENDENT§ 3.9.1 The Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent and necessary assistants who shall be in attendance at the Project site during performance of the Work. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor, and communications given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor.

§ 3.9.2 The Contractor, as soon as practicable after award of the Contract, shall furnish in writing to the Owner through the Architect the name and qualifications of a proposed superintendent. The Architect may reply within 14 days to the Contractor in writing stating (1) whether the Owner or the Architect has reasonable objection to the proposed superintendent or (2) that the Architect requires additional time to review. Failure of the Architect to reply within the 14 day period shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection.

§ 3.9.3 The Contractor shall not employ a proposed superintendent to whom the Owner or Architect has made reasonable and timely objection. The Contractor shall not change the superintendent without the Owner’s consent, which shall not unreasonably be withheld or delayed.

§ 3.10 ’CONTRACTOR S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES§ 3.10.1 The Contractor, promptly after being awarded the Contract, shall prepare and submit for the Owner’s and Architect’s information a Contractor’s construction schedule for the Work. The schedule shall not exceed time limits current under the Contract Documents, shall be revised at appropriate intervals as required by the conditions of the Work and Project, shall be related to the entire Project to the extent required by the Contract Documents, and shall provide for expeditious and practicable execution of the Work.

§ 3.10.2 The Contractor shall prepare a submittal schedule, promptly after being awarded the Contract and thereafter as necessary to maintain a current submittal schedule, and shall submit the schedule(s) for the Architect’s approval. The Architect’s approval shall not unreasonably be delayed or withheld. The submittal schedule shall (1) be coordinated with the Contractor’s construction schedule, and (2) allow the Architect reasonable time to review submittals. If the Contractor fails to submit a submittal schedule, the Contractor shall not be entitled to any increase in Contract Sum or extension of Contract Time based on the time required for review of submittals.

§ 3.10.3 The Contractor shall perform the Work in general accordance with the most recent schedules submitted to the Owner and Architect.

Init.

/


16

§ 3.11 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITEThe Contractor shall maintain at the site for the Owner one copy of the Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, Change Orders and other Modifications, in good order and marked currently to indicate field changes and selections made during construction, and one copy of approved Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar required submittals. These shall be available to the Architect and shall be delivered to the Architect for submittal to the Owner upon completion of the Work as a record of the Work as constructed.

§ 3.12 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES§ 3.12.1 Shop Drawings are drawings, diagrams, schedules and other data specially prepared for the Work by the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier or distributor to illustrate some portion of the Work.

§ 3.12.2 Product Data are illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams and other information furnished by the Contractor to illustrate materials or equipment for some portion of the Work.

§ 3.12.3 Samples are physical examples that illustrate materials, equipment or workmanship and establish standards by which the Work will be judged.

§ 3.12.4 Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals are not Contract Documents. Their purpose is to demonstrate the way by which the Contractor proposes to conform to the information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents for those portions of the Work for which the Contract Documents require submittals. Review by the Architect is subject to the limitations of Section 4.2.7. Informational submittals upon which the Architect is not expected to take responsive action may be so identified in the Contract Documents. Submittals that are not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without action.

§ 3.12.5 The Contractor shall review for compliance with the Contract Documents, approve and submit to the Architect Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals required by the Contract Documents in accordance with the submittal schedule approved by the Architect or, in the absence of an approved submittal schedule, with reasonable promptness and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the Owner or of separate contractors.

§ 3.12.6 By submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals, the Contractor represents to the Owner and Architect that the Contractor has (1) reviewed and approved them, (2) determined and verified materials, field measurements and field construction criteria related thereto, or will do so and (3) checked and coordinated the information contained within such submittals with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents.

§ 3.12.7 The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work for which the Contract Documents require submittal and review of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals until the respective submittal has been approved by the Architect.

§ 3.12.8 The Work shall be in accordance with approved submittals except that the Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents by the Architect’s approval of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals unless the Contractor has specifically informed the Architect in writing of such deviation at the time of submittal and (1) the Architect has given written approval to the specific deviation as a minor change in the Work, or (2) a Change Order or Construction Change Directive has been issued authorizing the deviation. The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in ShopDrawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals by the Architect’s approval thereof.

§ 3.12.9 The Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing or on resubmitted Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals, to revisions other than those requested by the Architect on previous submittals. In the absence of such written notice, the Architect’s approval of a resubmission shall not apply to such revisions.

§ 3.12.10 The Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services that constitute the practice of architecture or engineering unless such services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless the Contractor needs to provide such services in order to carry out the Contractor’s responsibilities for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures. The Contractor shall not be

Init.

/


17

required to provide professional services in violation of applicable law. If professional design services or certifications by a design professional related to systems, materials or equipment are specifically required of the Contractor by the Contract Documents, the Owner and the Architect will specify all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. The Contractor shall cause such services or certifications to be provided by a properly licensed design professional, whose signature and seal shall appear on all drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, Shop Drawings and other submittals prepared by such professional. Shop Drawings and other submittals related to the Work designed or certified by such professional, if prepared by others, shall bear such professional’s written approval when submitted to the Architect. The Owner and the Architect shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy, accuracy and completeness of the services, certifications and approvals performed or provided by such design professionals, provided the Owner and Architect have specified to the Contractor all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. Pursuant to this Section 3.12.10, the Architect will review, approve or take other appropriate action on submittals only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall not be responsible for the adequacy of the performance and design criteria specified in the Contract Documents.

§ 3.13 USE OF SITEThe Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities and the Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the site with materials or equipment.

§ 3.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING§ 3.14.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for cutting, fitting or patching required to complete the Work or to make its parts fit together properly. All areas requiring cutting, fitting and patching shall be restored to the condition existing prior to the cutting, fitting and patching, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents.

§ 3.14.2 The Contractor shall not damage or endanger a portion of the Work or fully or partially completed construction of the Owner or separate contractors by cutting, patching or otherwise altering such construction, or by excavation. The Contractor shall not cut or otherwise alter such construction by the Owner or a separate contractor except with written consent of the Owner and of such separate contractor; such consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. The Contractor shall not unreasonably withhold from the Owner or a separate contractor the Contractor’s consent to cutting or otherwise altering the Work.

§ 3.15 CLEANING UP§ 3.15.1 The Contractor shall keep the premises and surrounding area free from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish caused by operations under the Contract. At completion of the Work, the Contractor shall remove waste materials, rubbish, the Contractor’s tools, construction equipment, machinery and surplus materials from and about the Project.

§ 3.15.2 If the Contractor fails to clean up as provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner may do so and Owner shall be entitled to reimbursement from the Contractor.

§ 3.16 ACCESS TO WORKThe Contractor shall provide the Owner and Architect access to the Work in preparation and progress wherever located.

§ 3.17 ROYALTIES, PATENTS AND COPYRIGHTSThe Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. The Contractor shall defend suits or claims for infringement of copyrights and patent rights and shall hold the Owner and Architect harmless from loss on account thereof, but shall not be responsible for such defense or loss when a particular design, process or product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is required by the Contract Documents, or where the copyright violations are contained in Drawings, Specifications or other documents prepared by the Owner or Architect. However, if the Contractor has reason to believe that the required design, process or product is an infringement of a copyright or a patent, the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless such information is promptly furnished to the Architect.

Init.

/


18

§ 3.18 INDEMNIFICATION§ 3.18.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner, Architect, Architect’s consultants, and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys’ fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work, provided that such claim, damage, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), but only to the extent caused by the negligent acts or omissions of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, regardless of whether or not such claim, damage, loss or expense is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. Such obligation shall not be construed to negate, abridge, or reduce other rights or obligations of indemnity that would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Section 3.18.

§ 3.18.2 In claims against any person or entity indemnified under this Section 3.18 by an employee of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, the indemnification obligation under Section 3.18.1 shall not be limited by a limitation on amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or a Subcontractor under workers’ compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts.

ARTICLE 4 ARCHITECT§ 4.1 GENERAL§ 4.1.1 The Owner shall retain an architect lawfully licensed to practice architecture or an entity lawfully practicing architecture in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. That person or entity is identified as the Architect in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number.

§ 4.1.2 Duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Architect as set forth in the Contract Documents shall not be restricted, modified or extended without written consent of the Owner, Contractor and Architect. Consent shall not be unreasonably withheld.

§ 4.1.3 If the employment of the Architect is terminated, the Owner shall employ a successor architect as to whom the Contractor has no reasonable objection and whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the Architect.

§ 4.2 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT§ 4.2.1 The Architect will provide administration of the Contract as described in the Contract Documents and will be an Owner’s representative during construction until the date the Architect issues the final Certificate for Payment. The Architect will have authority to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract Documents.

§ 4.2.2 The Architect will visit the site at intervals appropriate to the stage of construction, or as otherwise agreed with the Owner, to become generally familiar with the progress and quality of the portion of the Work completed, and to determine in general if the Work observed is being performed in a manner indicating that the Work, when fully completed, will be in accordance with the Contract Documents. However, the Architect will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work. The Architect will not have control over, charge of, or responsibility for, the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or for the safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work, since these are solely the Contractor’s rights and responsibilities under the Contract Documents, except as provided in Section 3.3.1.

§ 4.2.3 On the basis of the site visits, the Architect will keep the Owner reasonably informed about the progress and quality of the portion of the Work completed, and report to the Owner (1) known deviations from the Contract Documents and from the most recent construction schedule submitted by the Contractor, and (2) defects and deficiencies observed in the Work. The Architect will not be responsible for the Contractor’s failure to perform the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Architect will not have control over or charge of and will not be responsible for acts or omissions of the Contractor, Subcontractors, or their agents or employees, or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work.

Init.

/


19

§ 4.2.4 COMMUNICATIONS FACILITATING CONTRACT ADMINISTRATIONExcept as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or when direct communications have been specially authorized, the Owner and Contractor shall endeavor to communicate with each other through the Architect about matters arising out of or relating to the Contract. Communications by and with the Architect’s consultants shall be through the Architect. Communications by and with Subcontractors and material suppliers shall be through the Contractor. Communications by and with separate contractors shall be through the Owner.

§ 4.2.5 Based on the Architect’s evaluations of the Contractor’s Applications for Payment, the Architect will review and certify the amounts due the Contractor and will issue Certificates for Payment in such amounts.

§ 4.2.6 The Architect has authority to reject Work that does not conform to the Contract Documents. Whenever the Architect considers it necessary or advisable, the Architect will have authority to require inspection or testing of the Work in accordance with Sections 13.5.2 and 13.5.3, whether or not such Work is fabricated, installed or completed. However, neither this authority of the Architect nor a decision made in good faith either to exercise or not to exercise such authority shall give rise to a duty or responsibility of the Architect to the Contractor, Subcontractors, material and equipment suppliers, their agents or employees, or other persons or entities performing portions of the Work.

§ 4.2.7 The Architect will review and approve, or take other appropriate action upon, the Contractor’s submittals such as Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples, but only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. The Architect’s action will be taken in accordance with the submittal schedule approved by the Architect or, in the absence of an approved submittal schedule, with reasonable promptness while allowing sufficient time in the Architect’s professional judgment to permit adequate review. Review of such submittals is not conducted for the purpose of determining the accuracy and completeness of other details such as dimensions and quantities, or for substantiating instructions for installation or performance of equipment or systems, all of which remain the responsibility of the Contractor as required by the Contract Documents. The Architect’s review of the Contractor’s submittals shall not relieve the Contractor of the obligations under Sections 3.3, 3.5 and 3.12. The Architect’s review shall not constitute approval of safety precautions or, unless otherwise specifically stated by the Architect, of any construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures. The Architect’s approval of a specific item shall not indicate approval of an assembly of which the item is a component.

§ 4.2.8 The Architect will prepare Change Orders and Construction Change Directives, and may authorize minor changes in the Work as provided in Section 7.4. The Architect will investigate and make determinations and recommendations regarding concealed and unknown conditions as provided in Section 3.7.4.

§ 4.2.9 The Architect will conduct inspections to determine the date or dates of Substantial Completion and the date of final completion; issue Certificates of Substantial Completion pursuant to Section 9.8; receive and forward to the Owner, for the Owner’s review and records, written warranties and related documents required by the Contract and assembled by the Contractor pursuant to Section 9.10; and issue a final Certificate for Payment pursuant to Section 9.10.

§ 4.2.10 If the Owner and Architect agree, the Architect will provide one or more project representatives to assist in carrying out the Architect’s responsibilities at the site. The duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of such project representatives shall be as set forth in an exhibit to be incorporated in the Contract Documents.

§ 4.2.11 The Architect will interpret and decide matters concerning performance under, and requirements of, the Contract Documents on written request of either the Owner or Contractor. The Architect’s response to such requests will be made in writing within any time limits agreed upon or otherwise with reasonable promptness.

§ 4.2.12 Interpretations and decisions of the Architect will be consistent with the intent of, and reasonably inferable from, the Contract Documents and will be in writing or in the form of drawings. When making such interpretations and decisions, the Architect will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both Owner and Contractor, will not show partiality to either and will not be liable for results of interpretations or decisions rendered in good faith.

§ 4.2.13 The Architect’s decisions on matters relating to aesthetic effect will be final if consistent with the intent expressed in the Contract Documents.

Init.

/


20

§ 4.2.14 The Architect will review and respond to requests for information about the Contract Documents. The Architect’s response to such requests will be made in writing within any time limits agreed upon or otherwise with reasonable promptness. If appropriate, the Architect will prepare and issue supplemental Drawings and Specifications in response to the requests for information.

ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS§ 5.1 DEFINITIONS§ 5.1.1 A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct contract with the Contractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site. The term “Subcontractor” is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Subcontractor. The term “Subcontractor” does not include a separate contractor or subcontractors of a separate contractor.

§ 5.1.2 A Sub-subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct or indirect contract with a Subcontractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site. The term “Sub-subcontractor” is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Sub-subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Sub-subcontractor.

§ 5.2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK§ 5.2.1 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents or the bidding requirements, the Contractor, as soon as practicable after award of the Contract, shall furnish in writing to the Owner through the Architect the names of persons or entities (including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design) proposed for each principal portion of the Work. The Architect may reply within 14 days to the Contractor in writing stating (1) whether the Owner or the Architect has reasonable objection to any such proposed person or entity or (2) that the Architect requires additional time for review. Failure of the Owner or Architect to reply within the 14-day period shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection.

§ 5.2.2 The Contractor shall not contract with a proposed person or entity to whom the Owner or Architect has made reasonable and timely objection. The Contractor shall not be required to contract with anyone to whom the Contractor has made reasonable objection.

§ 5.2.3 If the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the Contractor, the Contractor shall propose another to whom the Owner or Architect has no reasonable objection. If the proposed but rejected Subcontractor was reasonably capable of performing the Work, the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be increased or decreased by the difference, if any, occasioned by such change, and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued before commencement of the substitute Subcontractor’s Work. However, no increase in the Contract Sum or Contract Time shall be allowed for such change unless the Contractor has acted promptly and responsively in submitting names as required.

§ 5.2.4 The Contractor shall not substitute a Subcontractor, person or entity previously selected if the Owner or Architect makes reasonable objection to such substitution.

§ 5.3 SUBCONTRACTUAL RELATIONSBy appropriate agreement, written where legally required for validity, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor, to the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor, to be bound to the Contractor by terms of the Contract Documents, and to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities, including the responsibility for safety of the Subcontractor’s Work, which the Contractor, by these Documents, assumes toward the Owner and Architect. Each subcontract agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and Architect under the Contract Documents with respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor so that subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights, and shall allow to the Subcontractor, unless specifically provided otherwise in the subcontract agreement, the benefit of all rights, remedies and redress against the Contractor that the Contractor, by the Contract Documents, has against the Owner. Where appropriate, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with Sub-subcontractors. The Contractor shall make available to each proposed Subcontractor, prior to the execution of the subcontract agreement, copies of the Contract Documents to which the Subcontractor will be bound, and, upon written request of the Subcontractor, identify to the Subcontractor terms and conditions of the proposed subcontract agreement that may

Init.

/


21

be at variance with the Contract Documents. Subcontractors will similarly make copies of applicable portions of such documents available to their respective proposed Sub-subcontractors.

§ 5.4 CONTINGENT ASSIGNMENT OF SUBCONTRACTS§ 5.4.1 Each subcontract agreement for a portion of the Work is assigned by the Contractor to the Owner, provided that

.1 assignment is effective only after termination of the Contract by the Owner for cause pursuant to Section 14.2 and only for those subcontract agreements that the Owner accepts by notifying the Subcontractor and Contractor in writing; and

.2 assignment is subject to the prior rights of the surety, if any, obligated under bond relating to the Contract.

When the Owner accepts the assignment of a subcontract agreement, the Owner assumes the Contractor’s rights and obligations under the subcontract.

§ 5.4.2 Upon such assignment, if the Work has been suspended for more than 30 days, the Subcontractor’s compensation shall be equitably adjusted for increases in cost resulting from the suspension.

§ 5.4.3 Upon such assignment to the Owner under this Section 5.4, the Owner may further assign the subcontract to a successor contractor or other entity. If the Owner assigns the subcontract to a successor contractor or other entity, the Owner shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all of the successor contractor’s obligations under the subcontract.

ARTICLE 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS§ 6.1 ’OWNER S RIGHT TO PERFORM CONSTRUCTION AND TO AWARD SEPARATE CONTRACTS§ 6.1.1 The Owner reserves the right to perform construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner’s own forces, and to award separate contracts in connection with other portions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site under Conditions of the Contract identical or substantially similar to these including those portions related to insurance and waiver of subrogation. If the Contractor claims that delay or additional cost is involved because of such action by the Owner, the Contractor shall make such Claim as provided in Article 15.

§ 6.1.2 When separate contracts are awarded for different portions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site, the term “Contractor” in the Contract Documents in each case shall mean the Contractor who executes each separate Owner-Contractor Agreement.

§ 6.1.3 The Owner shall provide for coordination of the activities of the Owner’s own forces and of each separate contractor with the Work of the Contractor, who shall cooperate with them. The Contractor shall participate with other separate contractors and the Owner in reviewing their construction schedules. The Contractor shall make any revisions to the construction schedule deemed necessary after a joint review and mutual agreement. The construction schedules shall then constitute the schedules to be used by the Contractor, separate contractors and the Owner until subsequently revised.

§ 6.1.4 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, when the Owner performs construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner’s own forces, the Owner shall be deemed to be subject to the same obligations and to have the same rights that apply to the Contractor under the Conditions of the Contract, including, without excluding others, those stated in Article 3, this Article 6 and Articles 10, 11 and 12.

§ 6.2 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY§ 6.2.1 The Contractor shall afford the Owner and separate contractors reasonable opportunity for introduction and storage of their materials and equipment and performance of their activities, and shall connect and coordinate the Contractor’s construction and operations with theirs as required by the Contract Documents.

§ 6.2.2 If part of the Contractor’s Work depends for proper execution or results upon construction or operations by the Owner or a separate contractor, the Contractor shall, prior to proceeding with that portion of the Work, promptly report to the Architect apparent discrepancies or defects in such other construction that would render it unsuitable for such proper execution and results. Failure of the Contractor so to report shall constitute an acknowledgment that

Init.

/


22

the Owner’s or separate contractor’s completed or partially completed construction is fit and proper to receive the Contractor’s Work, except as to defects not then reasonably discoverable.

§ 6.2.3 The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for costs the Owner incurs that are payable to a separate contractor because of the Contractor’s delays, improperly timed activities or defective construction. The Owner shall be responsible to the Contractor for costs the Contractor incurs because of a separate contractor’s delays, improperly timed activities, damage to the Work or defective construction.

§ 6.2.4 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage the Contractor wrongfully causes to completed or partially completed construction or to property of the Owner or separate contractors as provided in Section 10.2.5.

§ 6.2.5 The Owner and each separate contractor shall have the same responsibilities for cutting and patching as are described for the Contractor in Section 3.14.

§ 6.3 ’OWNER S RIGHT TO CLEAN UPIf a dispute arises among the Contractor, separate contractors and the Owner as to the responsibility under their respective contracts for maintaining the premises and surrounding area free from waste materials and rubbish, the Owner may clean up and the Architect will allocate the cost among those responsible.

ARTICLE 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK§ 7.1 GENERAL§ 7.1.1 Changes in the Work may be accomplished after execution of the Contract, and without invalidating the Contract, by Change Order, Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work, subject to the limitations stated in this Article 7 and elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

§ 7.1.2 A Change Order shall be based upon agreement among the Owner, Contractor and Architect; a Construction Change Directive requires agreement by the Owner and Architect and may or may not be agreed to by the Contractor; an order for a minor change in the Work may be issued by the Architect alone.

§ 7.1.3 Changes in the Work shall be performed under applicable provisions of the Contract Documents, and the Contractor shall proceed promptly, unless otherwise provided in the Change Order, Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work.

§ 7.2 CHANGE ORDERS§ 7.2.1 A Change Order is a written instrument prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner, Contractor and Architect stating their agreement upon all of the following:

.1 The change in the Work;

.2 The amount of the adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum; and

.3 The extent of the adjustment, if any, in the Contract Time.

§ 7.3 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES§ 7.3.1 A Construction Change Directive is a written order prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner and Architect, directing a change in the Work prior to agreement on adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. The Owner may by Construction Change Directive, without invalidating the Contract, order changes in the Work within the general scope of the Contract consisting of additions, deletions or other revisions, the Contract Sum and Contract Time being adjusted accordingly.

§ 7.3.2 A Construction Change Directive shall be used in the absence of total agreement on the terms of a Change Order.

§ 7.3.3 If the Construction Change Directive provides for an adjustment to the Contract Sum, the adjustment shall be based on one of the following methods:

.1 Mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient substantiating data to permit evaluation;

.2 Unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon;

.3 Cost to be determined in a manner agreed upon by the parties and a mutually acceptable fixed or percentage fee; or

Init.

/


23

.4 As provided in Section 7.3.7.

§ 7.3.4 If unit prices are stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon, and if quantities originally contemplated are materially changed in a proposed Change Order or Construction Change Directive so that application of such unit prices to quantities of Work proposed will cause substantial inequity to the Owner or Contractor, the applicable unit prices shall be equitably adjusted.

§ 7.3.5 Upon receipt of a Construction Change Directive, the Contractor shall promptly proceed with the change in the Work involved and advise the Architect of the Contractor’s agreement or disagreement with the method, if any, provided in the Construction Change Directive for determining the proposed adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time.

§ 7.3.6 A Construction Change Directive signed by the Contractor indicates the Contractor’s agreement therewith, including adjustment in Contract Sum and Contract Time or the method for determining them. Such agreement shall be effective immediately and shall be recorded as a Change Order.

§ 7.3.7 If the Contractor does not respond promptly or disagrees with the method for adjustment in the Contract Sum, the Architect shall determine the method and the adjustment on the basis of reasonable expenditures and savings of those performing the Work attributable to the change, including, in case of an increase in the Contract Sum, an amount for overhead and profit as set forth in the Agreement, or if no such amount is set forth in the Agreement, a reasonable amount. In such case, and also under Section 7.3.3.3, the Contractor shall keep and present, in such form as the Architect may prescribe, an itemized accounting together with appropriate supporting data. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, costs for the purposes of this Section 7.3.7 shall be limited to the following:

.1 Costs of labor, including social security, old age and unemployment insurance, fringe benefits required by agreement or custom, and workers’ compensation insurance;

.2 Costs of materials, supplies and equipment, including cost of transportation, whether incorporated or consumed;

.3 Rental costs of machinery and equipment, exclusive of hand tools, whether rented from the Contractor or others;

.4 Costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance, permit fees, and sales, use or similar taxes related to the Work; and

.5 Additional costs of supervision and field office personnel directly attributable to the change.

§ 7.3.8 The amount of credit to be allowed by the Contractor to the Owner for a deletion or change that results in a net decrease in the Contract Sum shall be actual net cost as confirmed by the Architect. When both additions and credits covering related Work or substitutions are involved in a change, the allowance for overhead and profit shall be figured on the basis of net increase, if any, with respect to that change.

§ 7.3.9 Pending final determination of the total cost of a Construction Change Directive to the Owner, the Contractor may request payment for Work completed under the Construction Change Directive in Applications for Payment. The Architect will make an interim determination for purposes of monthly certification for payment for those costs and certify for payment the amount that the Architect determines, in the Architect’s professional judgment, to be reasonably justified. The Architect’s interim determination of cost shall adjust the Contract Sum on the same basis as a Change Order, subject to the right of either party to disagree and assert a Claim in accordance with Article 15.

§ 7.3.10 When the Owner and Contractor agree with a determination made by the Architect concerning the adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time, or otherwise reach agreement upon the adjustments, such agreement shall be effective immediately and the Architect will prepare a Change Order. Change Orders may be issued for all or any part of a Construction Change Directive.

§ 7.4 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORKThe Architect has authority to order minor changes in the Work not involving adjustment in the Contract Sum or extension of the Contract Time and not inconsistent with the intent of the Contract Documents. Such changes will be effected by written order signed by the Architect and shall be binding on the Owner and Contractor.

Init.

/


24

ARTICLE 8 TIME§ 8.1 DEFINITIONS§ 8.1.1 Unless otherwise provided, Contract Time is the period of time, including authorized adjustments, allotted in the Contract Documents for Substantial Completion of the Work.

§ 8.1.2 The date of commencement of the Work is the date established in the Agreement.

§ 8.1.3 The date of Substantial Completion is the date certified by the Architect in accordance with Section 9.8.

§ 8.1.4 The term “day” as used in the Contract Documents shall mean calendar day unless otherwise specifically defined.

§ 8.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION§ 8.2.1 Time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. By executing the Agreement the Contractor confirms that the Contract Time is a reasonable period for performing the Work.

§ 8.2.2 The Contractor shall not knowingly, except by agreement or instruction of the Owner in writing, prematurely commence operations on the site or elsewhere prior to the effective date of insurance required by Article 11 to be furnished by the Contractor and Owner. The date of commencement of the Work shall not be changed by the effective date of such insurance.

§ 8.2.3 The Contractor shall proceed expeditiously with adequate forces and shall achieve Substantial Completion within the Contract Time.

§ 8.3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME§ 8.3.1 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the commencement or progress of the Work by an act or neglect of the Owner or Architect, or of an employee of either, or of a separate contractor employed by the Owner; or by changes ordered in the Work; or by labor disputes, fire, unusual delay in deliveries, unavoidable casualties or other causes beyond the Contractor’s control; or by delay authorized by the Owner pending mediation and arbitration; or by other causes that the Architect determines may justify delay, then the Contract Time shall be extended by Change Order for such reasonable time as the Architect may determine.

§ 8.3.2 Claims relating to time shall be made in accordance with applicable provisions of Article 15.

§ 8.3.3 This Section 8.3 does not preclude recovery of damages for delay by either party under other provisions of the Contract Documents.

ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION§ 9.1 CONTRACT SUMThe Contract Sum is stated in the Agreement and, including authorized adjustments, is the total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract Documents.

§ 9.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUESWhere the Contract is based on a stipulated sum or Guaranteed Maximum Price, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect, before the first Application for Payment, a schedule of values allocating the entire Contract Sum to the various portions of the Work and prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Architect may require. This schedule, unless objected to by the Architect, shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor’s Applications for Payment.

§ 9.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT§ 9.3.1 At least ten days before the date established for each progress payment, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect an itemized Application for Payment prepared in accordance with the schedule of values, if required under Section 9.2, for completed portions of the Work. Such application shall be notarized, if required, and supported by such data substantiating the Contractor’s right to payment as the Owner or Architect may require, such as copies of requisitions from Subcontractors and material suppliers, and shall reflect retainage if provided for in the Contract Documents.

Init.

/


25

§ 9.3.1.1 As provided in Section 7.3.9, such applications may include requests for payment on account of changes in the Work that have been properly authorized by Construction Change Directives, or by interim determinations of the Architect, but not yet included in Change Orders.

§ 9.3.1.2 Applications for Payment shall not include requests for payment for portions of the Work for which the Contractor does not intend to pay a Subcontractor or material supplier, unless such Work has been performed by others whom the Contractor intends to pay.

§ 9.3.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, payments shall be made on account of materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the Work. If approved in advance by the Owner, payment may similarly be made for materials and equipment suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing. Payment for materials and equipment stored on or off the site shall be conditioned upon compliance by the Contractor with procedures satisfactory to the Owner to establish the Owner’s title to such materials and equipment or otherwise protect the Owner’s interest, and shall include the costs of applicable insurance, storage and transportation to the site for such materials and equipment stored off the site.

§ 9.3.3 The Contractor warrants that title to all Work covered by an Application for Payment will pass to the Owner no later than the time of payment. The Contractor further warrants that upon submittal of an Application for Payment all Work for which Certificates for Payment have been previously issued and payments received from the Owner shall, to the best of the Contractor’s knowledge, information and belief, be free and clear of liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances in favor of the Contractor, Subcontractors, material suppliers, or other persons or entities making a claim by reason of having provided labor, materials and equipment relating to the Work.

§ 9.4 CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT§ 9.4.1 The Architect will, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor’s Application for Payment, either issue to the Owner a Certificate for Payment, with a copy to the Contractor, for such amount as the Architect determines is properly due, or notify the Contractor and Owner in writing of the Architect’s reasons for withholding certification in whole or in part as provided in Section 9.5.1.

§ 9.4.2 The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will constitute a representation by the Architect to the Owner, based on the Architect’s evaluation of the Work and the data comprising the Application for Payment, that, to the best of the Architect’s knowledge, information and belief, the Work has progressed to the point indicated and that the quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents. The foregoing representations are subject to an evaluation of the Work for conformance with the Contract Documents upon Substantial Completion, to results of subsequent tests and inspections, to correction of minor deviations from the Contract Documents prior to completion and to specific qualifications expressed by the Architect. The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will further constitute a representation that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified. However, the issuance of a Certificate for Payment will not be a representation that the Architect has (1) made exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work, (2) reviewed construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, (3) reviewed copies of requisitions received from Subcontractors and material suppliers and other data requested by the Owner to substantiate the Contractor’s right to payment, or (4) made examination to ascertain how or for what purpose the Contractor has used money previously paid on account of the Contract Sum.

§ 9.5 DECISIONS TO WITHHOLD CERTIFICATION§ 9.5.1 The Architect may withhold a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part, to the extent reasonably necessary to protect the Owner, if in the Architect’s opinion the representations to the Owner required by Section 9.4.2 cannot be made. If the Architect is unable to certify payment in the amount of the Application, the Architect will notify the Contractor and Owner as provided in Section 9.4.1. If the Contractor and Architect cannot agree on a revised amount, the Architect will promptly issue a Certificate for Payment for the amount for which the Architect is able to make such representations to the Owner. The Architect may also withhold a Certificate for Payment or, because of subsequently discovered evidence, may nullify the whole or a part of a Certificate for Payment previously issued, to such extent as may be necessary in the Architect’s opinion to protect the Owner from loss for which the Contractor is responsible, including loss resulting from acts and omissions described in Section 3.3.2, because of

.1 defective Work not remedied;

.2 third party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of such claims unless security acceptable to the Owner is provided by the Contractor;

Init.

/


26

.3 failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors or for labor, materials or equipment;

.4 reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum;

.5 damage to the Owner or a separate contractor;

.6 reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time, and that the unpaid balance would not be adequate to cover actual or liquidated damages for the anticipated delay; or

.7 repeated failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

§ 9.5.2 When the above reasons for withholding certification are removed, certification will be made for amounts previously withheld.

§ 9.5.3 If the Architect withholds certification for payment under Section 9.5.1.3, the Owner may, at its sole option, issue joint checks to the Contractor and to any Subcontractor or material or equipment suppliers to whom the Contractor failed to make payment for Work properly performed or material or equipment suitably delivered. If the Owner makes payments by joint check, the Owner shall notify the Architect and the Architect will reflect such payment on the next Certificate for Payment.

§ 9.6 PROGRESS PAYMENTS§ 9.6.1 After the Architect has issued a Certificate for Payment, the Owner shall make payment in the manner and within the time provided in the Contract Documents, and shall so notify the Architect.

§ 9.6.2 The Contractor shall pay each Subcontractor no later than seven days after receipt of payment from the Owner the amount to which the Subcontractor is entitled, reflecting percentages actually retained from payments to the Contractor on account of the Subcontractor’s portion of the Work. The Contractor shall, by appropriate agreement with each Subcontractor, require each Subcontractor to make payments to Sub-subcontractors in a similar manner.

§ 9.6.3 The Architect will, on request, furnish to a Subcontractor, if practicable, information regarding percentages of completion or amounts applied for by the Contractor and action taken thereon by the Architect and Owner on account of portions of the Work done by such Subcontractor.

§ 9.6.4 The Owner has the right to request written evidence from the Contractor that the Contractor has properly paid Subcontractors and material and equipment suppliers amounts paid by the Owner to the Contractor for subcontracted Work. If the Contractor fails to furnish such evidence within seven days, the Owner shall have the right to contact Subcontractors to ascertain whether they have been properly paid. Neither the Owner nor Architect shall have an obligation to pay or to see to the payment of money to a Subcontractor, except as may otherwise be required by law.

§ 9.6.5 Contractor payments to material and equipment suppliers shall be treated in a manner similar to that provided in Sections 9.6.2, 9.6.3 and 9.6.4.

§ 9.6.6 A Certificate for Payment, a progress payment, or partial or entire use or occupancy of the Project by the Owner shall not constitute acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents.

§ 9.6.7 Unless the Contractor provides the Owner with a payment bond in the full penal sum of the Contract Sum, payments received by the Contractor for Work properly performed by Subcontractors and suppliers shall be held by the Contractor for those Subcontractors or suppliers who performed Work or furnished materials, or both, under contract with the Contractor for which payment was made by the Owner. Nothing contained herein shall require money to be placed in a separate account and not commingled with money of the Contractor, shall create any fiduciary liability or tort liability on the part of the Contractor for breach of trust or shall entitle any person or entity to an award of punitive damages against the Contractor for breach of the requirements of this provision.

§ 9.7 FAILURE OF PAYMENTIf the Architect does not issue a Certificate for Payment, through no fault of the Contractor, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor’s Application for Payment, or if the Owner does not pay the Contractor within seven days after the date established in the Contract Documents the amount certified by the Architect or awarded by binding dispute resolution, then the Contractor may, upon seven additional days’ written notice to the Owner and Architect, stop the Work until payment of the amount owing has been received. The Contract Time shall be extended

Init.

/


27

appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contractor’s reasonable costs of shut-down, delay and start-up, plus interest as provided for in the Contract Documents.

§ 9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION§ 9.8.1 Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work when the Work or designated portion thereof is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended use.

§ 9.8.2 When the Contractor considers that the Work, or a portion thereof which the Owner agrees to accept separately, is substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect a comprehensive list of items to be completed or corrected prior to final payment. Failure to include an item on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

§ 9.8.3 Upon receipt of the Contractor’s list, the Architect will make an inspection to determine whether the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete. If the Architect’s inspection discloses any item, whether or not included on the Contractor’s list, which is not sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work or designated portion thereof for its intended use, the Contractor shall, before issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, complete or correct such item upon notification by the Architect. In such case, the Contractor shall then submit a request for another inspection by the Architect to determine Substantial Completion.

§ 9.8.4 When the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete, the Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion that shall establish the date of Substantial Completion, shall establish responsibilities of the Owner and Contractor for security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance, and shall fix the time within which the Contractor shall finish all items on the list accompanying the Certificate. Warranties required by the Contract Documents shall commence on the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof unless otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Completion.

§ 9.8.5 The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be submitted to the Owner and Contractor for their written acceptance of responsibilities assigned to them in such Certificate. Upon such acceptance and consent of surety, if any, the Owner shall make payment of retainage applying to such Work or designated portion thereof. Such payment shall be adjusted for Work that is incomplete or not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

§ 9.9 PARTIAL OCCUPANCY OR USE§ 9.9.1 The Owner may occupy or use any completed or partially completed portion of the Work at any stage when such portion is designated by separate agreement with the Contractor, provided such occupancy or use is consented to by the insurer as required under Section 11.3.1.5 and authorized by public authorities having jurisdiction over the Project. Such partial occupancy or use may commence whether or not the portion is substantially complete, provided the Owner and Contractor have accepted in writing the responsibilities assigned to each of them for payments, retainage, if any, security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance, and have agreed in writing concerning the period for correction of the Work and commencement of warranties required by the Contract Documents. When the Contractor considers a portion substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit a list to the Architect as provided under Section 9.8.2. Consent of the Contractor to partial occupancy or use shall not be unreasonably withheld. The stage of the progress of the Work shall be determined by written agreement between the Owner and Contractor or, if no agreement is reached, by decision of the Architect.

§ 9.9.2 Immediately prior to such partial occupancy or use, the Owner, Contractor and Architect shall jointly inspect the area to be occupied or portion of the Work to be used in order to determine and record the condition of the Work.

§ 9.9.3 Unless otherwise agreed upon, partial occupancy or use of a portion or portions of the Work shall not constitute acceptance of Work not complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

§ 9.10 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT§ 9.10.1 Upon receipt of the Contractor’s written notice that the Work is ready for final inspection and acceptance and upon receipt of a final Application for Payment, the Architect will promptly make such inspection and, when the Architect finds the Work acceptable under the Contract Documents and the Contract fully performed, the Architect

Init.

/


28

will promptly issue a final Certificate for Payment stating that to the best of the Architect’s knowledge, information and belief, and on the basis of the Architect’s on-site visits and inspections, the Work has been completed in accordance with terms and conditions of the Contract Documents and that the entire balance found to be due the Contractor and noted in the final Certificate is due and payable. The Architect’s final Certificate for Payment will constitute a further representation that conditions listed in Section 9.10.2 as precedent to the Contractor’s being entitled to final payment have been fulfilled.

§ 9.10.2 Neither final payment nor any remaining retained percentage shall become due until the Contractor submits to the Architect (1) an affidavit that payrolls, bills for materials and equipment, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Owner or the Owner’s property might be responsible or encumbered (less amounts withheld by Owner) have been paid or otherwise satisfied, (2) a certificate evidencing that insurance required by the Contract Documents to remain in force after final payment is currently in effect and will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days’ prior written notice has been given to the Owner, (3) a written statement that the Contractor knows of no substantial reason that the insurance will not be renewable to cover the period required by the Contract Documents, (4) consent of surety, if any, to final payment and (5), if required by the Owner, other data establishing payment or satisfaction of obligations, such as receipts, releases and waivers of liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract, to the extent and in such form as may be designated by the Owner. If a Subcontractor refuses to furnish a release or waiver required by the Owner, the Contractor may furnish a bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against such lien. If such lien remains unsatisfied after payments are made, the Contractor shall refund to the Owner all money that the Owner may be compelled to pay in discharging such lien, including all costs and reasonable attorneys’ fees.

§ 9.10.3 If, after Substantial Completion of the Work, final completion thereof is materially delayed through no fault of the Contractor or by issuance of Change Orders affecting final completion, and the Architect so confirms, the Owner shall, upon application by the Contractor and certification by the Architect, and without terminating the Contract, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining balance for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than retainage stipulated in the Contract Documents, and if bonds have been furnished, the written consent of surety to payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Architect prior to certification of such payment. Such payment shall be made under terms and conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not constitute a waiver of claims.

§ 9.10.4 The making of final payment shall constitute a waiver of Claims by the Owner except those arising from.1 liens, Claims, security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract and unsettled;.2 failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents; or.3 terms of special warranties required by the Contract Documents.

§ 9.10.5 Acceptance of final payment by the Contractor, a Subcontractor or material supplier shall constitute a waiver of claims by that payee except those previously made in writing and identified by that payee as unsettled at the time of final Application for Payment.

ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY§ 10.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMSThe Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the performance of the Contract.

§ 10.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY§ 10.2.1 The Contractor shall take reasonable precautions for safety of, and shall provide reasonable protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to

.1 employees on the Work and other persons who may be affected thereby;

.2 the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site, under care, custody or control of the Contractor or the Contractor’s Subcontractors or Sub-subcontractors; and

.3 other property at the site or adjacent thereto, such as trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures and utilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction.

Init.

/


29

§ 10.2.2 The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities bearing on safety of persons or property or their protection from damage, injury or loss.

§ 10.2.3 The Contractor shall erect and maintain, as required by existing conditions and performance of the Contract, reasonable safeguards for safety and protection, including posting danger signs and other warnings against hazards, promulgating safety regulations and notifying owners and users of adjacent sites and utilities.

§ 10.2.4 When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment or unusual methods are necessary for execution of the Work, the Contractor shall exercise utmost care and carry on such activities under supervision of properly qualified personnel.

§ 10.2.5 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage and loss (other than damage or loss insured under property insurance required by the Contract Documents) to property referred to in Sections 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3 caused in whole or in part by the Contractor, a Subcontractor, a Sub-subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable and for which the Contractor is responsible under Sections 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3, except damage or loss attributable to acts or omissions of the Owner or Architect or anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them, or by anyone for whose acts either of them may be liable, and not attributable to the fault or negligence of the Contractor. The foregoing obligations of the Contractor are in addition to the Contractor’s obligations under Section 3.18.

§ 10.2.6 The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of the Contractor’s organization at the site whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents. This person shall be the Contractor’s superintendent unless otherwise designated by the Contractor in writing to the Owner and Architect.

§ 10.2.7 The Contractor shall not permit any part of the construction or site to be loaded so as to cause damage or create an unsafe condition.

§ 10.2.8 INJURY OR DAMAGE TO PERSON OR PROPERTYIf either party suffers injury or damage to person or property because of an act or omission of the other party, or of others for whose acts such party is legally responsible, written notice of such injury or damage, whether or not insured, shall be given to the other party within a reasonable time not exceeding 21 days after discovery. The notice shall provide sufficient detail to enable the other party to investigate the matter.

§ 10.3 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS§ 10.3.1 The Contractor is responsible for compliance with any requirements included in the Contract Documents regarding hazardous materials. If the Contractor encounters a hazardous material or substance not addressed in the Contract Documents and if reasonable precautions will be inadequate to prevent foreseeable bodily injury or death to persons resulting from a material or substance, including but not limited to asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB), encountered on the site by the Contractor, the Contractor shall, upon recognizing the condition, immediately stop Work in the affected area and report the condition to the Owner and Architect in writing.

§ 10.3.2 Upon receipt of the Contractor’s written notice, the Owner shall obtain the services of a licensed laboratory to verify the presence or absence of the material or substance reported by the Contractor and, in the event such material or substance is found to be present, to cause it to be rendered harmless. Unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall furnish in writing to the Contractor and Architect the names and qualifications of persons or entities who are to perform tests verifying the presence or absence of such material or substance or who are to perform the task of removal or safe containment of such material or substance. The Contractor and the Architect will promptly reply to the Owner in writing stating whether or not either has reasonable objection to the persons or entities proposed by the Owner. If either the Contractor or Architect has an objection to a person or entity proposed by the Owner, the Owner shall propose another to whom the Contractor and the Architect have no reasonable objection. When the material or substance has been rendered harmless, Work in the affected area shall resume upon written agreement of the Owner and Contractor. By Change Order, the Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased in the amount of the Contractor’s reasonable additional costs of shut-down, delay and start-up.

Init.

/


30

§ 10.3.3 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless the Contractor, Subcontractors, Architect, Architect’s consultants and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys’ fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work in the affected area if in fact the material or substance presents the risk of bodily injury or death as described in Section 10.3.1 and has not been rendered harmless, provided that such claim, damage, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), except to the extent that such damage, loss or expense is due to the fault or negligence of the party seeking indemnity.

§ 10.3.4 The Owner shall not be responsible under this Section 10.3 for materials or substances the Contractor brings to the site unless such materials or substances are required by the Contract Documents. The Owner shall be responsible for materials or substances required by the Contract Documents, except to the extent of the Contractor’s fault or negligence in the use and handling of such materials or substances.

§ 10.3.5 The Contractor shall indemnify the Owner for the cost and expense the Owner incurs (1) for remediation of a material or substance the Contractor brings to the site and negligently handles, or (2) where the Contractor fails to perform its obligations under Section 10.3.1, except to the extent that the cost and expense are due to the Owner’s fault or negligence.

§ 10.3.6 If, without negligence on the part of the Contractor, the Contractor is held liable by a government agency for the cost of remediation of a hazardous material or substance solely by reason of performing Work as required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall indemnify the Contractor for all cost and expense thereby incurred.

§ 10.4 EMERGENCIESIn an emergency affecting safety of persons or property, the Contractor shall act, at the Contractor’s discretion, to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss. Additional compensation or extension of time claimed by the Contractor on account of an emergency shall be determined as provided in Article 15 and Article 7.

ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS§ 11.1 ’CONTRACTOR S LIABILITY INSURANCE§ 11.1.1 The Contractor shall purchase from and maintain in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located such insurance as will protect the Contractor from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from the Contractor’s operations and completed operations under the Contract and for which the Contractor may be legally liable, whether such operations be by the Contractor or by a Subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable:

.1 Claims under workers’ compensation, disability benefit and other similar employee benefit acts that are applicable to the Work to be performed;

.2 Claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of the Contractor’s employees;

.3 Claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than the Contractor’s employees;

.4 Claims for damages insured by usual personal injury liability coverage;

.5 Claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property, including loss of use resulting therefrom;

.6 Claims for damages because of bodily injury, death of a person or property damage arising out of ownership, maintenance or use of a motor vehicle;

.7 Claims for bodily injury or property damage arising out of completed operations; and

.8 Claims involving contractual liability insurance applicable to the Contractor’s obligations under Section 3.18.

§ 11.1.2 The insurance required by Section 11.1.1 shall be written for not less than limits of liability specified in the Contract Documents or required by law, whichever coverage is greater. Coverages, whether written on an occurrence or claims-made basis, shall be maintained without interruption from the date of commencement of the Work until the date of final payment and termination of any coverage required to be maintained after final payment, and, with respect to the Contractor’s completed operations coverage, until the expiration of the period for correction

Init.

/


31

of Work or for such other period for maintenance of completed operations coverage as specified in the Contract Documents.

§ 11.1.3 Certificates of insurance acceptable to the Owner shall be filed with the Owner prior to commencement of the Work and thereafter upon renewal or replacement of each required policy of insurance. These certificates and the insurance policies required by this Section 11.1 shall contain a provision that coverages afforded under the policies will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days’ prior written notice has been given to the Owner. An additional certificate evidencing continuation of liability coverage, including coverage for completed operations, shall be submitted with the final Application for Payment as required by Section 9.10.2 and thereafter upon renewal or replacement of such coverage until the expiration of the time required by Section 11.1.2. Information concerning reduction of coverage on account of revised limits or claims paid under the General Aggregate, or both, shall be furnished by the Contractor with reasonable promptness.

§ 11.1.4 The Contractor shall cause the commercial liability coverage required by the Contract Documents to include (1) the Owner, the Architect and the Architect’s consultants as additional insureds for claims caused in whole or in part by the Contractor’s negligent acts or omissions during the Contractor’s operations; and (2) the Owner as an additional insured for claims caused in whole or in part by the Contractor’s negligent acts or omissions during the Contractor’s completed operations.

§ 11.2 ’OWNER S LIABILITY INSURANCEThe Owner shall be responsible for purchasing and maintaining the Owner’s usual liability insurance.

§ 11.3 PROPERTY INSURANCE§ 11.3.1 Unless otherwise provided, the Owner shall purchase and maintain, in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located, property insurance written on a builder’s risk “all-risk” or equivalent policy form in the amount of the initial Contract Sum, plus value of subsequent Contract Modifications and cost of materials supplied or installed by others, comprising total value for the entire Project at the site on a replacement cost basis without optional deductibles. Such property insurance shall be maintained, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or otherwise agreed in writing by all persons and entities who are beneficiaries of such insurance, until final payment has been made as provided in Section 9.10 or until no person or entity other than the Owner has an insurable interest in the property required by this Section 11.3 to be covered, whichever is later. This insurance shall include interests of the Owner, the Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the Project.

§ 11.3.1.1 Property insurance shall be on an “all-risk” or equivalent policy form and shall include, without limitation, insurance against the perils of fire (with extended coverage) and physical loss or damage including, without duplication of coverage, theft, vandalism, malicious mischief, collapse, earthquake, flood, windstorm, falsework, testing and startup, temporary buildings and debris removal including demolition occasioned by enforcement of anyapplicable legal requirements, and shall cover reasonable compensation for Architect’s and Contractor’s services and expenses required as a result of such insured loss.

§ 11.3.1.2 If the Owner does not intend to purchase such property insurance required by the Contract and with all of the coverages in the amount described above, the Owner shall so inform the Contractor in writing prior to commencement of the Work. The Contractor may then effect insurance that will protect the interests of the Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the Work, and by appropriate Change Order the cost thereof shall be charged to the Owner. If the Contractor is damaged by the failure or neglect of the Owner to purchase or maintain insurance as described above, without so notifying the Contractor in writing, then the Owner shall bear all reasonable costs properly attributable thereto.

§ 11.3.1.3 If the property insurance requires deductibles, the Owner shall pay costs not covered because of such deductibles.

§ 11.3.1.4 This property insurance shall cover portions of the Work stored off the site, and also portions of the Work in transit.

§ 11.3.1.5 Partial occupancy or use in accordance with Section 9.9 shall not commence until the insurance company or companies providing property insurance have consented to such partial occupancy or use by endorsement or

Init.

/


32

otherwise. The Owner and the Contractor shall take reasonable steps to obtain consent of the insurance company or companies and shall, without mutual written consent, take no action with respect to partial occupancy or use that would cause cancellation, lapse or reduction of insurance.

§ 11.3.2 BOILER AND MACHINERY INSURANCEThe Owner shall purchase and maintain boiler and machinery insurance required by the Contract Documents or by law, which shall specifically cover such insured objects during installation and until final acceptance by the Owner; this insurance shall include interests of the Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the Work, and the Owner and Contractor shall be named insureds.

§ 11.3.3 LOSS OF USE INSURANCEThe Owner, at the Owner’s option, may purchase and maintain such insurance as will insure the Owner against loss of use of the Owner’s property due to fire or other hazards, however caused. The Owner waives all rights of action against the Contractor for loss of use of the Owner’s property, including consequential losses due to fire or other hazards however caused.

§ 11.3.4 If the Contractor requests in writing that insurance for risks other than those described herein or other special causes of loss be included in the property insurance policy, the Owner shall, if possible, include such insurance, and the cost thereof shall be charged to the Contractor by appropriate Change Order.

§ 11.3.5 If during the Project construction period the Owner insures properties, real or personal or both, at or adjacent to the site by property insurance under policies separate from those insuring the Project, or if after final payment property insurance is to be provided on the completed Project through a policy or policies other than those insuring the Project during the construction period, the Owner shall waive all rights in accordance with the terms of Section 11.3.7 for damages caused by fire or other causes of loss covered by this separate property insurance. All separate policies shall provide this waiver of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise.

§ 11.3.6 Before an exposure to loss may occur, the Owner shall file with the Contractor a copy of each policy that includes insurance coverages required by this Section 11.3. Each policy shall contain all generally applicable conditions, definitions, exclusions and endorsements related to this Project. Each policy shall contain a provision that the policy will not be canceled or allowed to expire, and that its limits will not be reduced, until at least 30 days’ prior written notice has been given to the Contractor.

§ 11.3.7 WAIVERS OF SUBROGATIONThe Owner and Contractor waive all rights against (1) each other and any of their subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, agents and employees, each of the other, and (2) the Architect, Architect’s consultants, separate contractors described in Article 6, if any, and any of their subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, agents and employees, for damages caused by fire or other causes of loss to the extent covered by property insurance obtained pursuant to this Section 11.3 or other property insurance applicable to the Work, except such rights as they have to proceeds of such insurance held by the Owner as fiduciary. The Owner or Contractor, as appropriate, shall require of the Architect, Architect’s consultants, separate contractors described in Article 6, if any, and the subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, agents and employees of any of them, by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for validity, similar waivers each in favor of other parties enumerated herein. The policies shall provide such waivers of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. A waiver of subrogation shall be effective as to a person or entity even though that person or entity would otherwise have a duty of indemnification, contractual or otherwise, did not pay the insurance premium directly or indirectly, and whether or not the person or entity had an insurable interest in the property damaged.

§ 11.3.8 A loss insured under the Owner’s property insurance shall be adjusted by the Owner as fiduciary and made payable to the Owner as fiduciary for the insureds, as their interests may appear, subject to requirements of any applicable mortgagee clause and of Section 11.3.10. The Contractor shall pay Subcontractors their just shares of insurance proceeds received by the Contractor, and by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for validity, shall require Subcontractors to make payments to their Sub-subcontractors in similar manner.

§ 11.3.9 If required in writing by a party in interest, the Owner as fiduciary shall, upon occurrence of an insured loss, give bond for proper performance of the Owner’s duties. The cost of required bonds shall be charged against proceeds received as fiduciary. The Owner shall deposit in a separate account proceeds so received, which the

Init.

/


33

Owner shall distribute in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach, or as determined in accordance with the method of binding dispute resolution selected in the Agreement between the Owner and Contractor. If after such loss no other special agreement is made and unless the Owner terminates the Contract for convenience, replacement of damaged property shall be performed by the Contractor after notification of a Change in the Work in accordance with Article 7.

§ 11.3.10 The Owner as fiduciary shall have power to adjust and settle a loss with insurers unless one of the parties in interest shall object in writing within five days after occurrence of loss to the Owner’s exercise of this power; if such objection is made, the dispute shall be resolved in the manner selected by the Owner and Contractor as the method of binding dispute resolution in the Agreement. If the Owner and Contractor have selected arbitration as the method of binding dispute resolution, the Owner as fiduciary shall make settlement with insurers or, in the case of a dispute over distribution of insurance proceeds, in accordance with the directions of the arbitrators.

§ 11.4 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND§ 11.4.1 The Owner shall have the right to require the Contractor to furnish bonds covering faithful performance of the Contract and payment of obligations arising thereunder as stipulated in bidding requirements or specifically required in the Contract Documents on the date of execution of the Contract.

§ 11.4.2 Upon the request of any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of bonds covering payment of obligations arising under the Contract, the Contractor shall promptly furnish a copy of the bonds or shall authorize a copy to be furnished.

ARTICLE 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK§ 12.1 UNCOVERING OF WORK§ 12.1.1 If a portion of the Work is covered contrary to the Architect’s request or to requirements specifically expressed in the Contract Documents, it must, if requested in writing by the Architect, be uncovered for the Architect’s examination and be replaced at the Contractor’s expense without change in the Contract Time.

§ 12.1.2 If a portion of the Work has been covered that the Architect has not specifically requested to examine prior to its being covered, the Architect may request to see such Work and it shall be uncovered by the Contractor. If such Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents, costs of uncovering and replacement shall, by appropriate Change Order, be at the Owner’s expense. If such Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents, such costs and the cost of correction shall be at the Contractor’s expense unless the condition was caused by the Owner or a separate contractor in which event the Owner shall be responsible for payment of such costs.

§ 12.2 CORRECTION OF WORK§ 12.2.1 BEFORE OR AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETIONThe Contractor shall promptly correct Work rejected by the Architect or failing to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, whether discovered before or after Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated, installed or completed. Costs of correcting such rejected Work, including additional testing and inspections, the cost of uncovering and replacement, and compensation for the Architect’s services and expenses made necessary thereby, shall be at the Contractor’s expense.

§ 12.2.2 AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION§ 12.2.2.1 In addition to the Contractor’s obligations under Section 3.5, if, within one year after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof or after the date for commencement of warranties established under Section 9.9.1, or by terms of an applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents, any of the Work is found to be not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall correct it promptly after receipt of written notice from the Owner to do so unless the Owner has previously given the Contractor a written acceptance of such condition. The Owner shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the condition. During the one-year period for correction of Work, if the Owner fails to notify the Contractor and give the Contractor an opportunity to make the correction, the Owner waives the rights to require correction by the Contractor and to make a claim for breach of warranty. If the Contractor fails to correct nonconforming Work within a reasonable time during that period after receipt of notice from the Owner or Architect, the Owner may correct it in accordance with Section 2.4.

Init.

/


34

§ 12.2.2.2 The one-year period for correction of Work shall be extended with respect to portions of Work first performed after Substantial Completion by the period of time between Substantial Completion and the actual completion of that portion of the Work.

§ 12.2.2.3 The one-year period for correction of Work shall not be extended by corrective Work performed by the Contractor pursuant to this Section 12.2.

§ 12.2.3 The Contractor shall remove from the site portions of the Work that are not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and are neither corrected by the Contractor nor accepted by the Owner.

§ 12.2.4 The Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting destroyed or damaged construction, whether completed or partially completed, of the Owner or separate contractors caused by the Contractor’s correction or removal of Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

§ 12.2.5 Nothing contained in this Section 12.2 shall be construed to establish a period of limitation with respect to other obligations the Contractor has under the Contract Documents. Establishment of the one-year period for correction of Work as described in Section 12.2.2 relates only to the specific obligation of the Contractor to correct the Work, and has no relationship to the time within which the obligation to comply with the Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced, nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish the Contractor’s liability with respect to the Contractor’s obligations other than specifically to correct the Work.

§ 12.3 ACCEPTANCE OF NONCONFORMING WORKIf the Owner prefers to accept Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Owner may do so instead of requiring its removal and correction, in which case the Contract Sum will be reduced as appropriate and equitable. Such adjustment shall be effected whether or not final payment has been made.

ARTICLE 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS§ 13.1 GOVERNING LAWThe Contract shall be governed by the law of the place where the Project is located except that, if the parties have selected arbitration as the method of binding dispute resolution, the Federal Arbitration Act shall govern Section 15.4.

§ 13.2 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS§ 13.2.1 The Owner and Contractor respectively bind themselves, their partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives to covenants, agreements and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. Except as provided in Section 13.2.2, neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract as a whole without written consent of the other. If either party attempts to make such an assignment without such consent, that party shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all obligations under the Contract.

§ 13.2.2 The Owner may, without consent of the Contractor, assign the Contract to a lender providing construction financing for the Project, if the lender assumes the Owner’s rights and obligations under the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall execute all consents reasonably required to facilitate such assignment.

§ 13.3 WRITTEN NOTICEWritten notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual, to a member of the firm or entity, or to an officer of the corporation for which it was intended; or if delivered at, or sent by registered or certified mail or by courier service providing proof of delivery to, the last business address known to the party giving notice.

§ 13.4 RIGHTS AND REMEDIES§ 13.4.1 Duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Documents and rights and remedies available thereunder shall be in addition to and not a limitation of duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise imposed or available by law.

§ 13.4.2 No action or failure to act by the Owner, Architect or Contractor shall constitute a waiver of a right or duty afforded them under the Contract, nor shall such action or failure to act constitute approval of or acquiescence in a breach there under, except as may be specifically agreed in writing.

Init.

/


35

§ 13.5 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS§ 13.5.1 Tests, inspections and approvals of portions of the Work shall be made as required by the Contract Documents and by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations or lawful orders of public authorities. Unless otherwise provided, the Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests, inspections and approvals with an independent testing laboratory or entity acceptable to the Owner, or with the appropriate public authority, and shall bear all related costs of tests, inspections and approvals. The Contractor shall give the Architect timely notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such procedures. The Owner shall bear costs of (1) tests, inspections or approvals that do not become requirements until after bids are received or negotiations concluded, and (2) tests, inspections or approvals where building codes or applicable laws or regulations prohibit the Owner from delegating their cost to the Contractor.

§ 13.5.2 If the Architect, Owner or public authorities having jurisdiction determine that portions of the Work require additional testing, inspection or approval not included under Section 13.5.1, the Architect will, upon written authorization from the Owner, instruct the Contractor to make arrangements for such additional testing, inspection or approval by an entity acceptable to the Owner, and the Contractor shall give timely notice to the Architect of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such procedures. Such costs, except as provided in Section 13.5.3, shall be at the Owner’s expense.

§ 13.5.3 If such procedures for testing, inspection or approval under Sections 13.5.1 and 13.5.2 reveal failure of the portions of the Work to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents, all costs made necessary by such failure including those of repeated procedures and compensation for the Architect’s services and expenses shall be at the Contractor’s expense.

§ 13.5.4 Required certificates of testing, inspection or approval shall, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the Architect.

§ 13.5.5 If the Architect is to observe tests, inspections or approvals required by the Contract Documents, the Architect will do so promptly and, where practicable, at the normal place of testing.

§ 13.5.6 Tests or inspections conducted pursuant to the Contract Documents shall be made promptly to avoid unreasonable delay in the Work.

§ 13.6 INTERESTPayments due and unpaid under the Contract Documents shall bear interest from the date payment is due at such rate as the parties may agree upon in writing or, in the absence thereof, at the legal rate prevailing from time to time at the place where the Project is located.

§ 13.7 TIME LIMITS ON CLAIMSThe Owner and Contractor shall commence all claims and causes of action, whether in contract, tort, breach of warranty or otherwise, against the other arising out of or related to the Contract in accordance with the requirements of the final dispute resolution method selected in the Agreement within the time period specified by applicable law, but in any case not more than 10 years after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work. The Owner and Contractor waive all claims and causes of action not commenced in accordance with this Section 13.7.

ARTICLE 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT§ 14.1 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR§ 14.1.1 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if the Work is stopped for a period of 30 consecutive days through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work under direct or indirect contract with the Contractor, for any of the following reasons:

.1 Issuance of an order of a court or other public authority having jurisdiction that requires all Work to be stopped;

.2 An act of government, such as a declaration of national emergency that requires all Work to be stopped;

Init.

/


36

.3 Because the Architect has not issued a Certificate for Payment and has not notified the Contractor of the reason for withholding certification as provided in Section 9.4.1, or because the Owner has not made payment on a Certificate for Payment within the time stated in the Contract Documents; or

.4 The Owner has failed to furnish to the Contractor promptly, upon the Contractor’s request, reasonable evidence as required by Section 2.2.1.

§ 14.1.2 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if, through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work under direct or indirect contract with the Contractor, repeated suspensions, delays or interruptions of the entire Work by the Owner as described in Section 14.3 constitute in the aggregate more than 100 percent of the total number of days scheduled for completion, or 120 days in any 365-day period, whichever is less.

§ 14.1.3 If one of the reasons described in Section 14.1.1 or 14.1.2 exists, the Contractor may, upon seven days’ written notice to the Owner and Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner payment for Work executed, including reasonable overhead and profit, costs incurred by reason of such termination, and damages.

§ 14.1.4 If the Work is stopped for a period of 60 consecutive days through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons performing portions of the Work under contract with the Contractor because the Owner has repeatedly failed to fulfill the Owner’s obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to matters important to the progress of the Work, the Contractor may, upon seven additional days’ written notice to the Owner and the Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner as provided in Section 14.1.3.

§ 14.2 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CAUSE§ 14.2.1 The Owner may terminate the Contract if the Contractor

.1 repeatedly refuses or fails to supply enough properly skilled workers or proper materials;

.2 fails to make payment to Subcontractors for materials or labor in accordance with the respective agreements between the Contractor and the Subcontractors;

.3 repeatedly disregards applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, or lawful orders of a public authority; or

.4 otherwise is guilty of substantial breach of a provision of the Contract Documents.

§ 14.2.2 When any of the above reasons exist, the Owner, upon certification by the Initial Decision Maker that sufficient cause exists to justify such action, may without prejudice to any other rights or remedies of the Owner and after giving the Contractor and the Contractor’s surety, if any, seven days’ written notice, terminate employment of the Contractor and may, subject to any prior rights of the surety:

.1 Exclude the Contractor from the site and take possession of all materials, equipment, tools, and construction equipment and machinery thereon owned by the Contractor;

.2 Accept assignment of subcontracts pursuant to Section 5.4; and

.3 Finish the Work by whatever reasonable method the Owner may deem expedient. Upon written request of the Contractor, the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor a detailed accounting of the costs incurred by the Owner in finishing the Work.

§ 14.2.3 When the Owner terminates the Contract for one of the reasons stated in Section 14.2.1, the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive further payment until the Work is finished.

§ 14.2.4 If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds costs of finishing the Work, including compensation for the Architect’s services and expenses made necessary thereby, and other damages incurred by the Owner and not expressly waived, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor. If such costs and damages exceed the unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. The amount to be paid to the Contractor or Owner, as the case may be, shall be certified by the Initial Decision Maker, upon application, and this obligation for payment shall survive termination of the Contract.

§ 14.3 SUSPENSION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE§ 14.3.1 The Owner may, without cause, order the Contractor in writing to suspend, delay or interrupt the Work in whole or in part for such period of time as the Owner may determine.

Init.

/


37

§ 14.3.2 The Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be adjusted for increases in the cost and time caused by suspension, delay or interruption as described in Section 14.3.1. Adjustment of the Contract Sum shall include profit. No adjustment shall be made to the extent

.1 that performance is, was or would have been so suspended, delayed or interrupted by another cause for which the Contractor is responsible; or

.2 that an equitable adjustment is made or denied under another provision of the Contract.

§ 14.4 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE§ 14.4.1 The Owner may, at any time, terminate the Contract for the Owner’s convenience and without cause.

§ 14.4.2 Upon receipt of written notice from the Owner of such termination for the Owner’s convenience, the Contractor shall

.1 cease operations as directed by the Owner in the notice;

.2 take actions necessary, or that the Owner may direct, for the protection and preservation of the Work; and

.3 except for Work directed to be performed prior to the effective date of termination stated in the notice, terminate all existing subcontracts and purchase orders and enter into no further subcontracts and purchase orders.

§ 14.4.3 In case of such termination for the Owner’s convenience, the Contractor shall be entitled to receive payment for Work executed, and costs incurred by reason of such termination, along with reasonable overhead and profit on the Work not executed.

ARTICLE 15 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES§ 15.1 CLAIMS§ 15.1.1 DEFINITIONA Claim is a demand or assertion by one of the parties seeking, as a matter of right, payment of money, or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. The term “Claim” also includes other disputes and matters in question between the Owner and Contractor arising out of or relating to the Contract. The responsibility to substantiate Claims shall rest with the party making the Claim.

§ 15.1.2 NOTICE OF CLAIMSClaims by either the Owner or Contractor must be initiated by written notice to the other party and to the Initial Decision Maker with a copy sent to the Architect, if the Architect is not serving as the Initial Decision Maker. Claims by either party must be initiated within 21 days after occurrence of the event giving rise to such Claim or within 21 days after the claimant first recognizes the condition giving rise to the Claim, whichever is later.

§ 15.1.3 CONTINUING CONTRACT PERFORMANCEPending final resolution of a Claim, except as otherwise agreed in writing or as provided in Section 9.7 and Article 14, the Contractor shall proceed diligently with performance of the Contract and the Owner shall continue to make payments in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Architect will prepare Change Orders and issue Certificates for Payment in accordance with the decisions of the Initial Decision Maker.

§ 15.1.4 CLAIMS FOR ADDITIONAL COSTIf the Contractor wishes to make a Claim for an increase in the Contract Sum, written notice as provided herein shall be given before proceeding to execute the Work. Prior notice is not required for Claims relating to an emergency endangering life or property arising under Section 10.4.

§ 15.1.5 CLAIMS FOR ADDITIONAL TIME§ 15.1.5.1 If the Contractor wishes to make a Claim for an increase in the Contract Time, written notice as provided herein shall be given. The Contractor’s Claim shall include an estimate of cost and of probable effect of delay on progress of the Work. In the case of a continuing delay, only one Claim is necessary.

§ 15.1.5.2 If adverse weather conditions are the basis for a Claim for additional time, such Claim shall be documented by data substantiating that weather conditions were abnormal for the period of time, could not have been reasonably anticipated and had an adverse effect on the scheduled construction.

Init.

/


38

§ 15.1.6 CLAIMS FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGESThe Contractor and Owner waive Claims against each other for consequential damages arising out of or relating to this Contract. This mutual waiver includes

.1 damages incurred by the Owner for rental expenses, for losses of use, income, profit, financing, business and reputation, and for loss of management or employee productivity or of the services of such persons; and

.2 damages incurred by the Contractor for principal office expenses including the compensation of personnel stationed there, for losses of financing, business and reputation, and for loss of profit except anticipated profit arising directly from the Work.

This mutual waiver is applicable, without limitation, to all consequential damages due to either party’s termination in accordance with Article 14. Nothing contained in this Section 15.1.6 shall be deemed to preclude an award of liquidated damages, when applicable, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

§ 15.2 INITIAL DECISION§ 15.2.1 Claims, excluding those arising under Sections 10.3, 10.4, 11.3.9, and 11.3.10, shall be referred to the Initial Decision Maker for initial decision. The Architect will serve as the Initial Decision Maker, unless otherwise indicated in the Agreement. Except for those Claims excluded by this Section 15.2.1, an initial decision shall be required as a condition precedent to mediation of any Claim arising prior to the date final payment is due, unless 30 days have passed after the Claim has been referred to the Initial Decision Maker with no decision having been rendered. Unless the Initial Decision Maker and all affected parties agree, the Initial Decision Maker will not decide disputes between the Contractor and persons or entities other than the Owner.

§ 15.2.2 The Initial Decision Maker will review Claims and within ten days of the receipt of a Claim take one or more of the following actions: (1) request additional supporting data from the claimant or a response with supporting data from the other party, (2) reject the Claim in whole or in part, (3) approve the Claim, (4) suggest a compromise, or (5) advise the parties that the Initial Decision Maker is unable to resolve the Claim if the Initial Decision Maker lacks sufficient information to evaluate the merits of the Claim or if the Initial Decision Maker concludes that, in the Initial Decision Maker’s sole discretion, it would be inappropriate for the Initial Decision Maker to resolve the Claim.

§ 15.2.3 In evaluating Claims, the Initial Decision Maker may, but shall not be obligated to, consult with or seek information from either party or from persons with special knowledge or expertise who may assist the Initial Decision Maker in rendering a decision. The Initial Decision Maker may request the Owner to authorize retention of such persons at the Owner’s expense.

§ 15.2.4 If the Initial Decision Maker requests a party to provide a response to a Claim or to furnish additional supporting data, such party shall respond, within ten days after receipt of such request, and shall either (1) provide a response on the requested supporting data, (2) advise the Initial Decision Maker when the response or supporting data will be furnished or (3) advise the Initial Decision Maker that no supporting data will be furnished. Upon receipt of the response or supporting data, if any, the Initial Decision Maker will either reject or approve the Claim in whole or in part.

§ 15.2.5 The Initial Decision Maker will render an initial decision approving or rejecting the Claim, or indicating that the Initial Decision Maker is unable to resolve the Claim. This initial decision shall (1) be in writing; (2) state the reasons therefor; and (3) notify the parties and the Architect, if the Architect is not serving as the Initial Decision Maker, of any change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time or both. The initial decision shall be final and binding on the parties but subject to mediation and, if the parties fail to resolve their dispute through mediation, to binding dispute resolution.

§ 15.2.6 Either party may file for mediation of an initial decision at any time, subject to the terms of Section 15.2.6.1.

§ 15.2.6.1 Either party may, within 30 days from the date of an initial decision, demand in writing that the other party file for mediation within 60 days of the initial decision. If such a demand is made and the party receiving the demand fails to file for mediation within the time required, then both parties waive their rights to mediate or pursue binding dispute resolution proceedings with respect to the initial decision.

Init.

/


39

§ 15.2.7 In the event of a Claim against the Contractor, the Owner may, but is not obligated to, notify the surety, if any, of the nature and amount of the Claim. If the Claim relates to a possibility of a Contractor’s default, the Owner may, but is not obligated to, notify the surety and request the surety’s assistance in resolving the controversy.

§ 15.2.8 If a Claim relates to or is the subject of a mechanic’s lien, the party asserting such Claim may proceed in accordance with applicable law to comply with the lien notice or filing deadlines.

§ 15.3 MEDIATION§ 15.3.1 Claims, disputes, or other matters in controversy arising out of or related to the Contract except those waived as provided for in Sections 9.10.4, 9.10.5, and 15.1.6 shall be subject to mediation as a condition precedent to binding dispute resolution.

§ 15.3.2 The parties shall endeavor to resolve their Claims by mediation which, unless the parties mutually agree otherwise, shall be administered by the American Arbitration Association in accordance with its Construction Industry Mediation Procedures in effect on the date of the Agreement. A request for mediation shall be made in writing, delivered to the other party to the Contract, and filed with the person or entity administering the mediation. The request may be made concurrently with the filing of binding dispute resolution proceedings but, in such event, mediation shall proceed in advance of binding dispute resolution proceedings, which shall be stayed pending mediation for a period of 60 days from the date of filing, unless stayed for a longer period by agreement of the parties or court order. If an arbitration is stayed pursuant to this Section 15.3.2, the parties may nonetheless proceed to the selection of the arbitrator(s) and agree upon a schedule for later proceedings.

§ 15.3.3 The parties shall share the mediator’s fee and any filing fees equally. The mediation shall be held in the place where the Project is located, unless another location is mutually agreed upon. Agreements reached in mediation shall be enforceable as settlement agreements in any court having jurisdiction thereof.

§ 15.4 ARBITRATION§ 15.4.1 If the parties have selected arbitration as the method for binding dispute resolution in the Agreement, any Claim subject to, but not resolved by, mediation shall be subject to arbitration which, unless the parties mutually agree otherwise, shall be administered by the American Arbitration Association in accordance with its Construction Industry Arbitration Rules in effect on the date of the Agreement. A demand for arbitration shall be made in writing, delivered to the other party to the Contract, and filed with the person or entity administering the arbitration. The party filing a notice of demand for arbitration must assert in the demand all Claims then known to that party on which arbitration is permitted to be demanded.

§ 15.4.1.1 A demand for arbitration shall be made no earlier than concurrently with the filing of a request for mediation, but in no event shall it be made after the date when the institution of legal or equitable proceedings based on the Claim would be barred by the applicable statute of limitations. For statute of limitations purposes, receipt of a written demand for arbitration by the person or entity administering the arbitration shall constitute the institution of legal or equitable proceedings based on the Claim.

§ 15.4.2 The award rendered by the arbitrator or arbitrators shall be final, and judgment may be entered upon it in accordance with applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof.

§ 15.4.3 The foregoing agreement to arbitrate and other agreements to arbitrate with an additional person or entity duly consented to by parties to the Agreement shall be specifically enforceable under applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof.

§ 15.4.4 CONSOLIDATION OR JOINDER§ 15.4.4.1 Either party, at its sole discretion, may consolidate an arbitration conducted under this Agreement with any other arbitration to which it is a party provided that (1) the arbitration agreement governing the other arbitration permits consolidation, (2) the arbitrations to be consolidated substantially involve common questions of law or fact, and (3) the arbitrations employ materially similar procedural rules and methods for selecting arbitrator(s).

§ 15.4.4.2 Either party, at its sole discretion, may include by joinder persons or entities substantially involved in a common question of law or fact whose presence is required if complete relief is to be accorded in arbitration, provided that the party sought to be joined consents in writing to such joinder. Consent to arbitration involving an

Init.

/


40

additional person or entity shall not constitute consent to arbitration of any claim, dispute or other matter in question not described in the written consent.

§ 15.4.4.3 The Owner and Contractor grant to any person or entity made a party to an arbitration conducted under this Section 15.4, whether by joinder or consolidation, the same rights of joinder and consolidation as the Owner and Contractor under this Agreement.


SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS SC - 1

SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS These supplementary conditions modify, change, delete from or add to the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction AIA Document A201, 2007 edition. When any article of the General Conditions is modified or any paragraph, subparagraph or clause thereof is modified or deleted by this supplement, the unaltered provisions of that article, paragraph, subparagraph or clause shall remain in effect.

Article, paragraphs, subparagraphs or clauses modified or deleted have the same numerical designation as those occurring in the General Conditions.

ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS 1.1 Basic Definitions 1.1.1 The Contract Documents

(In subsection 1.1.1 delete the third sentence, and add the following sentence.)

“The Contract Documents shall include the bidding documents as listed in the Instruction to Bidders and any modifications made thereto by Addenda.”

ARTICLE 2 OWNER 2.2 Information and Services Required Of The Owner. 2.2.4 (Add the following sentence to the end of Subsection 2.2.4)

“The Owner shall not be responsible for any explanation or interpretation of the Contract Documents.”

(Delete subsection 2.2.5 and add the following new subsection.)

2.2.5 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract documents. The Architect will furnish to the Contractor, free of charge, up to ten (10) copies of Contract Documents. Additional copies may be purchased by the Contractor by paying actual printing and mailing costs.”

(Add the following section.)

2.5 Owner’s Right of Partial Occupancy 2.5.1 The Owner shall have the right to use any and all portions of the building that have reached such a stage of

completion as to permit occupancy or use provided that such occupancy or use does not hamper the Contractor or prevent his efficient completion of the Contract. Use form provided in the Contract Documents or otherwise by Owner or Architect entitled “Beneficial Occupancy”.

ARTICLE 3 CONTRACTOR 3.6 Taxes (Delete this paragraph in its entirety) 3.8 Allowances

(Delete subsections 3.8.1, 3.8.2 & 3.8.3 & add the following new subsection 3.8.1.)

“No cash allowances shall be made on any item.”



ARTICLE 4 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 4.1 Architect

(Delete the entire paragraph and substitute the following)

4.1.1 The term Architect, when used in the Contract Documents, shall mean the prime designer (Architect, Professional Engineer or Landscape Architect), or his authorized representative, lawfully licensed to practice architecture, engineering or landscape architecture in the state of Louisiana, identified as such in the Owner-Contractor Agreement, and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and masculine in gender.

ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS 5.2.3 (Completely delete subsection 5.2.3.) ARTICLE 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK 7.2.1 "A Change Order is a written order to the Contractor signed by the Owner and the Architect, issued after

execution of the Contract, authorizing a change in the work or an adjustment in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. The Contract Sum and the Contract Time may be changed only by Change Order. A Change Order signed by the Contractor indicates his agreement therewith, including the adjustment in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time."

7.2.1.1 The cost to the Owner resulting from a change in the work shall be the sum of: 1. Contractor's material and labor cost. 2. Subcontractor's and/or Sub-Subcontractor's (as defined in Article 5) material and labor cost. 3. Overhead and profit. 7.2.1.2 The credit to the Owner resulting from a change in the work shall be the sum of: 1. Contractor's material and labor cost. 2. Subcontractor's and/or Sub-Subcontractor's material and labor cost. 3. Credit will not be required for overhead and profit. 7.2.2 The Contractor will be due Extended Overhead for time delays only when complete stoppage of work

occurs causing a contract completion extension. The stoppage must be due to acts or omissions solely attributable to the Owner. In all cases the Contractor is to notify the Designer in writing as required by article 15.1.2.

7.2.3 Before a Change Order is prepared, the Contractor shall provide and deliver to the Architects the following

information, not subject to waiver, within ten (10) days after being notified to prepare said Change Order:

1. An itemized list of material and labor costs for Contractor's work including quantities and unit costs for each item of labor and each item of material. 2. Construction Contract Change Order Summary Form for each change order item. Use form included in Project Manual.



7.2.4 "Overhead and profit shall be computed by one of the following methods but shall not exceed a total of

25% on any portion of work: 1. When all of the work is General Contract work; 15% of the cost of the work for overhead and

profit. 2. When the work is all Subcontract work; 15% of the cost of the work for Subcontractor's

overhead and profit plus 10% of the cost of the work, not including the Subcontractor's overhead and profit, for General Contractor's overhead and profit.

3. When the work is a combination of General Contract work and Subcontract work; that portion

of the cost that is General Contract work shall be figured per 7.2.4.1 and that portion of the cost that is Subcontract work shall be calculated per 7.2.4.2.

7.2.5 After a change order has been approved, no follow-on requests for extensions of time or additional cost

shall be considered for the work included in that change order. 7.2.6 Cost of work for the purpose of Change Order's shall be costs necessarily incurred in performance of the

work and paid by the Contractor which shall consist of:

1. Wages Paid 2. Cost of all materials and supplies 3. Cost of necessary machinery and equipment 4. Cost of applicable taxes, insurance, fringe benefits, unemployment compensation, social

security, old age, bond premiums, and any other documents costs. 7.2.7 Subcontract cost shall consist of the items in 7.2.6 above plus overhead and profit as defined in 7.2.4. 7.2.8 Cost of work whether Contractor's to Subcontractor's cost shall not apply to the following: 1. Salaries or other compensation of the Contractor's personnel at the Contractor's principal office and branch offices. 2. Any part of the Contractor's capital expenses, including interest on the Contractor's capital employed for the work. 3. Overhead and general expenses of any kind or the cost of any item not specifically and expressly included in Subsection 7.3.6. 4. Cost of supervision not specifically required by the Change Order. 5. Costs due to the negligence of the Contractor, any Subcontractor, anyone directly employed by any of them, or for whose acts any of them, may be liable, including but not limited to the correction of defective or nonconforming work, disposal of material and equipment wrongly supplied, making good any damage to property, or delays caused by failure to provide adequate Change Order documentation. 7.2.9 When applicable as provided by the Contract, the cost to Owner for Change Orders shall be determined by

quantities and unit prices. The quantity of any item shall be as submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Architect. Unit prices shall cover cost of material, labor, equipment, overhead and profit.



7.3 Wherever “Construction Change Directives” appear, change to “Field Order”. Add the following paragraph: Any change order pertaining to public work, not required by LA - R.S. 38:2212 to be put out for public bid shall either be negotiated in the best interest of the public entity or let out for public bid as provided by LA - R.S. 38:2212. Where the change order is negotiated, the public entity shall require that said change order be fully documented and itemized as to costs, including material quantities, material costs, taxes, insurance, employee benefits, other related costs, profit and overhead. Where certain unit prices are contained in the initial contract, no deviations shall be allowed in computing negotiated change order costs. All Field Orders require Owner’s approval.

ARTICLE 8 TIME 8.1 Definitions 8.1.2 (In subsection 8.1.2 change the words “in the agreement” to read “by the written notice to proceed”.)

(Add new subsection)

8.1.5 “The date of Beneficial Occupancy shall be the date when a certain portion or portions of a project are complete to a point where they can be occupied by the Owner.”

8.2 Progress and Completion

(Delete subsection 8.2.1 and substitute the following:)

8.2.1 “Time is of the essence and completion of the work must be within the time stated in the Agreement, subject to such extensions as may be granted under section 8.3. The Contractor agrees to commence work not later than fourteen days after the transmittal date of written notice to proceed from the Owner and to substantially complete the project within the time stated in the Agreement. The Owner will suffer financial loss if the project is not substantially complete in the time set forth in the Contract Documents. The Contractor and his surety shall be liable for an shall pay to the Owner the sum stated in the Contract Documents as fixed, agreed and liquidated damages for each consecutive calendar day (Saturday, Sunday and holidays included) of delay until the Work is substantially complete."

8.3 Delays and Extensions of Time 8.3.1 “Change the words “by change order for such reasonable time as the Architect may determine” to read “as

recommended by the Architect, subject to Owner’s approval of the change order.”

(Delete subsection 8.3.3)

ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 9.2 Schedule of Values

(Delete subsection 9.2.1 and substitute the following)

9.2.1 “At the preconstruction conference, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner and the Architect a schedule of values prepared as follows:

1. The Schedule of Values Form as submittal shall be on continuation sheet of application certificate

for payment, AIA Documents G702-G702A. 2. Use the index (table of contents) of the specifications as a basis for format for listing costs of work

for sections under Division 1 through 16. Use each section number under each division for



subtitles. Each section shall be subdivided into separate line items for the total cost (with overhead and profit) of separate items in sections.

3. The total of all items shall equal the total Contract Sum. 9.3 Applications for Payment

(Delete 9.3.1 and substitute the following) 9.3.1 “Monthly, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect an itemized Application of Certificate for Payment,

notarized if required, supported by such data substantiating the right to payment as the Owner or the Architect may require. Application for payment shall be submitted on or about the first of each month for the value of labor and materials incorporated in the work and of material suitably stored at the site as of the twenty-fifth day of the proceeding month, less normal retainage as follows:

1. Project with Contract Sum of less than $500,000.00 - 10% of the Contract Sum.

2. Project with Contract Sum of more than $500,000.00 - 5% of the Contract Sum.”

9.3.1.1 Delete this subsection. 9.6 Progress Payments

(Delete 9.6.1 and substitute the following)

9.6.1 “After the Architect has issued a certificate for payment, the Owner shall make payment within a timely manner”

9.7 Substantial Completion 9.8.2.1 Delete the words “or a portion thereof which the Owner agrees to accept separately” where they appear in

9.8.2. 9.8.5 (Delete the second and third sentences of paragraph 9.8.5 and substitute the following)

“The normal retainage shall not be due the Contractor until expiration of the forty-five day lien period and submission to the Architect of a clear lien certificate and invoice for same.” (Add the following subsection 9.8.6, 9.8.7 and 9.8.8)

9.8.6 Delete the words “or designated portion thereof” wherever they appear in subsections 9.8.1, 9.8.2 and 9.8.3 above.”

9.8.7 “Upon the recommendation of the Architect, the Owner will issue and the Contractor will record with the

Clerk of Courts, a Certificate of Substantial Completion.” 9.8.8 “A “punch list” of “exceptions” and the dollar value related thereto will be prepared. A monetary value

will be assigned to each item so that a “special” retainage can be withheld for exceptions to acceptance in addition to the “normal” retainage. This monetary value shall be based on the estimated actual value of each item multiplied by two.”

9.9 Partial Occupancy or Use

(Delete section 9.9)

9.10 Final Completion and Final Payment



9.10.2 (Completely delete that part of the sentence following (5) and substitute the following)

“The Contractor shall record the acceptance for the Work that has been performed and the Contractor shall furnish a clear lien certificate from the Clerk of Courts not less than forty-five (45) days after the recordation of acceptance. The cost of recordation shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10.2.2 in the first sentence, between the words "bearing on" and "safety", add the words "the health and", 10.3.1 In the first sentence after "(PCB)" add "or lead" ARTICLE 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 13.2 Successors and Assigns 13.2.1 (Eliminate the second sentence and substitute the following):

“There shall be no assignment of the Contract.” (Delete section 13.2.2 in its entirety.) (Delete section 13.6 in its entirety.) (Delete section 13.7 in its entirety.) (Add the following section 13.8.)

13.5 Tests and Inspections 13.5.1 Delete the second sentence and substitute the following: “The Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests, inspections and approvals with third-party Testing Laboratory and the Contractor shall bear all related costs of tests, inspections and approvals.” 3.11.1 Along with items addressed in 3.11 at the completion of the project the Contractor is to provide the architect with final values per structure and per finished items such as sidewalks, light posts, wharfs, hydro- seeding, landscaping, fountains, etc.

13.8 Recordation of Contract and Bond 13.8.1 “The Contractor shall record the Agreement between the Owner and Contractor and Performance and

Payment Bond with the Clerk of Court in the parish in which the work is to be performed. The cost of recordation shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.”

ARTICLE 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT 14.2 Termination by the Owner for Cause 14.2.5 (Add the following subsection):

“If an agreed sum of liquidated damages has been established, termination by the Owner under this Article will not relieve the Contractor of his obligations under the liquidated damages provisions and the Contractor shall be liable to the Owner for per diem liquidated damages.”



ARTICLE 15 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES 15.1.5 Claims for Additional Time

(Add the following subsection.)

15.4 Arbitration

(Delete subsections 15.4.1, 15.4.1.1, 15.4.2, 15.4.3, 15.4.4.1, 15.4.4.2 and 15.4.4.3 and add the following)

15.4.1 All claims, disputes and other matters in question between the parties to this Agreement under Ten Thousand Dollars and no cents ($10,000.00) arising out of, or relating to this agreement or the breach thereof, shall be decided by arbitration under the following rules of arbitration. All claims, disputes and other matters over Ten Thousand dollars and no cents ($10,000.00) may be decided by mutual of the parties to this agreement. Notice of the demand for arbitration shall be filed in writing with the other party of the agreement. The demand for arbitration shall be made within the time limits specified in paragraph 15.1.2 of AIA document A201, 2007 edition. Any such arbitration proceeding shall, at the option of the Owner, be consolidated with or joined to other arbitration proceedings between the Owner and other persons or entities under contract with the Owner for the construction, repair or alterations of the project in question.

15.4.2 All claims by the Contractor shall first be submitted to the Architect in accordance with paragraph 15.2.1 of

the General Conditions. In the event that the Contractor does not receive a decision from the Architect in accordance with the provisions of 15.2.1, the Contractor shall demand arbitration not later than forty (40) days from the date of submission to the Architect or else the Contractor expressly agrees that the claim is waived.

15.4.3 The parties hereby agree that the locale of the arbitration proceedings shall be in Louisiana and that all

legal issues shall be governed by Louisiana law. The Louisiana state courts shall have sole jurisdiction in any court proceedings.

15.4.4 There shall be full right of discovery in arbitration to the extent permitted by the Louisiana Code of Civil

Procedure for court suits. 15.4.5 The right of AAA to make administrative appointments or appoint arbitrators is revoked. The Contractor

and the Owner shall select arbitrators as follows:

1. After demand has been made to arbitrate, each party shall within (15) days name their respective arbitrator.

2. The two arbitrators named by each party shall meet and jointly name the third arbitrator within the next fifteen (15) days.

3. Arbitration proceedings must be commenced no later than forty (40) days after the initial demand to arbitrate has been made.

4. Arbitrators must reach a decision within fifteen (15) days after the arbitration hearings are complete.

5. No more than one item shall be arbitrated at one time unless agreed upon by both parties. In the event it is agreed by both parties that more than one item is to be arbitrated by one panel of arbitrators, each item must be arbitrated separately and only after a decision has been reached by the panel on the proceeding item can the second item be arbitrated.

6. The decision of the arbitrators shall be in writing and shall be final. 15.4.6 This agreement to arbitrate shall be specifically enforceable under provisions of R.S. 9:4201 et seq. 15.4.7 Unless otherwise agreed in writing, the Contractor shall carry on the Work and maintain progress during

any arbitration proceeding, and the Owner shall continue to make payments in accordance with the Agreement.



ARTICLE 16 SHOP DRAWINGS 16.1 Follow all provisions of General Conditions regarding shop drawings and samples. 16.2 Shop drawings must be submitted in quadruplicate unless otherwise indicated in the specifications. ARTICLE 17 COMPLIANCE WITH LOUISIANA LICENSING LAW 17.1 The Contractor must be fully qualified under state or local licensing law for “General Contractors” in effect

and at the location of the Work before submitting his bid. For projects in the state of Louisiana, Contractors and Subcontractors must be licensed under Louisiana Revised Statutes 37:2151, et. seq. For projects requiring licensing in accordance with law. The Contractor shall state his license number with his bid and be responsible for determining that all Subcontractors and prospective Subcontractors are duly licensed.

ARTICLE 18 CONSTRUCTION SIGNS 18.1 The Contractor shall erect a sign at the project in accordance with the Architect’s sample drawing. Signs

shall be erected as soon as practical after commencement of the Work. Location of signs shall be as directed. Signs shall be maintained in good condition until completion of project.

ARTICLE 19 COORDINATION OF TRADES 19.1 The contract documents are intended to produce a piece of work complete in every respect and the

Contractor shall furnish all things necessary to complete the Work within the meaning and intent of said documents. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide everything necessary to complete the Work.

19.2 If installation of conduits, piping and ductwork become a problem, it will be expected that the various

Subcontractors with the General Contractor will coordinate their work to complete the installation at no additional cost to the Owner. Attention is called to the priority list for as enumerated here:

1. Sanitary drain and waste. 2. Storm drain and sewer. 3. Natural gas. 4. Domestic hot water. 5. Domestic cold water. 6. Electric conduit.

Items not required will be deleted, but adjusted sequence will remain. 19.3 It will be the responsibility of the Contractor and all Subcontractors to review all architectural, structural,

mechanical and electrical plans and call discrepancies in coordination to the attention of the Architect for addendum items. After the contract is signed, it will be the responsibility of the Contractor and Subcontractors to provide necessary rough-in and connection, mechanical and electrical, to all items and equipment necessary to place this unit or equipment in complete operating condition. If item is shown on any one segment (architectural, structural, mechanical or electrical), it shall be considered as being required by all and will be provided with all utility hook-up at no additional cost to the Owner, unless specifically noted otherwise.



19.4 Electrical panel locations shall be reviewed and locations adjusted for reasonable access by conduits within walls. If structure interferes with access to panels, the panel will be relocated at no cost to the Owner. Further, if the electrical panels cannot be flush mounted two options remain:

1. If the space is ½” of less from the wall, provide a finished wood trim filler at the perimeter of

panel 2-1/2” wide with mitered corners. 2. Subcontractor shall arrange with the General Contractor to provide an increase in wall thickness so

that the panel may be flush mounted with no additional cost to the Owner. 19.5 Plans will generally be complete with regard to pipe chases and furred areas. If additional furring is

required, this should be called to the attention of the Architect for an addendum. After the contract is signed it will be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide all pipe chases, increases in wall dimension and other furring necessary to complete the project with required finishes at no additional cost to the Owner. Exposed piping or conduit will be permitted only to the extent described elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

ARTICLE 20 DOCUMENT INTENT 20.1 The Contract Documents are intended to produce a piece of work complete in every respect and the

Contractor shall furnish all things necessary to complete the work within the meaning and intent of the said documents. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide everything necessary to complete the Work as enumerated in these Supplementary Conditions.

ARTICLE 21 RECORD DOCUMENTS 21.1.1 The Contractor will be furnished one (1) complete set of contract documents at the end of the contract

period. On these documents will be entered any changes from the original documents for “Record” documents submitted to the Architect for the use of the Owner. Final acceptance shall not be issued until the Architect receives these “Record” documents for submittal to the Owner. If required, the cost will be negotiated between Owner and Architect.

ARTICLE 22 EQUAL OPPORTUNITY 22.1 The Contractor and al Subcontractors shall not discriminate against any employee or applicant for

employment because of race, religion, color, sex or national origin. The Contractor shall take affirmative action to insure that applicants are employed, and that employees are treated during employment, without regard to their race, religion, color, sex or national origin. Such action shall include, but not limited to the following: “employment, upgrading, demotion, or transfer, recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. The Contractor agrees to post in conspicuous places, available to employees and applicants for employment, notices setting forth in policies of non-discrimination.

22.2.1 The Contractor and all Subcontractors shall, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by

them or on their behalf, state that all qualified applicants will receive consideration for employment without regard to race, religion, color, sex or national origin.

Updated 4/29/17 Page 1 of 8

CALCASIEU PARISH SHERIFFS OFFICE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT

STATE OF LOUISIANA PARISH OF CALCASIEU THIS AGREEMENT is hereby made and entered into this ______ day of ___________ 2017, by and between the CALCASIEU PARISH SHERIFF’S OFFICE, hereinafter referred to as "OWNER," a political subdivision of the State of Louisiana, represented herein by its duly authorized Sheriff, Tony Mancuso, and _____________, hereinafter referred to as “CONTRACTOR,” and represented herein by its duly authorized President, ______________. WHEREAS, the OWNER has solicited, received and analyzed competitive bids for the Calcasieu Parish Sheriff’s Office, which is the legal responsibility of the OWNER, and WHEREAS, the OWNER has duly awarded the CONTRACTOR as the successful proposer for the referenced construction activity, products and/or services as hereinafter set forth and in accordance with all local, state and federal regulations governing the expenditure of public funds as discussed in Section 3 below, and WHEREAS, the OWNER considers the public benefit of this type of facility repair and maintenance to be proportionate to the costs associated with this activity, and WHEREAS, the CONTRACTOR shall provide all materials, equipment and labor and perform all the work required to accomplish the designated scope of work in a thorough and workmanlike manner to the satisfaction of the OWNER or the OWNER’S architect/engineer and in accordance with all plans and specifications, instructions, general and/or standard terms and conditions, any addenda issued, and the “Bid” documents, including alternates, unit prices and allowances (when applicable) on file with the OWNER or the OWNER’S architect/engineer, which are as much a part of this agreement as if repeated verbatim herein. NOW THEREFORE, the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR do mutually agree to the following terms and conditions of this agreement:


1. Scope of Work

The OWNER hereby agrees to engage the CONTRACTOR to provide the construction activity, products and/or services inclusive in the OWNER’S “Bid” identified as “Bid” #. Any additional construction activity, products and/or services not specifically listed in the “Bid” but required by the OWNER and available to the CONTRACTOR may be added to the terms of this agreement at a mutually agreed upon price, subject to the verification of cost reasonableness of said change order.

2. Term of Agreement The initial term of this agreement shall commence upon execution of this agreement and shall continue until the completion of the project listed in the Scope of Work and all payments have been made. The CONTRACTOR will begin performance within immediately after receiving the work order or “Notice to Proceed” and shall complete the project within _____ calendar days from that date. If the time frame extends beyond the completion time period then the CONTRACTOR will notify the OWNER or the OWNER’S architect/engineer and follow the specific procedures identified in the plans and specifications, instructions, general and/or standard terms and conditions, any addenda issued, and the “Bid” documents, where applicable. Liquidated or stipulated damages will be assessed in accordance with the plans and specifications, instructions, general and/or standard terms and conditions, any addenda issued, and the “Bid” documents, where applicable for any project not completed within the contractually authorized time period. If these referenced documents are silent with respect to this information then stipulated damages will be assessed in the amount of five hundred dollars ($500) per day for any project not completed within the contractually authorized time period.

3. Payment Terms

Under this agreement, the OWNER agrees to pay the CONTRACTOR _____________ dollars ($__________) which is inclusive of all amounts properly due under the terms and conditions set forth in the “Bid” documents. If the “Bid” documents are silent with respect to payment and related terms then the CONTRACTOR will issue at least monthly invoices for which the OWNER will, in all good faith, attempt to review and process for payment within a reasonable time period. If the “Bid” documents are silent with respect to retainage amounts, then ten (10) percent of the total payment amount will be withheld for projects less than five hundred thousand ($500,000) dollars or five (5) percent of the total payment amount will be withheld for projects equal to or greater than five hundred thousand ($500,000) dollars both of which are provided in Louisiana Revised Statute 38:2248. If this agreement extends beyond the current fiscal year and notwithstanding anything to the contrary and when applicable, the CONTRACTOR acknowledges and agrees that pursuant to

jessi

Typewritten Text

jessi

Typewritten Text

jessi

Typewritten Text

jessi

Typewritten Text

jessi

Typewritten Text


the applicable state law, this agreement is subject to an annual appropriation dependency requirement to the effect that the renewal of this agreement is contingent upon the appropriation of funds to fulfill the requirements of this agreement. If the OWNER fails to appropriate sufficient monies to provide for payments under this agreement, then this agreement shall terminate on the last day of the last fiscal year for which funds were appropriated.

4. Amendments and Assignments

If there is a need to review and/or revise this agreement, the requesting party shall comply with the provisions of the “Bid” documents. If the “Bid” documents are silent with respect to amendments then the requesting party shall submit a written amendment to the other party, with the understanding that no amendment to this agreement shall be valid unless it is agreed and signed by both parties. This agreement shall not be assignable by either party without written consent of the other, except for assignment resulting from merger, consolidation, or reorganization of the assigning party.

5. Records and Audits For audit purposes, all records will be made available by both parties to any authorized representative of either party and said records will be retained for three (3) years from the final contractual payment under this agreement. It is also agreed that all records shall be made available to either party at no additional charge for such information. If any confidential information is obtained during the course of this agreement, both parties agree not to release that information without the approval of the other party unless instructed otherwise by court order, grantor, auditor, public information request or as required by law.

6. Liability, Indemnity and Insurance The CONTRACTOR shall perform the scope of work hereunder in accordance with all plans and specifications, instructions, general and/or standard terms and conditions, any addenda issued and the “Bid” documents, including alternates, unit prices and allowances (if applicable) as well as complying with all applicable laws and regulations. All construction activity, products and/or services will be provided or performed in a thorough and workmanlike manner to the satisfaction of the OWNER. This agreement is intended for the benefit of the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR and does not confer any rights upon any other third parties. All rights by and between the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR are limited to the actions outlined in the applicable local, state and federal laws, regulations and policies. The CONTRACTOR will indemnify, defend, and hold harmless the OWNER, including the OWNER’S employees and agents, from and against any and all claims or liabilities arising from the fault of the CONTRACTOR, its employees, subcontractors or agents in carrying out the CONTRACTOR’S duties and obligations under the terms of this agreement. The


OWNER will indemnify, defend, and hold harmless the CONTRACTOR, including the CONTRACTOR’S employees and agents, from and against any and all claims or liabilities arising from the fault of the OWNER, its employees or agents in carrying out the OWNER’S duties and obligations under the terms of this agreement. This section will survive the termination of this agreement. In the event that either party takes any action to enforce this mutual indemnity provision, the prevailing party shall be entitled to recover reasonable attorney’s fees and costs arising as a result thereof. The CONTRACTOR will comply with the insurance requirements as specified in the “Bid” documents and attached as Exhibit A. Evidence of compliance with the attached insurance requirements will be provided to the OWNER prior to the commencement of any work. As specified in the “Bid” documents, the CONTRACTOR is also required to provide the appropriate Payment and Performance Bonds in amounts equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the contract amount, estimated currently to be __________________ dollars ($__________). The CONTRACTOR is also required to maintain all contracting and/or other licenses as may be required by the Louisiana State Licensing Board for Contractors as well as other regulatory agencies.

7. Independent Contractor Status

The CONTRACTOR shall provide the services contemplated under this agreement as an independent contractor and not as an employee, agent, joint venturer, subcontractor or partner of the OWNER. Nothing in this agreement shall be construed as creating any other relationship between the CONTRACTOR and the OWNER, or between any employee, agent, joint venturer, subcontractor or agent of the CONTRACTOR and the OWNER. During the term of this agreement, all persons employed by CONTRACTOR shall be an employee of the CONTRACTOR for purposes of the CONTRACTOR’S benefit programs for plans now existing or hereafter created, workers’ compensation, compensation, and payment and withholding of federal, state and local income, social security, unemployment, Medicare, and other payroll taxes. The CONTRACTOR acknowledges that he is an independent contractor within the meaning of Louisiana workers’ compensation law, specifically Louisiana Revised Statute 23:1021 (6). The CONTRACTOR is rendering a service, other than manual labor, for a specified recompense for a specified result either as a unit or as a whole, under the control of the OWNER as to the result of his work only, and not as to the means by which such result is accomplished.

8. Warranties, Termination of Agreement and Dispute Resolution The CONTRACTOR warrants the following: (a) that it has the experience and ability to perform the scope of work required in this agreement, (b) that it will perform said scope of work in a professional, competent and timely manner, (c) that its services, reports and materials furnished hereunder will be as represented, (d) that it has the power to enter into


and perform this agreement, and (e) that its performance of this agreement shall not infringe upon or violate any third party’s rights or any federal, state or municipal law, including the proper handling of any waste disposals that may result from the services provided herein. While both parties agree to negotiate all contractual disputes in good faith, the OWNER reserves the right to terminate this agreement at any time upon written notice of termination, in which event, the CONTRACTOR will be reimbursed for all construction activity, products and/or services satisfactorily provided up until the date of termination. Either party may terminate this agreement “for cause” with written notice to the other party within fifteen (15) days stating the cause for termination. Upon receipt, the other party shall have thirty (30) days to satisfactorily remedy, correct or remove the cause for termination. If the notice of termination is by the OWNER then the OWNER may withhold payment of any costs and fees related to, arising from or incidental to the stated cause or causes for termination. If the parties are unable to independently and satisfactorily resolve any disagreement then both parties agree that any contractual disagreement will be resolved under the jurisdiction of the 14th Judicial District Court for Calcasieu Parish, Louisiana. In addition, if it is necessary to enforce this agreement in any judicial forum, then the parties agree that whoever substantially prevails in the litigation shall be entitled to reasonable attorney’s fees and costs as fixed by the Court.

9. Severability, Entire Agreement and Captions

This agreement shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of Louisiana. If any provision of this agreement is held invalid, void or unenforceable under any law or regulation or by a court of competent jurisdiction, such provision will be deemed amended in a manner which renders it valid, or if it cannot be so amended, it will be deemed to be deleted. Such amendment or deletion will not affect the validity of any other provision of this agreement. This agreement, any attached documents, and any referenced documents, including the “Bid” documents, represent the entire agreement between the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR and supersede all prior negotiations, representations or agreements, either written or oral. In the event of a conflict between this agreement and other documents, the terms of this agreement shall control. Each paragraph of this agreement has been supplied with a caption to serve only as a guide to the contents. The caption does not control the meaning of any paragraph or in any way determine its interpretation.

10. No Authorship Presumptions The OWNER and the CONTRACTOR have had an opportunity to negotiate the language of this agreement in consultation with legal counsel prior to its execution. No presumption shall arise or adverse inference be drawn by virtue of authorship. The OWNER and the CONTRACTOR hereby waive the benefit of any rule of law that might otherwise be applicable in connection with the interpretation of this agreement, including but not limited


to, any rule of law to the effect that any provision of this agreement shall be interpreted or construed against the party who (or whose counsel) drafted that provision. The rule of no authorship presumption set forth in this paragraph is equally applicable to any person that becomes a party by reason of assignment and/or assumption of this agreement and any successor to a signatory party.

11. Address of Notices and Communications All notices between the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR provided for pursuant to this agreement shall be in writing. The name and address of the OWNER'S representative is:

Tony Mancuso, Sheriff Calcasieu Parish Sheriff’s Office 5400 E Broad Street Lake Charles, Louisiana 70615

The name and address of the CONTRACTOR'S representative is:

_____________________ _____________________ _____________________ _____________________

In the event that the mailing address of the OWNER or the CONTRACTOR changes during the terms of this agreement, or that there is a change in the designated points of contact, the party with the address change or change of contact shall immediately notify the other party of the change.

[The remainder of this page is intentionally left blank.]


THUS DONE AND SIGNED on the ____ day of ______________ 2017, in Lake Charles, Louisiana, and in the presence of the undersigned witnesses and Notary Public, after a due reading of the whole. WITNESSES: CALCASIEU PARISH SHERIFF’S OFFICE: BY: Witness Signature TONY MANCUSO, SHERIFF Printed Witness Name Witness Signature Printed Witness Name

_____________________________________ NOTARY PUBLIC

_____________________________________

Notary Printed/Stamped Name and Identification Number


THUS DONE AND SIGNED on the ____ day of ______________ 2017, in Lake Charles, Louisiana, and in the presence of the undersigned witnesses and Notary Public, after a due reading of the whole. WITNESSES: INSERT CONTRACTOR’S NAME: BY: Witness Signature INSERT OFFICER’S NAME Printed Witness Name Witness Signature Printed Witness Name

_____________________________________ NOTARY PUBLIC

_____________________________________

Notary Printed/Stamped Name and Identification Number

CPPJ-Revised 2015 01

PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND To these presents personally came and intervene____________________________,

herein acting for __________________________________________, a corporation

organized and existing under the laws of the State of __________________, and duly

authorized to transact business in the State of Louisiana, as surety, who declared that

having taken cognizance of this contract and of the Construction Documents mentioned

herein, he hereby in his capacity as its Attorney-In-Fact obligates his said company, as

Surety for the said Contractor, unto the said Owner, Calcasieu Parish Sheriff’s Office,

up to the sum of _________________________________($________________)DOLLARS.

The condition of this performance and payment bond shall be that should the

Contractor herein not perform the contract in accordance with the terms and conditions

hereof, or should said Contractor not fully indemnify and save harmless the Owner,

Calcasieu Parish Sheriff’s Office, from all costs and damages which he may suffer by

said Contractor’s non-performance or should said Contractor not pay all persons who

have and fulfill obligations to perform labor and/or furnish materials in the prosecution

of the work provided for herein, including by way of example workmen, laborers,

mechanics, and furnishers of materials, machinery, equipment, and fixtures, then said

Surety agrees and is bound to so perform the contract and make said payment(s).

Provided, that any alterations which may be made in the terms, of the contract or

in the work to be done under it, or the giving by the Owner, Calcasieu Parish Sheriff’s

CPPJ-Revised 2015 01

PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND Page Two

Office, of any extensions of time for the performance of the contract, or any other

forbearance on the part of either the Owner, Calcasieu Parish Sheriff’s Office, or the

Contractor to the other shall not in any way release the Contractor or the Surety from

their liability hereunder, notice to the Surety of any such alterations, extensions, or

other forbearance being hereby waived.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties herein on this ______ day of _____________,

20___, have executed this agreement in five (5) counterparts, each of which shall,

without proof of accountancy for the other counterparts, be deemed an original thereof.

WITNESSES: As to Principal __________________________ ___________________________________________ __________________________ ___________________________________________ WITNESSES: As to Surety _________________________ ___________________________________________ SURETY _________________________ _________________________ ___________________________________________ (Attorney-In-Fact) _________________________

R-1020I(11/04)

Designation of Construction Contractor as Agent of a Governmental Entity and Exemption Certificate

General Information

Purpose of the R-1020 Form: Agencies and instrumentalities of federal or Louisiana state or local government may

designate a construction contractor as its authorized agent for the purpose of purchasing construction materials,

leasing and renting tangible personal property, and purchasing taxable services. Form R-1020 serves as the

documentation by which the government entity and contractor document the agency relationship to vendors of

materials and services. It also serves as documentation that the contractor’s purchases are sales tax exempt, and

therefore serves as an exemption certificate, which the vendor must retain on file to support the deduction he will

claim on his sales tax return. Effective 11-1-2004, the R-1032 exemption certificate will no longer be necessary.

Use of the R-1020 Form: The form must be signed by both parties, contractor and governmental entity. After

signature, both the contractor/agent and the governmental entity must keep an original copy of the form on file, along

with other documents that pertain to the construction project. (Effective 11-1-2004) Do not send a copy of the R-

1020 form to the Louisiana Department of Revenue. Retain your copy of the original certificate on file. The

contractor/agent must reproduce the original copy as needed to attach a copy to each purchase order for materials

for the project. The reproduced copy will serve as the exemption certificate that will document the exempt sale of

materials to the contractor/agent.

Subcontractors. A designated contractor may not re-designate his subcontractors as authorized agents for the

governmental entity. Each subcontractor must obtain its own designation from the governmental entity.

Title to Property: Any materials purchased by the agent through the use of this certificate immediately become the

property of the governmental entity upon delivery to the contractor/agent.

Restrictions as to Vendors: The governmental entity may choose to restrict the agent/contractor to making

purchases from a pre-selected list of vendors and providers of services. This restriction, if applicable, must

be incorporated into a contractual agreement between the governmental entity and the designated agent. If there

are no vendor restrictions, the contractor/agent may use the R-1020 Exemption Certificate to make sales tax exempt

purchases from any vendor.

, an agency of the United Legal Name of Governmental Entity

States government, or an agency, board, commission, or instrumentality of the State of Louisiana or its political subdivisions, including

parishes, municipalities and school boards, does hereby designate the following contractor as its agent for the purpose of making sales

tax exempt purchases on behalf of the governmental body:

Name of Contractor

Address

City State ZIP

This designation of agency shall be effective for purchases of component construction materials, taxable services and leases and rentals

of tangible personal property for the following named construction project:

Construction Project Contract Number

This designation and acceptance of agency is effective for the period

Beginning Date (mm/dd/yyyy) End Date (mm/dd/yyyy)

Purchases for the named project during this period by the designated contractor shall be considered as the legal equivalent of purchases

directly by the governmental body. Any materials purchased by this agent shall immediately, upon the vendor’s delivery to the agent,

become the property of this government entity. This government entity, as principal, assumes direct liability to the vendor for the payment

of any property, services, leases, or rentals made by this designated agent. This agreement does not void or supersede the obligations of

any party created under any construction contract related to this project, including specifically any contractual obligation of the construc-

tion contractor to submit payment to the vendors of materials or services for the project.

This contractor-agent is not authorized to delegate this purchasing agency to others; separate designations of agency by

this governmental entity are required for each contractor or sub-contractor who is to purchase on behalf of this governmen-

tal entity. The undersigned hereby certify that this designation is the entirety of the agency designation agreement between

them. In order for a purchase for an eligible governmental entity through a designated agent to be eligible for sales tax exemp-

tion, the designation of agency must be made, accepted, and disclosed to the vendor before or at the time of the purchase

transaction.

Designation of Agency Acceptance of AgencySignature of Authorized Designator Date (mm/dd/yyyy) Signature of Contractor or Subcontractor Authorized Acceptor Date (mm/dd/yyyy)

Name of Authorized Designator Name of Contractor’s or Subcontractor’s Acceptor

Name of Governmental Entity Name of Contractor

Address Address

City State ZIP City State ZIP

This designation of agency form, when properly executed by both the contractor and the governmental entity, shall serve as evidence

of the sales tax exempt status that has been conferred onto the contractor. No other exemption certificate form is necessary to claim

exemption from sales taxes. The agency agreement evidenced by this sales tax exemption certificate must be implemented at the time

of contract execution with the governmental entity. The contract between the governmental entity and his agent must contain provisions

to authenticate the conferment of agency.

Designation of Construction Contractoras Agent of a Governmental Entity

Sales Tax Exemption Certificate

R-1020 (4/12)

CHANGE ORDER


CHANGE ORDER NO.: __________ DATE: _____________________________ PROJECT: ____________________________________________________________________ PROJECT NO.: ____________________________ PURCHASE ORDER NO.: ___________ TO: ________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________ You are hereby directed to make the following change(s) in this contract as per the attached itemized breakdown: The Original Contract Sum ________________________ Net Change by Previous Change Orders ________________________ Contract Sum prior to this Change Order ________________________ Contract Sum will be (increased/decreased) by this Change Order –Attach Details ________________________ New Contract Sum including this Change Order ________________________ Contract Time will be _______________________ by ______ days Revised Contract Completion Date ______________________ RECOMMENDED ACCEPTED __________________________________ ___________________________________ Architect/Engineer/Project Manager Contractor __________________________________ ___________________________________ __________________________________ ___________________________________ By: _______________________________ By: ________________________________ Dated: ____________________________ Dated: _____________________________ APPROVED Calcasieu Parish Sheriff’s Office 5400 E Broad Street Lake Charles, LA 70615 By: _______________________________ Dated: ____________________________

RECOMMENDATION OF ACCEPTANCE


TO: ________________________________________________ Dated: ___________________ Project No.:__________________ Project Name: ____________________________________ Architect/Engineer: ___________________________________________________________ Contractor: ___________________________________________________________________ Using Agency: Calcasieu Parish Sheriff’s Office I certify to the best of my knowledge and belief that this project is complete or substantially complete in accordance with the plans and specifications to the point where it can be used for the purpose which was intended. It is recommended that it be accepted. Date of Acceptance by Architect/Engineer: ______________________________ Contract Date of Completion: ______________________________ Number of Days (Overrun) (Underrun): ______________________________ Liquidated Damages Per Day Stipulated in Contract: ______________________________ Value of Punch List (Attach Itemized List): ______________________________ Was part of the project occupied prior to Acceptance? If so, portion occupied, attach Beneficial Occupancy Form. Accepted: _________________________________________ Architect/Engineer Below Completed by Owner: Contract accepted as substantially complete by the Calcasieu Parish Sheriff’s Office on ___________________________________. __________________________________________ President


Not for Recordation

BENEFICIAL OCCUPANCY Project Name: __________________________________________________ Project No.: __________________________________________________ Architect/Engineer: __________________________________________________ Contractor: __________________________________________________ OWNER: Calcasieu Parish Sheriff’s Office The below described portion of subject project is, to the best of my knowledge and belief, complete to a point where the user desires to use in according with the Contract Documents. The Owner’s occupancy of any portion of this building does not violate any applicable warranties. Date Occupied: ____________________ Architect/Engineer Contractor By:_______________________________ By:_________________________________ Date: __________________ Date: _______________ Calcasieu Parish Sheriff’s Office By: _______________________________ Date:_______________ Punch List: NONE _______________


SPECIAL PROVISIONS

1. The Work shall be completed on or before 240 days from the date of Notice to Proceed.

2. If the duration of the Work exceeds the total contract time, the amount of $150 per calendar day for each day of delinquent completion shall be deducted from payments due to the Contractor as liquidated damages.


SUMMARY 01100 - 1

SECTION 01100 - SUMMARY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Project information. 2. Work covered by Contract Documents. 3. Owner-furnished products. 4. Access to site. 5. Work restrictions.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 01500 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing temporary use of Owner's facilities.

1.3 PROJECT INFORMATION

A. Project Identification: Addition and Renovations to Office Building for Calcasieu Parish Sheriff’s Office

1. Project Location: 5716 East Broad Street, Lake Charles, LA 70615.

B. Owner: Calcasieu Parish Sheriff’s Office

1. Owner's Representative: Tony Mancuso, Sheriff

C. Architect: H. Curtis Vincent – Steven D. Shows, Architects, APC.

1. Architect’s Representative: H. Curtis Vincent, AIA

1.4 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and generally consists of the following:

Construction of a two floor office space within an existing warehouse; The contractor must complete the new space prior to beginning work in the existing offices.

B. Type of Contract:

1. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract.


SUMMARY 01100 - 2

1.5 ACCESS TO SITE

A. General: Contractor shall have full use of Project site for construction operations during construction period. Contractor's use of Project site is limited only by Owner's right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project.

B. Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to areas within the Contract limits indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated. 1. Limits: Limit site disturbance to areas that are in the Contract limits. Contractor shall limit traffic

over areas that have been planted as part of Phase One of this project.

1.6 WORK RESTRICTIONS

A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations.

1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. On-Site Work Hours: Limit work on the site to normal working hours of 7 a.m. to 6 p.m., unless otherwise allowed with prior permission of Owner.

1. Early Morning Hours: As limited by authorities having jurisdiction for restrictions on noisy work.

C. Noise, Vibration, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of noise and vibration, odors, or other disruption to Owner occupancy with Owner.

1. Notify Owner, through Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed disruptive operations.

2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with disruptive operations.

D. Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted within the completed buildings or within 25 feet (8 m) of entrances, operable windows, or outdoor-air intakes.

E. Controlled Substances: Use of controlled substances on Project site is not permitted.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 01100


CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01250 - 1

SECTION 01250 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications.


1. Section 01635 "Substitution Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after the Contract award.

1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK

A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.

1.4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS

A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.

1. Work Change Proposal Requests issued by Architect are not instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change.

2. Within time specified in Proposal Request or 10 days, when not otherwise specified, after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change.

a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.

c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. d. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the

change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.

e. Quotation Form: Use forms acceptable to Architect.


CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01250 - 2

B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to Architect.

1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.

2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. 4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 5. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change,

including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.

6. Comply with requirements in Section 01635 "Substitution Procedures" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified.

7. Proposal Request Form: Use form acceptable to Architect.

1.5 ADMINISTRATIVE CHANGE ORDERS

A. Allowance Adjustment: See Section 01210 "Allowances" for administrative procedures for preparation of Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum to reflect actual costs of allowances.

1.6 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES

A. On Owner's approval of a Work Changes Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on form included in Project Manual.

1.7 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE

A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.

1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.

B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive.

1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.


PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION 01250


PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01290 - 1

SECTION 01290 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01250 "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling

changes to the Contract.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment.

1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's construction schedule.

1. Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following:

a. Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets. b. Submittal schedule. c. Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's construction schedule.

2. Submit the schedule of values to Architect at earliest possible date, but no later than seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment.

3. Subschedules for Separate Elements of Work: Where the Contractor's construction schedule defines separate elements of the Work, provide subschedules showing values coordinated with each element.

4. Subschedules for Separate Design Contracts: Where the Owner has retained design professionals under separate contracts who will each provide certification of payment requests, provide subschedules showing values coordinated with the scope of each design services contract as described in Section 01100 "Summary."

B. Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.

1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values:



a. Project name and location. b. Name of Architect. c. Architect's project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal.

2. Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of AIA Document G703. 3. Arrange the schedule of values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for

each item listed:

a. Description of the Work. b. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value. c. Dollar value of the following, as a percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-

hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent.

4. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with Project Manual table of contents. Provide multiple line items for principal subcontract amounts in excess of five percent of the Contract Sum.

5. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum.

6. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed.

a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. If required, include evidence of insurance.

7. Provide separate line items in the schedule of values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.

8. Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.

a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the schedule of values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option.

9. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum.

1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

A. Each Application for Payment following the initial Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner.

1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.

B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.



C. Application for Payment Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 as form for Applications for Payment.

D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return or discard incomplete applications without action.

1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.

2. Include amounts for work completed following previous Application for Payment, whether or not payment has been received. Include only amounts for work completed at time of Application for Payment.

3. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application.

4. Indicate separate amounts for work being carried out under Owner-requested project acceleration.

E. Stored Materials: Include in Application for Payment amounts applied for materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site.

1. Provide certificate of insurance, evidence of transfer of title to Owner, and consent of surety to payment, for stored materials.

2. Provide supporting documentation that verifies amount requested, such as paid invoices. Match amount requested with amounts indicated on documentation; do not include overhead and profit on stored materials.

3. Provide summary documentation for stored materials indicating the following:

a. Value of materials previously stored and remaining stored as of date of previous Applications for Payment.

b. Value of previously stored materials put in place after date of previous Application for Payment and on or before date of current Application for Payment.

c. Value of materials stored since date of previous Application for Payment and remaining stored as of date of current Application for Payment.

F. Transmittal: Submit three signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required.

1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application.

G. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:

1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of values. 3. Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final). 5. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 6. Copies of building permits. 7. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 8. Performance and payment bonds.



H. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Architect issues the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete.

1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.

2. This application shall reflect Certificate(s) of Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.

I. Final Payment Application: After completing Project closeout requirements, submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following:

1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Evidence that claims have been settled.





PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01310 - 1

SECTION 01310 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following:

1. General coordination procedures. 2. Requests for Information (RFIs). 3. Project meetings.

B. Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of responsibility are assigned to a specific contractor.

C. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01700 "Execution Requirements" for procedures for coordinating general installation and

field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points. 2. Section 01770 "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the Contract.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. RFI: Request from Owner, Architect, or Contractor seeking information required by or clarifications of the Contract Documents.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products. 2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.

B. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home, office, and cellular telephone numbers and e-mail addresses. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as alternates in the absence of individuals assigned to Project.

1. Post copies of list in project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times.



1.5 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.

1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation.

2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.

3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.

B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings.

1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required.

C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Preparation of the schedule of values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Preinstallation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. 8. Startup and adjustment of systems.

D. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. Coordinate use of temporary utilities to minimize waste.

1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated into, the Work. See other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials that are designated as Owner's property.

1.6 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs)

A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified.

1. Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by Contractor with no response.

2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors.

B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or interpretation and the following:



1. Project name. 2. Project number. 3. Date. 4. Name of Contractor. 5. Name of Architect. 6. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 7. RFI subject. 8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's suggested resolution impacts the Contract Time

or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 12. Contractor's signature. 13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop

Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation.

a. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches.

C. RFI Forms: AIA Document G716 or similar approved format

1. Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format.

D. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.

1. The following Contractor-generated RFIs will be returned without action:

a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. c. Requests for approval of Contractor's means and methods. d. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents. e. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. f. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. g. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs.

2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information.

3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Section 01250 "Contract Modification Procedures."

a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI response.

E. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Include the following:

1. Project name. 2. Name and address of Contractor. 3. Name and address of Architect. 4. RFI number including RFIs that were returned without action or withdrawn. 5. RFI description.



6. Date the RFI was submitted. 7. Date Architect's response was received.

F. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if Contractor disagrees with response.

1. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate.

2. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate.

1.7 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise indicated.

1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times.

2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions and

agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Ownerand Architect, within three days of the meeting.

B. Preconstruction Conference: Architect will schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement.

1. Conduct the conference to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. 2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and

its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:

a. Tentative construction schedule. b. Phasing. c. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items. d. Designation of key personnel and their duties. e. Lines of communications. f. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. g. Procedures for RFIs. h. Procedures for testing and inspecting. i. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. j. Submittal procedures. k. Preparation of record documents. l. Work restrictions. m. Working hours. n. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. o. Office, work, and storage areas. p. Security.

4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes.



C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.

1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect of scheduled meeting dates.

2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:

a. Contract Documents. b. Possible conflicts. c. Compatibility requirements. d. Time schedules. e. Compatibility of materials.

3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions.

4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties requiring information.

5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.

D. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at biweekly intervals.

1. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests. 2. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor,

supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project.

a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.

1) Review schedule for next period.

b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:

1) Status of submittals. 2) Temporary facilities and controls. 3) Progress cleaning. 4) Quality and work standards. 5) Status of correction of deficient items. 6) Field observations. 7) Status of RFIs. 8) Status of proposal requests. 9) Pending changes.



10) Status of Change Orders.

4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute the meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information.

a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.





SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 - 1

SECTION 01330 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.


1. Section 01290 "Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for Payment and the schedule of values.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architect's responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "action submittals."

B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "informational submittals."

C. File Transfer Protocol (FTP): Communications protocol that enables transfer of files to and from another computer over a network and that serves as the basis for standard Internet protocols. An FTP site is a portion of a network located outside of network firewalls within which internal and external users are able to access files.

D. Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems used for representing documents in a device-independent and display resolution-independent fixed-layout document format.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections.

1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and Contractor's construction schedule.



2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with startup construction schedule. Include submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those submittals required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication.

3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's construction schedule.

a. Submit revised submittal schedule to reflect changes in current status and timing for submittals.

4. Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format:

a. Scheduled date for first submittal. b. Specification Section number and title. c. Submittal category: Action; informational. d. Name of subcontractor. e. Description of the Work covered. f. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval. g. Scheduled date of fabrication. h. Scheduled dates for purchasing. i. Scheduled dates for installation. j. Activity or event number.

1.5 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic digital data files of the Contract Drawings will be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.

1. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data drawing files of the Contract Drawings for use in preparing Shop Drawings.

a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data drawing files as they relate to the Contract Drawings.

b. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of AIA Document C106, Digital Data Licensing Agreement.

B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities.

1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.

2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule.

3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification Section as separate packages under separate transmittals.

4. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination.

a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.

C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be



authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.

1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.

2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal.

3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 Days for review of each resubmittal. 4. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Architect's consultants, Owner, or

other parties is indicated, allow 21 days for initial review of each submittal.

D. Paper Submittals: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal item for identification.

1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Include the following information for processing and recording action taken:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Name of subcontractor. f. Name of supplier. g. Name of manufacturer. h. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. i. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. j. Other necessary identification.

3. Additional Paper Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal.

a. Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to specified number of copies to Architect.

4. Transmittal for Paper Submittals: Assemble each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will discard submittals received from sources other than Contractor.

a. Transmittal Form for Paper Submittals: Use AIA Document G810 or Similar.

E. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as follows:

1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation to each item.

2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.

3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect.

4. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use software-generated form from electronic project management software acceptable to Architect, containing the following information:

a. Project name. b. Date.



c. Name and address of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. f. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. g. Category and type of submittal. h. Submittal purpose and description. i. Specification Section number and title. j. Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each of

multiple items. k. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. l. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. m. Related physical samples submitted directly. n. Indication of full or partial submittal. o. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. p. Other necessary identification. q. Remarks.

5. Metadata: Include the following information as keywords in the electronic submittal file metadata:

a. Project name. b. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. c. Manufacturer name. d. Product name.

F. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect.

G. Deviations and Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same identification information as related submittal.

H. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.

1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect'saction stamp.

I. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

J. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections.

1. Submit electronic submittals via email as PDF electronic files.



a. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file.

2. Action Submittals: Submit three paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies.

3. Informational Submittals: Submit two paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise indicated. Architect will not return copies.

4. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity.

a. Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically submitted certificates and certifications where indicated.

b. Provide a notarized statement on original paper copy certificates and certifications where indicated.

B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment.

1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.

2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Standard color charts. d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards.

4. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. 5. Submit Product Data in either of the following formats:

a. PDF electronic file. b. Three paper copies of Product Data unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two

copies.

C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data, unless submittal based on Architect's digital data drawing files is otherwise permitted.

1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Identification of products. b. Compliance with specified standards. c. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. d. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.

2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm), but no larger than 30 by 42 inches (750 by 1067 mm).

3. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format:

a. Three opaque copies of each submittal. Architect will retain two copies; remainder will be returned.



D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.

1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package.

2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:

a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. c. Sample source. d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section. e. Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item.

3. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.

a. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor.

4. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.

a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected.

5. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection.

a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain one Sample set; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample set as a project record sample.

1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated.

2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations.

E. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form:

1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product indicated in the Contract Documents or assigned by Contractor if none is indicated.

2. Manufacturer and product name, and model number if applicable. 3. Number and name of room or space. 4. Location within room or space.



5. Submit product schedule in either of the following format:

a. PDF electronic file. b. Three paper copies of product schedule or list unless otherwise indicated.

F. Application for Payment and Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01290 "Payment Procedures."

G. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.

H. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required.

I. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

J. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

K. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

L. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

M. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

N. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW

A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.

B. Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements in Section 01770 "Closeout Procedures."

C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's



approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.

3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION

A. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or revisions required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action.

B. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party.

C. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial submittals has received prior approval from Architect.

D. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned for resubmittal without review or disposed of.

E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may be disposed of by the Architect.



QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01400 - 1

SECTION 01400 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control.

B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

1. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products.

2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.

C. Related Requirements:

1. Retain subparagraphs below to cross-reference requirements Contractor might expect to find in this Section but are specified in other Sections.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements.

B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect.

C. Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are constructed to verify selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged.

1. Laboratory Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies constructed at testing facility to verify performance characteristics.



2. Integrated Exterior Mockups: Mockups of the exterior envelope erected separately from the building but on Project site, consisting of multiple products, assemblies, and subassemblies.

3. Room Mockups: Mockups of typical interior spaces complete with wall, floor, and ceiling finishes, doors, windows, millwork, casework, specialties, furnishings and equipment, and lighting.

D. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria.

E. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements.

F. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, e.g., plant, mill, factory, or shop.

G. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work.

H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.

I. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.

1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s).

J. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS

A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding.

B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding.


A. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:

1. Specification Section number and title.



2. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections. 3. Description of test and inspection. 4. Identification of applicable standards. 5. Identification of test and inspection methods. 6. Number of tests and inspections required. 7. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections. 8. Requirements for obtaining samples. 9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service.

1.6 CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY-CONTROL PLAN

A. Quality-Control Plan, General: Submit quality-control plan within 10 days of Notice to Proceed, and not less than five days prior to preconstruction conference. Submit in format acceptable to Architect. Identify personnel, procedures, controls, instructions, tests, records, and forms to be used to carry out Contractor's quality-assurance and quality-control responsibilities. Coordinate with Contractor's construction schedule.

B. Submittal Procedure: Describe procedures for ensuring compliance with requirements through review and management of submittal process. Indicate qualifications of personnel responsible for submittal review.

C. Testing and Inspection: In quality-control plan, include a comprehensive schedule of Work requiring testing or inspection, including the following:

1. Contractor-performed tests and inspections including subcontractor-performed tests and inspections. Include required tests and inspections and Contractor-elected tests and inspections.

2. Special inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction and indicated on the "Statement of Special Inspections."

3. Owner-performed tests and inspections indicated in the Contract Documents.

D. Continuous Inspection of Workmanship: Describe process for continuous inspection during construction to identify and correct deficiencies in workmanship in addition to testing and inspection specified. Indicate types of corrective actions to be required to bring work into compliance with standards of workmanship established by Contract requirements and approved mockups.

E. Monitoring and Documentation: Maintain testing and inspection reports including log of approved and rejected results. Include work Architect has indicated as nonconforming or defective. Indicate corrective actions taken to bring nonconforming work into compliance with requirements. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.7 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS

A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other Sections. Include the following:

1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data.



9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the

Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.

B. Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of technical representative making report. 2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and,

if not, what corrective action was taken. 5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies

with requirements. 6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

C. Factory-Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative making report. 2. Statement that equipment complies with requirements. 3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies

with requirements. 4. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.

1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.



E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

F. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.

1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. 2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory

Accreditation Program.

G. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

H. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

I. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the following:

1. Contractor responsibilities include the following:

a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction. b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing results

to prevent delaying the Work. c. Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies, mockups, and laboratory mockups to

adequately demonstrate capability of products to comply with performance requirements. d. Build site-assembled test assemblies and mockups using installers who will perform same

tasks for Project. e. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and methods of

construction indicated for the completed Work.

2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Architect, with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.

1.9 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.

1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform.

2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor.



B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities required to verify that the Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not.

1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not.

2. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality-control services.

3. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed.

4. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.

5. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility.

6. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct.

C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Section 01330 "Submittal Procedures."

D. Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's technical representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical representative's services include participation in preinstallation conferences, examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, observation of Installer activities, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports.

E. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.

F. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.

1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.

2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted.

3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.

4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service through Contractor.

5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work.

6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.

G. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following:

1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.



3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples.

4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site.

H. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.

1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG

A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:

1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.

B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours.

3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.

1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in Section 01700 "Execution Requirements."

B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.

C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services.



REFERENCES 01420 - 1

SECTION 01420 - REFERENCES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.

B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract.

C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed."

D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."

E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work.

F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations.

G. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.

H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.

I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built.

1.3 INDUSTRY STANDARDS

A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.

B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated.


REFERENCES 01420 - 2





EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 - 1

SECTION 01700 - EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Construction layout. 2. Field engineering and surveying. 3. Installation of the Work. 4. Cutting and patching. 5. Progress cleaning. 6. Starting and adjusting. 7. Protection of installed construction. 8. Correction of the Work.


1. Section 01100 "Summary" for limits on use of Project site. 2. Section 01330 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys. 3. Section 01770 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project Record

Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, and final cleaning.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other work.

B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after installation of other work.


A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land-surveying services of the kind indicated.

B. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of construction elements.

1. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Architect of locations and details of cutting and await directions from Architect before proceeding. Shore, brace, and



support structural elements during cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or increase deflection

2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Operational elements include the following:

a. Primary operational systems and equipment. b. Fire separation assemblies. c. Air or smoke barriers. d. Mechanical systems piping and ducts. e. Control systems. f. Electrical wiring systems. g. Operating systems of special construction.

3. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Other construction elements include but are not limited to the following:

a. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. b. Membranes and flashings. c. Equipment supports. d. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment. e. Noise- and vibration-control elements and systems.

4. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.

C. Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding, meet at Project site with parties involved in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.

B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.

1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of in-place materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION



3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, mechanical and electrical systems, and other construction affecting the Work.

1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; underground electrical services, and other utilities.

2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site.

B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.

1. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation.

2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed.

3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings.

D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in Section 01310 "Project Management and Coordination."

E. Surface and Substrate Preparation: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for preparation of substrates to receive subsequent work.

3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT



A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly.

B. General: Engage a land surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices.

1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project.

2. Establish limits on use of Project site. 3. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required

dimensions. 4. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. 5. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses. 6. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable tolerances. 7. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established by

authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations.

D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations.

E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect.

3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING

A. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations.

1. Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written approval of Architect. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control points promptly. Report the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points to Architectbefore proceeding.

2. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base replacements on the original survey control points.

B. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark.

1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents. 2. Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide temporary

reference points sufficient to locate the Work. 3. Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked construction to its

original condition.

3.5 INSTALLATION



A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated.

1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease

of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated. 4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 96 inches (2440 mm) in occupied spaces and 90 inches

(2300 mm) in unoccupied spaces.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated.

C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.

D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.

E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction items on site and placement in permanent locations.

F. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.

G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements.

H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions.

1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect.

2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for

installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.

J. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous.

3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.

1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition.



B. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.

C. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut.

D. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.

E. Adjacent Occupied Areas: Where interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas is unavoidable, coordinate cutting and patching according to requirements in Section 01100 "Summary."

F. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to minimize interruption to occupied areas.

G. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations.

1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.

2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core

drill. 4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Sections where required by

cutting and patching operations. 5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed.

Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.

6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.

H. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections, where applicable.

1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate physical integrity of installation.

2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of patching and refinishing.

a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials.

b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. 3. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a

weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity of building enclosure.

I. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces.



3.7 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.

1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. 2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if the

temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C). 3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark

containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.

a. Use containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored.

4. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where Contractor and other contractors are working concurrently.

B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.

C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work.

1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work

area, as appropriate.

D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.

E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.

F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials down sewers or into waterways. Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 01500 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." and Section 01524 "Construction Waste Management."

H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.

I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects.

J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.

3.8 STARTING AND ADJUSTING



A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.

B. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding.

C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Section 01400 "Quality Requirements."

3.9 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.



CUTTING AND PATCHING 01731 - 1

SECTION 01731 - CUTTING AND PATCHING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and

patching individual parts of the Work. 2. Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for patching fire-rated construction.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other Work.

B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after installation of other Work.


A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio.

B. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.

1. Primary operational systems and equipment. 2. Mechanical systems piping and ducts. 3. Control systems. 4. Electrical wiring systems. 5. Operating systems of special construction in Division 13 Sections.

C. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch miscellaneous elements or related components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that result in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.

1. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. 2. Membranes and flashings. 3. Equipment supports. 4. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment.



D. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.

B. In-Place Materials: Use materials identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.

1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will match the visual and functional performance of in-place materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be performed.

1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with in-place finishes or primers.

2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut.

B. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.

C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas.

D. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to minimize interruption to occupied areas.

3.3 PERFORMANCE

A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.



1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition.

B. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations.

1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.

2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete or Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core

drill. 4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 2 Sections where

required by cutting and patching operations. 5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed.

Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.

6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.

C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections.

1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation.

2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing.

a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials.

b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. 3. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weather-

tight condition.

D. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials.



CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01770 - 1

SECTION 01770 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Substantial Completion procedures. 2. Final completion procedures. 3. Warranties. 4. Final cleaning. 5. Repair of the Work.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01700 "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning of Project site.


A. Product Data: For cleaning agents.

B. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion.

C. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion.

1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in other Sections.

1.5 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES

A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete.

B. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request.

1. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment. 2. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion.



3. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training video recordings specified in Section 01820 "Demonstration and Training."

4. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 5. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction

tools, and similar elements. 6. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 7. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects.

1.6 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES

A. Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, complete the following:

1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Section 01290 "Payment Procedures."

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architectwill either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

1.7 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)

A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.

1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling,

individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. 3. Include the following information at the top of each page:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number.

4. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format:

a. PDF electronic file. Architectwill return annotated file. b. Three paper copies.

1.8 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES

A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty.



B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during construction period by separate agreement with Contractor.

C. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of Project Manual.

1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch (215-by-280-mm) paper.

2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer.

3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.

4. Warranty Electronic File: Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty and bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document.

D. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.

1. Use cleaning products that comply with Green Seal's GS-37, or if GS-37 is not applicable, use products that comply with the California Code of Regulations maximum allowable VOC levels.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FINAL CLEANING

A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.

B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project:

a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances.

b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits.

c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface.



d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. e. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of

stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition.

f. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.

g. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.

h. Remove labels that are not permanent. i. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment. Remove

excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. j. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting

from water exposure.

k. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. l. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.

C. Construction Waste Disposal: Comply with waste disposal requirements in Section 01500 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." and Section 01524 "Construction Waste Management."

3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK

A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of Substantial Completion.

B. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored, provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition.

1. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other damaged transparent materials.

2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration.

a. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and identification.

3. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede operation or reduce longevity.

4. Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures.



SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02411-1

SECTION 02411 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Demolition and removal of selected site elements as indicated on Drawings or as otherwise required for new construction.


1. Section 01100 "Summary" for restrictions on the use of the premises, Owner-occupancy requirements, and phasing requirements.

2. Section 01700 "Execution" for cutting and patching procedures. 3. Section 02230 "Site Clearing" for site clearing and removal of above- and below-grade

improvements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.

B. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated.

C. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.

1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP

A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor.

B. Historic items, relics, antiques, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, and other items of interest or value to Owner that may be encountered during demolition remain the property of Owner.



1. Carefully salvage in a manner to prevent damage and promptly return to Owner or re-install as indicated on Drawings.

1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished. 2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure. 3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials,

demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by selective demolition operations.

5. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection.

1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.

B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical.

1. Before selective demolition, Owner will remove the following items:

a. Any vehicles present in parking areas to be demolished.

C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition.

D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work.

1. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work. 2. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify

Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract.

E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.

F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations.

1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PEFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations.

B. Review record documents of existing construction provided by Owner. Owner does not guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in record documents.

C. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required.

D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.

1. Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Section 01500 "Temporary Facilities and Controls."

B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.

1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building.

2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas.

3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations.

4. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed. 5. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling

specified in Section 01500 "Temporary Facilities and Controls."



3.3 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL

A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows:

1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level.

2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain.

3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces.

4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.

5. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 6. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and

promptly dispose of off-site. 7. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid

free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. 8. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to

impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 9. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. Comply with requirements in

Section 01524 "Construction Waste Management."

B. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.

3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS

A. Asphalt paving and Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, then break up and remove.

3.5 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.

1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces

and areas.



3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.

4. Comply with requirements specified in Section 01524 "Construction Waste Management."

B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.

C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began.


LOAD BEARING MASONRY04 81 00 - 1

SECTION 04 81 00

LOAD BEARING MASONRY

PART 1 - GENERAL


Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and

Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

This Section includes unit masonry assemblies consisting of the following:

Concrete masonry units.

Prefaced concrete masonry units.

Concrete brick.

Mortar and grout.

Reinforcing steel.

Masonry joint reinforcement.

Ties and anchors.

Embedded flashing.

Miscellaneous masonry accessories.

Cavity-wall insulation.

Division 7 Section "Bituminous Dampproofing" for dampproofing applied to cavity face of backup

wythes of cavity walls.

Division 7 Section "Water Repellents" for water repellents applied to unit masonry assemblies.

Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for exposed sheet metal flashing.

Division 7 Section "Firestopping" for firestopping at tops of masonry walls and at openings in

masonry walls.

Division 10 Section "Louvers and Vents" for wall vents (brick vents).

Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following:

Anchor sections of adjustable masonry anchors for connecting to structural frame, installed under

Division 5 Section "Structural Steel."

jessi

Typewritten Text

jessi

Typewritten Text

Addition and Renovations to Office Building for Calcasieu Parish Sheriff's Office Lake Charles, Louisiana


Products installed, but not furnished, under this Section include the following:

Steel lintels and shelf angles for unit masonry, furnished under Division 5 Section "Metal

Fabrications."

Manufactured reglets in masonry joints for metal flashing, furnished under Division 7

Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

Hollow-metal frames in unit masonry openings, furnished under Division 8 Section "Steel Doors

and Frames.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

Provide unit masonry that develops the following net-area compressive strengths (f'm) at 28 days.

Determine compressive strength of masonry from net-area compressive strengths of masonry units

and mortar types according to Tables 1 and 2 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

For Concrete Unit Masonry: f'm = 1500 psi

1.5 SUBMITTALS

Product Data: For each different masonry unit, accessory, and other manufactured product

specified.

Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for the following:

Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars. Comply with

ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." Show elevations of reinforced

walls.

Samples for Initial Selection: For the following:

Unit masonry Samples in small-scale form showing the full range of colors and textures

available for each different exposed masonry unit required.

Colored mortar Samples showing the full range of colors available.

Include test results, measurements, and calculations establishing net-area compressive

strength of masonry units.

Mortar complying with property requirements of ASTM C 270

Grout mixes complying with compressive strength requirements of [ASTM C

476] Include description of type and proportions of grout ingredients.


Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following items

complies with requirements:

Each type of masonry unit required.

Include test data, measurements, and calculations establishing net-area

compressive strength of masonry units.

Each material and grade indicated for reinforcing bars.

Each type and size of joint reinforcement.

Each type and size of anchor, tie, and metal accessory.


Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and

color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, through one source

from a single manufacturer for each product required.

Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including

color for exposed masonry, from one manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one

source or producer for each aggregate.

Preconstruction Testing Service: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to

perform preconstruction testing indicated below. Payment for these services will be made by

Owner. Retesting of materials failing to meet specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's

expense.

Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each concrete masonry unit indicated, per ASTM C

140.

Mortar Test: For mortar properties per ASTM C 270.

Grout Test: For compressive strength per ASTM C 1019.

Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in

Division 1 Section "Project Meetings."

Construction Testing/Inspection Service: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing

agency to perform construction inspections indicated below. Payment for these services will be

made by Owner. Reinspection of materials missing or failing to meet specified requirements shall

be done at Contractor's expense.


Testing Service technician shall be present for a minimum of 2 hours each day load

bearing masonry is being laid. An inspection shall be made of all walls to receive

reinforcement and grout prior to pouring of grout. Any discovered discrepancies with

contract documents shall be reported to the Contractor immediately and to the Architect in

writing within 24 hours. Any discrepancies shall be corrected prior to grouting operations

and reinspected by the testing service technician. Any discrepancies not corrected will

have that portion of wall removed and reconstructed at no additional cost to the Owner.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed

location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become

wet, do not install until they are dry.

Protect Type I concrete masonry units from moisture absorption so that, at the time of installation,

the moisture content is not more than the maximum allowed at the time of delivery.

Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use

cementitious materials that have become damp.

Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and

contamination avoided.

Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for lifting and

emptying into dispensing silo. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated

platforms, under cover, and in a dry location or in a metal dispensing silo with weatherproof cover.

Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt

and oil.

1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS

Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with

waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when

construction is not in progress.

Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least 3

days after building masonry walls or columns.

Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left

exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such

masonry.

Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by coverings spread on

ground and over wall surface.

Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings.

Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral

finishes, from mortar droppings.


Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from splashing

mortar and dirt onto completed masonry.

Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or

frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or

by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in ACI

530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

Hot-Weather Requirements: Protect unit masonry work when temperature and humidity conditions

produce excessive evaporation of water from mortar and grout. Provide artificial shade and wind

breaks and use cooled materials as required.

When ambient temperature exceeds 100 deg F, or 90 deg F with a wind velocity greater than 8

mph, do not spread mortar beds more than 48 inches ahead of masonry. Set masonry units within

one minute of spreading mortar.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows:

Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sash, control joints, headers, bonding, and other

special conditions.

Provide bullnose units for outside corners, unless otherwise indicated.

Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90 and as follows:

Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area

compressive strength of 1900 psi

Weight Classification: Lightweight

Provide Type I, moisture-controlled units.

Size (Width): Manufactured to the following dimensions:

4 inches nominal; 3-5/8 inches actual.




Acceptable Products or Manufacturer

Featherlite or Approved Equal

Burnished (Ground Face) Masonry Units: ASTM C 90 and as follows:


Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive

strength of 1900 psi.

Weight Classification: Lightweight unless otherwise indicated.


Size: Manufactured to dimensions indicated for nondecorative units.

Acceptable Products or Manufacturer

Featherlite

Concrete Building Brick: ASTM C 55 and as follows:

Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive

strength of 2500 psi.

Weight Classification: Lightweight.


Size: Manufactured to the following actual dimensions:

Modular: 3-5/8 inches wide by 2-1/4 inches high by 7-5/8 inches long.

Exposed Faces: Manufacturer's standard color and texture, unless otherwise

indicated.

2.2 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS

Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for

cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar

color indicated.

Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150,

Type I or Type III, and hydrated lime complying with ASTM C 207.

Mortar Cement: ASTM C 1329.

Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91.

For pigmented mortar, use a colored cement formulation as required to produce the color

indicated or, if not indicated, as selected from manufacturer's standard formulations.

For colored-aggregate mortar, use natural color or white cement as necessary to produce

required mortar color.

Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144; except for joints less than 1/4 inch thick, use aggregate

graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 sieve.


White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or ground white stone.

Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.

Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with

ASTM C 494, Type C, and recommended by the manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of

composition indicated.

Water-Repellent Admixture: Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use with

concrete masonry units, containing integral water repellent by same manufacturer.

Water: Potable.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

Colored Portland Cement-Lime Mix:

Eaglebond; Blue Circle Cement.

Color Mortar Blend; Glen-Gery Corporation.

Rainbow Mortamix Custom Color Cement/Lime; Holnam, Inc.

Centurion Colorbond PL; Lafarge Corporation.

Mortar Cement:

Magnolia Superbond Mortar Cement; Blue Circle Cement.

Lafarge Mortar Cement; Lafarge Corporation.

Cold-Weather Admixture:

Accelguard 80; Euclid Chemical Co.

Morseled; W. R. Grace & Co., Construction Products Division.

Trimix-NCA; Sonneborn, Div. of ChemRex, Inc.

Water-Repellent Admixture:

Mortar Tite; Addiment Inc.

Dry-Block Mortar Admixture; W. R. Grace & Co., Construction Products

Division.

Rheopel; Master Builders.

2.3 REINFORCING STEEL

Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M; ASTM A 616/A 616M, including

Supplement 1; or ASTM A 617/A 617M, Grade 60.

Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60; epoxy coated to comply with

ASTM A 775/A 775M.


2.4 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT

General: ASTM A 951 and as follows:

Hot-dip galvanized, carbon-steel wire for both interior and exterior walls.

Wire Size for Side Rods: 0.188-inch diameter.

Wire Size for Cross Rods: 0.188-inch.

Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet, with prefabricated corner and tee units where

indicated.

For single-wythe masonry, provide either ladder or truss type with single pair of side rods

and cross rods spaced not more than 16 inches o.c.

2.5 TIES AND ANCHORS, GENERAL

General: Provide ties and anchors, specified in subsequent articles, made from

materials that comply with this Article, unless otherwise indicated.

Hot-Dip Galvanized Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 153, Class B-2 coating.

Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, commercial-quality, steel sheet zinc coated

by hot-dip process on continuous lines before fabrication.

Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 366/A 366M cold-rolled, carbon-steel

sheet hot-dip galvanized after fabrication to comply with ASTM A 153.

Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304 or 316.

Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

2.6 BENT WIRE TIES

General:

Where coursing between wythes does not align, use adjustable ties composed of 2 parts; 1 with

pintles, the other with eyes; with maximum misalignment of 1-1/4 inches.

Where wythes are of different materials, use adjustable ties composed of 2 parts; 1 with pintles, the

other with eyes; with maximum misalignment of 1-1/4 inches.

Wire: Fabricate from 1/4-inch diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel.

2.7 ADJUSTABLE ANCHORS FOR CONNECTING TO STEEL FRAME

General:

Provide two-piece assemblies that allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and


compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall.

Anchor Section: Crimped 1/4-inch diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire anchor section for

welding to steel.

Tie Section: Triangular-shaped wire tie, sized to extend within 1 inch of masonry face, made from

0.25-inch diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel.

2.8 ANCHORS FOR CONNECTING TO CONCRETE

General:

Provide two-piece assemblies that allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and

compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall.

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS

Anchor Bolts:

Headed Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and,

where indicated, flat washers; hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153, Class C; of

diameter and length indicated and in the following configurations:


Postinstalled Anchors: Anchors as described below, with capability to sustain, without failure,

load imposed within factors of safety indicated, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488,

conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

Type: Chemical anchors.

Corrosion Protection: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633,

Class Fe/Zn 5 (5 microns) for Class SC 1 service condition (mild).

For Postinstalled Anchors in Concrete: Capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to four

times the loads imposed.

For Postinstalled Anchors in Grouted Masonry Units: Capability to sustain, without failure, a load

equal to six times the loads imposed.

2.10 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS

Metal Flashing: Fabricate from the following metal complying with requirements specified in

Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" :

2.11 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES

Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1;

compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from

[neoprene].

Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Material as indicated below, designed to fit standard sash block

and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated.

Styrene-Butadiene-Rubber Compound: ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805.

PVC: ASTM D 2287, Type PVC-65406.

Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D

226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt).

Round Plastic Weep/Vent Tubing: Medium-density polyethylene, 3/8-inch OD by 4 inches

long.

Wicking Material: Cotton or polyester rope, 1/4 to 3/8 inch in diameter, in length required to

produce 2-inch exposure on exterior and 18 inches in cavity between wythes.

Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning masonry

unit cells with loops for holding reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from 0.142-

inch steel wire, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.

Provide units with either two loops or four loops as needed for number of bars indicated.

Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, cavity drainage materials that may

be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:


Reinforcing Bar Positioners:

D/A 811; Dur-O-Wal, Inc.

D/A 816; Dur-O-Wal, Inc.

No. 376 Rebar Positioner; Heckman Building Products, Inc.

#RB Rebar Positioner; Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.

#RB-Twin Rebar Positioner; Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.

Double O-Ring Rebar Positioner; Masonry Reinforcing Corporation of America.

O-Ring Rebar Positioner; Masonry Reinforcing Corporation of America.

2.12 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES

General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders,

water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated.

Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.

Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in the form of a preblended mix.

Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients

before delivering to Project site.

Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Property Specification.

Extended-Life Mortar for Unit Masonry: Mortar complying with ASTM C 1142 may be used

instead of mortar specified above, at Contractor's option.

Limit cementitious materials in mortar for exterior and reinforced masonry to portland cement,

mortar cement, and lime.

For reinforced masonry and where indicated, use Type N.

For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and non-load-bearing walls and parapet walls; for interior

load-bearing walls; for interior non-load-bearing partitions; and for other applications where

another type is not indicated, use Type N.

Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476.

Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will

comply with Table 5 of ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces and

pour height.

Provide grout with a 2500 psi compressive strength and a slump of 8 to 11 inches as

measured according to ASTM C 143.

2.13 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform source quality-control testing

indicated below:


Payment for these services will be made by Owner.

Retesting of materials failing to meet specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's

expense.

Concrete Masonry Unit Tests: For each type of concrete masonry unit indicated, units will be

tested according to ASTM C 140.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation

tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed.

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction to verify actual locations of piping

connections.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to the full thickness

shown. Build single-wythe walls to the actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths

indicated.

Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this Section and in other Sections of

the Specifications.

Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing

equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to the opening.

Cut masonry units with motor-driven saws to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units as

required to provide a continuous pattern and to fit adjoining construction. Where possible, use full-

size units without cutting. Allow units cut with water-cooled saws to dry before placing, unless

wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges

concealed.

3.3 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES

Comply with tolerances in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 and the following:

For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and

control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 20 feet nor 1/2 inch maximum.

For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10


feet, nor 1/2 inch maximum.

For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as exposed lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary

from level by more than 1/4 inch in 20 feet, nor 1/2 inch maximum.

For exposed bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch,

with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch. Do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent

courses by more than 1/8 inch.

For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8

inch. Do not vary from adjacent bed-joint and head-joint thicknesses

by more than 1/8 inch.

3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS

Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint

thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets.

Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other

locations.

Lay out bearing plates for roof and floor joists and roof trusses from joist and truss manufacturer’s

shop drawings. Verify spacing of joists with mechanical for ductwork clearances required prior to

setting bearing plates.

Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Lay exposed masonry in the following bond pattern; do not

use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.

One-half running bond with vertical joint in each course centered on units in courses above and

below or as indicated on Drawings.

Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less

than 2 inches. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with less

than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.

Stopping and Resuming Work: In each course, rack back one-half-unit length for one-half

running bond or one-third-unit length for one-third running bond; do not tooth. Clean exposed

surfaces of set masonry, wet clay masonry units lightly if required, and remove loose masonry

units and mortar before laying fresh masonry.

Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified under this and other Sections

of the Specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.

Fill space between hollow-metal frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless otherwise

indicated.

Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal

lath in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core.

Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams,

lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated.


Build non-load-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid

floor or roof structure above, unless otherwise indicated.

Install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of structure

above.

Wedge non-load-bearing partitions against structure above with small pieces of tile, slate, or metal.

Fill joint with mortar after dead-load deflection of structure above approaches final position.

At fire-rated partitions, install firestopping in joint between top of partition and underside of

structure above to comply with Division 7 Section "Firestopping."

3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING

Lay hollow masonry units as follows:

With full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells.

Bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and in all courses of piers, columns, and

pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be filled with grout.

For starting course on footings where cells are not grouted, spread out full mortar bed, including

areas under cells.

3.6 BONDING OF MULTI WYTHE MASONRY

Use masonry joint reinforcement installed in horizontal mortar joints to bond wythes together.

Corners: Provide interlocking masonry unit bond in each wythe and course at corners, unless

otherwise indicated.

Provide continuity with masonry joint reinforcement at corners by using prefabricated "L" units as

well as masonry bonding.

Intersecting and Abutting Walls: Unless vertical expansion or control joints are shown at juncture,

bond walls together as follows:

Provide continuity with masonry joint reinforcement by using prefabricated "T" units not more

than 16 inches o.c..

3.7 CAVITIES

Keep cavities clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Strike joints

facing cavities flush.

Coat cavity face of backup wythe to comply with Division 7 Section "Bituminous Dampproofing."

3.8 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT


General: Provide continuous masonry joint reinforcement as indicated. Install entire length of

longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2

inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches.

Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches o.c.

Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches above and below wall openings and extending 12

inches beyond openings.

Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by using prefabricated "L" and "T" sections.

Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at returns, offsets,

column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions.

3.9 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL MEMBERS

Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces structural members to

comply with the following:

Anchor masonry to structural members with flexible anchors embedded in masonry joints and

attached to structure.

Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches o.c. vertically and 36 inches o.c.

horizontally.

3.10 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS

General: Install control and expansion joints in unit masonry where indicated. Build-in related

items as masonry progresses. Do not form a continuous span through movement joints unless

provisions are made to prevent in-plane restraint of wall or partition movement.

Form control joints in concrete masonry as follows:

Install preformed control-joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block.

3.11 LINTELS

Install steel lintels where indicated.

3.12 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION

Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores to support reinforced masonry

elements during construction.

Construct formwork to conform to shape, line, and dimensions shown. Make it sufficiently tight to

prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape

during construction and curing of reinforced masonry.

Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to

carry their own weight and other temporary loads that may be placed on them during construction.


Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements of ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 .

Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained sufficient

strength to resist grout pressure. Comply with requirements of for cleanouts and for grout

placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height.

3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform field quality-control testing indicated

below.

Payment for these services will be made by Owner.

Retesting of materials failing to meet specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense.

Testing Frequency: Tests and Evaluations listed in this Article will be performed during

construction for each 5000 sq. ft. of wall area or portion thereof.

Mortar properties will be tested per ASTM C 780.

Grout will be sampled and tested for compressive strength per ASTM C 1019.

Concrete Masonry Unit Tests: For each type of concrete masonry unit indicated, units will be

tested according to ASTM C 140.

Prior to pouring grout in bond beams located at top of roof supporting walls, contractor shall notify

testing agency to witness type and location of reinforcing in bond beam, and insure tie dowels are

in place to tie vertical wall reinforcing to bond beams.

3.14 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING

Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged

or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh

mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.

Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely

fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide

a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application.

3.15 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL

Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property. At completion

of unit masonry work, remove from Project site.

END OF SECTION 04 81 00


Retrofit Roof Framing System 05400 - 1

SECTION 05400 - RETROFIT ROOF FRAMING SYSTEM

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Furnish all labor, materials, services, and equipment necessary to complete all retrofit steel roof framing work shown on the plans and specified herein.

B. Retrofit steel roof framing shall be installed to provide support for new standing seam panels installed over existing roofing panels. Refer to Section 07410 for new standing seam panels.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this section.

B. Related work specified elsewhere:

1. 07410 - Standing Seam Roof Panels.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. American Iron and Steel Construction (AISC): 9th Ed. Manual of Steel Construction.

B. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI): 1996 Ed. Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members.

C. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE): ASCE 7-10 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures.

D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. A36-97 Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.

2. A570-98 Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Carbon, Hot-Rolled, Structural Quality.

3. A611-97 Standard Specification for Structural Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Cold-Rolled.

4. A653-99 Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Cold-Rolled, Structural Quality.

5. A924-99 Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.

E. Light Gage Structural Institute (LGSI): 1990 Ed. Light Gage Structural Steel Framing System Design Handbook.



1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Show roof framing system with accessories in plan, sections and details. Include complete drawing/description of each framing component and fastener, including metal thickness' and finishes, connection details, anchorage details, and special fabrication provisions. Indicate relationships with adjacent and interfacing work. Indicate fastener types and spacing; and provide fastener pullout values.

B. Product Data: Include manufacturer's detailed material and system description, engineering performance data and finish specifications. Indicate fastener types and spacing; and required fastener pullout values.

C. Design Loads: Submit copy of manufacturer's minimum design load calculations according to ASCE 7-10. All loading types shall be considered: dead, live, snow, wind, and seismic. Design load calculations shall be sealed by a registered professional engineer. In no case shall the design loads be taken to be less than those detailed in article 1.9 of this specification.

D. System Certification: Provide statement certifying the proposed system’s capacity to safely resist the calculated design loads. Statement shall be provided by a registered professional engineer and co-signed by an officer of the manufacturing company.

1.5 ALTERNATE MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturer Approval: The materials outlined in this Materials and Methods Specification are the type of materials to be used on this project. This specification is based on the performance characteristics of the systems identified in article 2.1. Alternate manufacturers must gain approval ten (10) business days prior to the bid opening by submitting all items in article 1.5 B. Bidder will not be allowed to change materials after the bid opening date.

B. Alternate Manufacturers: If the bidder wishes to propose an alternate manufacturer and/or material than that specified, the following manufacturer criteria must be submitted. Alternate systems will not be considered for approval unless each of these items has been submitted for review at least 10 business days prior to bid opening:

1. Submit manufacturer’s product literature and each of the submittal items as required in article 1.4 for evaluation of the proposed system. Complete project shop drawings for a similar project may be submitted in lieu of shop drawings for this project.

2. A list of a minimum of five (5) jobs where the proposed alternate material was used under similar conditions. The reference list shall include date of project, size of project, project address, and telephone number of architect/owner contact.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURNACE

A. Engage an experienced metal framing and roofing contractor (erector) to install the framing system who has a minimum of three (3) years experience specializing in the installation of retrofit roof framing systems and standing seam metal roof systems.



B. Contractor must be certified by manufacturer specified as supplier of retrofit roof framing systems and obtain written certification from manufacturer that installer is approved for installation of specified system. If requested, contractor must supply owner with a copy of this certification.

C. Successful contractor is required to maintain a full-time supervisor/foreman who is on the job-site at all times during installation of new roof system. Foreman must have a minimum of three (3) years experience with the installation of system similar to that specified.

D. Successful contractor must obtain all components of each type of specified roof framing system from a single manufacturer. Any secondary products that are required which cannot be supplied by the specified manufacturer must be recommended and approved in writing by primary manufacturer prior to bidding.

E. If required, fabricator/installer shall submit work experience and evidence of adequate financial responsibility. The owners representative reserves the right to inspect fabrication facilities in determining qualifications.


A. Manufacturer's responsibility:

1. Protect components during fabrication and packing from mechanical abuse and corrosion.

2. All components delivered for this project shall be labeled with an identification number or part number which must correspond to component identification shown on project shop drawings.

B. Installer's responsibility:

1. Store materials off ground providing for drainage; under cover providing for air circulation; and protected from wind movement, foreign material contamination, mechanical damage, cement, lime or other corrosive substances.

2. Handle materials to prevent damage. Damaged material shall be rejected and removed from the site.

3. Protect materials from wind-related damages.

4. Inspect materials upon delivery. Reject and remove physically damaged or marred material from project site.

1.8 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Determine that work of other trades will not hamper or conflict with necessary fabrication and storage requirements for roof framing system.



B. Protection:

1. Provide safety plan in accordance with all federal, state, and/or local regulations.

2. Do not overload roof with stored materials.

1.9 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA

A. Uniform Wind Uplift Load Capacity.

1. Installed roof framing system shall withstand negative (uplift) design wind loading pressures provided in section 07410. Notched purlin type systems shall be spaced at the same spacing as the existing metal purlins (approximately sixty (60) inches on center).

2. Capacity to resist positive loads shall be determined by empirical calculations in accordance with AISI. Calculation shall be sealed by a registered professional engineer.

3. Installed roof framing system shall carry negative uniform design loads with a maximum system deflection of L/180 as measured at the midspan of the top member.

C. Uniform Positive Load Capacity.

1. The installed roof framing system shall be capable of resisting the following positive uniform roof loads: Roof Live Load of 20 psf.


3. Installed roof framing system shall carry positive uniform design loads with a maximum system deflection of L/180 as measured at the midspan of the top member.

D. Concentrated Load Capacity.

1. The installed roof framing system shall be capable of resisting a 200 pound concentrated load applied to the top flange at a location mid way between fasteners.

2. Capacity to resist concentrated loads shall be determined by empirical calculations in accordance with AISI. Calculation shall be sealed by a registered professional engineer.

3. Installed roof system shall carry concentrated design loads with a maximum system deflection of L/120 as measured at the midspan of the top member or notched purlin Additionally, the roof framing system shall exhibit no permanent deformation or damage upon removal of the concentrated load.



1.10 WARRANTIES

A. Owner shall receive one (1) warranty from manufacturer of each roof framing system covering all of the following criteria.

1. 10 year material coverage.

2. Warranty shall commence on date of substantial completion.

B. Owner shall receive one (1) warranty from the installer of the roof framing systems covering installation and workmanship for a period of three (3) years from date of substantial completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 NOTCHED PURLIN TYPE FRAMING SYSTEM

A. General.

1. Whenever a particular make of material, trade name and/or manufacturer's name is specified herein, it shall be regarded as being indicative of the minimum standard of quality required. A bidder who proposes to quote on the basis of an alternate material and/or system will only be considered if the proposed alternate is submitted on time and is documented as being equivalent or superior in quality to the specified system. Additionally, all manufacturer and contractor/fabricator guidelines and performance criteria must be met as specified herein.

2. Approved Systems/Manufacturers: a. BASIS OF DESIGN: Roof Hugger, Physical Address: 142-B Whitaker

Rd. Lutz, FL 33549, Mailing Address: P.O. Box 1027 Odessa, FL 33556 Email: [email protected]

B. Materials.



1. Notched purlin framing shall be 16 gauge minimum galvanized steel meeting all requirements of ASTM A653, Grade 33 (minimum) with a hot dipped galvanized coating per ASTM A924, class G90.

C. Characteristics.

1. Notched purlin profile shall be a stiffened zee shape with notched bottom flange and web to match the profile of the existing metal panel. The top flange shall be one and three quarters (1 ¾) inch wide (minimum) to provide for attachment of the standing seam panel clips.

2. The web height of the notched purlin shall be as required for installation over the existing metal panels, and to accomplish the panel lap detail for replacement standing seam roof panels as detailed on drawings.

2.2 FASTENERS

A. Light gauge metal components shall be connected to other light gauge metal components as shown on shop drawings. The typical fastener shall be #12 diameter (minimum) HWH self-drilling, self-tapping sheet metal screws, unless otherwise noted on shop drawings.

B. Connections to structural steel members shall be made with appropriate screw or bolt type fasteners, as indicated on shop drawings. Field welding of light gauge steel framing is not allowed. Concrete and masonry anchors, if required, shall be installed in accordance with the fastener manufacturer’s recommendations.

C. Fasteners which are concealed by the finished metal wall or roof cladding system shall be coated with the manufacturer’s standard corrosion resistant finish, such as zinc plating.

D. Fasteners which are will be exposed after installation of the finished metal wall or roof cladding system shall be series 410 stainless steel with painted heads matching the color of adjacent materials.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Shop fabricate metal framing components to the maximum extent possible, forming metal work with clear, sharp, straight, and uniform bends and rises.

B. All welding, if required, shall be performed under shop conditions. Field welding is not acceptable.



C. Fabricate framing and related sheet metal work in accord with approved shop drawings and applicable standards.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Inspection: Examine the alignment and placement of the building structure and substrate. Correct any objectionable warp, waves or buckles in the substrate before proceeding with installation of the metal roof framing system. The installed roof panels will follow the contour of the framing system and may appear irregular if not corrected.

B. Establish straight side and crosswise benchmarks.

C. Use proper size and length fastener for strength requirements.

D. Rectangular Roofs shall be checked for square and straightness. Gable ends may not be straight; set a true line for the framing system with string line.

E. Measure the roof lengthwise to confirm lengths, overhangs, and coverage of flashings at eaves and ridges. Coordinate framing system layout with standing seam roof panel installation details/shop drawings.

F. Pre-roofing conference: Prior to beginning roofing work, a pre-roofing conference shall be held to review work to be accomplished.

1. Engineer’s representative, owner’s representative, prime contractor and all other subcontractors who have equipment penetrating roof or whose work involves access to roof, and retrofit roof framing system manufacturer's representative shall be present.

3.2 FRAMING SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Notched Purlin Type Framing System.



1. Install notched purlin type framing system over existing standing seam roof panels.

2. Locate new framing directly above existing purlin locations, per manufacturer’s recommendations.

B. All details will be shown on manufacturer’s shop drawings to successful bidder; install framing system in accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturer's product data, within specified erection tolerances.

C. Isolate dissimilar metals and masonry or concrete from metals with bituminous coating. Use gasketed fasteners where required to prevent corrosive action between fastener, substrate, and components.

D. Limit exposed fasteners to extent indicated on shop drawings.

E. Attach framing system to existing roof structure using fasteners of size and spacing as determined by manufacturer's design analysis to resist all specified design loads.

F. Installed system shall be true to line and plane and free of dents, and physical defects.

G. Maximum variation from true planes or lines shall be one quarter (1/4) inch in twenty (20) feet and three eighths (3/8) inch in forty (40) feet of more.

H. Remove damaged work and replace with new, undamaged components.

I. Touch up exposed fasteners using paint furnished by roofing panel manufacturer and matching exposed panel surface finish.

J. Remove all miscellaneous materials and debris from roof.

END OF SECTION


ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100 - 1

SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Wood blocking.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal (38 mm actual) or greater but less than 5 inches nominal (114 mm actual) in least dimension.

B. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following:

1. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire-retardant treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material tested.


A. Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.



1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture

content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber.

3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 15 percent for 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness or less, 19 percent for more than 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER

A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior construction not in contact with the ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with the ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with the ground.

1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. Do not use inorganic boron (SBX) for sill plates.

B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or that does not comply with requirements for untreated material.

C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review.

D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:

1. Wood blocking and similar members used for support of plumbing fixtures or restroom accessories in restrooms, kitchens, janitors closets when installed in EXTERIOR walls.

2. Wood sills, blocking, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER

A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following:

1. Blocking.

B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Standard, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species.

C. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species and grades:

1. Mixed southern pine; No. 3 grade; SPIB.

D. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose.

E. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.



2.4 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture.

1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners of Type 304 stainless steel.

B. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.

C. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1 (ASME B18.2.3.8M).

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, butyl rubber or rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch (0.6 mm).

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated.

B. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated.

C. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim.

1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c.

D. Provide fire blocking in furred spaces, stud spaces, and other concealed cavities as indicated and as follows:

1. Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level, at ceiling, and at not more than 96 inches (2438 mm) o.c. with solid wood blocking or noncombustible materials accurately fitted to close furred spaces.

2. Fire block concealed spaces of wood-framed walls and partitions at each floor level, at ceiling line of top story, and at not more than 96 inches (2438 mm) o.c. Where fire blocking is not inherent in framing system used, provide closely fitted solid wood blocks of same width as framing members and 2-inch nominal- (38-mm actual-) thickness.

3. Fire block concealed spaces between floor sleepers with same material as sleepers to limit concealed spaces to not more than 100 sq. ft. (9.3 sq. m) and to solidly fill space below partitions.

4. Fire block concealed spaces behind combustible cornices and exterior trim at not more than 20 feet (6 m) o.c.

E. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.



F. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber.

1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water. 2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water.

G. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following:

1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code. 2. Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2), "Alternate

Attachments," in ICC's International Residential Code for One- and Two-Family Dwellings.



INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 - 1

SECTION 06402 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Interior standing and running trim. 2. Plastic-laminate cabinets. 3. Plastic-laminate countertops. 4. Other shelving/cabinets as indicated on Drawings.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing woodwork items unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For high-pressure decorative laminate and cabinet hardware and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components.

1. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking

and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 2. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures and other items installed in

architectural woodwork.

C. Samples for Initial Selection:

1. Plastic laminates. 2. PVC edge material. 3. Thermoset decorative panels.


A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.

B. Source Limitations: Engage a qualified woodworking firm to assume undivided responsibility for production of interior architectural woodwork.



C. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements.

D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where fire-retardant materials or products are indicated or otherwise required, provide materials and products with specified fire-test-response characteristics as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by UL, ITS, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency in the form of separable paper label or, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, imprint on surfaces of materials that will be concealed from view after installation.


A. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Project Conditions" Article.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

2. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork without field measurements. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of AWI's quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Wood Products: Comply with the following: 1. Hardboard: AHA A135.4. 2. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD.



3. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2-Exterior Glue.

C. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard finished with thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper complying with LMA SAT-1.

1. Provide PVC or polyester edge banding complying with LMA EDG-1 on components with exposed or semiexposed edges.

D. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or, if not indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard.

1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide high-pressure decorative laminates by one of the following:

a. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc.

2.2 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS

A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated or as otherwise required, use materials complying with requirements in this Article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire-test-response characteristics specified.

1. Use Fire retardant materials wherever any cabinets are within 3 feet of a cooking appliance. 2. Do not use treated materials that do not comply with requirements of referenced woodworking

standard or that are warped, discolored, or otherwise defective. 3. Use fire-retardant-treatment formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise adversely affect

finishes. Do not use colorants to distinguish treated materials from untreated materials. 4. Identify fire-retardant-treated materials with appropriate classification marking of UL, U.S.

Testing, Timber Products Inspection, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Comply with performance requirements of AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood). Use the following treatment type:

1. Organic-resin-based formulation thermally set in wood by kiln drying. 2. Mill lumber before treatment and implement special procedures during treatment and drying

processes that prevent lumber from warping and developing discolorations from drying sticks or other causes, marring, and other defects affecting appearance of treated woodwork.

3. Kiln-dry materials before and after treatment to levels required for untreated materials.

C. Fire-Retardant Particleboard: Panels complying with the following requirements, made from softwood particles and fire-retardant chemicals mixed together at time of panel manufacture to achieve flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 25 or less per ASTM E 84.

1. For panels 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick and less, comply with ANSI A208.1 for Grade M-2 except for the following minimum properties: modulus of rupture, 1600 psi (11 MPa); modulus of elasticity, 300,000 psi (2070 MPa); internal bond, 80 psi (550 kPa); and screw-holding capacity on face and edge, 250 and 225 lbf (1100 and 1000 N), respectively.

2. For panels 13/16 to 1-1/4 inches (20 to 32 mm) thick, comply with ANSI A208.1 for Grade M-1 except for the following minimum properties: modulus of rupture, 1300 psi (9 MPa); modulus of elasticity, 250,000 psi (1720 MPa); linear expansion, 0.50 percent; and screw-holding capacity on face and edge, 250 and 175 lbf (1100 and 780 N), respectively.

3. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Duraflake FR" by Weyerhaeuser.



2.3 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets.

B. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 170 degrees of opening, self-closing. Brushed Chrome finish.

C. Pulls @ cabinet doors & drawers: Back mounted, solid brass, 4-1/4 inches long, 4 inches Center to Center (102 mm) long, 1-1/4 inch projection. 1. Brushed Chrome wire pull as manufactured by “Amerock #BP76312CS26D" or equal.

D. Catches: Push-in magnetic catches, BHMA A156.9, B03131.

E. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04071; with shelf rests, B04081.

F. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9, B05091. 1. Heavy Duty (Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200): Side mounted; full-overtravel-extension

type; zinc-plated steel ball-bearing slides. 2. Box Drawer Slides: Grade 1HD-100; for drawers not more than 6 inches (150 mm) high and 24

inches (600 mm) wide. 3. File Drawer Slides: Grade 1HD-200; for drawers more than 6 inches (150 mm) high or 24 inches

(600 mm) wide.

G. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121.

H. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041.

I. Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: 2-inch (51-mm) OD, black, molded-plastic grommets and matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage.

1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "OG series" by Doug Mockett & Company, Inc.

J. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated.

1. (Brushed) Satin Chrome Finish: BHMA 626 for brass or bronze base; BHMA 652 for steel base.

K. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in BHMA A156.9.


A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.

B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors.

C. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Contact cement.

1. Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive.



2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation areas.

B. Sand fire-retardant-treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before fabrication.

C. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following:

1. Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members 3/4 Inch (19 mm) Thick or Less: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).

2. Edges of Rails and Similar Members More Than 3/4 Inch (19 mm) Thick: 1/8 inch (3 mm). 3. Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members and Rails: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).

D. Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.

1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times woodwork fabrication will be complete.

2. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements indicated on Shop Drawings before disassembling for shipment.

E. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs.

1. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish.

2.6 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH

A. Grade: Custom.

B. Locations: Window sills/trim and Chair Rail where indicated on Drawings.

C. Wood Species and Cut: Red oak, quarter sawn.

1. Provide split species on trim that faces areas with different wood species, matching each face of woodwork to species and cut of finish wood surfaces in areas finished.

2. Provide veneer plywood where indicated. Grain of veneer shall match solid material of same species when adjacent.

D. For rails wider or thicker than available lumber, use veneered construction. Do not glue for width or thickness.

E. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members, except for members with ends exposed in finished work.

1. Assemble moldings in plant to maximum extent possible. Finger Jointing is NOT allowed.



2.7 PLASTIC-LAMINATE CABINETS

A. Grade: Premium.

B. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay.

C. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces including exposed shelves on cabinets with no doors: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with the following requirements:

1. Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: Grade HGS. 2. Postformed Surfaces: Grade HGP. 3. Vertical Surfaces: Grade HGS. 4. Edges: PVC T-mold

a. Color to be as selected by Architect.

D. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces:

1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Thermoset decorative panels.

a. Edges of Plastic-Laminate Shelves: PVC tape, 0.018-inch (0.460-mm) minimum thickness, matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish.

b. For semiexposed backs of panels with exposed plastic-laminate surfaces, provide surface of high-pressure decorative laminate, Grade VGS.

2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Thermoset decorative panels. 3. Drawer Bottoms: Thermoset decorative panels.

E. Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic Laminate Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate, Grade BKL.

F. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: 1. As selected by Architect from laminate manufacturer's full range in the following categories:

a. Solid colors, matte finish. b. Wood grains, matte or textured finish.

G. Provide dust panels of 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments and drawers, unless located directly under tops.

2.8 PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS

A. Grade: Premium.

B. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: HGS.

C. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: 1. As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range in the following categories:

a. Patterns (including HD), matte or textured finish.

D. Grain Direction: Parallel to cabinet fronts.

E. Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces.



F. Core Material at Sinks: Particleboard or Medium-density fiberboard made with exterior glue.

G. Backer Sheet: Provide plastic-laminate backer sheet, Grade BKL, on underside of countertop substrate.

2.9 UTILITY SHELVING

A. Melamine-Faced Particleboard: Particleboard complying with ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, finished on both faces with thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper and complying with requirements of NEMA LD3, Grade VGL, for test methods 3.3, 3.4, 3.6, 3.8, and 3.10.

1. Color: Almond.

B. Utility Shelving: Made from the following material, 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick.

1. Melamine-faced particleboard with applied-PVC front edge.

C. Standards for Adjustable Shelf Brackets: BHMA A156.9, B04102; powder-coat-finished steel.

D. Adjustable Shelf Brackets: BHMA A156.9, B04112; black-anodized aluminum.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas.

B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Grade: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in Part 2 for fabrication of type of woodwork involved.

B. Assemble woodwork and complete fabrication at Project site to comply with requirements for fabrication in Part 2, to extent that it was not completed in the shop.

C. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm).

D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts.

E. Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood: Handle, store, and install fire-retardant-treated wood to comply with chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions, including those for adhesives used to install woodwork.

F. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated.



G. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Do not use pieces less than 96 inches (2400 mm) long, except where shorter single-length pieces are necessary. Scarf running joints and stagger in adjacent and related members.

1. Fill gaps, if any, between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler, sand smooth, and finish same as wood base if finished.

2. Install standing and running trim with no more variation from a straight line than 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm).

H. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.

1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line.

2. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. with appropriate fasteners for substrate or blocking.

I. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other supports into underside of countertop.

1. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line.

2. Secure backsplashes to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. and to walls with adhesive.

3. Caulk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.

B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.

C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.



BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 1

SECTION 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Cavity-wall insulation. 2. Concealed building insulation.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies" for insulation installed in masonry cells. 2. Division 7 Section "Bituminous Dampproofing” for dampproofing applied to exterior face of

interior wythe CMUs. 3. Division 5 Section "Steel Roof Deck" for insulation installed above the roof deck 4. Division 9 Section "Non Load Bearing Steel Framing" for sound attenuation insulation 5. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Insulation."

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: Insulation composed of rock-wool fibers, slag-wool fibers, or glass fibers; produced in boards and blanket with latter formed into batts (flat-cut lengths) or rolls.


A. Plenum Rating: Provide glass-fiber insulation where indicated in ceiling plenums whose test performance is rated as follows for use in plenums as determined by testing identical products per "Erosion Test" and "Mold Growth and Humidity Test" described in UL 181, or on comparable tests from another standard acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Erosion Test Results: Insulation shows no visible evidence of cracking, flaking, peeling, or delamination of interior surface of duct assembly, after testing for 4 hours at 2500-fpm (13-m/s) air velocity.

2. Mold Growth and Humidity Test Results: Insulation shows no evidence of mold growth, delamination, or other deterioration due to the effects of high humidity, after inoculation with Chaetomium globosium on all surfaces and storing for 60 days at 100 percent relative humidity in the dark.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.



B. Samples for Verification: Full-size units for each type of exposed insulation indicated.

C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency for insulation products.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of building insulation through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84. 2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119. 3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136.


A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.

B. Protect plastic insulation as follows:

1. Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to Project site

before installation time. 3. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of

construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.

2.2 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION

A. Manufacturers:

1. CertainTeed Corporation. 2. Johns Manville. 3. Knauf Fiber Glass.



4. Owens Corning.

B. Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.

C. Where glass-fiber blanket insulation is indicated by the following thicknesses, provide blankets in batt or roll form with thermal resistances indicated:

1. 9-1/2 inches thick with a thermal resistance of (R-30).

2.3 AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS

A. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation and substrates. 1. Verify compatibility of adhesive and insulation board with bituminous damp-proofing on concrete

masonry units prior to installing insulation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements of Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and for other conditions affecting performance.

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation or vapor retarders, including removing projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders or of interfering with insulation attachment.


A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application indicated.

B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any time to ice, rain, and snow.

C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.

D. Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located within insulated exterior walls, coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation encapsulates piping.

E. For preformed insulating units, provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.



3.4 INSTALLATION OF CAVITY-WALL INSULATION

A. On units of foam-plastic board insulation, install pads of adhesive spaced approximately 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. both ways on inside face, and as recommended by manufacturer. Fit courses of insulation between wall ties and other obstructions, with edges butted tightly in both directions. Press units firmly against inside substrates indicated.

1. Supplement adhesive attachment of insulation by securing boards with two-piece wall ties designed for this purpose and specified in Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies."

3.5 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION

A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.

B. Seal joints between foam-plastic insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation manufacturer.

C. Install mineral-fiber insulation in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements:

1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends.

2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.

3. Maintain 3-inch (76-mm) clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.


VAPOR RETARDER 072600 - 1

SECTION 072600 – VAPOR RETARDERS

A. PART I – GENERAL

1-1 SUMMARY A. Products Supplied Under This Section

1. Vapor Retarder, Seam Tape & Accessories for installation under concrete slabs B. Related Sections

1. Section 03300 Cast-in-place Concrete 2. Section 07260 Vapor Retarder

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM E 1745-09 Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders used

in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs. 2. ASTM E 154-99 (2005) Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Retarders used in

Contact with Earth under Concrete Slabs, on Walls, or as Ground Cover. 3. ASTM E 96-05 Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. 4. ASTM E 1643-09 Selection, Design, Installation, and Inspection of Water Vapor

Retarders used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs. 5. ASTM F 1249 Test Method for Water Vapor Transmission Rate Through Plastic Film

and Sheeting Using a Modulated Infrared Sensor. 6. ASTM D 903 Standard Test Method for Peel or Stripping Strength of Adhesive Bonds

B. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 1. ACI 302.2R-06 Guide for Concrete Slabs that Receive Moisture-Sensitive

Flooring Materials. Vapor Retarder component is not less than 10 mils thick.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Quality Control / Assurance 1. Summary of test results as per paragraph 8.3 of ASTM E 1745. 2. Manufacturer’s samples, literature. 3. Manufacturer’s installation instructions for placement, seaming and penetration repair instructions.

B. PART II – PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS A. Vapor Retarder (Performance Based Specification)

1. Vapor Retarder membrane must have the following properties: a. Minimum 10 mil thick plastic geo-membrane b. Manufactured with prime high-grade 100% virgin polyolefin resins c. Water Vapor Retarder ASTM E 1745 Meets Class A (Plastics) d. Water Vapor Permeance ASTM E 96 0.002 perms (g/hr/m2) e. Water Vapor Permeance ASTM E 96 0.007 perms (US) or lower f. Puncture Resistance ASTM E 1745 Class A minimum 3960 grams g. Tensile Strength ASTM E 1745 Class A minimum 83.75 lbf / in

Front Desk HP

Typewritten Text

Front Desk HP

Typewritten Text

Addition and Renovations to Office Building for Calcasieu Parish Sheriff's Office Lake Charles, Louisiana

VAPOR RETARDER 072600 - 2

2. Pre-Approved Manufacturers a. Barrier-Bac VB-350 (16 mil) by Inteplast Group, 877-535-0555, www.BarrierBac.com b. Vapor Block 15 (mil) manufactured by Raven Industries, 800-635-3456,

www.ravenind.com c. Griffolyn 15 mil manufactured by Reef Industries, 800-231-6074,

www.reefindustries.com d. Moistop Ultra 15 (mil) manufactured by Fortifiber, 800-773-4777,

www.fortifiber.com e. Stego Wrap Vapor Barrier (15-mil) by Stego Industries LLC., (877)

464-7834 www.stegoindustries.com f. Other materials which meet performance characteristics listed

above may be submitted for prior approval a minimum of 7 days prior to the date by which bids must be submitted.

2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Seam Tape

1. 1. Tape manufactured and/or supplied by the approved manufacturers listed in section 2.1 Materials (B.): a. Water Vapor Permeance ASTM E 96B <0.01 Perms

B. Pipe Boots 1. Construct Pipe Boots from Vapor Retarder material and pressure sensitive tape

per manufacturer’s instructions. B. Pipe Boots

1. Mastic must have the following qualities: a. Water Vapor Transmission ASTM E 96 — 0.3 perms or lower

C. PART III – EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION A. Ensure that base material is approved by Architect or Geotechnical Engineer

1. Level and compact base material.

3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install vapor retarder in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and

ASTM E 1643: 1. Unroll vapor retarder with the longest dimension parallel with the direction of

the concrete placement. 2. Lap vapor retarder over footings and/or seal to foundation walls. 3. Overlap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer’s tape. 4. Seal all penetrations (including pipes) per manufacturer’s instructions. 5. No penetration of the vapor retarder is allowed except for reinforcing steel and

permanent utilities. 6. Repair damaged areas by cutting patches of vapor retarder, overlapping damaged

area 6 inches and taping all sides with tape.

END OF SECTION

http://www.barrierbac.com/

http://www.ravenind.com/

http://www.reefindustries.com/

http://www.fortifiber.com/

http://www.stegoindustries.com/


STANDING SEAM ROOF PANELS 07410 - 1

SECTION 07410 - STANDING SEAM ROOF PANELS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work described in this section includes pre-formed metal roofing system complete with clips,

perimeter and penetration flashing, and closures. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Supplementary Conditions

and Division 1 Specification Sections apply to this section. B. Related work: 1. Specification Section 05400 - Retrofit roof framing system. 1.3 REFERENCES A. American Architectural Manufacturer Association (AAMA): 1. AAMA 501.1 Standard Test Method for Metal Curtain Walls for Water Penetration

using Dynamic Pressure. B. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI): 1. 1996 Ed. Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members. C. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE): 1. ASCE 7-10 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures. D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. A792-96 Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by

the Hot-Dip Process. 2. A875-99 Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-5% Aluminum Alloy-Coated by the

Hot Dip Process. 3. A653-96 Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip

Process. 4. B209-96 Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. 5. D1056-91 Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or Expanded

Rubber. 6. D3575-84 Test Methods for Flexible Cellular Materials made from Olefin

Polymers. 7. E283-93 Standard Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior

Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen.



8. E331-86 Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows,

Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. 9. E1592-95 Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Sheet Metal Roof

and Siding Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. 10. E1646-95 Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Metal Roof

Panel Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. 11. E1680-95 Standard Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Metal

Roof Panel Systems. E. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA): 1. 1993 Ed. Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, 5th edition. F. Underwriters' Laboratories (UL): 1. UL-263 Fire Tests of Building Constructions and Materials. 2. UL-580 Tests for Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies. 3. UL-790 Tests for Fire Resistance of Roof Covering Materials.

G. Factory Mutual Approvals (FM): 1. FM 4471, August 1995: Approval Standard for Class I roof panels.

1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Any material submitted as equal to the specified material must be accompanied by a copy of the

manufacturer's standard specification section. That specification section shall be signed and sealed by a professional engineer licensed in the state in which the installation is to take place. Substitution requests containing specifications without licensed engineer certification shall be rejected for non-conformance.

B. Shop Drawings 1. Show roofing system with flashings and accessories in plan, sections and details.

Include metal thickness' and finishes, panel lengths, joining details, anchorage details, flashings and special fabrication provisions for termination and penetrations; thermal expansion provisions and special supports.

2. Indicate relationships with adjacent and interfacing work. Indicate fastener types and

spacing; and provide fastener pullout values. 3. Shop drawings must be completed by the metal panel manufacturer's engineering

department. C. Product Data: Include manufacturer's detailed material and system description, sealant and closure

installation instructions, engineering performance data and finish specifications. Indicate fastener types and spacing; and required fastener pullout values.

D. Design Loads: Submit copy of manufacturer's minimum design load calculations according to

ASCE 7-10, Chapter 30 for Components and Cladding, sealed by a registered professional



engineer employed by the system manufacturer as a full-time staff engineer. In no case shall the design loads be taken to be less than those detailed in article 1.9 of this specification.

E. Design Test Reports: Provide certified test reports from an independent testing laboratory that bear

the seal of a registered professional engineer to show compliance with the performance criteria specified in article 1.9. Each of the following test reports must be submitted:

1. ASTM E1592-95: Test results must clearly demonstrate compliance with the following

requirements: a. The ultimate test failure load shall be reduced by the safety factor specified in

article 1.9 to determine the allowable working load for the panel system. b. The proposed system has been tested to insure that the allowable working load

of the panel system meets or exceeds the specified negative wind uplift pressures listed in article 1.9 of this specification for all roof zones.

c. The test results are applicable for the panel material, grade, thickness, width, and

profile specified. Results are not applicable for systems that are thinner, wider, lower grade, or different material/profile than the system which was tested.

d. The results must clearly show that the allowable clip spacing meets or exceeds

the requirements specified in article 3.3 C for all roof areas. Clip spacing shall not be reduced for any roof zone from that which is specified.

2. ASTM E283-93 and E331-86: Test results must clearly demonstrate compliance with the

performance requirements specified in article 1.9. 3. ASTM E1646-95 and E1680-95: Test results must clearly demonstrate compliance with

the performance requirements specified in article 1.9. Results are not applicable for systems that are thinner, wider, lower grade, or different material/profile than the system which was tested. The differential test pressures must be equal to those specified in article 1.9.

F. Samples: Provide full scale samples of the following materials and system components. Samples

shall be of identical material type, thickness, panel width, and material grade/alloy/temper as the system specified for this project. Except for item 2, samples may be of any of the manufacturer’s standard colors.

1. Submit a twelve (12) inch long by actual width sample of panel showing seam profile and

stiffening mesas across the flat pan of the panel. Also include separate snap-on cap with factory applied hot melt sealant beads.

2. Provide a six by six (6 x 6) inch sample of the color selected for this project. The sample

shall be the actual specified coating system on a metal substrate. 3. Provide samples of actual system components, including: each type of anchor/clip

required, head closure assembly, roll goods (if specified), bearing plates and/or framing (if specified).

1.5 ALTERNATE MANUFACTURERS A. Alternate Manufacturers: The following manufacturer criteria must be submitted. Alternate

systems will not be considered for approval unless each of these items has been submitted for review at least 10 business days prior to bid opening:



1. Submit each item listed in article 1.4 (A through E) for evaluation of the proposed system.

2. Tests shall have been made for identical systems within the ranges of specified

performance criteria. 3. Empirical calculations for roof performance shall only be acceptable for positive loads. 4. A list of a minimum of five (5) jobs where the proposed alternate material was used

under similar conditions. The reference list shall include date of project, size of project, project address, and telephone number of architect/owner contact.

6. A written statement from the manufacturer stating that they will provide the building

owner with inspections for a minimum of three days per week by an experienced, full time employee of the company.

7. A written statement from a corporate officer of the manufacturing company stating that

he or she has reviewed the specifications and confirms that the proposed system meets or exceeds all performance requirements listed as well as meets the panel size, gauge, weight, clip design, sealant design, uplift pressures and height of the vertical seam

8. A copy of manufacturer's specified warranty. Warranty must include coverage for all

trim, flashing, and penetrations associated with this roof. 9. Proof that the manufacturer has been in business for a minimum number of years equal to

the warranty period required for this project. B. Site Formed Panels: Panels in excess of shippable length shall be formed on-site. Site formed

panels shall meet each of the following requirements: 1. Panels shall be formed on heavy duty factory type roll-formers. Roll-formers shall

gradually form the panel profile utilizing no fewer than twelve (12) forming stations to improve quality and minimize oil canning.

2. All tooling shall be polished and tempered to a minimum hardness of Rockwell C - 52.

Tooling shall be maintained clean and in good working condition. Tooling repairs or modifications made by means of welding, sawing, grinding or the like are unacceptable, as they may contribute to poor quality, aesthetics, and performance of the end product.

3. Panels shall be of identical profile and characteristics as factory formed panels and

specimens used as the basis of performance tests. 4. Sealant shall be factory applied in a separate factory formed snap on cap. Site/field

applied seam sealant is unacceptable. Seam caps may be shipped in forty-five (45’) or less length and lap spliced over full length panels in accordance with manufacturer’s system details.

5. Site roll-forming equipment shall be operated by a trained full time experienced

technician. The installer must provide additional personnel to handle raw materials and finished product as necessary.

6. Roll-forming equipment shall be set up and utilized only in designated area on project

site approved by the Owner and the Architect. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE



A. Manufacturer Approval: This specification is based on the performance characteristics of the system identified in article 2.1. Alternate manufacturers must gain approval from the Prime Design Professional 10 business days prior to the bid opening by submitting all items required in article 1.5 B. Bidder will not be allowed to change materials after the bid opening date. Failure of a panel system to meet all requirements of this specification will result in forfeiture of the bid award.

B. Engage an experienced metal roofing contractor (erector) to install standing seam system who has

a minimum of three (3) years experience specializing in the installation of structural standing seam metal roof systems.

C. Contractor must be certified by manufacturer specified as supplier of structural standing seam

system and obtain written certification from manufacturer that installer is approved for installation of specified system. If requested, contractor must supply owner with a copy of this certification.

D. Successful contractor is required to maintain a full-time supervisor/foreman who is on the job-site

at all times during installation of new roof system. Foreman must have a minimum of five (5) years experience with the installation of system similar to that specified.

E. If required, fabricator/installer shall submit work experience and evidence of adequate financial

responsibility. The owner’s representative reserves the right to inspect fabrication facilities in determining qualifications.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Manufacturer's responsibility: 1. Protect components during fabrication and packing from mechanical abuse, stains,

discoloration, and corrosion. 2. Provide protective interleaving between contact areas of exposed surfaces to prevent

abrasion during shipment, storage, and handling. B. Installer's responsibility: 1. Store materials off ground providing for drainage; under cover providing for air

circulation; and protected from wind movement, foreign material contamination, mechanical damage, cement, lime or other corrosive substances.

2. Handle materials to prevent damage to surfaces, edges and ends of roofing sheets and

sheet metal items. Damaged material shall be rejected and removed from the site. 3. Protect panels from wind-related damages. 4. Inspect materials upon delivery. Reject and remove physically damaged or marred

material from project site. 5. Protective film on roof panels must be removed in a period of time which allows for

FULL removal of all film. If any film residue remains on panel(s), it is the installer’s responsibility to properly clean and remove residue. Note: Cure time may vary based on environmental conditions.

1.8 JOB CONDITIONS



A. Determine that work of other trades will not hamper or conflict with necessary fabrication and storage requirements for pre-formed metal roofing system.

B. Protection: 1. Provide protection or avoid traffic on completed roof surfaces. 2. Do not overload roof with stored materials. 3. Support no roof-mounted equipment directly on roofing system.

C. Ascertain that work of other trades which penetrates the roof or is to be made watertight by the roof is in place and approved prior to installation of roofing.

D. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when weather conditions permit metal panels to

be installed according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements. 1.9 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA

A. General Performance: Metal roof panels shall comply with performance requirements without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.

B. Delegated Design: Design metal roof panel assembly, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

C. Thermal Expansion and Contraction. 1. Completed metal roofing and flashing system shall be capable of withstanding expansion

and contraction of components caused by changes in temperature without buckling, producing excess stress on structure, anchors or fasteners, or reducing performance ability.

2. The design temperature differential shall be not less than 200 degrees F. 3. Interface between panel and clip shall provide for unlimited thermal movement in each

direction along the longitudinal direction. 4. Location of metal roofing rigid connector shall be at the ridge end of the panel. Panel

detail @ eave is to be expanding type unless otherwise approved by the Project Architect. Metal ridge connector may require design as per job conditions by specified manufacturer.

D. Uniform Wind Uplift Load Capacity (Roof Area)

1. Installed roof system shall withstand negative (uplift) design wind loading pressures complying with the following criteria. Anchor clips shall be installed exactly as spacing given in article 3.3 C.

a. Design Code: ASCE 7-10, Chapter 30 for Components and Cladding. b. Safety Factor: 1.67 after any load reduction or material stress increase. c. Category III Building with an Importance Factor of 1.00. d. Wind Speed: 141 mph.

e. Ultimate Pullout Value: 779 pounds per each of the two fasteners holding the panel anchor to the roof decking or framing system.

f. Exposure Category: C. g. Design Roof Height: 22.00 feet.



h. Minimum Building Width: 67.00 feet. i. Roof Pitch: 1.0 inch per foot. j. Enclosed Building in Windborne debris region Roof Area Design Uplift Pressure: Zone 1 - Field of roof 28.2 psf Zone 2 - Eaves and rakes 47.3 psf Zone 3 - Corners 71.2 psf

2. Capacity shall be determined using pleated airbag method in accordance with ASTM E 1592, testing of sheet metal roof panels. Allowable safe working loads shall be determined by dividing the ultimate test load by the safety factor specified above. In order to comply with the building code, panel system must be tested to withstand these listed pressures at clip spacings no closer than those listed in article 3.3 C.

E. Uniform Positive Load Capacity.


2. Installed roof system shall carry positive uniform design loads with a maximum

system deflection of L/180 as measured at the rib (web) of the panel. F. ASTM E283: Static pressure air infiltration (doors, windows, curtain walls): Pressure Leakage Rate 1.57 PSF 0.0007 cfm/sq.ft. 6.24 PSF 0.0002 cfm/sq.ft. 20.0 PSF 0.0036 cfm/sq.ft. G. ASTM E331: Static pressure water infiltration (doors, windows, curtain walls): Pressure Result 5 Gal/Hr Per S.F. and Static No Leakage Pressure of 20.0 Psf for 15 minutes H. ASTM E1680: Static pressure air infiltration (roof panels): Pressure Leakage Rate 1.57 PSF 0.0012 cfm/sq.ft. 6.24 PSF 0.0001 cfm/sq.ft. 20.0 PSF 0.0011 cfm/sq.ft. I. ASTM E1646: Static pressure water infiltration (roof panels): Pressure Result 5 Gal/Hr Per S.F. and Static No Leakage Pressure Of 20.0 Psf for 15 minutes



J. Water penetration (dynamic pressure): No water penetration, other than condensation, when

exposed to dynamic rain and 70 mph wind velocities for not less than five minutes duration, when tested in accord with principles of AAMA 501.1.

K. Capacities for gauge, span or loading other than those tested may be determined by interpolation

of test results within the range of test data. Extrapolation for conditions outside test range are not acceptable.

L. FMG Listing: Provide metal roof panels and component materials that comply with requirements

in FMG 4471 as part of a panel roofing system and that are listed in FMG's "Approval Guide" for Class 1 or noncombustible construction, as applicable.

M. NOTE: If Roof Manufacturer’s Design requires roof panel clip spacing to be closer than the spacing of the existing building’s roof purlins, then the Contractor shall be responsible for the design and installation of additional purlins or continuous clips required to meet wind loading requirements. Contractor shall provide shop drawings for any additional purlins added to Architect for review.

1.10 WARRANTIES A. Owner shall receive one (1) warranty from manufacturer of roof panels covering all of the

following criteria. Multiple warranties are not acceptable. 1. Manufacturer’s 20 year watertight warranty, including coverage for all trim, flashings,

and penetrations associated with the standing seam roof area. 2. Warranty shall commence on date of substantial completion as agreed by contract. 4. Installer shall provide manufacturer with 2 year warranty covering roofing system

installation and watertightness. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 STANDING SEAM ROOFING SYSTEM A. General. 1. Whenever a particular make of material, trade name and/or manufacturer's name is

specified herein, it shall be regarded as being indicative of the minimum standard of quality required. A bidder who proposes to quote on the basis of an alternate material and/or system will only be considered if the proposed alternate is submitted on time and is documented as being equivalent or superior in quality to the specified system in accordance with article 1.5. Additionally, all manufacturer and contractor/fabricator guidelines and performance criteria must be met as specified in article 1.4, 1.5, 1.6, and 1.9.

2. Basis of Design: Product names for the metal roof panel system and waterproofing

materials used in this section shall be based on performance characteristics of the, Series 300 System, Innovative Metals Company, Inc. (Imetco), Tucker, Georgia, telephone 1-800-646-3826, and shall form the basis of the contract documents. Any proposed alternate systems must meet or exceed the following listed characteristics and be submitted for approval 10 days prior to bid opening. Additionally, all performance requirements listed in “Design Criteria” (article 1.9) and Warranty Criteria (article 1.10)



must be met and submitted as well as all items listed in the Manufacturer’s Qualifications (article 1.5).

a. Approved Alternate Panel: ZIP-RIB by Merchant & Evans. B. Materials.

1. Panel material: 22 ga., Galvalume steel, type AZ-55, smooth as per ASTM A792-96 with a 2-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

2. Flashing and flat stock material: Fabricate in profiles indicated on drawings of same

material, thickness, and finish as roof system, unless indicated otherwise. C. Characteristics: 1. Provide the same panel profile from a single manufacturer for all standing seam roof

areas. 2. Provide standing seam panels incorporating mechanically interlocked, concealed anchor

clips allowing unlimited thermal movement, and of configuration which will prevent entrance or passage of water.

a. Panel/Cap configuration must have a total of four (4) layers of steel surrounding

anchor clip for prevention of water infiltration and increased system strength designed to limit potential for panel blow-off.

b. Profile of panel shall have mesa's every two (2) inches on center continuous

throughout panel which are a minimum of one point five (1.5) inches wide. c. Exposed fasteners, screws and/or roof mastic are unacceptable and will be

rejected. System configuration only allows for exposed fasteners at panel overlap (if required) and trim details (as per manufacturer's guidelines).

d. Provide panels in continuous lengths from ridge to eave with no overlaps. e. Panels lengths which exceed maximum shipping lengths shall be field rolled on

equipment owned by the panel manufacturer. 3 Seam must be two and three-eights (2-3/8) inches minimum height for added upward

pressures and aesthetic appeal. Seam shall have continuous anchor reveals to allow anchor clips to resist positive and negative loading and allow unlimited expansion and contraction of panels due to thermal changes. Integral (not mechanically sealed) seams are unacceptable.

4. Concealed Standard Anchor Clips: Clips must be sixteen (16) gauge Galvalume steel,

ONE (1) piece clip with projecting legs for additional panel alignment and provision for unlimited thermal movement in each direction along the longitudinal dimension.

a. Two-piece (2) clips are unacceptable. Note: Merchant and Evans’ 2-piece zip-rib clip is acceptable for zip-rib system

only.



b. Sealant applied in panel cap must be isolated from clip to insure that no sealant damage occurs from the movement of the panel during expansion and contraction.

c. Clip must maintain a clearance of a minimum of three-eighths (3/8) inches

between panel and substrate for proper ventilation to help prevent condensation on underside of panel and eliminate the contact of panel fastener head to panel.

5. Concealed I-SPAN Anchors: Provide anchors of continuous lengths with a zero point

zero six two (0.062) inches, minimum thickness, of extruded aluminum, alloy 6005-T5, with projecting legs for additional panel alignment and provision for unlimited thermal movement in each direction along the longitudinal dimension.

a. Anchor shall provide non-penetrating, concealed engagement at the panel seams

in a manner similar to the standard anchor clips. b. Sealant applied in panel cap must be isolated from anchor to insure that no

sealant damage occurs from the movement of the panel during expansion and contraction.

c. Anchor must maintain a clearance of a minimum of three-eights (3/8) inches

between panel and substrate for proper ventilation to help prevent condensation on underside of panel and eliminate the contact of panel fastener head to panel.

d. I-SPAN Anchor shall be used in lieu of standard anchor clips for the required

roof zones. Zone 3 requires I-SPAN continuous clips. . 6. Seam cap: Snap-on cap shall be a minimum of 1" wide "T" shaped of continuous length

up to forty-five (45) feet according to job conditions and field seamed by means of manufacturer's standard seaming machine.

a. Cap shall be designed to receive two (2) beads of continuous hot applied

gasketing sealant which will be applied independent of anchor clip to allow unlimited thermal movement of panel without damage to cap sealant.

b. Sealant shall be a SIS (Styrene-Isoprene-Styrene) block copolymer type

thermoplastic rubber adhesive, non-fatigue water barrier. 7. Standing Seam Panel Width: 16" (Imetco Series 300 panel) based on existing, nominal

5'-0" roof purlin spacing. Panel width indicated is minimum. Alternative manufacturer’s panels could be required to be less than 16” based on the Design and wind pressures.

8. Stiffening ribs: Located in flat of panel to minimize oil canning and telegraphing of

structural members. 9. Replaceability: Panels shall be of a symmetrical design with snap on cap configuration

such that individual panels may be removable for replacement without removing adjacent panels.

10. Panel ends shall be panned at ridge, headwall, and hip conditions, or where applicable. 11. Panel length: Full length without joints, including bends. D. Accessories 1. Gable anchor clips for:



a. Standing Seam style. b. Galvalume steel, type AZ-55, minimum thickness 16 gauge 2. Fasteners: a. Concealed fasteners: Corrosion resistant steel fasteners (zinc plated, stainless

steel or equal) designed to meet structural loading requirements. Provide #14 as the minimum fastener size.

b. Exposed fasteners: Series 410 stainless steel fasteners or one-eighth (1/8) inch

diameter stainless steel waterproof rivets. All exposed fasteners shall be factory painted to match the color of the standing seam panels.

3. Closures: Factory precut closed cell foam meeting ASTM D1056 or ASTM D3575,

enclosed in metal channel matching panels when used at hip, ridge, rake, and jamb. 4. Provide all miscellaneous accessories for complete installation.

2.2 PANEL MATERIALS

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Restricted flatness steel sheet metallic coated by the hot-dip process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M.

1. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M, structural quality. 2. Surface: Smooth, flat finish. 3. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish:

a. 2-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

4. Concealed Finish: Apply pretreatment and manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil (0.013 mm).

2.3 ACCESSORY PRODUCTS A. Sealant: 1. Acceptable product: a. Concealed Application: Non-curing butyl sealant or equal. b. Exposed Application: Garland SS sealant or equal.



2. Colors: As selected by architect from sealant manufacturer's standard selection.

2.4 FABRICATION A. Shop fabricate metal roofing and flashing components to the maximum extent possible, forming

metal work with clear, sharp, straight, and uniform bends and rises. Hem exposed edges of flashings.

B. Form flashing components from full single width sheet in minimum ten (10'-0") foot lengths.

Provide mitered corners, joined using closed end pop rivets and joint sealant. C. Fabricate roofing and related sheet metal work in accord with approved shop drawings and

applicable standards. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Inspection: Examine the alignment and placement of the building structure and substrate. Correct

any objectionable warp, waves or buckles in the substrate before proceeding with installation of the pre-formed metal roofing. The installed roof panels will follow the contour of the structure and may appear irregular if not corrected.

B. Establish straight side and crosswise benchmarks. C. Use proper size and length fastener for strength requirements. Approximately five-sixteenths

(5/16) inch, is allowable for maximum fastener head size beneath the panel. D. Rectangular shaped roofs shall be checked for square and straightness. Gable ends may require

setting a true line for the gable clips and setting with string line. E. Measure the roof lengthwise to confirm panel lengths, overhangs, coverage of flashings at eaves

and ridges and verify clearances for thermal movement. F. Pre-roofing conference: 1. Prior to beginning metal roofing work, a pre-roofing conference shall be held to review

work to be accomplished. 2. Architect, contractor, metal roofing subcontractor, metal roofing system manufacturer's

representative and all other subcontractors who have equipment penetrating roof or whose work involves access to roof shall be present.

3.2 METAL FABRICATION AND EQUIPMENT A. Mechanical panel fabrication for curving panels shall be operated by a trained full time

experienced technician. B. Mechanical equipment shall have a least sixteen (16) rolling stations and provide a product

identical to factory manufactured product. 3.3 ROOFING AND FLASHING INSTALLATION



A. Comply with all details and install roofing materials and flashings in accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturer's product data, within specified erection tolerances.

B. Prepare roof for the installation of standing seam panels, including: 1. Install “roof hugger” sub-purlin system in accordance with bid documents and

manufacturer’s instructions to meet specified wind loading requirements. 2. Install all decking, framing, and/or furring members as indicated in this specification and

bid documents. C. Clip Spacing (Based on Imetco panel specified. Alternate manufacturers spacing will vary). Main Roof Area:

1. Clip spacing must be 5’-0” for Zone 1 (field) 2. Clip spacing must be 5’-0” for Zone 2 (eave, ridge, hip, and rake). 3. Clip spacing must be 4’-4” for Zone 3 (corners). Continuous clip required for

5’-0” purlin spacing. 4. Clip spacing for Zones 2 & 3 must extend 6’-9” onto the roof area.

D. Installation of Roof Panels: Roof panels can be installed by starting from either end and working towards the opposite end. Due to the symmetrical design of the specified panel system, it is also acceptable to start from the middle of the roof and work toward each end.

1. A stainless steel pop rivet shall be secured through the anchor reveal of the panel leg and

extend into the arms of the panel clip located at the ridge of the system. Provide at each arm of the clip along the ridge. The panel is then anchored at both sides of the clip.

a. Be sure to capture all drilling debris during this operation with a rag or cloth

placed on the panels at the drilling operation. b. Panels are not securely attached to the roof until fixed to the anchor clip. To

avoid damage and injury, all panels shall be fixed to the anchor clip immediately as they are installed.

2. The seam caps are shipped with two (2) beads of factory applied hot melt sealant located

inside the caps. To install the caps, hook one side of the cap over the panel edge and rotate over the opposite panel leg. For ease of installation, start at one end of the panel and work toward the opposite end.

3. A hand crimping tool is used to crimp the cap around the top of two adjacent panels 4. Caps shall then be permanently seamed with manufacturer’s mechanical seamer. 5. At the end of each day’s work, seam caps shall be mechanically seamed or hand crimped

(crimp 4 inches every 8 feet) to reduce the possibility of wind damage prior to completion of the project.

6. Un-installed panels which are temporarily stored on the ground or roof shall be secured in

place at the end of each day’s work to prevent possible damage or injury. E. Isolate dissimilar metals and masonry or concrete from metals with bituminous coating. Use

gasketed fasteners where required to prevent corrosive action between fastener, substrate, and panels.

F. Limit exposed fasteners to extent indicated on shop drawings.



G. Anchorage shall allow for temperature expansion/contraction movement without stress or

elongation of panels, clips, or anchors. Attach clips to structural substrate using fasteners of size and spacing as determined by manufacturer's design analysis to resist specified uplift and thermal movement forces.

H. Seal laps and joints in accordance with roofing system manufacturer's product data. I. Coordinate flashing and sheet metal work to provide weathertight conditions at roof terminations.

Fabricate and install in accordance with standards of SMACNA Manual. J. Provide for temperature expansion/contraction movement of panels at roof penetrations and roof

mounted equipment in accordance with system manufacturer's product data and design calculations.

K. Installed system shall be true to line and plane and free of dents, and physical defects. In light

gauge panels with wide flat surfaces, some oil canning may be present. Oil canning does not affect the finish or structural integrity of the panel and is therefore not cause for rejection.

L. Maximum variation from true planes or lines shall be one-fourth (1/4) inch in twenty (20) feet and

three-eighth (3/8) inch in forty (40) feet or more. M. Form joints in linear sheet metal to allow for one-fourth (1/4) inch minimum expansion at twenty

(20) feet on center maximum and eight (8) feet from corners. N. At joints in linear sheet metal items, set sheet metal items in two (2), one-fourth (1/4) inch beads

of butyl sealant. Extend sealant over all metal surfaces. Mate components for positive seal. Allow no sealant to migrate onto exposed surfaces.

O. Remove damaged work and replace with new, undamaged components. P. Touch up exposed fasteners using paint furnished by roofing panel manufacturer and matching

exposed panel surface finish. Q. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal panels are installed.

On completion of metal panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal panel manufacturer.

R. Clean exposed surfaces of roofing and accessories after completion of installation. Leave in clean

condition at date of substantial completion. Touch up minor abrasions and scratches in finish as directed by Architect.



FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07600- 1

SECTION 07600 - FLASHING AND SHEET METAL PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES: A. Provide all labor, equipment, and materials fabricate and install the following.

1. Gutters and accessories. 2. Downspouts and accessories. 3. Rake Trims and accessories. 4. Other components and trim as required.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Drawing and general provisions of the Contract, including General Supplementary Conditions

and Division 1 Specification Sections, Apply to this Section. B. RELATED SECTIONS

1. Section 07410 – Standing Seam roof Panels

1.3 REFERENCES ASTM B-209 Specification for aluminum sheet ASTM B-221 Specification for aluminum extruded shape FS QQ-L-201 Specification for Lead Sheet ASTM A792-96 Steel Sheet, Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated, by the Hot-Dip Process ASTM B32 Solder Metal ASTM B209 Aluminum and Alloy Sheet and Plate ASTM B486 Paste Solder ASTM D226 Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing ASTM D486 Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-free FS O-F-506 Flux, Soldering, Paste and Liquid WH Warnock Hersey International, Inc. Middleton, WI. FM Loss Prevention Data Sheet NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association - Roofing Manual SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300 - Submittals. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's specification data sheets for each product in accordance

with Section 01330. C. Provide approval letters from metal manufacturer for use of their metal within this particular

roofing system type.



D. Submit two samples, 12 x 12 inch in size illustrating typical external corner, internal corner, valley, junction to vertical dissimilar surface, material and finish.

E. Shop Drawings 1. For manufactured and shop fabricated gutters, downspouts, trims, and all other sheet

metal fabrications.

2. Shop drawings: Indicate material profile, jointing pattern, jointing details, fastening methods, flashing, termination's, and installation details.

3. Indicate type, gauge and finish of metal.

F. Certification 1. Submit roof manufacturer's certification that metal fasteners furnished are acceptable to

roof manufacturer. 2. Submit roof manufacturer's certification that metal furnished is acceptable to roofing

manufacturer as a component of roofing system and is eligible for roof manufacturer's system warranty.

G. Manufacturer's Product Data

1. Metal material characteristics and installation recommendations. 2. Submit color chart prior to material ordering and/or fabrication so that equivalent colors

to those specified can be approved.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards

1. Comply with details and recommendations of SMACNA Manual for workmanship, methods of joining, anchorage, provisions for expansion, etc.

B. If required, fabricator/installer shall submit work experience and evidence of adequate financial

Responsibility. The owner’s representative reserves the right to inspect fabrication facilities in determining qualifications.

C. Successful contractor must obtain all components of roof system from a single manufacturer including any roll good materials if required. Any secondary products that are required which cannot be supplied by the specified manufacturer must be recommended and approved in writing by primary manufacturer prior to bidding.

D. The designer shall conduct all required periodic inspections of work in progress as described herein and shall furnish written documentation of all such inspections.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened containers or packages with labels intact

and legible.



B. Stack pre-formed and pre-finished material to prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage.

C. Prevent contact with materials which may cause discoloration or staining.

1.7 JOB CONDITIONS A. Determine that work of other trades will not hamper or conflict with necessary fabrication and

storage requirements for pre-formed metal roofing system.

B. Protection:

1. Provide protection or avoid traffic on completed roof surfaces. 2. Do not overload roof with stored materials.

3. Support no roof-mounted equipment directly on the roofing system.

C. Ascertain that work of other trades which penetrates the roof or is to be made watertight by the

roof is in place an approved prior to installation of roofing.

1.8 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA

A. Factory Mutual Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 windstorm resistance 1-90.

1.9 WARRANTIES

A. Manufacturer's Warranty 1. Pre-finished metal material shall require a written 20-year non-prorated warranty

covering fade, chalking and film integrity. The material shall not show a color change greater than 5 NBS color units per ASTM D-2244 or chalking excess of 8 units per ASTM D-659. If either occurs material shall be replaced per warranty, at no cost to the Owner.

B. Contractor's Warranty 1. The Contractor shall provide the Owner with a notarized written warranty assuring that

all sheet metal work including caulking and fasteners to be watertight and secure for a period of two years from the date of final acceptance of the building. Warranty shall include all materials and workmanship required to repair any leaks that develop, and make good any damage to other work or equipment caused by such leaks or the repairs thereof.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 APPROVED EQUIVALENT

A. Contractor must submit any product not specified a minimum ten days before the bid date to Architect in order for product to be considered for approval. The Architect will notify Contractor, in writing, of decision to accept or reject request.

2.2 MATERIALS



A. Metal system is to be comprised of minimum Galvalume steel.

1. Acceptable Manufacturers a. IMETCO Metal Flash: Innovative Metals Company, Inc. c. Approved equivalent. 2. Materials Gutters and Downspouts

a. Aluminum-Zinc alloy Coated Steel Aluminum-zinc alloy (galvalume) coated steel, ASTM A792, coating

designation AZ-50, in thickness of .0336 nom. /22 gauge for accessory components; 36" to 48" by coil length, chemically treated, commercial or lock-forming quality.

b. Steel Finishes: fluorocarbon finish. Epoxy primer baked both sides, .2-.25 mils

thickness as approved by finish coat manufacturer. Weathering finish as referred by National Coil Coaters Association (NCCA).

Property Test Method Fluorocarbon* Pencil ASTM D-3363 HB-H Hardness NCAA II-2 Bend ASTM D-4145 O-T NCAA II-19 Cross- ASTM D-3359 no loss Hatch of Adhesion adhesion Gloss ASTM D-523 25+/-5% (60° angle) Reverse Impact ASTM D-2794 no cracking or loss of adhesion Nominal Thickness ASTM D-1005 primer 0.2 mils topcoat 0.8 mils TOTAL 1.0 mils

c. Colors shall be as selected by architect.

B. Miscellaneous Metals and Flashings: 1. Roof Vents: Stainless Steel Sheet Type 304, ASTM A167, 24 gage, (0.015"), annealed

except dead soft where fully concealed by other work, 2D (dull) finish. 3. Gutter Spacers: Aluminum-zinc alloy (galvalume) coated steel, ASTM A792, coating

designation AZ-50, in thickness of .0336 nom. /16 gauge for accessory components; 36" to 48" by coil length, chemically treated, commercial or lock-forming quality.



4. Gutter Brackets: ASTM A 7921A 792M – 1/8” x 1” hot dip galvanized steel. 5. Continuous Gutter Angle Shelf: ASTM A 7921A 792M – 1/8” x 1 ½” hot dip galvanized

angle iron.

2.3 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Metal Primer: Zinc chromate type.

B. Plastic Cement: ASTM D 4586

C. Sealant: Specified in Section 07900 or on drawings.

D. Lead: Meets Federal Specification QQ-L-201, Grade B, four pounds per square foot.

E. Solder: ANSI/ASTM B32; 95/05 type.

F. Flux: FS O-F-506.

G. Underlayment: ASTM D2178, No15 asphalt saturated roofing felt.

H. Slip Sheet: Rosin sized building paper.

I. Fasteners:

1. Corrosion resistant screw fastener as recommended by metal manufacturer. Finish exposed fasteners same as flashing metal.

2. Fastening shall conform to Factory Mutual 1-90 requirements or as stated on section

details, whichever is more stringent. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PROTECTION

A. Protect contact areas of dissimilar metals with heavy asphalt or other approved coating,

specifically made to stop electrolytic action. 3.2 GENERAL

A. Install work watertight, without waves, warps, buckles, fastening stress, or distortion, allowing for

expansion and contraction. B. Roof Drainage: Contractor is responsible for determining the proper gutter and downspout sizing

according to the “Roof Drainage Systems” Section of the most current SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.

C. Fastening of metal to walls and wood blocking shall comply with SMACNA Architectural Sheet

Metal Manual, Factory Mutual I-90 wind uplift specifications, Factory Mutual 1-49 Loss Prevention Data Sheets and/or manufacturer's recommendations whichever is of the highest standard.



D. All accessories or other items essential to the completeness of sheet metal installation, whether specifically indicated or not, shall be provided and of the same material as item to which applied.

E. Metal trim shall be secured at the bottom edge with a continuous cleat. Cleats shall be at least one

gauge heavier than the metal it secures. F. Downspouts shall discharge a maximum of 12” above finished grade or paving surface. G. All Downspouts discharging on non-paved areas shall include a pre-cast concrete splash block.

Splash block shall be a minimum of 16” wide and 24” long. Note: Splash blocks may be cast on site at the Contractor’s option.

H. Provide turnout design at bottom of downspouts to direct water flow away from building. I. Contractor is responsible for determining and locating the expansion joints as detailed and

according to the most current SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. 3.3 INSPECTION A. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, or vents through roof are solidly set, fastening

strips located. B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. C. Field measure site conditions prior to fabricating work. 3.4 MANUFACTURED SHEET METAL SYSTEMS A. Installing Contractor shall be responsible for determining if the sheet metal systems are in general

conformance with roof manufacturer's recommendations. B. Furnish and install manufactured sheet metal systems in strict accordance with manufacturer's

printed instructions. C. Provide all factory-fabricated accessories including, but not limited to, fascia extenders, miters,

scuppers, joint covers, etc. 3.5 SHOP FABRICATED SHEET METAL A. Installing Contractor shall be responsible for determining if the sheet metal systems are in general

conformance with roof manufacturer's recommendations. B. Metal work shall be shop fabricated to configurations and forms in accordance with recognized

sheet metal practices. C. Hem exposed edges. D. Angle bottom edges of exposed vertical surfaces to form drip. E. All corners for sheet metal shall be lapped with adjoining pieces fastened and set in sealant.



F. Install sheet metal to comply with Architectural Sheet Metal manual, Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Associations, Inc.



THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 07841 - 1

SECTION 07841 - THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls. 2. Penetrations in horizontal assemblies. 3. Penetrations in smoke barriers.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 7 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for joints in or between fire-resistance-rated construction, at exterior curtain-wall/floor intersections, and in smoke barriers.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system. Include location and design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency.

1. Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting agency's illustration for a particular penetration firestopping condition, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by penetration firestopping manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire-resistance-rated assembly.

C. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

D. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating penetration firestopping has been installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written recommendations.

E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for penetration firestopping.


A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FM Global according to FM Global 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors," or been evaluated by UL and found to comply with its "Qualified Firestop Contractor Program Requirements."



B. Installer Qualifications: A firm experienced in installing penetration firestopping similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful performance. Qualifications include having the necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer's products per specified requirements. Manufacturer's willingness to sell its penetration firestopping products to Contractor or to Installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on buyer.

C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Penetration firestopping shall comply with the following requirements:

1. Penetration firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Penetration firestopping is identical to those tested per testing standard referenced in "Penetration Firestopping" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements:

a. Penetration firestopping products bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency.

b. Classification markings on penetration firestopping correspond to designations listed by the following:

1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory." 2) FM Global in its "Building Materials Approval Guide."


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install penetration firestopping when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by penetration firestopping manufacturers or when substrates are wet because of rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

B. Install and cure penetration firestopping per manufacturer's written instructions using natural means of ventilations or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that penetration firestopping is installed according to specified requirements.

B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate penetration firestopping.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc. 2. Grace Construction Products. 3. Hilti, Inc. 4. Johns Manville.



5. Nelson Firestop Products. 6. NUCO Inc. 7. Passive Fire Protection Partners. 8. RectorSeal Corporation. 9. Specified Technologies Inc. 10. 3M Fire Protection Products. 11. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Fire Protection Systems Group. 12. USG Corporation.

2.2 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

A. Provide penetration firestopping that is produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems shall be compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with penetrating items if any.

B. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg (2.49 Pa).

1. Fire-resistance-rated walls include fire walls, fire-barrier walls, smoke-barrier walls and fire partitions.

2. F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.

C. Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg (2.49 Pa).

1. Horizontal assemblies include floors, floor/ceiling assemblies and ceiling membranes of roof/ceiling assemblies.

2. F-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated. 3. T-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated

except for floor penetrations within the cavity of a wall.

D. Penetrations in Smoke Barriers: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per UL 1479.

1. L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/sq. ft. (0.025 cu. m/s per sq. m) of penetration opening at 0.30-inch wg (74.7 Pa) at both ambient and elevated temperatures.

E. W-Rating: Provide penetration firestopping showing no evidence of water leakage when tested according to UL 1479.

F. Exposed Penetration Firestopping: Provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.

G. VOC Content: Provide penetration firestopping that complies with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):

1. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L. 2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. 3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.

H. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by penetration



firestopping manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestopping indicated.

1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, including the following:

a. Slag-wool-fiber or rock-wool-fiber insulation. b. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing materials to prevent

leakage of fill materials in liquid state. c. Fire-rated form board. d. Fillers for sealants.

2. Temporary forming materials. 3. Substrate primers. 4. Collars. 5. Steel sleeves.

2.3 FILL MATERIALS

A. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that do not re-emulsify after cure during exposure to moisture.

B. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant.

C. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening dielectric, water-resistant putties containing no solvents, inorganic fibers, or silicone compounds.

D. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets with aluminum foil on one side.

E. Mortars: Prepackaged dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement, fillers, and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar.

F. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.

G. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below:

1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces, and nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and sloped surfaces, unless indicated firestopping limits use of nonsag grade for both opening conditions.

2.4 MIXING

A. For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with penetration firestopping manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with the following requirements:

1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of penetration firestopping.

2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with penetration firestopping. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent penetration firestopping from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of the Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove stains. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing firestopping's seal with substrates.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated.

B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.

1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestopping.

C. Install fill materials for firestopping by proven techniques to produce the following results:

1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.

2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items.

3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.



3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify penetration firestopping with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches (150 mm) of firestopping edge so labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestopping. Use mechanical fasteners or self-adhering-type labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the following information on labels:

1. The words "Warning - Penetration Firestopping - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage."

2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number. 3. Designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 4. Date of installation. 5. Manufacturer's name. 6. Installer's name.


A. Owner reserves the right to engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Where deficiencies are found or penetration firestopping is damaged or removed because of testing, repair or replace penetration firestopping to comply with requirements.

C. Proceed with enclosing penetration firestopping with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and installations comply with requirements.

3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by penetration firestopping manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that penetration firestopping is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, immediately cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated penetration firestopping and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements.

3.7 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SCHEDULE

A. Types of Firestopping Required: 1. Firestopping with No Penetrating Items. 2. Firestopping for Metallic Pipes, Conduit, or Tubing. 3. Firestopping for Nonmetallic Pipe, Conduit, or Tubing. 4. Firestopping for Insulated Pipes. 5. Firestopping for Miscellaneous Electrical Penetrants. 6. Firestopping for Miscellaneous Mechanical Penetrants. 7. Firestopping for Groupings of Penetrants.



FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 07842 - 1

SECTION 07842 - FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Joints in or between fire-resistance-rated constructions. 2. Joints at exterior curtain-wall/floor intersections. 3. Joints in smoke barriers.

B. Related Sections: 1. Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for penetrations in fire-resistance-

rated walls, horizontal assemblies, and smoke barriers.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Schedule: For each fire-resistive joint system. Include location and design designation of qualified testing agency.

1. Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing agency's illustration for a particular fire-resistive joint system condition, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire-resistance-rated assembly.

C. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

D. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating fire-resistive joint systems have been installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written recommendations.

E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for fire-resistive joint systems.


A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FM Global according to FM Global 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors," or been evaluated by UL and found to comply with UL's "Qualified Firestop Contractor Program Requirements."

B. Installer Qualifications: A firm experienced in installing fire-resistive joint systems similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record



of successful performance. Qualifications include having the necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer's products per specified requirements. Manufacturer's willingness to sell its fire-resistive joint system products to Contractor or to Installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on buyer.

C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Fire-resistive joint systems shall comply with the following requirements: 1. Fire-resistive joint systems are identical to those tested per testing standard referenced in "Fire-

Resistive Joint Systems" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements:

a. Fire-resistive joint system products bear classification marking of qualified testing agency. b. Fire-resistive joint systems correspond to those indicated by reference to designations listed

in the UL "Fire Resistance Directory."


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install fire-resistive joint systems when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by fire-resistive joint system manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

B. Install and cure fire-resistive joint systems per manufacturer's written instructions using natural means of ventilation or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate construction of joints to ensure that fire-resistive joint systems are installed according to specified requirements.

B. Coordinate sizing of joints to accommodate fire-resistive joint systems.

C. Notify Owner's testing agency at least seven days in advance of fire-resistive joint system installations; confirm dates and times on day preceding each series of installations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS

A. Where required, provide fire-resistive joint systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of assemblies in or between which fire-resistive joint systems are installed. Fire-resistive joint systems shall accommodate building movements without impairing their ability to resist the passage of fire and hot gases.

B. Joints in or between Fire-Resistance-Rated Construction: Provide fire-resistive joint systems with ratings determined per ASTM E 1966 or UL 2079:

1. Joints include those installed in or between fire-resistance-rated walls, floor or floor/ceiling assemblies and roofs or roof/ceiling assemblies.

2. Fire-Resistance Rating: Equal to or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of construction they will join.



3. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc. b. CEMCO. c. Fire Trak Corp. d. Grace Construction Products. e. Hilti, Inc. f. Johns Manville. g. Nelson Firestop Products. h. NUCO Inc. i. Passive Fire Protection Partners. j. RectorSeal Corporation. k. Specified Technologies Inc. l. 3M Fire Protection Products. m. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Fire Protection Systems Group. n. USG Corporation.

C. Joints in Smoke Barriers: Provide fire-resistive joint systems with ratings determined per UL 2079.

1. L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/ft (0.00775 cu. m/s x m) of joint at 0.30 inch wg (74.7 Pa) at both ambient and elevated temperatures.

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc. b. Grace Construction Products. c. Hilti, Inc. d. Johns Manville. e. Nelson Firestop Products. f. NUCO Inc. g. Passive Fire Protection Partners. h. RectorSeal Corporation. i. Specified Technologies Inc. j. 3M Fire Protection Products. k. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Fire Protection Systems Group. l. USG Corporation.

D. Exposed Fire-Resistive Joint Systems: Provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.

E. VOC Content: Provide fire-resistive joint systems that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):

1. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L. 2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. 3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.

F. Accessories: Provide components of fire-resistive joint systems, including primers and forming materials, that are needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only components specified by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing agency for systems indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION



3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configurations, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning: Clean joints immediately before installing fire-resistive joint systems to comply with fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:

1. Remove from surfaces of joint substrates foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of fill materials.

2. Clean joint substrates to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with fill materials. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent fill materials of fire-resistive joint system from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of the Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove stains. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing fire-resistive joint system's seal with substrates.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install fire-resistive joint systems to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated.

B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.

1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of fire-resistive joint system.

C. Install fill materials for fire-resistive joint systems by proven techniques to produce the following results:

1. Fill voids and cavities formed by joints and forming materials as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.

2. Apply fill materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by joints. 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce smooth,

uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify fire-resistive joint systems with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches (150 mm) of joint edge so labels will be visible to anyone



seeking to remove or penetrate joint system. Use mechanical fasteners or self-adhering-type labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the following information on labels:

1. The words "Warning - Fire-Resistive Joint System - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage."

2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number. 3. Designation of applicable testing agency. 4. Date of installation. 5. Manufacturer's name. 6. Installer's name.


A. Inspecting Agency: Owner reserves the right to engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Where deficiencies are found or fire-resistive joint systems are damaged or removed due to testing, repair or replace fire-resistive joint systems so they comply with requirements.

C. Proceed with enclosing fire-resistive joint systems with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and installations comply with requirements.

3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by fire-resistive joint system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which joints occur.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure fire-resistive joint systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If damage or deterioration occurs despite such protection, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated fire-resistive joint systems immediately and install new materials to produce fire-resistive joint systems complying with specified requirements.

3.7 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEM SCHEDULE

A. Fire Resistive Joint Types: 1. Floor-to-Floor, Fire-Resistive Joint Systems. 2. Wall-to-Wall, Fire-Resistive Joint Systems. 3. Floor-to-Wall, Fire-Resistive Joint Systems. 4. Head-of-Wall, Fire-Resistive Joint Systems. 5. Bottom-of-Wall, Fire-Resistive Joint Systems. 6. Wall-to-Wall, Fire-Resistive Joint Systems Intended for Use as Corner Guards. 7. Perimeter Fire-Resistive Joint Systems.



JOINT SEALANTS 07920 - 1

SECTION 07920 - JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes joint sealants for the following applications:

1. Exterior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces:

a. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry. b. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors, windows and louvers. c. Other joints as indicated.

2. Interior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces:

a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings. c. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors. d. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. e. Joints between gypsum board and concrete masonry partitions and other materials and trim. f. Joints between millwork/cabinets and wall surfaces g. Other joints as indicated.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 2 Section "Pavement Joint Sealants" for sealing joints in pavements, walkways, and curbing.


A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.

B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and water-resistant continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized Installer who is approved or licensed for installation of elastomeric sealants required for this Project.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manufacturer.




A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:

1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F (5 deg C).

2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications

indicated. 4. Contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint

substrates.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.2 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS

A. Elastomeric Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.

B. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.

C. Single-Component Nonsag Urethane Sealant:

1. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). 2. Class: 25. 3. Uses Related to Exposure: T (traffic) and NT (nontraffic). 4. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.

a. Use O Joint Substrates: Color anodic aluminum, galvanized steel, brick and wood..

2.3 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING

A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330 of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance:




A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant performance.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:

1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.

2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following:

a. Concrete.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates,

or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following:

a. Metal. b. Glass.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.



3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

C. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace

them with dry materials.

D. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed:

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum

sealant movement capability.

E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.

1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor

sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.



HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08111 - 1

SECTION 08111 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Standard and custom hollow metal doors and frames. 2. Steel sidelight, borrowed lite and transom frames. 3. Light frames and glazing installed in hollow metal doors.


1. Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for embedding anchors for hollow metal work into masonry construction.

2. Division 08 Section “Flush Wood Doors”. 3. Division 08 Section "Glazing" for glass view panels in hollow metal doors. 4. Division 08 Section "Door Hardware". 5. Division 09 Sections "Exterior Painting" and "Interior Painting" for field painting hollow

metal doors and frames.

C. Codes and References: Comply with the version year adopted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. 1. ANSI/SDI A250.8 - Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 2. ANSI/SDI A250.4 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for

Steel Doors, Frames, Frames Anchors and Hardware Reinforcing. 3. ANSI/SDI A250.6 - Recommended Practice for Hardware Reinforcing on Standard Steel

Doors and Frames. 4. ANSI/SDI A250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel

Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames. 5. ANSI/SDI A250.11 - Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames. 6. ASTM A1008 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural,

High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability. 7. ASTM A653 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-

Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. 8. ASTM A924 - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-

Coated by the Hot-Dip Process. 9. ASTM C 1363 - Standard Test Method for Thermal Performance of Building Assemblies

by Means of a Hot Box Apparatus. 10. ANSI/BHMA A156.115 - Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and Frames.



11. ANSI/SDI 122 - Installation and Troubleshooting Guide for Standard Steel Doors and Frames.

12. ANSI/NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows; National Fire Protection Association.

13. ANSI/NFPA 105: Standard for the Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies. 14. NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; National Fire Protection

Association. 15. UL 10C - Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 16. UL 1784 - Standard for Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, hardware reinforcements, profiles, anchors, fire-resistance rating, and finishes.

B. Door hardware supplier is to furnish templates, template reference number and/or physical hardware to the steel door and frame supplier in order to prepare the doors and frames to receive the finish hardware items.

C. Shop Drawings: Include the following:

1. Elevations of each door design. 2. Details of doors, including vertical and horizontal edge details and metal thicknesses. 3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 5. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections. 6. Details of accessories. 7. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing. 8. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems.

D. Samples for Verification:

1. Samples are only required by request of the architect and for manufacturers that are not current members of the Steel Door Institute.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow metal doors and frames through one source from a single manufacturer wherever possible.

B. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8, latest edition, "Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames".

C. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to UL10C (neutral pressure at 40” above sill) or UL 10C. 1. Smoke Control Door Assemblies: Comply with NFPA 105.



a. Smoke "S" Label: Doors to bear “S” label, and include smoke and draft control gasketing applied to frame and on meeting stiles of pair doors.

D. Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Light Frame Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257. Provide labeled glazing material.

E. Pre-Submittal Conference: Conduct conference in compliance with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings" with attendance by representatives of Supplier, Installer, and Contractor to review proper methods and procedures for installing hollow metal doors and frames and to verify installation of electrical knockout boxes and conduit at frames with electrified or access control hardware.


A. Deliver hollow metal work palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project site storage. Do not use non-vented plastic.

B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions.

C. Store hollow metal work under cover at Project site. Place in stacks of five units maximum in a vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4-inch high wood blocking. Do not store in a manner that traps excess humidity.

1. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation. Door and frames to be stacked in a vertical upright position.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before fabrication.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

B. Warranty includes installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. CECO Door Products (C). 2. Curries Company (CU). 3. Steelcraft (S).

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications.

B. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum G60 (Z180) or A60 (ZF180) metallic coating.

C. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum G60 (Z180) or A60 (ZF180) metallic coating.

2.3 HOLLOW METAL DOORS

A. General: Provide 1-3/4 inch doors of design indicated, not less than thickness indicated; fabricated with smooth surfaces, without visible joints or seams on exposed faces unless otherwise indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 and ANSI/NAAMM HMMA 867.

B. Exterior Doors: Face sheets fabricated of commercial quality hot-dipped zinc coated steel that complies with ASTM A 653/A 653M, Coating Designation A60. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level:

1. Design: Flush panel. 2. Level/Model: Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty), Minimum 16

gauge (0.053-inch -1.3-mm) thick steel, Model 2. 3. Top and Bottom Edges: Reinforce tops and bottoms of doors with a continuous steel

channel not less than 16 gauge, extending the full width of the door and welded to the face sheet. Doors with an inverted top channel to include a steel closure channel, screw attached, with the web of the channel flush with the face sheets of the door. Plastic or composite channel fillers are not acceptable.

4. Hinge Reinforcement: Minimum 7 gauge (3/16") plate 1-1/4" x 9" or minimum 14 gauge continuous channel with pierced holes, drilled and tapped.

5. Hardware Reinforcements: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcing plates from same material as door face sheets.

C. Interior Doors: Face sheets fabricated of commercial quality cold rolled steel that complies with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level:



1. Design: Flush panel.

a. Fire Door Core: As required to provide fire-protection and temperature-rise ratings indicated.

2. Level/Model: Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty), Minimum 16 gauge (0.053-inch -1.3-mm) thick steel, Model 2.

3. Top and Bottom Edges: Reinforce tops and bottoms of doors with a continuous steel channel not less than 16 gauge, extending the full width of the door and welded to the face sheet.

4. Hinge Reinforcement: Minimum 7 gauge (3/16") plate 1-1/4" x 9" or minimum 14 gauge continuous channel with pierced holes, drilled and tapped.

5. Hardware Reinforcements: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcing plates from same material as door face sheets.

6. Curries Company (CU) - Energy Efficient - 787 Mercury Series.

2.4 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES

A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile.

B. Exterior Frames: Fabricated of hot-dipped zinc coated steel that complies with ASTM A 653/A 653M, Coating Designation A60.

1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. Profile as indicated on drawings. 2. Frames: Minimum 16 gauge (0.053-inch -1.3-mm) thick steel sheet.

C. Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet that complies with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M.

1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. Profile as indicated on drawings. 2. Frames: Minimum 16 gauge (0.053-inch -1.3-mm) thick steel sheet.

D. Fire rated frames: Fabricate frames in accordance with NFPA 80, listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated.

E. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 Table 4 with reinforcement plates from same material as frames.

2.5 FRAME ANCHORS

A. Jamb Anchors:

1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, formed from A60 metallic coated material, not less than 0.042 inch thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches wide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch thick.

2. Stud Wall Type: Designed to engage stud and not less than 0.042 inch thick. 3. Compression Type for Drywall Slip-on (Knock-Down) Frames: Adjustable compression

anchors.



B. Floor Anchors: Floor anchors to be provided at each jamb, formed from A60 metallic coated material, not less than 0.042 inches thick.

2.6 LIGHT OPENINGS AND GLAZING

A. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints at fabricator’s shop. Fixed and removable stops to allow multiple glazed lites each to be removed independently. Coordinate frame rabbet widths between fixed and removable stops with the type of glazing and installation indicated.

B. Moldings for Glazed Lites in Doors and Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Frames: Minimum 20 gauge thick, fabricated from same material as door face sheet in which they are installed.

C. Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with hollow metal frames, a minimum of 5/8 inch (16 mm) high unless otherwise indicated. Provide fixed frame moldings and stops on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames.

D. Preformed Metal Frames for Light Openings: Manufacturer's standard frame formed of 0.048-inch-thick, cold rolled steel sheet; with baked enamel or powder coated finish; and approved for use in doors of fire protection rating indicated. Match pre-finished door paint color where applicable.

2.7 ACCESSORIES

A. Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical anchors.

B. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inches thick.

2.8 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. When shipping limitations so dictate, frames for large openings are to be fabricated in sections for splicing or splining in the field by others.

B. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in ANSI/SDI A250.8.

C. Hollow Metal Doors:

1. Exterior Doors: Provide optional weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape where specified.

2. Glazed Lites: Factory cut openings in doors with applied trim or kits to fit. Factory install glazing where indicated.

3. Astragals: Provide overlapping astragals as noted in door hardware sets in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware" on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by NFPA 80 for fire-



performance rating or where indicated. Extend minimum 3/4 inch beyond edge of door on which astragal is mounted.

D. Hollow Metal Frames:

1. Shipping Limitations: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames.

2. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible.

a. Welded frames are to be provided with two steel spreaders temporarily attached to the bottom of both jambs to serve as a brace during shipping and handling. Spreader bars are for bracing only and are not to be used to size the frame opening.

3. Sidelight and Transom Bar Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding.

4. High Frequency Hinge Reinforcement: Provide high frequency hinge reinforcements at door openings 48-inches and wider with mortise butt type hinges at top hinge locations.

5. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated for removable stops, provide security screws at exterior locations.

6. Mortar Guards: Provide guard boxes at back of hardware mortises in frames at all hinges and strike preps regardless of grouting requirements.

7. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot welds per anchor.

8. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:

a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows:

1) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. 2) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. 3) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches high. 4) Four anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches

or fraction thereof above 120 inches high.

b. Stud Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows:

1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. 2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. 3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high. 4) Five anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches

or fraction thereof above 96 inches high. 5) Two anchors per head for frames above 42 inches wide and mounted in

metal stud partitions. 9. Door Silencers: Except on weatherstripped or gasketed doors, drill stops to receive door

silencers. Silencers to be supplied by frame manufacturer regardless if specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware".



E. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive template mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware."

1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8. 2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive non-template, mortised and surface mounted door

hardware. 3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series

specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware. 4. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with

Division 26 Sections.

2.9 STEEL FINISHES

A. Prime Finishes: Doors and frames to be cleaned, and chemically treated to insure maximum finish paint adhesion. Surfaces of the door and frame exposed to view to receive a factory applied coat of rust inhibiting shop primer.

1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead and chromate free primer complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; and compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. General Contractor to verify the accuracy of dimensions given to the steel door and frame manufacturer for existing openings or existing frames (strike height, hinge spacing, hinge back set, etc.).

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove welded in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

B. Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace welded hollow metal frames for square, level, twist, and plumb condition.

C. Tolerances shall comply with SDI-117 "Manufacturing Tolerances Standard Steel Doors and Frames."



D. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive non-template, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install hollow metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Hollow Metal Frames: Install hollow metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.11 and NFPA 80 at fire rated openings.

1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, leveled, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete and frames properly set and secured, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances.

2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with post-installed expansion anchors.

3. Grout Requirements: Do not grout head of frames unless reinforcing has been installed in head of frame. Do not grout vertical or horizontal closed mullion members.

C. Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary.

1. Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors:

a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch. b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch. c. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch. d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 3/4

inch.

2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80.

D. Field Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing" and with hollow metal manufacturer's written instructions.


A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.

B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow metal work immediately after installation.

C. Prime-Coat and Painted Finish Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat, or painted finishes, and apply touchup of compatible air drying, rust-inhibitive primer, zinc rich primer (exterior and galvanized openings) or finish paint.



DOOR HARDWARE 08710 - 1

SECTION 08710 – DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes commercial door hardware for the following:

1. Swinging doors.

B. Door hardware includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following:

1. Mechanical door hardware. 2. Electromechanical door hardware. 3. Cylinders specified for doors in other sections.

C. Related Sections:

1. Division 08 Section “Door Hardware Schedule”. 2. Division 08 Section “Hollow Metal Doors and Frames”. 3. Division 08 Section “Flush Wood Doors”.

D. Codes and References: Comply with the version year adopted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction.

1. ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. 2. ICC/IBC - International Building Code. 3. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 4. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows. 5. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code. 6. NFPA 105 - Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies. 7. State Building Codes, Local Amendments.

E. Standards: All hardware specified herein shall comply with the following industry standards:

1. ANSI/BHMA Certified Product Standards - A156 Series 2. UL10C – Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies



1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data sheets including installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, operational descriptions and finishes.

B. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate the final Door Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.

1. Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's "Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule."

2. Organization: Organize the Door Hardware Schedule into door hardware sets indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Organize door hardware sets in same order as in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. Submittals that do not follow the same format and order as the Door Hardware Sets will be rejected and subject to resubmission.

3. Content: Include the following information:

a. Type, style, function, size, label, hand, and finish of each door hardware item.

b. Manufacturer of each item. c. Fastenings and other pertinent information. d. Location of door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor

plans and in door and frame schedule. e. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. f. Mounting locations for door hardware. g. Door and frame sizes and materials. h. Warranty information for each product.

4. Submittal Sequence: Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule at earliest possible date, particularly where approval of the Door Hardware Schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include Product Data, Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of the Door Hardware Schedule.

C. Shop Drawings: Details of electrified access control hardware indicating the following:

1. Wiring Diagrams: Upon receipt of approved schedules, submit detailed system wiring diagrams for power, signaling, monitoring, communication, and control of the access control system electrified hardware. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. Include the following:

a. Elevation diagram of each unique access controlled opening showing location and interconnection of major system components with respect to their placement in the respective door openings.



b. Complete (risers, point-to-point) access control system block wiring diagrams.

c. Wiring instructions for each electronic component scheduled herein.

2. Electrical Coordination: Coordinate with related sections the voltages and wiring details required at electrically controlled and operated hardware openings.

D. Proof of Certification: Provide copy of manufacturer(s) official certification or accreditation document indicating proof of status as a qualified and authorized provider of the primary Integrated Wiegand Access Control Products.

E. Proof of Certification: Provide copy of manufacturer(s) official certification or accreditation document indicating proof of status as a qualified installer of Windstorm assemblies.

F. Keying Schedule: After a keying meeting with the owner has taken place prepare a separate keying schedule detailing final instructions. Submit the keying schedule in electronic format. Include keying system explanation, door numbers, key set symbols, hardware set numbers and special instructions. Owner must approve submitted keying schedule prior to the ordering of permanent cylinders/cores.

G. Informational Submittals:

1. Product Test Reports: Indicating compliance with cycle testing requirements, based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified independent testing agency.

H. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Provide manufacturers operating and maintenance manuals for each item comprising the complete door hardware installation in quantity as required in Division 01, Closeout Submittals.


A. Please be advised that Hardware Supplier and Hardware Installer must obtain a license with the Louisiana Office of State Fire Marshall in accordance to RS 40:1464 and RS 40:1664.

B. Manufacturers Qualifications: Engage qualified manufacturers with a minimum 5 years of documented experience in producing hardware and equipment similar to that indicated for this Project and that have a proven record of successful in-service performance.

C. Installer Qualifications: A minimum 3 years documented experience installing both standard and electrified door hardware similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

D. Door Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Experienced commercial door hardware distributors with a minimum 5 years documented experience supplying both mechanical and electromechanical hardware installations comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project. Supplier recognized as a factory direct distributor by the manufacturers of the primary materials with a warehousing facility in Project's vicinity.



Supplier to have on staff a certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner concerning both standard and electromechanical door hardware and keying.

E. Integrated Wiegand, Wireless, and IP-Enabled Access Control Products Supplier Qualifications: Integrated access control products and accessories are required to be supplied and installed through current members of the ASSA ABLOY "Authorized Channel Partner" (ACP) and "Certified Integrator" (CI) programs. Suppliers are to be factory trained, certified prior to project bid, and a direct purchaser of the specified product. Installers are to be factory trained, certified prior to project bid, and are responsible for commissioning, servicing, and warranting the installed equipment specified for the project.

F. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware specified in this section from a single source unless otherwise indicated.

1. Electrified modifications or enhancements made to a source manufacturer's product line by a secondary or third party source will not be accepted.

2. Provide electromechanical door hardware from the same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Each unit to bear third party permanent label demonstrating compliance with the referenced standards.

H. Keying Conference: Conduct conference to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings." Keying conference to incorporate the following criteria into the final keying schedule document:

1. Function of building, purpose of each area and degree of security required. 2. Plans for existing and future key system expansion. 3. Requirements for key control storage and software. 4. Installation of permanent keys, cylinder cores and software. 5. Address and requirements for delivery of keys.

I. Pre-Submittal Conference: Conduct coordination conference in compliance with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings" with attendance by representatives of Supplier(s), Installer(s), and Contractor(s) to review proper methods and the procedures for receiving, handling, and installing door hardware.

1. Prior to installation of door hardware, conduct a project specific training meeting to instruct the installing contractors' personnel on the proper installation and adjustment of their respective products. Product training to be attended by installers of door hardware (including electromechanical hardware) for aluminum, hollow metal and wood doors. Training will include the use of installation manuals, hardware schedules, templates and physical product samples as required.

2. Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in, power supply connections, and other preparatory work performed by other trades.

3. Review sequence of operation narratives for each unique access controlled opening. 4. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials. 5. Review the required inspecting, testing, commissioning, and demonstration procedures



J. At completion of installation, provide written documentation that components were applied to manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and according to approved schedule.


A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up and shelving for door hardware delivered to Project site. Do not store electronic access control hardware, software or accessories at Project site without prior authorization.

B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Door Hardware Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package.

C. Deliver, as applicable, permanent keys, cylinders, cores, access control credentials, software and related accessories directly to Owner via registered mail or overnight package service. Instructions for delivery to the Owner shall be established at the "Keying Conference".

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing standard and electrified hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing hardware to comply with indicated requirements.

B. Door Hardware and Electrical Connections: Coordinate the layout and installation of scheduled electrified door hardware and related access control equipment with required connections to source power junction boxes, low voltage power supplies, detection and monitoring hardware, and fire and detection alarm systems.

C. Door and Frame Preparation: Doors and corresponding frames are to be prepared, reinforced and pre-wired (if applicable) to receive the installation of the specified electrified, monitoring, signaling and access control system hardware without additional in-field modifications.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. General Warranty: Reference Division 01, General Requirements. Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. Warranty Period: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer(s), agreeing to repair or replace components of standard and electrified door hardware that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period after final acceptance by the Owner. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage. 2. Faulty operation of the hardware. 3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering.



4. Electrical component defects and failures within the systems operation.

C. Standard Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Special Warranty Periods:

1. Ten years for mortise locks and latches. 2. Five years for exit hardware. 3. Twenty five years for manual surface door closer bodies. 4. Two years for electromechanical door hardware.

1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE

A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in Door Hardware Sets and each referenced section that products are to be supplied under.

B. Designations: Requirements for quantity, item, size, finish or color, grade, function, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows:

C. Named Manufacturer's Products: Product designation and manufacturer are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in the Door Hardware Schedule.

D. Substitutions: Requests for substitution and product approval for inclusive mechanical and electromechanical door hardware in compliance with the specifications must be submitted in writing and in accordance with the procedures and time frames outlined in Division 01, Substitution Procedures. Approval of requests is at the discretion of the architect, owner, and their designated consultants.

2.2 HANGING DEVICES

A. Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.1 certified butt hinges with number of hinge knuckles as specified in the Door Hardware Sets.

1. Quantity: Provide the following hinge quantity, unless otherwise indicated:



a. Two Hinges: For doors with heights up to 60 inches. b. Three Hinges: For doors with heights 61 to 90 inches. c. Four Hinges: For doors with heights 91 to 120 inches. d. For doors with heights more than 120 inches, provide 4 hinges, plus 1 hinge

for every 30 inches of door height greater than 120 inches.

2. Hinge Size: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated, with hinge widths sized for door thickness and clearances required:

a. Widths up to 3’0”: 4-1/2” standard or heavy weight as specified. b. Sizes from 3’1” to 4’0”: 5” standard or heavy weight as specified.

3. Hinge Weight and Base Material: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:

a. Exterior Doors: Heavy weight, non-ferrous, ball bearing or oil impregnated bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate standard weight.

b. Interior Doors: Standard weight, steel, ball bearing or oil impregnated bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate heavy weight.

4. Hinge Options: Comply with the following where indicated in the Hardware Sets or on Drawings:

a. Non-removable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for the all out-swinging lockable doors.

5. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Bommer Industries (BO). b. Hager Companies (HA). c. McKinney Products (MK).

2.3 POWER TRANSFER DEVICES

A. Electrified Quick Connect Transfer Hinges: Provide electrified transfer hinges with Molex™ standardized plug connectors and sufficient number of concealed wires (up to 12) to accommodate the electrified functions specified in the Door Hardware Sets. Connectors plug directly to through-door wiring harnesses for connection to electric locking devices and power supplies. Wire nut connections are not acceptable.


a. Hager Companies (HA) - ETW-QC (# wires) Option. b. McKinney Products (MK) - QC (# wires) Option.



2.4 CYLINDERS AND KEYING

A. General: Cylinder manufacturer to have minimum (10) years experience designing secured master key systems and have on record a published security keying system policy.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of keyed cylinder and keys from the same source manufacturer as locksets and exit devices, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Cylinders: Original manufacturer cylinders complying with the following:

1. Mortise Type: Threaded cylinders with rings and cams to suit hardware application. 2. Rim Type: Cylinders with back plate, flat-type vertical or horizontal tailpiece, and raised

trim ring. 3. Bored-Lock Type: Cylinders with tailpieces to suit locks. 4. Mortise and rim cylinder collars to be solid and recessed to allow the cylinder face to be

flush and be free spinning with matching finishes. 5. Keyway: Manufacturer’s Standard.

D. Permanent Cores: Manufacturer's standard; finish face to match lockset; complying with the following:

1. Interchangeable Cores: Core insert, removable by use of a special key; usable with other manufacturers' cylinders.

E. Security Cylinders: ANSI/BHMA A156.5, Grade 1, patented security cylinders and keys able to be used together under the same facility master or grandmaster key system. Cylinders are to be factory keyed.


a. Schlage Lock (SC) - Primus Everest.

F. Patented Cylinders: ANSI/BHMA A156.5, Grade 1, certified cylinders employing a utility patented and restricted keyway requiring the use of patented controlled keys. Provide bump resistant, fixed core cylinders as standard with solid recessed cylinder collars. Cylinders are to be factory keyed where permanent keying records will be established and maintained.

1. Provide a 6 pin multi-level master key system comprised of patented controlled keys and security and high security cylinders operated by one (1) key of the highest level. Geographical exclusivity to be provided for all security and high security cylinders and UL437 certification where specified.

a. Level 1 Cylinders: Provide utility patented controlled keyway cylinders that are furnished with patented keys available only from authorized distribution.

2. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - Degree Series. b. Corbin Russwin (RU) – Access 3 Series.

G. Keying System: Each type of lock and cylinders to be factory keyed.



1. Conduct specified "Keying Conference" to define and document keying system instructions and requirements.

2. Furnish factory cut, nickel-silver large bow permanently inscribed with a visual key control number as directed by Owner.

3. New System: Key locks to a new key system as directed by the Owner.

H. Key Quantity: Provide the following minimum number of keys:

1. Change Keys per Cylinder: Two (2) 2. Master Keys (per Master Key Level/Group): Five (5). 3. Construction Keys (where required): Ten (10). 4. Construction Control Keys (where required): Two (2). 5. Permanent Control Keys (where required): Two (2).

I. Construction Keying: Provide temporary keyed construction cores.

J. Key Registration List (Bitting List):

1. Provide keying transcript list to Owner's representative in the proper format for importing into key control software.

2. Provide transcript list in writing or electronic file as directed by the Owner.

K. Key Control Cabinet: Provide a key control system including envelopes, labels, and tags with self-locking key clips, receipt forms, 3-way visible card index, temporary markers, permanent markers, and standard metal cabinet. Key control cabinet shall have expansion capacity of 150% of the number of locks required for the project.


a. Lund Equipment (LU). b. MMF Industries (MM). c. Telkee (TK).

2.5 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHING DEVICES

A. Mortise Locksets, Grade 1 (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.13, Series 1000, Operational Grade 1 certified. Locksets are to be manufactured with a corrosion resistant steel case and be field-reversible for handing without disassembly of the lock body.


a. Abbloy to match existing CPSO system

2.6 INTEGRATED WIEGAND OUTPUT LOCKING DEVICES – MULTI-CLASS READER

A. Integrated Wiegand Output Multi-Class Mortise Locks: Wiegand output ANSI A156.13, Grade 1, mortise lockset with integrated card reader, request-to-exit signaling, door position status switch, and latchbolt monitoring in one complete unit. Hard wired, solenoid driven



locking/unlocking control of the lever handle trim, 3/4" deadlocking anti-friction latch, and 1" case-hardened steel deadbolt. Lock is U.L listed and labeled for use on up to 3 hour fire rated openings. Available with or without keyed high security cylinder override. 1. Open architecture, hard wired platform supports centralized control of locking units with

new or existing Wiegand compatible access control systems. Latchbolt monitoring and door position switch act in conjunction to report door-in-frame (DPS) and door latched (door closed and latched) conditions.

2. Integrated reader supports the following credentials: a. 125kHz proximity credentials: HID, AWID, Indala, and EM4102. b. 13.56 MHz proximity credentials: HID iClass, HID iClass SE, SE for

MIFARE Classic, DESFire EV1. 3. 12VDC external power supply required for reader and lock, with optional 24VDC lock

solenoid. Fail safe or fail secure options. 4. Energy Efficient Design: Provide lock bodies which have a holding current draw of

15mA maximum, and can operate on either 12 or 24 volts. Locks are to be field configurable for fail safe or fail secure operation.

5. Support end-of-line resistors contained within the lock case. 6. Installation requires only one cable run from the lock to the access control panel without

requirements for additional proprietary lock panel interface boards or modules. 7. Installation to include manufacturer's access control panel interface board or module

where required for Wiegand output protocol.


a. Corbin Russwin (RU) – ML2000 SE-LP10 Series.

2.7 LOCK AND LATCH STRIKES

A. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latch or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set, unless otherwise indicated, and as follows:

1. Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by manufacturer.

2. Aluminum-Frame Strike Box: Provide manufacturer's special strike box fabricated for aluminum framing.

B. Standards: Comply with the following:

1. Strikes for Mortise Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.13. 2. Strikes for Auxiliary Deadlocks: BHMA A156.5. 3. Dustproof Strikes: BHMA A156.16.

2.8 CONVENTIONAL EXIT DEVICES

A. General Requirements: All exit devices specified herein shall meet or exceed the following criteria:



1. At doors not requiring a fire rating, provide devices complying with NFPA 101 and listed and labeled for "Panic Hardware" according to UL305. Provide proper fasteners as required by manufacturer including sex nuts and bolts at openings specified in the Hardware Sets.

2. Where exit devices are required on fire rated doors, provide devices complying with NFPA 80 and with UL labeling indicating "Fire Exit Hardware". Provide devices with the proper fasteners for installation as tested and listed by UL. Consult manufacturer’s catalog and template book for specific requirements.

3. Except on fire rated doors, provide exit devices with hex key dogging device to hold the pushbar and latch in a retracted position. Provide optional keyed cylinder dogging on devices where specified in Hardware Sets.

4. Devices must fit flat against the door face with no gap that permits unauthorized dogging of the push bar. The addition of filler strips is required in any case where the door light extends behind the device as in a full glass configuration.

5. Lever Operating Trim: Where exit devices require lever trim, furnish manufacturer's heavy duty escutcheon trim with threaded studs for thru-bolts.

a. Lock Trim Design: As indicated in Hardware Sets, provide finishes and designs to match that of the specified locksets.

b. Where function of exit device requires a cylinder, provide a cylinder (Rim or Mortise) as specified in Hardware Sets.

6. Rail Sizing: Provide exit device rails factory sized for proper door width application.

7. Through Bolt Installation: For exit devices and trim as indicated in Door Hardware Sets.

B. Conventional Push Rail Exit Devices (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.3, Grade 1 certified panic and fire exit hardware devices furnished in the functions specified in the Hardware Sets. Exit device latch to be stainless steel, pullman type, with deadlock feature.


a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) - ED4000 / ED5000 Series. b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 80 Series. c. Von Duprin (VD) - 35A/98 XP Series.

2.9 INTEGRATED WIEGAND OUTPUT EXIT DEVICES – MULTI-CLASS READER

A. Integrated Wiegand Output Multi-Class Exit Hardware: Wiegand output ANSI 156.3 Grade 1 rim, mortise, and vertical rod exit device hardware with integrated proximity card reader, latchbolt and touchbar monitoring, and request-to-exit signaling, in one complete unit. Hard wired, solenoid driven locking/unlocking control of the lever handle exit trim with 3/4" throw latch bolt. U.L listed and labeled for either panic or "fire exit hardware" for use on up to 3 hour fire rated openings. Available with or without keyed high security cylinder override.



1. Open architecture, hard wired platform supports centralized control of locking units with new or existing Wiegand compatible access control systems. Inside push bar (request-to-exit) signaling and door position (open/closed status) monitoring (via separately connected DPS).

2. Integrated reader supports the following credentials: a. 125kHz proximity credentials: HID, AWID, Indala, and EM4102. b. 13.56 MHz proximity credentials: HID iClass, HID iClass SE, SE for MIFARE

Classic, DESFire EV1. 3. 12VDC external power supply required for reader. 24VDC required for solenoid

operated exit trim. Fail safe or fail secure options. 4. Installation requires only one cable run from the exit hardware to the access control panel

without requirements for additional proprietary lock panel interface boards or modules. 5. Competitor Alternates Allowed Option>Installation to include manufacturer's access

control panel interface board or module where required for Wiegand output protocol.


a. Corbin Russwin (RU) – ED5000 SE-LP10 Series. b. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) – M1 80 Series.

2.10 DOOR CLOSERS

A. All door closers specified herein shall meet or exceed the following criteria:

1. General: Door closers to be from one manufacturer, matching in design and style, with the same type door preparations and templates regardless of application or spring size. Closers to be non-handed with full sized covers including installation and adjusting information on inside of cover.

2. Standards: Closers to comply with UL-10C for Positive Pressure Fire Test and be U.L. listed for use of fire rated doors.

3. Cycle Testing: Provide closers which have surpassed 15 million cycles in a test witnessed and verified by UL.

4. Size of Units: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for sizing of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Where closers are indicated for doors required to be accessible to the physically handicapped, provide units complying with ANSI ICC/A117.1.

5. Closer Arms: Provide heavy duty, forged steel closer arms unless otherwise indicated in Hardware Sets.

6. Closers shall not be installed on exterior or corridor side of doors; where possible install

closers on door for optimum aesthetics.

7. Closer Accessories: Provide door closer accessories including custom templates, special mounting brackets, spacers and drop plates, and through-bolt and security type fasteners as required for proper installation.



B. Door Closers, Surface Mounted (Large Body Cast Iron): ANSI/BHMA A156.4, Grade 1 surface mounted, heavy duty door closers with complete spring power adjustment, sizes 1 thru 6; and fully operational adjustable according to door size, frequency of use, and opening force. Closers to be rack and pinion type, one piece cast iron body construction, with adjustable backcheck and separate non-critical valves for closing sweep and latch speed control.


a. Corbin Russwin Hardware (RU) - DC8000 Series. b. LCN Closers (LC) - 4040XP Series. c. Norton Door Controls (NO) – 9500 Series. d. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 281 Series.

2.11 ARCHITECTURAL TRIM

A. Door Protective Trim

1. General: Door protective trim units to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets.

2. Size: Fabricate protection plates (kick, armor, or mop) not more than 2" less than door width (LDW) on stop side of single doors and 1” LDW on stop side of pairs of doors, and not more than 1" less than door width on pull side. Coordinate and provide proper width and height as required where conflicting hardware dictates. Height to be as specified in the Hardware Sets.

3. Protection Plates: ANSI/BHMA A156.6 certified protection plates (kick, armor, or mop), fabricated from the following:

4. Options and fasteners: Provide manufacturer's designated fastener type as specified in the Hardware Sets. Provide countersunk screw holes.


a. Hager Companies (HA). b. Rockwood Manufacturing (RO). c. Trimco (TC).

2.12 DOOR STOPS AND HOLDERS

A. General: Door stops and holders to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets.

B. Door Stops and Bumpers: ANSI/BHMA A156.16, Grade 1 certified door stops and wall bumpers. Provide wall bumpers, either convex or concave types with anchorage as indicated, unless floor or other types of door stops are specified in Hardware Sets. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. Where floor or wall bumpers are not appropriate, provide overhead type stops and holders.




a. Hager Companies (HA). b. Rockwood Manufacturing (RO). c. Trimco (TC).

C. Overhead Door Stops and Holders: ANSI/BHMA A156.6, Grade 1 certified overhead stops and holders to be surface or concealed types as indicated in Hardware Sets. Track, slide, arm and jamb bracket to be constructed of extruded bronze and shock absorber spring of heavy tempered steel. Provide non-handed design with mounting brackets as required for proper operation and function.


a. Rixson Door Controls (RF). b. Rockwood Manufacturing (RO). c. Sargent Manufacturing (SA).

2.13 ARCHITECTURAL SEALS

A. General: Thresholds, weatherstripping, and gasket seals to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets. Provide continuous weatherstrip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated. At exterior applications provide non-corrosive fasteners and elsewhere where indicated.

B. Smoke Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 105 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for smoke control ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL 1784.

1. Provide smoke labeled perimeter gasketing at all smoke labeled openings.

C. Fire Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL-10C.

1. Provide intumescent seals as indicated to meet UL10C Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, and UBC 7-2, Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.

D. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strips are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.

E. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. National Guard Products (NG). 2. Pemko Manufacturing (PE). 3. Reese Enterprises, Inc. (RE).



2.14 ELECTRONIC ACCESSORIES

A. Switching Power Supplies: Provide UL listed or recognized filtered and regulated power supplies. Provide single, dual, or multi-voltage units as shown in the hardware sets. Units must be expandable up to eight Class 2 power limited outputs. Units must include the capability to incorporate a battery backup option with integral battery charging capability in addition to operating the DC load in event of line voltage failure. Provide the least number of units, at the appropriate amperage level, sufficient to exceed the required total draw for the specified electrified hardware and access control equipment.


a. Securitron (SU) - AQ Series.

2.15 FABRICATION

A. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to manufacturers recognized installation standards for application intended.

2.16 FINISHES

A. Standard: Designations used in the Hardware Sets and elsewhere indicate hardware finishes complying with ANSI/BHMA A156.18, including coordination with traditional U.S. finishes indicated by certain manufacturers for their products.

B. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness, and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware.

C. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine scheduled openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Notify architect of any discrepancies or conflicts between the door schedule, door types, drawings and scheduled hardware. Proceed only after such discrepancies or conflicts have been resolved in writing.



3.2 PREPARATION

A. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115 series.

B. Wood Doors: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115-W series.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install each item of mechanical and electromechanical hardware and access control equipment to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and according to specifications.

1. Installers are to be trained and certified by the manufacturer on the proper installation and adjustment of fire, life safety, and security products including: hanging devices; locking devices; closing devices; and seals.

B. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, unless specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations:

1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."

2. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors."

3. Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with ANSI A117.1 "Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities."

4. Provide blocking in drywall partitions where wall stops or other wall mounted hardware is located.

C. Integrated Wiegand access control products are required to be installed through current members of the ASSA ABLOY "Certified Integrator" (CI) program.

D. Retrofitting: Install door hardware to comply with manufacturer's published templates and written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.

E. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

F. Storage: Provide a secure lock up for hardware delivered to the project but not yet installed. Control the handling and installation of hardware items so that the completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses before and after installation.




A. Field Inspection: Supplier will perform a final inspection of installed door hardware and state in report whether work complies with or deviates from requirements, including whether door hardware is properly installed, operating and adjusted.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.


A. Protect all hardware stored on construction site in a covered and dry place. Protect exposed hardware installed on doors during the construction phase. Install any and all hardware at the latest possible time frame.

B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.

C. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper finish. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of owner occupancy.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Instruct Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain mechanical and electromechanical door hardware.

3.8 DOOR HARDWARE SETS

A. The hardware sets represent the design intent and direction of the owner and architect. They are a guideline only and should not be considered a detailed hardware schedule. Discrepancies, conflicting hardware and missing items should be brought to the attention of the architect with corrections made prior to the bidding process. Omitted items not included in a hardware set should be scheduled with the appropriate additional hardware required for proper application and functionality.



GLAZING 08800-1

SECTION 08800 - GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Glass for windows, hollow metal windows, borrowed lights, doors and storefront framing.

2. Glazing sealants and accessories.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications.

B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to ASTM C 1036.

C. IBC: International Building Code.

D. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.


GLAZING 08800-2


A. Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility test report.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications for Insulating-Glass Units with Sputter-Coated, Low-E Coatings: A qualified insulating-glass manufacturer who is approved [and certified] by coated-glass manufacturer.

B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program.


A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.

B. Comply with insulating-glass manufacturer's written instructions for venting and sealing units to avoid hermetic seal ruptures due to altitude change.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.

B. Structural Performance: Glazing shall withstand the following design loads within limits and under conditions indicated determined according to the IBC and ASTM E 1300. 1. Design Wind Pressures: Determine design wind pressures applicable to Project according

to ASCE/SEI 7, based on heights above grade indicated on Drawings. a. Basic Wind Speed: 140. b. Building Category: II. c. Exposure Category: B.


GLAZING 08800-3

2. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For glass supported on all four edges, limit center-of-glass deflection at design wind pressure to not more than 1/50 times the short-side length or 1 inch , whichever is less.

3. Differential Shading: Design glass to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading within individual glass lites.

C. Safety Glazing: Where safety glazing is indicated or otherwise required by codes, provide glazing that complies with 16 CFR 1201, Category II.

D. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below:

1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 6 mm thick. 2. For laminated-glass lites, properties are based on products of construction indicated. 3. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall

unit and for each lite. 4. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's

WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F . 5. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values,

according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program. 6. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300.

2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below unless more stringent requirements are indicated. See these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.

1. GANA Publications: "Laminated Glazing Reference Manual" and "Glazing Manual." 2. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing

Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use."

B. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, or manufacturer. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.

C. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC.

D. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass that complies with performance requirements and is not less than the thickness indicated.

1. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: 6 mm. 2. Thickness of Tinted Glass: Provide same thickness for each tint color indicated

throughout Project.

E. Strength: Where annealed float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, heat-strengthened float glass, or fully tempered float glass as needed to comply with "Performance


GLAZING 08800-4

Requirements" Article. Where heat-strengthened float glass is indicated, provide heat-strengthened float glass or fully tempered float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where fully tempered float glass is indicated, provide fully tempered float glass.

2.3 GLASS PRODUCTS

A. Clear Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality-Q3.

B. Tinted Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 2 (tinted), Quality-Q3.

C. Fully Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated, Quality-Q3.

1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated.

D. Heat-Strengthened Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind HS (heat strengthened), Type I, Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated, Quality-Q3.


2.4 LAMINATED GLASS

A. Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172. Use materials that have a proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after fabrication and installation.

1. Construction: Laminate glass with polyvinyl butyral interlayer, ionomeric polymer interlayer, or cast-in-place and cured-transparent-resin interlayer to comply with interlayer manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Interlayer Thickness: 0.090” pvb. a. Provide thickness not less than that indicated and as needed to comply with

requirements. 3. Interlayer Color: Clear unless otherwise indicated.

B. Transparent One-Way Glass: Where indicated, provide Transparent, laminated, One-Way glass that permits viewing from the specified side only. The other side is to be reflective. Verify which orientation the glazing shall be installed prior to installation.

2.5 INSULATING GLASS

A. Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190.

1. Sealing System: Dual seal, with manufacturer's standard primary and secondary sealants. 2. Spacer: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction. 3. Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel, or a blend of both.


GLAZING 08800-5

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, with requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.

B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.

C. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.

2.7 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS

A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements.

1. Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components.

a. Temperature Change: 120 deg F , ambient; 180 deg F , material surfaces.

B. Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites to produce square edges with slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces.

C. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the following:

1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners.

2. Presence and functioning of weep systems. 3. Minimum required face and edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.


GLAZING 08800-6

B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that leave visible marks in the completed Work.

3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL

A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.

B. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass includes glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass, impair performance, or impair appearance.

C. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing.

D. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.

E. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches .

1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements.

2. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape.

F. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.

G. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified.

H. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement.

I. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

3.4 GASKET GLAZING (DRY)

A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.

B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.


GLAZING 08800-7

C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

D. Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure-glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.


A. Immediately after installation remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.

B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains.

1. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. Remove and replace glass that cannot be cleaned without damage to coatings.

C. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period.

D. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

3.6 MONOLITHIC GLASS SCHEDULE

A. Glass Type: Clear fully tempered float glass.

1. Minimum Thickness: 6 mm. 2. Safety glazing required.

3.7 INSULATING-LAMINATED-GLASS SCHEDULE

A. Glass Type: Tinted, insulating laminated glass. 1. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch. 2. Minimum Thickness of Outdoor Lite: 6 mm. 3. Outdoor Lite: Tinted fully tempered float glass. 4. Tint Color: Bronze. 5. Interspace Content: Air.


GLAZING 08800-8

6. Indoor Lite: Clear laminated glass with two plies of fully tempered float glass. a. Minimum Thickness of Each Glass Ply: 3 mm.

7. Safety glazing required.



FIRE-RESISTANT GLAZING 08801-1

SECTION 08801 - FIRE-RESISTANT GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Fire-resistance-rated glazing.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications.

B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to ASTM C 1036.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.




A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program.


A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install fire-resistant glazing until spaces are enclosed and weathertight and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.



1.9 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Laminated Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace laminated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of laminated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated-glass standard.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.

2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organization below unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.

1. GANA Publications: "Laminated Glazing Reference Manual" and "Glazing Manual."

B. Safety Glazing Labeling: Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, glass thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.

2.3 GLASS PRODUCTS

A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated.

B. Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated, Quality-Q3.


2.4 FIRE-RESISTANCE-RATED GLAZING

A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Glazing: Listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-resistance ratings indicated, based on testing according to ASTM E 119 or UL 263.

B. Fire-Resistance-Rated Glazing Labeling: Permanently mark fire-resistance-rated glazing with certification label of a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, test standard, that the glazing is approved for use in walls, and the fire-resistance rating in minutes.



C. Laminated Glass with Intumescent Interlayers: Laminated glass made from multiple plies of uncoated, ultraclear float glass; with intumescent interlayers; and complying with 16 CFR 1201, Category II.

2.5 GLAZING ACCESSORIES

A. Provide glazing gaskets, glazing sealants, glazing tapes, setting blocks, spacers, edge blocks, and other glazing accessories that are compatible with glazing products and each other and are approved by testing agencies that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing products with which products are used for applications and fire-protection ratings indicated.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.

B. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance.

C. Perimeter Insulation for Fire-Resistive Glazing: Product that is approved by testing agency that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing product with which it is used for application and fire-protection rating indicated.

2.7 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS

A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners, and for compliance with minimum required face and edge clearances.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.

B. Examine glazing units to locate fire side and protected side. Label or mark units as needed so that fire side and protected side are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that leave visible marks in the completed work.



3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL

A. Use methods approved by testing agencies that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing products.

B. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.

C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance.

D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing.

E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.

F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.

G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches .

1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements.

2. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape.

H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.

I. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face fire side or protected side as specified.

J. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement.

K. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

3.4 GASKET GLAZING (DRY)

A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.



B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop, so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.

C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.

D. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.


A. Immediately after installation, remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.

B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains.

1. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

C. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period.

D. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

3.6 FIRE-RESISTANT GLAZING SCHEDULE

A. Glass Type: Fire-resistance-rated glazing with 450 deg F temperature-rise limitation; laminated glass with intumescent interlayers.

B. Locations: See Door/Window Schedules on Drawings were rated glass is required

C. Glazing required per Door rating: 1. 90 minute - D-H-90 or D-H-W-90 2. 45 minute - D-H-45 or D-H-W-45 3. 20 minute - D-20 or D-W-20



NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING 09111 - 1

SECTION 09111 - NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board assemblies. 2. Suspension systems for interior gypsum ceilings, soffits, and grid systems


1. Section 05400 "Cold Formed Steel Framing" for load-bearing, metal-stud framing and assemblies. 2. Section 09250 "Gypsum Board" for wall board attached to metal framing.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non-load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.

1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless otherwise indicated.

2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180), hot-dip galvanized unless otherwise indicated.

B. Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. Use either steel studs and runners or dimpled steel studs and runners.



1. Steel Studs and Runners:

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch (0.84 mm) or as otherwise indicated on drawings.

b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

C. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width required.

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.027 inch (0.68 mm).

D. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.053-inch (1.34-mm) uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges. 1. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum uncoated-steel

thickness of 0.033 inch (0.8 mm). 2. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- (1.59-mm-)

diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire. 3. Provide radiused furring channels where indicated.

2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Furring Channels (Furring Members):

1. Cold-Rolled Channels: 0.053-inch (1.34-mm) uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges, 3/4 inch (19 mm) deep.

2. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.027 inch (0.68 mm). b. Depth: 2-1/2 inches (64 mm).

3. Dimpled Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.025 inch (0.64 mm). b. Depth: 2-1/2 inches (64 mm).

4. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch (22 mm) deep.

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.018 inch (0.45 mm).

B. Grid Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock.

2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.

1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION



3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.



A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754. 1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to

framing installation.

B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.

C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.

D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently.

3.3 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES

A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.

1. Single-Layer Application: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 2. Multilayer Application: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 3. Tile Backing Panels: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated.

B. Where studs are installed directly against dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.

C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.

D. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling.

1. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.

a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch (13-mm)

clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly. c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead

structure.

2. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads.



3. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure.

4. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated.

E. Direct Furring:

1. Screw to framing. 2. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or

powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c.

F. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.

3.4 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. 1. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 16 inches (406 mm) o.c.

B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.

C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system.

a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices.

3. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.

D. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports.

E. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.6 m) measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes.



GYPSUM BOARD 09250 - 1

SECTION 09250 - GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Interior gypsum board. 2. Tile backing panels.



1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging.


A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.

B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.

C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.



B. Chinese Drywall Products are NOT acceptable.

2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL

A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated.

2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. CertainTeed Corp. 2. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. 3. National Gypsum Company. 4. Temple-Inland. 5. USG Corporation.

B. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.

1. Locations: As required for use in Fire Rated Assemblies 2. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm). 3. Long Edges: Tapered.

C. Abuse-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1629/C 1629M, Level 2.

1. Core: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. 3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274. 4. Use where indicated.

D. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. With moisture- and mold-resistant core and paper surfaces.

1. Core: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. 3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274. 4. Use as ceiling board above suspended acoustical ceiling and where exposed. 5. Use in wet areas where ceramic tile and cementitious backer board are not indicated.

2.4 SPECIALTY GYPSUM BOARD @ CONTRACTOR’S OPTION

A. Skim-Coated Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. Manufactured with a factory-applied skim coat.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Lafarge North America Inc.; Rapid Deco L5.

2. Core: As indicated. 3. Long Edges: Tapered.



2.5 TILE BACKING PANELS

A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 and ASTM C 1288 or 1325, with manufacturer's standard edges.


a. C-Cure; C-Cure Board 990. b. Custom Building Products; Wonderboard. c. James Hardie Building Products, Inc.; Hardiebacker 500. d. National Gypsum Company, Permabase Cement Board. e. USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board.

2. Thickness: As indicated or as otherwise required for proper wall assembly. 3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.

2.6 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced galvanized steel sheet.

2. Shapes:

a. Cornerbead. b. Expansion (control) joint.

2.7 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.

B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper. 2. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.

1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound.

2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.

3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 5. Skim Coat: REQUIRED AT ALL GYPSUM SURFACES EXPOSED TO VIEW (UNLESS

OTHERWISE NOTED): For final coat of Level 5 finish, use drying-type, all-purpose compound or high-build interior coating product designed for application by airless sprayer and to be used instead of skim coat to produce Level 5 finish.

D. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels:



1. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by backer unit manufacturer.

2.8 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations.

B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick.

2. For panels in un-conditioned spaces, use galvanized or stainless steel screws.

C. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool.

1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly.

D. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.


a. Accumetric LLC; BOSS 824 Acoustical Sound Sealant. b. Pecora Corporation; AIS-919. c. Specified Technologies, Inc.; Smoke N Sound Acoustical Sealant. d. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.

E. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Section 07210 "Building Insulation."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.


3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL

A. Comply with ASTM C 840.

B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member.



C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) of open space between panels. Do not force into place.

D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.

E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. 1. Expansion Joints shall be installed at maximum 30' o.c.

F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally.

1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. (0.7 sq. m) in area.

2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and

decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- (6.4- to 9.5-mm-) wide joints to install sealant.

G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- (6.4- to 12.7-mm-) wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

H. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side.

3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:

1. Wallboard Type: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Type X: As indicated on Drawings or where required for fire-resistance-rated assembly. 3. Abuse-Resistant Type: As indicated on Drawings. 4. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: Behind FRP panels and surface applied insulation in

mechanical equipment rooms (see mechanical specs) or as otherwise indicated on Drawings.

B. Single-Layer Application:

1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated.

2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels horizontally (perpendicular to framing) unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints.

a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels.

b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.

3. On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members.

4. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.



C. Multilayer Application:

1. On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to framing members and offset face-layer joints one framing member, 16 inches (400 mm) minimum, from parallel base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.

2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions.

3. On Z-furring members, apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face layer either vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) with vertical joints offset at least one furring member. Locate edge joints of base layer over furring members.

4. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws.

3.4 APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS

A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A108.11, at locations indicated to receive tile.

B. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a uniform plane across panel surfaces.

3.5 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:

1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners unless otherwise indicated.

3.6 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD

A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.

B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.

C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape.

D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840:

1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile or FRP panels or where indicated on Drawings. 3. Level 5: Where panels are exposed to view unless indicated otherwise.

a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 09912 "Interior Painting."

3.7 PROTECTION



A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application.

B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.



CERAMIC TILE 09310 - 1

SECTION 09310 - CERAMIC TILE

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Ceramic tile. 2. Stone thresholds.

B. Related Sections: 1. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation

joints in tile surfaces. 2. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board" for cementitious backer units.

DEFINITIONS

C. General: Definitions in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards and in ANSI A137.1 apply to Work of this Section unless otherwise specified.

D. ANSI A108 Series: ANSI A108.01, ANSI A108.02, ANSI A108.1A, ANSI A108.1B, ANSI A108.1C, ANSI A108.4, ANSI A108.5, ANSI A108.6, ANSI A108.8, ANSI A108.9, ANSI A108.10, ANSI A108.11, ANSI A108.12, ANSI A108.13, ANSI A108.14, ANSI A108.15, ANSI A108.16, and ANSI A108.17, which are contained in "American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile."

E. Module Size: Actual tile size plus joint width indicated.

F. Face Size: Actual tile size, excluding spacer lugs.


A. Static Coefficient of Friction: For tile installed on walkway surfaces, provide products with the required values as determined by testing identical products per ASTM C 1028:

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show widths, details, and locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished tile surfaces.



C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of tile and grout indicated. Include Samples of accessories involving color selection.


A. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from one source or producer.

1. Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from same production run and of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area.

B. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from one manufacturer and each aggregate from one source or producer.

C. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this Section from a single manufacturer for each product:

1. Stone thresholds. 2. Joint sealants.


A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirements in ANSI A137.1 for labeling tile packages.

B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.

C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination can be avoided.

D. Store liquid materials in unopened containers and protected from freezing.

E. Handle tile that has temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated surfaces from contacting backs or edges of other units. If coating does contact bonding surfaces of tile, remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions.

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated.



2. Grout: Furnish quantity of grout equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, and color indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated.

1. Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements unless otherwise indicated.

B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI A108.02, ANSI standards referenced in other Part 2 articles.

C. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges, blend tile in factory and package so tile units taken from one package show same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples.

D. Mounting: For factory-mounted tile, provide back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies as standard with manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.

E. Factory-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type, protect exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout by precoating with continuous film of petroleum paraffin wax, applied hot. Do not coat unexposed tile surfaces.

2.2 TILE PRODUCTS

A. Tile Type CT-1: Factory-mounted unglazed ceramic mosaic tile.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Basis of Design: “Keystones” by Daltile; Division of Dal-Tile International Inc. b. American Olean; “Unglazed Mosaics”

2. Composition: Vitreous or impervious natural clay or porcelain. 3. Module Size: 2 by 2 inches (50.8 by 50.8 mm). 4. Thickness: 1/4 inch (6.35 mm). 5. Face: Plain with cushion edges. 6. Surface: Smooth, without abrasive admixture. 7. Tile Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 8. Grout Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. The intention is for the

grout color to closely match tile color.

B. Tile Type CT-2: Glazed wall tile and base.

1) Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a) Basis of Design: “Rittenhouse Square, glazed ceramic wall tile” by Daltile; Division of

Dal-Tile International Inc. b) American Olean.



2) Module Size: 3 inches by 6 inches. 3) Base configuration: Coved 4) Thickness: 5/16 inch (8 mm). 5) Face: Pattern of design indicated, with manufacturer's standard edges. 6) Tile Colors and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range with two colors

per room. 7) Grout: Polymer modified unsanded. 8) Grout Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 9) Joint Width: 1/16”

C. Tile Type PT-1: Glazed Porcelain Floor Tile.

1) Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a) Basis of Design: “Volume 1.0” by Daltile; Division of Dal-Tile International Inc. b) "Segment" by Anatolia.

2) Composition: Porcelain. 3) Module Size: 12” by 24" 4) Thickness: 3/8 inch. 5) Tile Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 6) Pattern: Brick Joint pattern (1/2) 7) Grout: Polymer modified sanded. 8) Grout Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 9) Joint Width: 3/16”

2.3 THRESHOLDS

A. General: Fabricate to sizes and profiles indicated or required to provide transition between adjacent floor finishes.

1. Bevel edges at 1:2 slope, with lower edge of bevel aligned with or up to 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) above adjacent floor surface. Finish bevel to match top surface of threshold. Limit height of threshold to 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) or less above adjacent floor surface.

a. Marble Thresholds: ASTM C 503/C 503M, with a minimum abrasion resistance of 10 or 12 according to ASTM C 1353 or ASTM C 241/C 241M and with honed finish. 1) Provide the following:

a) "Carrara White" as manufactured by DALTILE.

2.4 SETTING MATERIALS

A. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4.

1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by one of the following:

a. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company. b. Bostik, Inc. c. Laticrete International, Inc. d. MAPEI Corporation. e. Summitville Tiles, Inc.



2. Provide prepackaged, dry-mortar mix containing dry, redispersible, vinyl acetate or acrylic additive to which only water must be added at Project site.

3. For wall applications, provide mortar that complies with requirements for nonsagging mortar in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.4.

2.5 GROUT MATERIALS

A. Polymer-Modified Tile Grout: ANSI A118.7. 1. Polymer Type: Ethylene vinyl acetate or acrylic additive, in dry, redispersible form, prepackaged

with other dry ingredients.

B. Grout for Pregrouted Tile Sheets: Same product used in factory to pregrout tile sheets.

2.6 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS

A. General: Provide sealants, primers, backer rods, and other sealant accessories that comply with the following requirements and with the applicable requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." 1. Use primers, backer rods, and sealant accessories recommended by sealant manufacturer.

B. Colors: Provide colors of exposed sealants to match colors of grout in tile adjoining sealed joints unless otherwise indicated.

C. One-Part, Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920; Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and, as applicable to nonporous joint substrates indicated, O; formulated with fungicide, intended for sealing interior ceramic tile joints and other nonporous substrates that are subject to in-service exposures of high humidity and extreme temperatures.

D. Multipart, Pourable Urethane Sealant for Use T: ASTM C 920; Type M; Grade P; Class 25; Uses T, M, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.


A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indicated.

B. Temporary Protective Coating: Either product indicated below that is formulated to protect exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout; compatible with tile, mortar, and grout products; and easily removable after grouting is completed without damaging grout or tile.

1. Petroleum paraffin wax, fully refined and odorless, containing at least 0.5 percent oil with a melting point of 120 to 140 deg F (49 to 60 deg C) per ASTM D 87.

2. Grout release in form of manufacturer's standard proprietary liquid coating that is specially formulated and recommended for use as temporary protective coating for tile.

C. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout manufacturers.

D. Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard silicone product for sealing grout joints and that does not change color or appearance of grout.

2.8 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT



A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers' written instructions.

B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions.

C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for installations indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed tile.

1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, free of coatings that are incompatible with tile-setting materials including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.

2. Verify that concrete substrates for tile floors comply with surface finish requirements in ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.

a. Verify that surfaces that received a steel trowel finish have been mechanically scarified. b. Verify that protrusions, bumps, and ridges have been removed by sanding or grinding.

3. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed.

4. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with or thin-set mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer.

B. Prepare substrates to receive waterproofing by applying a reinforced mortar bed that complies with ANSI A108.1A and is sloped 1/4 inch per foot (1:50) toward drains.

C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, verify that tile has been factory blended and packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing.

D. Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: If indicated under tile type or needed to prevent grout from staining or adhering to exposed tile surfaces, precoat them with continuous film of temporary protective coating, taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces.



3.3 TILE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" for TCA installation methods specified. Comply with parts of the ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCA installation methods, and apply to types of setting and grouting materials used.

B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.

C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.

D. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise indicated.

1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within tile sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work.

2. Where adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim are specified or indicated to be same size, align joints.

3. Where tiles are specified or indicated to be whole integer multiples of adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim, align joints unless otherwise indicated.

E. Joint Widths: As indicated

F. Lay out tile wainscots to dimensions indicated or to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated.

G. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated. Form joints during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles.

1. Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly above them. 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint

Sealants."

H. Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds in same type of setting bed as adjacent floor unless otherwise indicated.

1. Set thresholds in latex-portland cement mortar (thin set). 2. Do not extend cleavage membrane or crack isolation membrane under thresholds set in dry-set

portland cement or latex-portland cement mortar. Fill joints between such thresholds and adjoining tile set on cleavage membrane or crack isolation membrane with elastomeric sealant.

I. Grout Sealer: Apply grout sealer to cementitious grout joints in tile floors according to grout-sealer manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove excess sealer and sealer from tile faces by wiping with soft cloth.

3.4 TILE BACKING PANEL JOINTS



A. Treat Joints of cementitious backer units according to ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's written instructions for type of application indicated. Use latex-portland cement mortar for bonding material unless otherwise directed in manufacturer's written instructions.

3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter.

1. Remove grout residue from tile as soon as possible. 2. Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written

instructions but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning.

3. Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coating manufacturer and that is acceptable to tile and grout manufacturer. Trap and remove coating to prevent drain clogging.

B. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. If recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors.

C. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is completed.

D. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral protective cleaner from tile surfaces.



ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 - 1

SECTION 09511 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings as indicated on Drawings.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. AC: Articulation Class.

B. CAC: Ceiling Attenuation Class.

C. LR: Light Reflectance coefficient.

D. NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples for Initial Selection: For components with factory-applied color finishes.

C. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Source Limitations:

1. Acoustical Ceiling Panel: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer. 2. Suspension System: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling panel and supporting suspension system through one source from a single manufacturer.

C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.




A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension system components, and accessories to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.

B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content.

C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

1. Pressurized Plenums: Operate ventilation system for not less than 48 hours before beginning acoustical panel ceiling installation.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed. 2. Suspension System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to 2.0 percent of

quantity installed. 3. Hold-Down Clips: Equal to 1.0 percent of quantity installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL

A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectances, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400; plenum mounting in which face of test specimen is 15-3/4 inches (400 mm) away from test surface per ASTM E 795.

B. Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each product type.



1. Where appearance characteristics of acoustical panels are indicated by referencing pattern designations in ASTM E 1264 and not manufacturers' proprietary product designations, provide products selected by Architect from each manufacturer's full range that comply with requirements indicated for type, pattern, color, light reflectance, acoustical performance, edge detail, and size.

C. Antimicrobial Fungicide Treatment: Provide acoustical panels with face and back surfaces coated with antimicrobial treatment consisting of manufacturer's standard formulation with fungicide added to inhibit growth of mold and mildew and showing no mold or mildew growth when tested according to ASTM D 3273 and evaluated according to ASTM D 3274 or ASTM G 21.

2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING TYPE SA-1

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide “Fine Fissured – Square Lay-in” #1728 as manufactured by Armstrong World Industries or a prior approved comparable product.

B. Classification: Provide panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for type, form, and pattern as follows:

1. Type and Form: Type III, mineral base with painted finish; Form 2, nodular. 2. Pattern: CE (perforated, small holes and lightly textured).

C. Color: White

D. LR: Not less than 0.85.

E. NRC: Not less than 0.55.

F. CAC: Not less than 33.

G. Edge/Joint Detail: Square.

H. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15 mm).

I. Modular Size: 24 by 24 inches (600 by 600 mm)

J. Anti-Microbial: Bioblock Plus

K. Sag Resistance: “Humiguard Plus”

2.3 ACOUSTICAL PANELS FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING TYPE SA-2

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide “Fine Fissured – Angled Tegular Lay-in” #1732 as manufactured by Armstrong World Industries or a prior approved comparable product.

B. Classification: Provide panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for type, form, and pattern as follows:

1. Type and Form: Type III, mineral base with painted finish; Form 2, nodular. 2. Pattern: CE (perforated, small holes and lightly textured).

C. Color: White




E. NRC: Not less than 0.55.


G. Edge/Joint Detail: Angled Tegular.


I. Modular Size: 24 by 24 inches (600 by 600 mm)

J. Anti-Microbial: Bioblock Plus

K. Sag Resistance: “Humiguard Plus”

2.4 ACOUSTICAL PANELS FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING TYPE SA-3 (at restrooms)

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide “Ceramaguard” #607 Fine Fissured Square Lay-In as manufactured by Armstrong World Industries or a prior approved comparable product.

B. Classification: Provide panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for type, form, and pattern as follows: 1. Type and Form: Type XX, other types; described as high-density, ceramic- and mineral-base

panels with scrubbable finish, resistant to heat, moisture, and corrosive fumes. 2. Pattern: CE (perforated, small holes and lightly textured).

C. Color: White.


E. NRC: 0.55.


G. Edge/Joint Detail: Square


I. Modular Size: 24 by 24 inches (600 by 600 mm).

J. Inherent Antimicrobial Treatment

K. Sag Resistance: “Humiguard Max”

2.5 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL

A. Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635.

B. Finishes and Colors, General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Provide manufacturer's standard factory-applied finish for type of system indicated.



C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements.

1. Anchors: Anchors of type and material indicated below, with holes or loops for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to five times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 or ASTM E 1512 as applicable, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency.

a. Corrosion Protection at Interior Spaces: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5 (0.005 mm) for Class SC 1 service condition.

b. Corrosion Protection at Interior spaces adjacent to Exterior doors (minimum 15’ distance from exterior doors): Stainless-steel components complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Group 1 Alloy 304 or 316 for bolts; Alloy 304 or 316 for anchor.

D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements:

1. Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 2. Stainless-Steel Wire: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Type 304, nonmagnetic. 3. Nickel-Copper-Alloy Wire: ASTM B 164, nickel-copper-alloy UNS No. N04400. 4. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at 3 times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1,

"Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.135-inch- (3.5-mm-) diameter wire.

E. Hold-Down Clips @ Interior: Provide manufacturer's standard hold-down clips spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. on all cross tees in rooms indicated on drawings. If not specifically indicated, Hold Down clips are generally located at vestibules that open to the exterior and interior and at ceilings inside interior doors for a minimum distance of 15’ away from door in all directions.

2.6 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING TYPES SA-1, SA-2 & SA-3

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide “Prelude XL” Exposed Tee 15/16” wide grid system by ARMSTRONG or a prior approved comparable product.

B. Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Hot-Dip Galvanized, G60 (Z180), Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180) coating designation, with prefinished, cold-rolled, 15/16-inch- (24-mm-) wide, aluminum caps on flanges.

1. Structural Classification: Heavy-duty system. 2. Face Design: Flat, flush. 3. Face Finish: Painted white aluminum.

2.7 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT

A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints @ Building Interior: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.

PART 3 - EXECUTION



3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans

B. Suspended Ceilings: Coordinate installation of ceiling suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive ceiling hangers at spacing required to support ceilings and that hangers will develop their full strength.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636 and design requirements indicated, per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook."

B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system.

2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices.

4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.

5. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten hangers to cast-in-place hanger inserts, postinstalled mechanical or adhesive anchors, or power-actuated fasteners that extend through forms into concrete.

6. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires.

7. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 8. Space hangers not more than 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c. along each member supported directly

from hangers, unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches (200 mm) from ends of each member.

9. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications.

C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers, without attaching to



permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast-in-place or postinstalled anchors.

D. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.

E. Install panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit.

1. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as follows: a. Install panels with pattern running in one direction parallel to long axis of space unless

otherwise directed by Architect.

2. For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of suspension system runners and moldings.

3. Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel manufacturer.

4. Install hold-down clips in areas indicated, in areas required by authorities having jurisdiction, and for fire-resistance ratings; space as recommended by panel manufacturer's written instructions, unless otherwise indicated.


A. Tests and Inspections: Testing and inspecting of completed installations of acoustical panel ceiling hangers and anchors and fasteners shall take place in successive stages, in areas of extent and using methods as follows. Do not proceed with installations of acoustical panel ceiling hangers for the next area until test results for previously completed installations of acoustical panel ceiling hangers show compliance with requirements.

1. Extent of Each Test Area: When installation of ceiling suspension systems on each floor has reached 20 percent completion but no panels have been installed.

a. Within each test area, testing agency will select 1 of every 10 power-actuated fasteners and postinstalled anchors used to attach hangers to concrete and will test them for 200 lbf (890 N) of tension; it will also select one of every 2 postinstalled anchors used to attach bracing wires to concrete and will test them for 440 lbf (1957 N) of tension.

b. When testing discovers fasteners and anchors that do not comply with requirements, testing agency will test those anchors not previously tested until 20 pass consecutively and then will resume initial testing frequency.

B. Remove and replace acoustical panel ceiling hangers and anchors and fasteners that do not pass tests and inspections and retest as specified above.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.


RESILIENT FLOOR TILE 09651 - 1


SECTION 09651 - RESILIENT FLOOR TILE

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Vinyl Composition.

B. Related Sections: 1. Division 9 Section "Resilient Wall Base and Accessories" for resilient base, reducer strips, and

other accessories installed with resilient floor coverings.



B. Shop Drawings: For each type of floor tile. Include floor tile layouts, edges, columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts.

1. Show details of special patterns.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of floor tile indicated.

1.4 MATERIALS MAINTENANCE SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Floor Tile: Furnish 1 box for every 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each type, color, and pattern of floor tile installed.


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.

1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.




A. Store floor tile and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) or more than 90 deg F (32 deg C). Store floor tiles on flat surfaces.


A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C), in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods:

1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation.

B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C).

C. Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation.

D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation.

E. Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VINYL COMPOSITION FLOOR TILE (VCT#1)

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1. Mannington Mills, Inc.; “Essentials and Designer Essentials”. 2. Azrock; “Cortina Colors & Cortina Classic”.

B. Tile Standard: ASTM F 1066, Class 2, through-pattern tile.

C. Wearing Surface: Smooth.

D. Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm).

E. Size: 12 by 12 inches (305 by 305 mm).

F. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.

2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit floor tile and substrate conditions indicated.

C. Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by manufacturer.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor tile.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.

B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.

1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that

contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.

3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.

4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and as follows. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.

a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. (1.36 kg of water/92.9 sq. m) in 24 hours.

C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

D. Do not install floor tiles until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed.

1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.

E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation.

3.3 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile.

B. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter.

1. Lay tiles in pattern indicated.



C. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles.

1. Lay tiles in pattern of colors and sizes indicated.

D. Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.

E. Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor tiles to center of door openings.

F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.

G. Adhere floor tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of floor tile.

B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor tile installation:

1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.

C. Protect floor tile products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.

D. Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from floor tile surfaces before applying liquid floor polish.

1. Apply two coat(s) and machine buff to a high shine.

E. Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion.



RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09653 - 1

SECTION 09653 - RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Resilient base. 2. Resilient molding accessories.

B. Related Sections: 1. Division 9 Section "Resilient Floor Tile for resilient floor tile."

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated.

C. Product Schedule: For resilient products. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.

1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.


A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) or more than 90 deg F (32 deg C).


A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C), in spaces to receive resilient products during the following time periods:

1. 48 hours before installation.



2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation.

B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C).

C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS


1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet (3 linear m) for every 500 linear feet (150 linear m) or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Note: Resilient Base types, RA-1 & RA-2 shall be from the same manufacturer.

2.2 RESILIENT BASE (RA-1)

A. Resilient Base:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Basis of Design: Johnsonite.; 4” rubber coved base b. Mannington or approved equal submitted in accordance with Section 01635.

B. Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F 1861.

1. Material Requirement: Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset). 2. Manufacturing Method: Group I (solid, homogeneous). 3. Style: Cove (base with toe).

C. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm).

D. Height: 4 inches (102 mm).

E. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length.

F. Outside Corners: Job formed.

G. Inside Corners: Job formed.

H. Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

I. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.



2.3 RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORY:

A. Resilient Molding Accessory:


a. Basis-of-Design - Johnsonite b. Flexco, Inc. c. Mannington

B. Description: Transition pieces for different floor surfaces as indicated on drawings or as otherwise required for changes in floor finishes.

C. Material: Rubber.

D. Profile and Dimensions: As indicated on drawings.

E. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.

2.4 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated.

C. Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width shown, of height required to protect exposed edges of tiles, and in maximum available lengths to minimize running joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.

B. Concrete Substrates for Resilient Stair Treads and Accessories: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.



1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that

contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.

3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. 4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and as follows. Proceed with

installation only after substrates pass testing.

a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. (1.36 kg of water/92.9 sq. m) in 24 hours.

b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum 75 percent relative humidity level measurement.

C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

D. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where they are to be installed.

1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.

E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation.

3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.

B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.

C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned.

D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.

E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.

F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.

G. Job-Formed Corners:

1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends.

2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible.

H. Mitered Base:

1. Resilient base 0.1875” thick shall be mitered at outside and inside corners with proper equipment as recommended by manufacturer.



3.4 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories.

B. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of carpet and resilient floor covering that would otherwise be exposed.


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient products.

B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation:

1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.

C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.

D. Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from resilient stair treads before applying liquid floor polish.

1. Apply two coat(s).

E. Cover resilient products until Substantial Completion.



CARPET & CARPET TILE 09681 - 1

SECTION 09681 - CARPET

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Broadloom carpet and carpet base.


1. Division 9 Section "Resilient Wall Base and Accessories" for resilient wall base and accessories installed with carpet tile.


A. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules.

1. Carpet: 12-inch- (300-mm-) square Sample.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.


A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.


A. Fire-Test-Response Ratings: Where indicated, provide carpet tile identical to those of assemblies tested for fire response according to NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.




A. Comply with CRI 104.


A. Comply with CRI 104 for temperature, humidity, and ventilation limitations.

B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install carpet tiles until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

C. Do not install carpet or carpet tiles over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

D. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet tiles, install carpet tiles before installing these items.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BROADLOOM CARPET (Carpet C-1):

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide comparable product by one of the following:

1. BIGELOW “NEW BASICS II” broadloom carpet.

2. Or PATCRAFT "Socrates II" broadloom carpet

B. Description: 1. Level heathered loop. 2. Solution Dyed Nylon. 3. 1/10” gauge 4. 28 oz. Face weight 5. 11 stitches per inch

C. Colors and patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

B. Adhesives for Broadloom Carpet: 1. Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining type to suit products and subfloor conditions

indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet and is recommended or provided by carpet manufacturer.

2. Seam Adhesive: Hot-melt adhesive tape or similar product recommended by carpet manufacturer for sealing and taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form secure seams and to prevent pile loss at seams.

PART 3 - EXECUTION



3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet tile performance. Examine carpet tile for type, color, pattern, and potential defects.

B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following:

1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

2. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet tile installation.

B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks, holes and depressions 1/8 inch (3 mm) wide or wider and protrusions more than 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.

D. Clean metal substrates of grease, oil, soil and rust, and prime if directed by adhesive manufacturer. Rough sand painted metal surfaces and remove loose paint. Sand aluminum surfaces, to remove metal oxides, immediately before applying adhesive.

E. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet tile.

3.3 INSTALLATION - CARPET

A. Comply with CRI 104 and carpet manufacturer's written installation instructions for the following:

1. Direct-Glue-Down Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 9, "Direct Glue-Down Installation."

B. Comply with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations and Shop Drawings for seam locations and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under the door in closed position.

C. Do not bridge building expansion joints with carpet.

D. Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet manufacturer.



E. Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.

F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.

3.4 INSTALLATION - CARPET TILES

A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 14, "Carpet Modules," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions.

B. Installation Method: Glue down; install every tile with full-spread, releasable, pressure-sensitive adhesive.

C. Maintain dye lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area.

D. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

E. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.

F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.


A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet and carpet tile:

1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet manufacturer.

2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet surface. 3. Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face-beater element.

B. Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protecting Indoor Installations."

C. Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.



EXTERIOR PAINTING 09911 - 1

SECTION 09911 - EXTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following exterior substrates:

1. Steel & Iron. 2. Galvanized Steel. 3. Steel doors and frames.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 02751 "Cement Concrete Pavement" for painting on exterior concrete paved surfaces. 2. Section 09912 "Interior Painting" for surface preparation and the application of paint systems on

interior substrates. 3. Section 09931 "Stains" for staining and finishing wood products at interior.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Gloss Level 1 (Matte Flat): Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

B. Gloss Level 2 (Velvet-like Flat): Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

C. Gloss Level 3 (eggshell): 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

D. Gloss Level 4 (satin): 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

E. Gloss Level 5 (Semi-Gloss): 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

F. Gloss Level 6 (Gloss): 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.

B. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:



1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.

2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified, with the proposed product highlighted.

3. VOC content.


A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) of each material and color applied.


A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F (7 deg C).

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.


A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F (10 and 35 deg C).

B. Do not apply paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Benjamin Moore & Co. 2. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. 3. Sherwin-Williams Company (The).

2.2 PAINT, GENERAL

A. Material Compatibility:

1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.



B. VOC Content: Provide materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Colors: Match Architect's samples

2.3 PRIMERS/SEALERS

A. Primer, Bonding, Water Based.

B. Primer, Bonding, Solvent-Based.

C. Primer, Alkyd Anti-Corrosive for Metal.

D. Cementitious Galvanized-Metal Primer.

2.4 WATER BASED PAINTS

A. Latex, Exterior Low-Sheen (Gloss Level 3-4).

B. Latex, Exterior Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5).

2.5 SOLVENT-BASED PAINTS

A. Alkyd, Exterior, Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5).


A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure:

1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If paint materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency.

2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being used do

not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.



C. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.

B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.

D. Steel/Cast Iron Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer but not less than the following:

1. SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning."

E. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.

F. Plastic Trim Fabrication Substrates: Remove dust, dirt, and other foreign material that might impair bond of paints to substrates.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual."

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation,

paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items with prime coat only. 3. Paint both sides and edges of exterior doors and entire exposed surface of exterior door frames. 4. Paint entire exposed surface of window frames and sashes. 5. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification,

performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 6. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory

finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.

B. Tint undercoats same color as topcoat, but tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.



C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.

E. Painting miscellaneous items at exterior:

1. Paint the following work where exposed to view: a. Equipment, including panelboards and switch gear that do not have a factory applied final

finish. b. Uninsulated metal piping. c. Uninsulated plastic piping. d. Pipe hangers and supports. e. Metal Bollards f. Metal conduit. g. Plastic conduit. h. Metal Clean-out covers and gratings.


A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.

1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint

manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations.


A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.

B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

3.6 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Steel/Cast Iron Substrates:

1. Alkyd System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, anticorrosive for metal.



b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Alkyd, exterior, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5).

B. Steel Doors and Frames:

1. Alkyd System:

a. Prime Coat: Bonding Primer, alkyd for exterior metal. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Alkyd, exterior, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5).



INTERIOR PAINTING 09912 - 1

SECTION 09912 - INTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on interior substrates. 1. Steel Doors and Frames. 2. Exposed Metal Ductwork. 3. Gypsum board.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 09911 "Exterior Painting" for surface preparation and the application of paint systems on

exterior substrates. 2. Section 09931 "Stains" for wood staining and finish at interior.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Gloss Level 1 (Matte Flat): Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

B. Gloss Level 2 (Velvet-like Flat): Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

C. Gloss Level 3 (eggshell): 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

D. Gloss Level 4 (satin): 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

E. Gloss Level 5 (Semi-Gloss): 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

F. Gloss Level 6 (Gloss): 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

G. Gloss Level 7 (High Gloss): More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.

B. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:

1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.



2. VOC content.



1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) of each material and color applied.





A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F (10 and 35 deg C).

B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Benjamin Moore & Co. 2. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. 3. Sherwin-Williams Company (The).

2.2 PAINT, GENERAL


1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

B. Colors: Match Architect's samples or as indicated in a color schedule.

2.3 PRIMERS/SEALERS



A. Interior Latex Primer/Sealer

B. Primer, Bonding, Solvent Based.

2.4 METAL PRIMERS

A. Primer, Alkyd, Anti-Corrosive, for Metal.

B. Primer, Alkyd, Quick Dry, for Metal.

C. Primer, Galvanized, Water Based.

2.5 WATER-BASED PAINTS

A. High-Performance Architectural Latex (Satin)

B. Latex, Interior, Flat, (Gloss Level 1).

C. Latex, Interior, (Gloss Level 3).

D. Latex, Interior, Semi-Gloss, (Gloss Level 5).

2.6 SOLVENT-BASED PAINTS

A. Alkyd Enamel, Semi-Gloss, (Gloss Level 5).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.

C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth.

D. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.

E. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.



B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.

D. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer, if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer but not less than the following: 1. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

E. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.

F. Gypsum Board Substrates: Do not begin paint application until finishing compound is dry and sanded smooth.

G. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI Manual."

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before

final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.

3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces.

4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.

B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.



E. Painting exposed structure, Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work:

1. Paint the following work where exposed in equipment rooms:

a. Exposed steel structure (main structural steel and cold-rolled materials). b. Equipment, including panelboards. c. Uninsulated metal piping. d. Pipe hangers and supports.

2. Paint the following work where exposed in occupied spaces: a. Exposed Metal Duct Work. b. Equipment, including panelboards. c. Uninsulated metal piping. d. Insulated piping jacket. e. Pipe hangers and supports.

3. Paint portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets that are visible from occupied spaces.


A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.

1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint

manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations.



B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

3.6 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Exposed metal ductwork Substrates:

1. Latex over Alkyd Primer System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, anti-corrosive, for metal or primer, alkyd, quick dry, for metal.



b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, semi-gloss, (Gloss Level 5).

B. Galvanized-Metal Substrates:

1. Latex over Waterborne Primer System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized, water based. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, semi-gloss, (Gloss Level 5).

C. Steel Doors and Frames:

1. Alkyd System:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, anti-corrosive, alkyd for steel doors and frames. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Alkyd, exterior, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5).

D. Gypsum Board Substrates:

1. Latex System:

a. Prime Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat @ ceilings: Latex, interior, flat, (Gloss Level 1). d. Topcoat @ walls: Latex, interior, (Gloss Level 3).



WOOD STAINS AND TRANSPARENT FINISHES 09931 - 1

SECTION 09931 - WOOD STAINS AND TRANSPARENT FINISHES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of wood finishes on the following substrates:

1. Interior Substrates:

a. Dressed lumber (finish carpentry).

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 9 Section "Exterior Painting" for surface preparation and application of paint systems on

exterior substrates. 2. Division 9 Section "Interior Painting" for surface preparation and application of paint systems on

interior substrates.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated.

C. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:

1. Cross-reference to finish system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.

2. Printout of MPI's current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in Part 2, with the product proposed for use highlighted.


A. MPI Standards:

1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in its "MPI Approved Products List."

2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" for products and finish systems indicated.







A. Apply finishes only when temperature of surfaces to be finished and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F (10 and 35 deg C).

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix) as materials applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Quantity: Furnish an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) of each material and color applied.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL


1. Provide materials for use within each finish system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a finish system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in finish system and on substrate indicated.

B. Stain Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.2 WOOD FILLERS

A. Wood Filler Paste: MPI #91.

2.3 PRIMERS AND SEALERS

A. Alkyd Sanding Sealer: MPI #102.

2.4 STAINS

A. Interior Wood Stain (Semitransparent): MPI #90.

2.5 VARNISHES



A. Interior Varnish (Semigloss): MPI #74, Gloss Level 5, alkyd type.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work.

1. Maximum Moisture Content of Wood Substrates: 15 percent when measured with an electronic moisture meter.

2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes.

3. Begin finish application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry.

4. Beginning application of finish system constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrate and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.

B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be finished. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and finishing.

1. After completing finishing operations, reinstall items that were removed; use workers skilled in the trades involved. Remove surface-applied protection if any.

C. Clean and prepare surfaces to be finished according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified.

1. Remove surface dirt, oil, or grease by washing with a detergent solution; rinse thoroughly with clean water and allow to dry. Remove grade stamps and pencil marks by sanding lightly. Remove loose wood fibers by brushing.

2. Remove mildew by scrubbing with a commercial wash formulated for mildew removal and as recommended by stain manufacturer.

3. Countersink steel nails, if used, and fill with putty tinted to final color to eliminate rust leach stains.

D. Apply wood filler paste to open-grain woods, as defined in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual," to produce smooth, glasslike finish.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply finishes according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for finish and substrate indicated. 2. Finish surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces.



B. Apply finishes to produce surface films without cloudiness, holidays, lap marks, brush marks, runs, ropiness, or other surface imperfections.


A. Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at any time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when finishes are being applied:

1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample finish materials being used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor.

2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying finishes if test results show materials being used do

not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying materials from Project site, pay for testing, and refinish surfaces finished with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously finished surfaces if, on refinishing with complying materials, the two finishes are incompatible.



B. After completing finish application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered materials by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from finish application. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced finished wood surfaces.

3.6 INTERIOR WOOD-FINISH-SYSTEM SCHEDULE

A. Finish Carpentry Substrates:

1. Alkyd Varnish Over Stain and Sealer System: MPI INT 6.3D.

a. Stain Coat: Interior wood stain (semitransparent). b. Seal Coat: Alkyd sanding sealer. c. Two Finish Coats: Interior varnish (semigloss).



SIGNS 10431 - 1

SECTION 10431 - SIGNS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Panel signs. 2. Signage accessories.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 1 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary project identification signs.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of sign.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, and large-scale sections of typical members and other components. Show mounting methods, grounds, mounting heights, layout, spacing, reinforcement, accessories, and installation details.

1. Provide message list for each sign, including large-scale details of wording, lettering, graphics and braille layout.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sign material indicated that involves color selection.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain each sign type through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and with code provisions as adopted by authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Interior Code Signage: Provide signage as required by accessibility regulations and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. These include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Illuminated Exit Signs: Refer to Division 16. b. Signs for Accessible Spaces as indicated in Signage Schedule in Part 3 of the Section.



SIGNS 10431 - 2

A. Field Measurements: Where sizes of signs are determined by dimensions of surfaces on which they are installed, verify dimensions by field measurement before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. For signs supported by or anchored to permanent construction, advise installers of anchorage devices about specific requirements for placement of anchorage devices and similar items to be used for attaching signs.

1. For signs supported by or anchored to permanent construction, furnish templates for installation of anchorage devices.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide “CW Series” as manufactured by BAYUK GRAPHIC SYSTEMS, INC., 5005 Old Lincoln Highway, Parkersburg, PA 19365, Phone: (717) 442-0274, Fax: (717) 442-1289 or a comparable product by one of the following:

1. Best Sign Systems Inc. 2. Gemini Incorporated. 3. Innerface Sign Systems, Inc. 4. Mohawk Sign Systems.

B. Interior Panel Signs: Provide smooth sign panel surfaces constructed to remain flat under installed conditions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) measured diagonally from corner to corner, complying with the following requirements:

1. Two Laminated, Acrylic Sheet Panels: a. Face Panel: Clear, non-glare, acrylic, 1/8” thick b. Backer Panel: Opaque, colored, 1/16” thick.

2. Edge Condition: Square cut. 3. Corner Condition: Rounded to 1/2” radius 4. Mounting: Unframed.

a. Wall mounted with Two-faced tape at interior signs and concealed mechanical anchors at exterior signs.

b. Manufacturer's standard anchors for substrates encountered. 5. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 6. Tactile Characters: Characters and Grade 2 Braille raised 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) above surface with

contrasting colors.

C. Changeable Message Inserts: Fabricate signs to allow insertion of changeable messages in the form of slide-in inserts with paper inserts printed by Owner.

D. Tactile and Braille Sign: Manufacturer's standard process for producing text and symbols complying with ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and with ICC/ANSI A117.1. Text shall be accompanied by Grade 2 Braille. Produce precisely formed characters with square-cut edges free from burrs and cut marks; Braille dots with domed or rounded shape.

1. Panel Material: Clear acrylic sheet with opaque color backing sheet. 2. Raised-Copy Thickness: Not less than 1/16 inch.


SIGNS 10431 - 3

E. Colored Coatings for Acrylic Sheet: For copy and background colors, provide colored coatings, including inks, dyes, and paints, that are recommended by acrylic manufacturers for optimum adherence to acrylic surface and are UV and water resistant for five years for application intended. 1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Mounting Methods: Use concealed fasteners fabricated from materials that are not corrosive to sign material and mounting surface.

B. Anchors and Inserts: Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance.

2.3 FINISHES, GENERAL


B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B. Verify that items, including anchor inserts, provided under other sections of Work are sized and located to accommodate signs.

C. Examine supporting members to ensure that surfaces are at elevations indicated or required to comply with authorities having jurisdiction and are free from dirt and other deleterious matter.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Locate signs and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of types described and complying with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance.

2. Interior Wall Signs: Install signs on walls adjacent to latch side of door where applicable. Where not indicated or possible, such as double doors, install signs on nearest adjacent walls. Locate to allow approach within 3 inches (75 mm) of sign without encountering protruding objects or standing within swing of door.


SIGNS 10431 - 4

B. Wall-Mounted Signs: Comply with sign manufacturer's written instructions except where more stringent requirements apply.

1. Two-Face Tape: Mount signs to smooth, nonporous surfaces. Do not use this method for vinyl-covered or rough surfaces.

2. Signs Mounted on Glass: Provide matching opaque plate on opposite side of glass to conceal mounting materials. Mount Signs using double sided tape to glass surfaces.


A. After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Protect signs from damage until acceptance by Owner.

3.4 SIGNAGE SCHEDULE – See Drawings



BUILDING PLAQUE 10432 - 1

SECTION 10432 – BUILDING PLAQUE

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Cast-metal plaque installed where indicated by Architect.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 10 Section "Signs" for panel signs.


A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative of signage manufacturer for installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.


A. Field Measurements: Where sizes of signs are determined by dimensions of surfaces on which they are installed, verify dimensions by field measurement before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. For plaques supported by or anchored to permanent construction, advise installers of anchorage devices about specific requirements for placement of anchorage devices and similar items to be used for attaching signs.

1. For plaques supported by or anchored to permanent construction, furnish templates for installation of anchorage devices.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CAST-METAL PLAQUES

A. General: Provide castings free from pits, scale, sand holes, and other defects. Comply with requirements specified for metal, border style, background texture, and finish and in required thickness, size, shape, and copy.

B. Available Manufacturers:



1. A.R.K. Ramos. 2. Metal Arts; Div. of L&H Mfg.

C. Bronze Castings: ASTM B 584, alloy UNS No. C83600 (No. 1 manganese bronze).

D. Border Style: Projected bevel.

E. Background Texture: Manufacturer's standard leatherette finish.

F. Mounting: Concealed studs, noncorroding for substrates encountered.

G. Size: 36” x 24”

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Anchors and Inserts: Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or lead expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work.

2.3 FINISHES, GENERAL


B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

2.4 COPPER-ALLOY FINISHES

A. Cast-Bronze Plaque Finishes: Exposed surfaces free from porosity, burrs, and rough spots; with returns finished with fine-grain air blast.

1. Raised Areas: Hand-tool and buff borders and raised copy to produce manufacturer's standard satin finish.

B. Clear Protective Coating: Coat exposed surfaces of copper alloys with manufacturer's standard clear organic coating specially designed for coating copper-alloy products.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.



B. Verify that items, including anchor inserts, provided under other sections of Work are sized and located to accommodate plaque.

C. Examine supporting members and blocking to ensure that surfaces are at elevations indicated or required to comply with authorities having jurisdiction and are free from dirt and other deleterious matter.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate plaque where indicated, using mounting methods of types described and in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated, with sign surfaces free from distortion and other defects in appearance.

B. Cast-Metal Plaques: Mount plaques using standard fastening methods recommended in writing by manufacturer for type of wall surface indicated.

C. Concealed Mounting: Mount plaques by inserting threaded studs into tapped lugs on back of plaque.


A. After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Protect signs from damage until acceptance by Owner.

3.4 PLAQUE SCHEDULE

A. NOTE: Exact text for Metal Plaque will be provided by Architect. Plaque will generally include: 1. Calcasieu Parish Sheriffs Office – Digital copy of Logo will be provided by Architect 2. Name of Project 3. Year of Construction 4. Sheriff's Name 5. Architect’s Company Name 6. Consulting Engineer's Company Names 7. General Contractor’s Name



FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 10522 - 1

SECTION 10522 - FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Fire protection cabinets (Fire-rated and Non-Rated) for the following:

a. Portable fire extinguishers.

B. Related Sections: 1. Division 10 Section "Fire Extinguishers."

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire protection cabinets.

1. Fire Protection Cabinets: Include roughing-in dimensions, details showing mounting methods, relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and panel style.

B. Shop Drawings: For fire protection cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of fire protection cabinet indicated.

D. Product Schedule: For fire protection cabinets. Coordinate final fire protection cabinet schedule with fire extinguisher schedule to ensure proper fit and function.


A. Fire-Rated, Fire Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements in ASTM E 814 for fire-resistance rating of walls where they are installed. 1. Verify rating of walls where cabinets are to be installed with Architect prior to installation.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size of fire protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated are accommodated.



B. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire protection cabinets with wall depths.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304.

2.2 FIRE PROTECTION CABINET 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers that may be incorporated into

the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. J. L. Industries, Inc., a division of Activar Construction Products Group. b. Larsen's Manufacturing Company c. Modern Metal Products, Division of Technico Inc. d. Moon-American e. Potter Roemer LLC

B. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher.

C. Cabinet Construction: Nonrated or fire rated depending on wall installation location.

1. Fire-Rated Cabinets: Construct fire-rated cabinets with double walls fabricated from 0.0428-inch- (1.1-mm-) thick, cold-rolled steel sheet lined with minimum 5/8-inch- (16-mm-) thick, fire-barrier material. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes.

D. Cabinet Material: Stainless-steel sheet.

E. Semirecessed Cabinet: Cabinet box partially recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit style of trim indicated; with one-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend). Provide where walls are of insufficient depth for recessed cabinets but are of sufficient depth to accommodate semirecessed cabinet installation.

1. Rolled-Edge Trim: 2-1/2-inch (64-mm) backbend depth.

F. Cabinet Trim Material: Stainless-steel sheet.

G. Door Material: Stainless-steel sheet.

H. Door Style: Solid Stainless steel panel with frame.

I. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated.

1. Provide recessed door pull and friction latch. 2. Provide concealed hinge permitting door to open 180 degrees.

J. Accessories: 1. Lettered Door Handle: One-piece, cast-iron door handle with the word "FIRE" embossed into

face.

K. Finishes:



1. Stainless Steel: No. 4.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Fire Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub) with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated.

1. Weld joints and grind smooth. 2. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes.

B. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials indicated and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected.

1. Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow-metal design, minimum 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick.

2. Miter and weld perimeter door frames.

C. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth.

2.4 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS


B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces of fire protection cabinets from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Finish fire protection cabinets after assembly.

D. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

2.5 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES

A. Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish.

B. Polished Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross scratches.

1. Run grain of directional finishes with long dimension of each piece. 2. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and

leave surfaces chemically clean. 3. Directional Satin Finish: No. 4.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where semirecessed cabinets will be installed.




3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare recesses for semirecessed fire protection cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install fire protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights indicated below:

1. Fire Protection Cabinets: 54 inches (1372 mm) above finished floor to top of cabinet.

B. Fire Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb.


A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire protection cabinets are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.

B. Adjust fire protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly.

C. On completion of fire protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.

D. Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire protection cabinets that cannot be restored to factory-finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by fire protection cabinet and mounting bracket manufacturers.

E. Replace fire protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.



FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 10523 - 1

SECTION 10523 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers.


1. Division 10 Section "Fire Extinguisher Cabinets."

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rating and classification, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire extinguisher.

B. Product Schedule: For fire extinguishers. Coordinate final fire extinguisher schedule with fire protection cabinet schedule to ensure proper fit and function.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers to include in maintenance manuals.


A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers."

B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Provide fire extinguishers approved, listed, and labeled by FMG.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire protection cabinets to ensure fit and function.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:



a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10. b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers.

2. Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire protection cabinet indicated.


a. J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar Construction Products Group. b. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. c. Potter Roemer LLC.

2. Handles and Levers: Stainless steel. 3. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, Appendix B and

bar coding for documenting fire extinguisher location, inspections, maintenance, and recharging.

B. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type in Aluminum Container 3-A:40-B:C, 6-lb (2.7-kg) nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in enameled-aluminum container.

2.2 MOUNTING BRACKETS FOR EXTINGUISHERS NOT INSTALLED IN CABINETS

A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard galvanized steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or red baked-enamel finish.

1. Manufacturers: a. J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar Construction Products Group. b. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. c. Potter Roemer LLC.

B. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect.

1. Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in red letter decals applied to mounting surface.

a. Orientation: Vertical.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.

1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers.




3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install fire extinguishers in locations indicated and in compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.



TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10801 - 1

SECTION 10801 - TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. Under-lavatory guards, shower curtains, curtain rings and grab bard attached to pre-fabricated shower unit are specified in the Mechanical documents and/or drawings.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Public-use washroom and shower room accessories.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories.

B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying the Work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.0312-inch (0.8-mm) minimum nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.

C. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamper-and-theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed.

2.2 PUBLIC-USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES

A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for accessories is based on products indicated. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. Bradley Corporation. 2. GAMCO



B. Toilet Tissue (Roll) Dispenser TP-1: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: BRADLEY Model No. 5402 2. Description: Roll-in-reserve dispenser with hinged front secured with tumbler lockset. 3. Mounting: Surface mounted. 4. Operation: Molded polyethylene spindle; core cannot be removed until roll is empty. 5. Capacity: Designed for regular diameter tissue rolls. 6. Material and Finish: 22 gauge Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).

C. Grab Bar GB-1 & GB-2: 1. Basis of Design Product: BRADLEY 812 series 2. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners. 3. Material: Stainless steel, 0.05 inch (1.3 mm) thick.

a. Finish: Smooth, No. 4, satin finish on ends and slip-resistant texture in grip area. 4. Outside Diameter: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). 5. Configuration and Length:

a. GB-#1: Straight, 36 inches long. b. GB-#2: Straight, 42 inches long.

D. Mirror Unit MR-#1: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: BRADLEY Model No. 781-2436 2. Material and finish: Tempered Glass, with Stainless Steel Frame. 3. Hangers: Provide rigid, tamper-resistant installation, using included tamper resistant mounting

screws. 4. Size: 24” w. X 36” tall.

E. Liquid-Soap Dispenser SD-1: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: BRADLEY Model No. 6542. 2. Description: Designed for dispensing soap in liquid or lotion form. 3. Mounting: Horizontally oriented, surface mounted. 4. Capacity: 40 oz. 5. Materials: 20 gauge stainless steel (No. 4 satin finish). 6. Lock: Lockable Filler hole with special key provided. 7. Refill Indicator: Window type sight gauge.

F. Towel Shelf TS-1: 1. Basis of Design: BRADLEY Model #9104 2. 8" deep shelf 3. Mounting: Surface with vandal resistant escutcheons. 4. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 satin finish

G. Towel/Robe Hook TH-1: 1. Basis of Design: BRADLEY Model #9124 2. Double Hook configuration 3. Mounting: Surface with vandal resistant escutcheons. 4. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 satin finish

H. Shower Curtain Rod & Curtain SWR-1: 1. Rod Description: 1-1/4-inch (32-mm) OD; fabricated from nominal 0.05-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick

stainless steel. 2. Rod Mounting Flanges: Stainless-steel flanges designed for exposed fasteners. 3. Rod Finish: No. 4 (satin). 4. Curtain Size: Minimum 12 inches (305mm) wider than opening by 72 inches (1828 mm) high.

2.3 FABRICATION



A. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage and with corrosion-resistant backing plates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.

B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf (1112 N), when tested according to method in ASTM F 446.

C. Provide keys for all locked toilet accessory units to Owner through Architect at project completion.


A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items.

B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.

C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations.



HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 12492-1

SECTION 12492 - HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Horizontal louver blinds with polymer slats.


1. Section 06100 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking and grounds for mounting horizontal louver blinds and accessories.



B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type and color of horizontal louver blind.

1. Include similar Samples of accessories involving color selection.


A. Deliver horizontal louver blinds in factory packages, marked with manufacturer, product name, and location of installation using same designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install horizontal louver blinds until construction and wet and finish work in spaces, including painting, is complete and dry and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

B. Field Measurements: Where horizontal louver blinds are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operating hardware of operable glazed units through entire operating range. Notify Architect of installation conditions that vary from Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain horizontal louver blinds from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS, POLYMER SLATS


1. Hunter Douglas. 2. Levolor, a Newell Rubbermaid Company

B. Slats: Polymers that are lead free, UV stabilized, integrally colored, opaque, and will not crack or yellow; antistatic, dust-repellent treated.

1. Formulation: Polymer/wood composite. 2. Width: 2 inches. 3. Thickness: 0.150 inch. 4. Spacing: Manufacturer's standard. 5. Profile: Manufacturer's standard.

C. Headrail: Formed steel or extruded aluminum; long edges returned or rolled. Headrail fully encloses operating mechanisms on three sides and ends.

1. Capacity: One blind per headrail unless otherwise indicated. 2. Manual Lift Mechanism:

a. Lift-Cord Lock: Variable; stops lift cord at user-selected position within full operating range.

b. Operator: Extension of lift cord(s) through lift-cord lock mechanism to form cord pull.

3. Manual Tilt Mechanism: Enclosed worm-gear mechanism and linkage rod that adjusts ladders.

a. Tilt: Full. b. Operator: Clear-plastic wand. c. Over-Rotation Protection: Manufacturer's detachable operator or slip clutch to

prevent over rotation of gear.

4. Manual Lift-Operator and Tilt-Operator Lengths: Manufacturer's standard 5. Manual Lift-Operator and Tilt-Operator Locations: Manufacturer's standard unless

otherwise indicated.

D. Bottom Rail: Secures and protects ends of ladders and lift cords.

1. Type: Manufacturers standard.

E. Lift Cord: Manufacturer's standard braided cord.



F. Ladders: Evenly spaced across headrail at spacing that prevents long-term slat sag.

1. Type: Braided cord.

G. Valance: Manufacturer's standard.

H. Mounting Brackets: With spacers and shims required for blind placement and alignment indicated.

1. Type: Wall or Overhead. 2. Intermediate Support: Provide intermediate support brackets to produce support spacing

recommended by blind manufacturer for weight and size of blind.

I. Colors, Textures, Patterns, and Gloss:

1. Slats: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors and textures including premium selections.

2. Components: Provide rails, cords, ladders, and materials exposed to view matching or coordinating with slat color unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLIND FABRICATION

A. Product Safety Standard: Fabricate horizontal louver blinds to comply with WCMA A 100.1 including requirements for corded, flexible, looped devices; lead content of components; and warning labels.

B. Unit Sizes: Fabricate units in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows, measured at 74 deg F :

1. Between (Inside) Jamb Installation: Width equal to jamb-to-jamb dimension of opening in which blind is installed less 1/4 inch per side or 1/2 inch total, plus or minus 1/8 inch . Length equal to head-to-sill dimension of opening in which blind is installed less 1/4 inch , plus or minus 1/8 inch .

C. Concealed Components: Noncorrodible or corrosion-resistant-coated materials.

1. Lift-and-Tilt Mechanisms: With permanently lubricated moving parts.

D. Mounting and Intermediate Brackets: Designed for removal and reinstallation of blind without damaging blind and adjacent surfaces, for supporting blind components, and for bracket positions and blind placement indicated.

E. Installation Fasteners: No fewer than two fasteners per bracket, fabricated from metal noncorrosive to brackets and adjoining construction; type designed for securing to supporting substrate; and supporting blinds and accessories under conditions of normal use.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, and other conditions affecting performance.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install horizontal louver blinds level and plumb, aligned and centered on openings, and aligned with adjacent units according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Locate so exterior slat edges are not closer than 1 inch from interior faces of glass and not closer than 1/2 inch from interior faces of glazing frames through full operating ranges of blinds.

2. Install mounting and intermediate brackets as required to prevent deflection of headrails. 3. Install with clearances that prevent interference with adjacent blinds, adjacent

construction, and operating hardware of glazed openings, other window treatments, and similar building components and furnishings.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust horizontal louver blinds to operate free of binding or malfunction through full operating ranges.


A. Clean horizontal louver blind surfaces after installation according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer and that ensures that horizontal louver blinds are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

C. Replace damaged horizontal louver blinds that cannot be repaired in a manner approved by Architect before time of Substantial Completion.


SECTION 15000 - MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS

RELATED DOCUMENTS

The general provisions of the Contract, including the Conditions of the Contract (General,Supplementary, and other Conditions, Division 0) and Division 1 as appropriate, apply tothe Work specified in this Section.

Refer to Division 15, Mechanical, as well as the Specifications for the other various trades and materials andbe thoroughly familiar with all provisions regarding mechanical work.

SCOPE OF WORK

Furnish all labor and material necessary to provide and install the complete mechanical portion of thisContract, including plumbing, air conditioning, heating and ventilating systems as called for herein and onaccompanying drawings. Parts of the mechanical division may be bid separately or in combination, at theContractor's option; however, it shall be the responsibility of the General Contractor to assure himself that allitems covered in the Mechanical Division have been included if he chooses to accept separate bids.

It is the intent of this specification that all Division 15 materials with temperatures below ambient conditionsor conveying any fluid/gas at temperatures below 70 deg. F be insulated to completely eliminate the potentialfor condensation. Unless specified elsewhere in these specifications, for materials that do not require access,insulate with 2" thick 1# density fiberglass duct wrap insulation with foil face (seal all joints air and water tight). For materials requiring occasional access, use 2" thick closed cell rubberized insulation with re-sealable fabricjoints (hook and loop type). Contractor shall refer to the Architectural and Structural drawings and install equipment, piping, etc. to meetbuilding and space requirements. No equipment shall be bid on or submitted for approval if it will not fit in thespace provided.

It is the intention of these specifications that all mechanical systems shall be furnished complete with allnecessary valves, controls, insulation, piping devices, equipment, etc. necessary to provide a satisfactoryinstallation that is complete and in good working order. The HVAC system shall ensure that under allcircumstances, the building shall be kept at temperatures and indoor space relative humidities that whencompared to outside temperatures and relative humidities protect building finishes installed under this contractand/or existing floor, wall and ceiling finishes within the building from damage due to excessive temperatureor humidity. HVAC system shall ensure that building remain under a slight positive pressure and shall alarmin the event of a negative pressure condition. In addition Contractor shall provide training to Owner in regardto the need for space temperature and humidity control whenever the outdoor dew point (wetbulb temperature)exceed 62.5 deg. F and freeze protection procedures whenever the outdoor temperature (drybulbtemperature) drops below 32 deg. F. Contractor shall obtain written sign-off on the part of the Owner to thereceipt of all training including the above and all required training referenced hereafter, throughout thesespecifications. Failure to obtain this sign-off shall be constructed as evidence that proper training was notgiven.

Contractor shall visit the site and acquaint himself thoroughly with all existing facilities and conditions whichwould affect his portion of the work. Failure to do so shall not relieve the Contractor from the responsibilityof installing his work to meet the conditions.

This Contractor shall protect the entire system and all parts thereof from injury throughout the project and upto acceptance of the work. Failure to do so shall be sufficient cause for the Architect to reject any piece ofequipment.

15000-1

Brittany

Typewritten Text

Addition and Renovations to Office Building for Calcasieu Parish Sheriffs Office Lake Charles, Louisiana

DEMOLITION

The contractor shall visit the site prior to bid to determine the extent of work required to complete the project.

Contractor shall coordinate demolition with owner. All equipment shall be salvaged for owner. Locateequipment as directed by owner. All equipment and materials not salvaged by the owner shall be removedfrom the site and discarded at the contractors expense.

Contractor shall coordinate all work with general contractor and phase work as required by project.

All equipment piping, etc. required to be removed to accommodate the modifications shall be removed.

Contractor shall maintain services to existing facilities which shall remain during and after construction iscomplete.

Contractor shall coordinate any shutdown of services with the owner. It is intended that the building willremain occupied during construction. Contractor shall schedule shut down of services with the owner in orderto prevent disruption of building occupancy.

Contractor shall be responsible for draining down of existing systems to complete demolition. All work shallbe scheduled with the owner. Contractor shall also be responsible for refilling system and removing all air inorder to return the systems to proper operating conditions. All shutdown of services shall be done at night during a time period approved by owner. The systems shall be required to be back up and running each morning unless otherwise approved by the owner.

GROUNDS AND CHASES

This Contractor shall see that all required chases, grounds, holes and accessories necessary for theinstallation of his work are properly built in as the work progresses; otherwise, he shall bear the cost ofproviding them.

CUTTING AND PATCHING

Initial cutting and patching shall be the responsibility of the General Contractor, with the Mechanical Contractorbeing responsible for laying out and marking any and all holes required for the reception of his work. Nostructural beams or joists shall be cut or thimbled without first receiving the approval of the Architect. Afterinitial surfacing has been done, any further cutting, patching and painting shall be done at this Contractor'sexpense.

FILL AND CHARGES FOR EQUIPMENT

Fill and charge with materials or chemicals all those devices or equipment as required to comply with themanufacturer's guarantee or as required for proper operation of the equipment.

BIDDING REQUIREMENTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES

Prime bidder is responsible for all work , of all trades and sub-contractors bidding this project. It is the primebidders responsibility, prior to submitting a bid to ensure that sub-contractors coordinate all aspects of thework between trades, sub-contractors, etc. to the fullest extent possible.

Prime bidder shall ensure that all sub-contractors, suppliers, equipment vendors, etc., obtain all necessaryand pertinent contract document information pertaining to their work prior to the submission of a bid. Contractor shall realize that different sub-contractors may furnish equipment, accessories, devices, etc.

15000-2

necessary for a complete and working installation, that require provision of services by another sub-contractoror trade.

Bidders of all or any portions of this section or division are required to review all contract documents includingbut not limited to Architectural drawings, Structural drawings, Mechanical drawings, Plumbing drawings,Electrical drawings, etc. to coordinate requirements and responsibilities with and through prime bidder.

Bidders of all or any portions of this section or division, by furnishing a bid on a portion of the prime contractare indicating that they have received all contract documents and coordinated services provided under theirportion of the work with the prime bidder; they are indicating that they have expressed any pertinent questions(which would result from a detailed, thorough review of the entire set of contract documents) to the primebidder in accordance with Division 1 requirements, prior to bidding.

All timely, pertinent, questions provided in writing prior to bids, in accordance with Division 1 requirements,will be clarified, defined, or otherwise explained in a written addendum and/or addendums prior to bids, inaccordance in Division 1 requirements.

It is not the intention of these contract documents to leave any issue relating to coordination between tradesor sub-contractors vaguely defined. The intention is to define all issues, coordination matters, equipmentrequirements, sizes, routing, etc. to the satisfaction of the prime bidder, prior to receipt of bids.Bidders of all or any portions of this section or division, by virtue of the submission of a bid to the prime bidder,are indicating that they have reviewed the entire set of contract documents with due diligence and regard forthe Owner's desire for a comprehensive and complete bid proposal; that they have expressed all concernsor questions requiring clarification on matters of coordination between trades and/or sub-contractors; that theyhave expressed any such concerns or questions in writing in accordance with Division 1 requirements.

Prime bidders, by submission of a comprehensive bid on the project are indicating that the subcontractorsselected in their bid have complied with all Division 1 requirements, that they have indicated in writing, priorto bidding, all questions or concerns requiring clarification and/or explanation and have documented any andall specific exclusions involving work that would generally be considered to be work of their trade. The primebidder shall coordinate all work so that anything excluded by the bidder of all or any portions of this sectionor division, have been addressed prior to bids in one of the following manners:

1. The work has been confirmed, by the prime bidder, to be work of another trade or subcontractor(whose proposal is also being accepted).

2. Clarification of the matter has been made through the prime design professional via writtenaddendum and is clearly and mutually understood by the prime bidder and the party raising theissue/question, or seeking clarification.

3. The work has been accepted as the responsibility of the prime contractor directly.

MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT

The term "provide" when used in the Contract Documents includes all items necessary for the properexecution and completion of the Work.

Specific reference in the Specifications to any article, device, product, material, fixture, form or type ofconstruction by name, make or catalog number, shall be interpreted as establishing a standard of quality andshall not be construed as limiting competition; and the Contractor, in such cases, may at his option use anyarticle, device, product, material, fixture, form or type of construction which in the judgement of the Architectexpressed in writing is equal to that specified.

Coordinate and properly relate all Work of this Division to building structure and work of all other trades.

15000-3

Visit premises and become thoroughly familiar with existing conditions; verify all dimensions in field. AdviseArchitect of any discrepancies prior to Bid Date in accordance with Division 0.

Do not rough-in for any item or equipment furnished by others or noted "Not in Contract" (NIC), without firstreceiving rough-in information from physically examining the existing equipment, receiving specific cut sheetinformation from the Owner’s representative, other trades and/or Architect. Rough-in services for “NIC”equipment as required, as the work progresses.

Provide storage and protection for all equipment and materials in accordance with requirements of Division0 and Division 1. Replace any equipment and materials damaged by improper handling, storage, orprotection, at no additional cost to Owner.

Keep premises clean in accordance with requirements of Division 0 and Division 1.

SUBSTITUTIONS

Substitutions are only allowed by approval of the Architect prior to Bid Date as stipulated in Division 0 and/orDivision 1.

Design of systems is based on specific equipment. If the use of other manufacturer's equipment, even thoughapproved by Architect, involves additional cost due to space requirements, foundation requirements, increasedmechanical or electrical services, the cost of such extra work shall be borne by manufacturer of substitutedequipment. Even though a manufacturer's name appears in the Contract Documents as having acceptableequipment, their equipment with different model numbers shall be classified as being a substitute to theequipment originally designed for and named in the Contract Documents. Substitute equipment, materials,etc., will not be allowed to deviate from Contract Document requirements. Furnish all options specified orreasonably implied from the contract documents. Specifically identify any variance is regard to submittalversus specified performance on the cover sheet of each submittal.

DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS

The specific intent of these Contract Documents is to provide the various systems, equipment, etc. to theOwner complete and in a thoroughly calibrated functional condition.

The Drawings shall not be construed as shop drawings. In the event of a possible interference with piping orequipment of another trade, items requiring set grade and elevations shall have precedence over other itemsShould any major interference develop, immediately notify the Architect.

In laying out Work, refer to mechanical, electrical, structural, and architectural drawings at all times in orderto avoid interference and undue delays in the progress of the Work.

Furnish all plumbing fixtures (with required accessories) shown on either the plumbing drawings or thearchitectural drawings. Review Architectural casework elevations and identify fixtures indicated. Providefixtures indicated. Rough-in for all fixtures as work progress. Verify prior to fixture shop drawing submittal.

CODES AND REGULATIONS

Work shall be in full accord with the most stringent interpretation of the State Sanitary Code, local ordinances,building codes, and other applicable national, local, and state regulations.

Equipment shall conform to requirements and recommendations of the National bureau of Fire Underwritersand National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).

15000-4

Items provided under this Division shall comply with the American National Standards Institute (ANSI)"Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by Physically HandicappedPeople," ANSI A 117.1

In the possible event of conflict between codes or regulations and Contract Documents, the most stringentinterpretation of either shall govern (provided if exceeds the requirements of other codes. In the event of anirreconcilable difference between codes or regulations notify the Architect/Engineer immediately.

In addition to the codes heretofore mentioned, all mechanical work and equipment shall conform to theapplicable portions of the following specifications, codes and/or regulations:

1. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) 2. National Electrical Code (NEC)3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)4. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)5. American Gas Association(AGA)6. Southern Building Code (SSBC)7. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)

All materials, equipment and accessories installed under this Contract shall conform to all rules, codes, etc.as recommended by National Associations governing the manufacturer, rating and testing of such materials,equipment and accessories. All materials shall be new and of the best quality and first class in every respect. Whenever directed by the Architect, the Contractor shall submit a sample for approval before proceeding.

Where laws or local regulations provide that certain accessories such as gauges, thermometers, relief valvesand parts be installed on equipment, it shall be understood that such equipment be furnished complete withthe necessary accessories, whether or not called for in these Specifications.

All unfired and fired pressure vessels shall be built in accordance with the A.S.M.E. Code and so stamped. Furnish shop certificates for each vessel. Contractor shall provide and pay for first operating certificate asper State Fire Marshal Regulations.

FEES, PERMITS, AND TAXES

Obtain and pay for permits required for the Work of this Division. Pay fees in connection therewith, includingnecessary inspection fees.

Pay any and taxes levied for Work of this Division, including municipal and/or state sales tax where applicable.

All permits, fees, certificates, etc. for the installation, inspections, plan review, service connections locations,and/or construction of the work which are required by any authority and/or agencies having jurisdiction, shallbe obtained and paid for by the Contractor.

The Contractor shall make all tests required by the Architect, Engineer or other governing authorities at noadditional cost to the Owner.

The Contractor shall notify the Architect and local governing authorities before any tests are made, and thetests are not to be drawn off a line covered or insulated until examined and approved by the authorities. Inevent defects are found, these shall be corrected and the work shall be retested.

Prior to requesting final inspection by the Architect, the Contractor shall have a complete coordination andadjustment meeting of all of his sub-contractors directly responsible for the operation of any portion of thesystem. At the time of this meeting, each and every sequence of operation shall be checked to assure proper

15000-5

operation. Notify the Architect in writing ten (10) days prior to this meeting, instructing him of the time, dateand whom you are requesting to be present.

This project shall not be accepted until the above provisions are met to the satisfaction of the Architect.

MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS

Install and operate equipment and material in strict accord with manufacturer's installation and operatinginstructions. The manufacturer's instructions shall become part of the Contract Documents and shallsupplement Drawings and Specifications.

SUBMITTAL DATA

Submit shop drawings, project data, and samples in accordance with requirements of Division 0/and orDivision 1.

Shop drawings shall consist of published ratings or capacity data, detailed construction drawings for fabricateditems, wiring and control diagrams, performance curves, installation instructions, manufacturer's installationdrawings, and other pertinent data. Submit drawings showing revisions to equipment layouts due to use ofalternate or substitute equipment.

Where approved manufacturers and suppliers of equipment, materials, etc. are unable to fully comply withContract Document requirements, specifically call such deviations to attention of Architect on submittals. Typedeviations on a separate sheet; underlined statements or notations on standard brochures, equipment flysheets, etc. will not be accepted.

Approval of submittals shall not relieve Contractor from furnishing required quantities and verifyingdimensions. In addition, approval shall not waive original intent of Contract Documents.

Failure to obtain written approval of equipment shall be considered sufficient grounds for rejection of saidequipment regardless of the stage of completion of the project.

REVIEW OF MATERIALS:

Whenever manufacturers or trade names are mentioned in these Plans or Specifications, the words "orapproved equivalent" shall be assumed to follow whether or not so stated. Manufacturers or trade names areused to establish a standard of quality only, and should not be construed to infer a preference. Equivalentproducts which meet the Architect's approval will be accepted; however, these products must be submittedto the Architect a minimum of ten (10) days prior to the Bid Date.

Submission shall include the manufacturer's name, model number, rating table and construction features.

Upon receipt and checking of this submittal, the Architect will issue an addendum listing items which areapproved as equivalent to those specified. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL BASE HIS BID SOLELY ON THOSEITEMS SPECIFIED OR INCLUDED IN THE "PRIOR APPROVAL ADDENDUM", AS NO OTHER ITEM WILLBE ACCEPTABLE.

Prior approval of a particular piece of equipment does not mean automatic final acceptance and will not relievethe Contractor of the responsibility of assuring himself that this equipment is in complete accord with the Plansand Specifications and that it will fit into the space provided. Shop drawings must be submitted on all itemsof equipment for approval as hereinafter specified.

15000-6

Before proceeding with work and/or within thirty (30) days after the award of the General Contract for thiswork, the Mechanical Contractor shall furnish to the Architect complete shop and working drawings of suchapparatus, equipment, controls, insulation, etc. to be provided in this project. These drawings shall givedimensions, weights, mounting data, performance curves and other pertinent information.

The Architect's approval of shop drawings shall not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility of incorrectlyfigured dimensions or any other errors which may be contained in these drawings. Any omission from theshop drawings or specifications, even through approved by the Architect, shall not relieve the Contractor fromfurnishing and erecting same.

Seven (7) sets of shop drawings shall be submitted to the Architect for approval. These submittals shall besupplied as part of this Contractor's contract. Any drawings not approved shall be resubmitted until they areapproved. SUBMIT ALL SHOP DRAWINGS AT THE SAME TIME. NO SEPARATE ITEMS WILL BEACCEPTED.

Submit one (1) sepia with two (2) blueline prints of all mechanical room layouts showing locations of allequipment, piping, etc. to insure all will fit in space provided. Submit drawings at 1/4" scale.

VALUE ENGINEERING (V/E):

Value Engineering (V/E) defined: For purposes of Division 15 and 16 Specifications, in accordance with allDivision 1 Requirements and all Terms and Conditions of proposed contract between Owner and Contractor,Value Engineering (V/E) shall be defined as a “post bid” process, whereby the apparent low bidder (havingsubmitted a proposal in strict accordance with Project Contract Documents, that exceeds the Owner’savailable funds for construction [AFC] for this specified project) offers proposed changes (“ValueEngineering”) to the work. This proposed value engineering may alter or adjust aforementioned contractdocument requirements in exchange for financial and/or other consideration (in response to a specific requestby the Owner/Owner’s Representative).

Value Engineering may not be considered, prior to scheduled receipt and review of Bid Proposals by theOwner and an official written request from the Owner/Owner’s Representative expressing the Owner’s desireto consider value engineering items.

While it may be in the project Owner’s interest to consider the first cost money saving that may be generatedvia alternatives and options generated via participation in Value Engineering, Division 15 contractor shallrealize that substantive offers of Value Engineering (V/E), if accepted by the Owner, constitute a design-buildagreement (offer and acceptance) with the owner, and drastically change the design concept of the project,as developed by the Professional of Record identified on the Contract Documents.

Should contractor offer, and the owner accept value engineering options that alter aspects of the systemdesign, equipment, performance and/or performance verification or monitoring of respective systems, Division15 contractor shall provide duly licensed professional engineering consultants working on behalf of theDivision 15 contractor (including sub-contractors and equipment vendors/manufacturers) to review, approveand take professional responsibility for performance and suitability of V/E hybrid systems, materials oroperational changes related to respective V/E items. The Division 15 contractor’s licensed professionalengineering consultants and the Division 15 contractor assume any and all responsibility for the design andsuitability in terms of performance, of hybrid systems installed, as Division 15 contractor’s Professional ofRecord, absolving the original project Professional of Record (identified on the original Contract Documents,released for the original project Bid/Negotiation) from responsibility for the V/E hybrid systems portion of thework.

Division 15 contractor, via the offer and acceptance of value engineering items on the project agrees toprovide professional engineering design services and take full and complete responsibility for the hybrid

15000-7

design. Further, the Division 15 contractor’s (V/E Items)professional of record (either employees, orindependent consultants to the Division 15 contractor) through the offer and acceptance of V/E items, agreeto indemnify and hold harmless the project owner, the owner’s original A/E team (Professional of Record onbehalf of the owner for the original Contract Documents) their heirs and assigns in regard to the V/E changesand their impact on the Division 15 systems altered, affected or modified, in whole or in part. The Professionalof Record shown on the original Contract Documents in regard to the systems altered, adjusted, revised,modified or otherwise affected by the value engineering items implemented, shall be absolved of designresponsibility as a result of implementation of V/E items, and their original use of Engineering Seals used fororiginal Contract Documents, shall not apply.

While it may be in the project Owner’s interest to consider the first cost money saving that may be generatedvia alternatives and options generated via participation in Value Engineering, Division 15 contractor shallrealize that substantive offers of Value Engineering (V/E), if accepted by the Owner, constitute a design-buildagreement (offer and acceptance) with the owner, and drastically change the design concept of the project,as developed by the Professional of Record identified on the Contract Documents.

Should contractor offer, and the owner accept value engineering options that alter aspects of the systemdesign, equipment, performance and/or performance verification or monitoring of respective systems, Division15 contractor shall provide duly licensed professional engineering consultants working on behalf of theDivision 15 contractor (including sub-contractors and equipment vendors/manufacturers) to review, approveand take professional responsibility for performance and suitability of V/E hybrid systems, materials oroperational changes related to respective V/E items. The Division 15 contractor’s licensed professionalengineering consultants and the Division 15 contractor assume any and all responsibility for the design andsuitability in terms of performance, of hybrid systems installed, as Division 15 contractor’s Professional ofRecord, absolving the original project Professional of Record (identified on the original Contract Documents,released for the original project Bid/Negotiation) from responsibility for the V/E hybrid systems portion of thework.

Division 15 contractor, via the offer and acceptance of value engineering items on the project agrees toprovide professional engineering design services and take full and complete responsibility for the hybriddesign. Further, the Division 15 contractor’s (V/E Items)professional of record (either employees, orindependent consultants to the Division 15 contractor) through the offer and acceptance of V/E items, agreeto indemnify and hold harmless the project owner, the owner’s original A/E team (Professional of Record onbehalf of the owner for the original Contract Documents) their heirs and assigns in regard to the V/E changesand their impact on the Division 15 systems altered, affected or modified, in whole or in part. The Professionalof Record shown on the original Contract Documents in regard to the systems altered, adjusted, revised,modified or otherwise affected by the value engineering items implemented, shall be absolved of designresponsibility as a result of implementation of V/E items, and their original use of Engineering Seals used fororiginal Contract Documents, shall not apply.

PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

Keep Project Record Documents in accordance with requirements of Division 0 and/or Division 1.

During construction period, keep accurate records of installations made under this Division, paying particularattention to major interior and exterior underground and concealed piping, ductwork, etc.

The Contractor shall obtain at his cost, two sets of blueline prints of the original bid documents by theArchitect. One set shall be kept on the site with all information as referenced below, and shall update sameas the work progresses. The other set will be utilized to record all field changes to a permanent record copyfor the Owner.

15000-8

If the Contractor elects to vary from the Contract Documents and secures prior approval from the Architectfor any phase of the work, he shall record in a neat and readable manner, ALL such variances on the bluelineprint in red. The original bluelines shall be returned to the Architect for documentation.

All deviations from sizes, locations, and from all other features of the installations shown in the ContractDocuments shall be recorded.

In addition, it shall be possible using these drawings to correctly and easily locate, identify and establish sizesof all piping, directions and the like, as well as other features of the work which will be concealed undergroundand/or in the finished building.

Locations of underground work shall be established by dimensions to columns, lines or walls, locating allturns, etc., and by properly referenced centerline or invert elevations and rates of fall.

For work concealed in the building, sufficient information shall be given so it can be located with reasonableaccuracy and ease. In some cases this may be by dimension. In others, it may be sufficient to illustrate thework on the drawings in relation to the spaces in the building near which it was actually installed. TheArchitect's/Engineer's decision in this matter will be final.

The following requirements apply to all "As-Built" drawings:

1. They shall be maintained at the Contractor's expense.2. All such drawings shall be done carefully and neatly, and in a form approved by the

Architect/Engineer.3. Additional drawings shall be provided as necessary for clarifications.4. These drawings shall be kept up-to-date during the entire course of the work and shall be available

upon request for examination by the Architect/Engineer; and when necessary, to establish clearancesfor other parts of the work.

5. "As-built" drawings shall be returned to the Architect upon completion of the work and are subject toapproval of the Architect/Engineer.

EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING

Provide excavating and backfilling necessary for Work of this Division. Comply with provisions of Division 2,Site Work, if applicable.

Trenches shall be inspected by Code Authorities and/or Owner's Representative before and after piping is laid.Give Owner' Representative 24-hour notice for each inspection. If any trenches are filled without Owner'sRepresentative inspection and as subsequently found to be deficient, the trenches shall be uncovered,inspected, and then re-filled, if requested by Owner's Representative.

Provide minimum 18 inches of cover or in compliance with local published frost line data (if greater than 18inches) to finish grades or paving at water piping.

For piping, provide bell holes at trench bottom to assure uniform bearing. Accurately grade trench bottomsby instrument before laying any pipe.

Protect and maintain trenches in dry condition until piping has been inspected and approved. Immediately afterapproval, backfill trenches in tamped layers.Compact fill to satisfaction of Architect and/or Owner's Representative.

15000-9

CUTTING AND PATCHING

Comply with requirements of Division 0 and Division 1 regarding cutting and patching. Locate and timely installsleeves as required to minimize cutting and patching.

Cutting, fitting, repairing, patching, and finishing of Work shall be done by craftsmen skilled in their respectivetrades. Where cutting is required, cut in such a manner as not to weaken structure, partitions, or floors. Holesrequired to be cut must be cut or drilled without breaking out around the holes. Where patching is necessaryin finished areas of the building, the Architect will determine the extent of such patching and refinishing.

Where return air plenums above ceilings are utilized, Division 15 Contractor shall ensure that return airopenings are provided in walls run to deck, for proper return air flow back to the AHU. Cut walls as requiredto provide openings sized for maximum 1000 feet per minute air flow velocity through openings above ceiling. Provide a fire damper at openings of fire walls and a smoke damper at openings of smoke walls. Coordinateelectric or pneumatic services to smoke dampers via automatic temperature control/EMS Contractor.

Repairing Roadways and Walks: Coordinate all roadway work with authorities having jurisdiction. Cut and/orbore under roadways for connection of utilities as required. Coordinate work through General Contractor. Where this contractor cuts or breaks roadways or walks to lay the piping, he shall repair or replace thesesections to match existing, unless specifically identified as the responsibility of others.

PAINTING

Painting shall be provided by General Contractor’s painting sub-contractor, unless specified otherwise. Leaveexposed piping, materials, and equipment clean and free of rust, grease, dirt, etc. before and after painting.

Factory finished equipment, fixtures, and materials which are marred, chipped, scratched, or otherwiseunacceptable shall be repaired or replaced under this Division to Architect satisfaction, at no additions costto Owner.

Coordinate all painting requirements with prime bidder prior to bids.

Paint all exposed piping inside and outside of building. Label all piping after painting as required. Utilizeindustry standard paint colors for respective system unless directed otherwise by Architect. Review proposedcolor scheme with Architect/Engineer prior to ordering materials.

All piping shall be color coded per the following:1. Condenser Water Piping Green2. Water Chilled Water Piping Blue3. Hot Water Heating Piping Aluminum4. Domestic Cold Water Piping Yellow5. Domestic Hot Water Piping Blue6. Fire Protection Piping Red7. Natural Gas Piping Yellow

CLEANING AND ADJUSTING:

Upon completion of his work, the Contractor shall clean and adjust all equipment, controls, valves, etc.; cleanall piping, ductwork, etc.; and leave the entire installation in good working order.

15000-10

OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS

Provide the Owner with three (3) copies of printed instructions indicating various pieces of equipment by nameand model number, complete with parts lists, maintenance and repair instructions and test and balance report.

COPIES OF SHOP DRAWINGS WILL NOT BE ACCEPTABLE AS OPERATION AND MAINTENANCEINSTRUCTIONS.

This information shall be bound in plastic hardbound notebooks with the job name, Architect and Engineernames permanently embossed on the cover. Rigid board dividers with labeled tabs shall be provided fordifferent pieces of equipment. Submit manuals to the Architect for approval.

In addition to the operation and maintenance brochure, the Contractor shall provide a separate brochure whichshall include registered warranty certificates on all equipment, especially any pieces of equipment which carrywarranties exceeding one (1) year.

The operation and maintenance brochure shall be furnished with a detailed list of all equipment furnished tothe project, including the serial number and all pertinent nameplate data such as voltage, amperage draw,recommended fuse size, rpm, etc. The Contractor shall include this data on each piece of equipmentfurnished under this contract.

GUARANTEE

The Contractor shall guarantee all materials, equipment and workmanship for a period of one (1) year fromthe date of final acceptance of the project. This guarantee shall include furnishing of all labor and materialnecessary to make any repairs, adjustments or replacement of any equipment, parts, etc. necessary to restorethe project to first class condition. This guarantee shall exclude only the changing or cleaning of filters. Warranties exceeding one (1) year are hereinafter specified with individual pieces of equipment.

If the Contractor's office is in excess of a fifty (50) mile radius of the project, he shall appoint a local qualifiedcontractor to perform any emergency repairs or adjustments required during the guarantee period. The nameof the contractor appointed to provide emergency services shall be submitted to the Architect for his approval.

LOCAL CONDITIONS

The location and elevation of all utility services is based on available surveys and utility maps and arereasonably accurate; however, these shall serve as a general guide only, and the Contractor shall visit the siteand verify the location and elevation of all services to his satisfaction in order to determine the amount of workrequired for the execution of the Contract.

The Contractor shall contact the various utility companies, determine the extent of their requirements and heshall include in his bid all lawful fees and payments required by these companies for complete connection andservices to the building, including meters, connection charges, street patching, extensions from meters tomain, etc.

In case major changes are required, this fact, together with the reasons therefor, shall be submitted to theArchitect, in writing, not less than seven (7) days before the date of bidding. Failure to comply with thisrequirement will make the Contractor liable for any changes, additions and expenses necessary for thesuccessful completion of the project.

MINOR DEVIATIONS

Plans and detail sketches are submitted to limit, explain and define conditions, specified requirements, pipe

15000-11

sizes and manner of erecting work. Structural or other conditions may require certain modifications from themanner of installation shown, and such deviations are permissible and shall be made as required. However,specified sizes and requirements necessary for satisfactory operation shall remain unchanged. It may benecessary to shift ducts or pipes, or to change the shape of ducts, and these changes shall be made asrequired. All such changes shall be referred to the Architect for approval before proceeding. Extra chargesshall not be allowed for these changes.

The Contractor shall realize that the drawings could delve into every step, sequence or operation necessaryfor the completion of the project, without drawing on the Contractor's experience or ingenuity. However, onlytypical details are shown on the Plans. In cases where the Contractor is not certain about the method ofinstallation of his work, he shall ask for details. Lack of details will not be an excuse for improper installation.

In general, the drawings are diagrammatic and the Contractor shall install his work in a manner so thatinterferences between the various trades are avoided. In cases where interferences do occur, the Architectis to state which item was first installed.

VALVE TAGS

Secure metal tags to all valves. Labeling on all valve tags shall include type of system the valve controls andthe area of building, zone, or equipment number affected by valve operation. Tag shall be 2"minimumdiameter brass, engraved with code number, service and size. A framed list of the valves, givingmanufacturer's name, model number, type and location shall be mounted in the main basement equipmentroom.

MACHINERY GUARDS

This Contractor shall provide v-belt guards for each v-belt drive or other hazardous drive. The guard shallenclose the drive entirely and shall have a hole for taking a tachometer reading.

LABELING MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT

All mechanical equipment (A/C units, air handlers, fan coil units, fan powered boxes, water heaters, etc.)furnished under Division 15 of contract documents shall be labeled with permanent laminated plate securedto equipment. Units shall be labeled as indicated on plans and schedules.

END OF SECTION

15000-12

SECTION 15100 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS

PIPE

Sanitary Sewer Waste Lines:

1. Piping above and below slab, unless otherwise shown or specified, shall be constructed of solid wallSchedule 40 PVC "DWV" plastic pipe and fittings with solvent welded joints.

Sanitary Sewer Vent Lines Above Slab:

1. These shall be constructed of "no hub" service weight cast iron pipe with neoprene/stainless steelclamp couplings.

2. Sanitary sewer lines below the slab shall be supported at no more than 5 ft. intervals with 3/8"(minimum) round galvanized or coated steel hangers secured in the slab above.

3. Sanitary sewer pipe penetrating concrete slabs shall be wrapped with Virginia Chemical K-501,Benjamin Manufacturing Model 6200, or equal foam insulation tape.

Domestic Cold and Hot Water Lines:

1. All such lines shall be Government Type "L", hard copper water tubing of standard weight andthickness as made by Mueller, Chase, Anaconda or equivalent, unless indicted otherwise. Use 95-5lead-free solder on all piping above slab. Use Silfos 1000 lead-free solder on all piping beneath theo

slab. 2. In certain areas, type "L" soft copper without joints below slab shall be used only where indicated on

the Plans. Piping shall be completely insulated per Section 15200.3. Domestic cold water lines penetrating concrete slabs shall be wrapped with "Protect-O-Sleeve" vinyl

flexible tube as manufactured by Robert H. Harris Co., or equivalent.4. Domestic hot water lines shall be insulated at all penetrations through slab per insulation (see Section

15200).5. Domestic cold water piping within 5'-0" of building may be Schedule 40 PVC plastic pipe with solvent

welded joints, or slip joint fittings with EPDM seals. Provide thrust blocks all at changes in direction. Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

Refrigerant Lines:

1. These shall be Government Type "L" hard copper.

Water Heater Relief Lines:


Equipment Drain Lines:


Condensate Drain Lines:

1. All such lines shall be Schedule 40 PVC plastic pipe and fittings with solvent weld joints. Install trapat all air handling equipment.

15100-1

Brittany

Typewritten Text


Trap Primer Lines:

1. All such lines shall be Type "L" soft copper, without joints.

Installation of Piping:

1. All pipe shall be true and straight, without sags or traps.2. The Contractor shall exercise care in cleaning joints after making cuts on pipe to prevent pipe

particles from entering the system.3. All pipe fittings shall be same as piping specified unless indicated otherwise.4. Arrange, install piping approximately as indicated, straight, plumb and as direct as possible; form right

angles, or parallel lines with building walls. The most practical appearance of piping runs is required. Keep pipes close to walls, partitions, ceilings; off-set only where necessary to follow walls as directed.

5. Before installing piping, check plumbing and HVAC drawings with architectural, mechanical,structural, electrical drawings; make accurate layout of plumbing and HVAC piping. Whereinterferences may appear and departures from indicated arrangements are required, consult withother trades involved; come to agreement as to changed locations and elevations of piping; obtainapproval of proposed changes. Note runs of other contractor's piping and large conduits andcooperate to achieve neat appearance.

6. Unless otherwise indicated, conceal all piping in building construction in finished areas. Install suchpiping in time so as not to cause delay to work of other trades and to allow ample time for tests andapproval; do not cover before approval is obtained.

7. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other and building lines; space them at distance to permitaccess for servicing, valves, and to create most practical appearance when racked with conduits,refrigerant, etc., provided by other contractors.

8. Keep fixture branches concealed to points above floor close to fixtures; expose only as much asnecessary for final connection. Rigidly support pipes projecting from walls, chases, etc. in wall orchase to make firm, well-braced installation. Loosely supported pipe or accessory is not acceptable.

9. Install horizontal piping to coordinate with other trades and install without sags or humps.10. Grade inside sewer piping at uniform slope of 1/4 inch per foot, minimum; where this is impossible,

maintain slope as directed but in no case less than 1/8 inch per foot. Waste lines 3 inches andsmaller must grade at minimum 1/4 inch per foot. See Drawings for fall on exterior sewer lines.

11. Grade other piping as specified under heading or service where used, or as directed. 12. Keep piping free from scale and dirt, protect open pipe ends wherever work is suspended during

construction. To prevent foreign bodies entering and lodging in pipe, use temporary plugs or otherapproved material.

13. Where changes in pipe sizes occur, do not bush down; use only reducing fittings. For drainage pipingchanges in direction, use longsweep bends where possible; otherwise, short sweep 1/4 bends orcombination Y and 1/8 bends; also Y's in combination with other bends.

14. Provide shut off valves at all supply connections to all equipment. Supplier of equipment shall providerough-in drawings and this contractor shall fully connect all items, supply necessary piping and fittingsas required, unless otherwise noted individually.

15. Do not locate valves with stems below horizontal.16. Locate valves for easy access and operations. Where concealed, notify General Contractor of exact

location in order that he may leave openings for access panels. Provide access panels.17. Provide unions, screwed or flanged, where indicated, and in following locations even if not indicated. 18. In by-passes around equipment.19. In connection to equipment requiring disconnection for repairs or replacement. Locate between shut-

off and equipment.20. Weld-O-let fittings shall be used in iron pipe.21. All screwed fittings and pipe shall have threads cut to standard pipe thread dimensions. Pipe shall

be properly reamed after cutting of threads.22. Joint compound, Rector Seal Series 100, LACO Series Slick-tite or equal thread lubricant shall be

15100-2

applied to male threads of the screwed pipe and fittings only.23. Approved expansion joints or flexible couplings shall be provided as necessary.24. Care shall be taken in making up pipe and fittings such that the pipe does not extend into fitting

sufficiently to reduce the waterway.25. Standard, one-piece reducing fittings of approved design shall be used wherever a change in size is

made. Changes in pipe sizes shall not be made by means of reducing flanges.26. Bushings may be used only where standard, one-piece reducing fittings are not available and shall

be subject to the following:

a. Bushings shall be of the face or flush type.b. Bushings shall not be used in elbow fittings.c. Bushings shall not be used when the reduction in size of the outlet is less than ½".d. Bushings shall not be used in more than one outlet of any tee or two outlets of any cross

fitting.

PIPE SPECIALTIES

Dielectric unions shall be used between copper and iron pipe.

PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

This Contractor shall furnish and install all foundations and supports required for his equipment unlessindicated otherwise on the Drawings.

This Contractor shall furnish and install all escutcheons, inserts, thimbles, hangers, etc. required for the propersupport and installation of his equipment and piping and he shall cooperate with other trades in locating andplacing these items.

PROVIDE SLEEVES FOR ALL PIPES PASSING THROUGH WALLS, FLOORS, BEAMS, ETC.

Sleeves passing through structural members or concrete footings shall be of cast iron or Schedule 40 steelpipe. Sleeves passing through nonstructural walls or floors shall be of 26 gauge galvanized iron. Jointsbetween sleeves and pipes passing through floors shall be made weather tight with plastic materials. Wherepipes pass through water proofing membrane, flashing sleeves shall be installed.

Provide Grinnell, Fee & Mason, or equivalent malleable iron split ring hangers with rod supports throughout. STRAP HANGERS OR WIRE WILL NOT BE ACCEPTED.

Maximum spacing of hangers for cast iron pipes shall be 5 ft.; for other than soil, use 10 ft.

Provide galvanized iron shields between hangers and pipe covering.

Provide Grinnell, Fee & Mason, Crane or equivalent heavy steel riser clamps on vertical risers at floors tosupport pipes.

Provide producer speciality, Jones Manufacturing or equal chrome plated brass escutcheons wherever pipespass through floors, walls or ceilings in exposed or finished areas.

All piping projecting from chases shall be rigidly supported in the wall or chase. Loosely supported fixturesor accessories will not be accepted.

15100-3

VALVES AND UNIONS

Furnish and install all valves, unions, stops, connections, etc. shown on plans and necessary to make acomplete system in working order. Provide valves on inlet and outlet of all equipment and fixtures and onbranch lines to fixtures or groups of fixtures.

Ball Valves, 3" and smaller, rated for 150 PSI saturated steam pressure, 600 PSI WOG pressure; shall be 2-piece construction, bronze body conforming to ASTM B-62, conventional port, chrome-plated brass ball,replaceable TFE seats and seals, blow-out proof stem, and vinyl-covered steel handle. Provide solder endsfor condenser water, chilled water and domestic hot and cold water service of NIBCO Design S-580-70,Milwaukee BA-150-S or equal, threaded ends of heating hot water and low pressure steam of NIBCO DesignT-580-70, Milwaukee BA-100-S or equal. For chilled water insulated piping systems, provide ball valves withextended stem, insulated handle with protective thermal barrier sleeve to prevent condensate moisture dripand pipe insulation deterioration. At Contractor’s option, Victaulic Style 722 or 721 ball valves may be used.

All valves, unions, etc. where pipe is chrome plated shall have similar finish. All exposed supplies to plumbingfixtures shall be chrome plated.

All gas cocks, valves, etc. on gas lines shall have local utility company and AGA approval.

Domestic water valves (below grade): M & H AWWA Series C-509 resilient gate valve with low torqueoperation, positive shut-off, O- Ring seals, full epoxy coating and square valve stem end. Provide two (2)adjustable "TEE" handle valve wrenches to be turned over to the owner after construction is complete.

Gate Valves, 2-Inch and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125, body and bonnet of ASTM B 62 cast bronze; withthreaded or solder ends, solid disc, copper-silicon alloy or bronze stem, brass packing gland, "Teflon"impregnated packing, and malleable iron handwheel. Provide Class 150 valves meeting the above wheresystem pressure requires.

Gate Valves, 2-Inch and Smaller: (Hot Water Heating) MSS SP-80; Class 150, body and union bonnet ofASTM B 62 cast bronze; with threaded or solder ends, solid disc, copper-silicon alloy or bronze stem, brasspacking gland, "Teflon" impregnated packing, and malleable iron handwheel. Do not use solder end valvesfor hot water hearing piping applications.

Gate Valves, 2-1/2-Inch and Larger: MSS SP-70; Class 125 iron body, bronze mounted, with body and bonnetconforming to ASTM A 126 Class B; with flanged ends "Teflon" impregnated packing, and two-piece backingbland assembly.

Globe Valves, 2-Inch and Smaller: NSS SP-80; Class 125; body and screwed bonnet of ASTM B 62 castbronze; with threaded or solder ends, brass or replaceable composition disc, copper-silicon alloy stem, brasspacking gland, "Teflon" impregnated packing, and malleable iron handwheel. Provide Class 150 valvesmeeting the above where system pressure requires.

Butterfly Valves, 2-1/2-Inch and Larger: MSS SP-67; rated at 200 psi; cast-iron body conforming to ASTMA 126, Class B. Provide valves with field replaceable EPDM sleeve, nickel-plated ductile iron disc (exceptaluminum bronze disc for valves installed in condenser water piping), stainless steel stem, and EPDM O-ringstem seals. Provide lever operators with locks for sizes 2 through 6 inches and gear operators with positionindicator for sizes 8 through 24 inches. Provide "Non-Leakage" full threaded lug flange body type capableof being broken down at one side of the valve remaining closed. Drill and tap valves on dead-end service orrequiring additional body strength. At Contractor’s option Victaulic 300 BFV for grooved piping systems maybeused.

15100-4

Swing Check Valves, 2 Inch-and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125 cast-bronze body and cap conforming toASTM B 62; with horizontal swing, Y-pattern, and bronze disc; and having threaded or solder ends. Providevalves capable of being reground while the valve remains in the line. Provide Class 150 valves meeting theabove specifications, with threaded end connections, where system pressure requires or where Class 125valves are not available.

Swing Check Valves, 2-1/2-Inch and Larger: MSS SP-71; Class 125 (Class 175 FM approved for fireprotection piping system), cast iron body and bolted cap conforming to ASTM A 126, Class B; horizontalswing, and bronze disc or cast-iron disc with bronze disc ring; and flanged ends. Provide valves capable ofbeing refitted while the valve remains in the line. At Contractor’s option, Victaulic Style 716 for grooved piping systems may be used.

Wafer Check Valves: Class 2500, cast-iron body; with replaceable bronze seat, and non-slam design lappedand balanced twin bronze flappers and stainless steel trim and torsion spring. Provide valves designed toopen and close at approximately one foot differential pressure.

Lift Check Valves, 2 Inch-and Smaller: Class 125; cast-bronze body and cap conforming to ASTM B 62;horizontal or angle pattern, lift-type valve, with stainless steel spring, bronze disc holder with renewable"Teflon" disc, and threaded ends. Provide valves capable of being refitted and grounded while the valveremains in the line.

Select Valves with the following ends or types of pipe/tube connections:

1. Copper Tube Size 2 Inch and Smaller: Solder ends, except provide threaded ends for heating hotwater.

2. Steel Pipe Sizes, 2 Inch and Smaller: Threaded or grooved end.3. Steel Pipe Sizes, 2-1/2 Inch and Larger: Grooved end or flanged.

INSTALLATION OF VALVES

Use ball and butterfly valves for shut-off duty.

Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.

Install valves and unions for each fixture and item of equipment arranged to allow equipment removal withoutsystem shutdown. Unions are not required on flanged devices.

Install three-valve bypass around each pressure reducing valve using throttling-type valves.

Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above the center of the pipe.

Install valves in a position to allow full stem movement.

All valves, unions, etc. where pipe is chrome plated shall have similar finish. All exposed supplies to plumbingfixtures shall be chrome plated.

All valves, on insulated piping shall be complete with extended lever handle stem.

SHOCK ABSORBERS

All water service to fixtures or groups of fixtures shall have concealed air chambers. Air chambers shall beof the same diameter as the supply or header pipes and 12 inches long on both hot and cold water branches. Locate shock absorbers close to fixture or at end of header.

15100-5

Shock arrestors shall be installed for sterilizer water supplies.

On lines 1-1/4" and above fixtures with quick closing valves (i.e.: Dishwashers, tempered valves, etc.) install"Shock Trol", "Precision Plumbing Products" or equal water hammer arrester properly sized for each unit.

ESCUTCHEONS

Provide escutcheons for all exposed lines passing through floors, walls, and ceilings. They shall be chromeplated brass and shall be of such flange size as to cover necessary penetrating openings.

FLASHING

Flash all vent penetrations through roof. Extend flashing approximately 10 inches in all directions at base andturn ends down into top of pipe. Off-set vents where necessary to provide 4 feet minimum clearance fromother flashing such as outside walls, curbs, etc. Note: All vents shall be 25 feet from fresh air intakes.

TEST

Make such tests of work as specified, or required by Architect or by State and Municipal Bureaus havingjurisdiction, and under their supervision. Perform tests in presence of Architect's representative. NotifyArchitect two days prior to testing.

Provide apparatus, temporary piping connections, or other requirements necessary for tests. Takeprecautions to prevent damage to building or contents by tests. Contractor is required to repair and makegood at his expense damage so caused.

Correct leaks, defects, or deficiencies discovered as result of tests. Repeat tests until test requirements arefully complied with. Caulking of pipe joints to remedy leaks is not permitted, except on lead and oakum joints.

STERILIZATION

Sterilization all water lines in strict accordance with State Board of Health requirements. After flushing out,obtain approval of water sample analysis from State Board of Health and submit approval report to Architect.

MOTORS, STARTERS AND ELECTRICAL WORK The Mechanical Contractor shall furnish to the Electrical Contractor for installation, all the motor starters, start-stop switches and pilot lights for each piece of motor driven equipment unless shown otherwise.

The Electrical Contractor shall install all motor starters, start-stop switches and pilot lights as furnished by theMechanical Contractor. The Electrical Contractor shall also do all power wiring required for the installationof such mechanical equipment.

The Mechanical Contractor shall furnish and install equipment interlocking, control wiring, etc., as hereinafterspecified under Temperature Controls. All work shall be done in accordance with the National Electric Coderequirements. The Mechanical Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating all work to provide a completesystem in working order.

All electrical equipment shall have the U.L. Label and shall meet the standards of the National Electrical Codeand NEMA.

All motors for the mechanical equipment shall be of the 40 C rise type and shall be furnished and installedo

15100-6

by the Mechanical Contractor. All motors shall be wound for plus or minus 10% of the specified voltage. Motors ½ HP and smaller shall be 120 volt, single phase, 60 cycle. Motors above ½ HP shall be the voltagesas indicated on the Drawings. All motors shall be PREMIUM EFFICIENCY type with a minimum motorefficiency of: 1,1.5 and 2 HP-84%; 3 HP-85%; 5 HP-87%; 7.5 and 10 HP-89%; 15 HP-90%; 20 HP-91%; 25and 30 HP-92%; 40 HP-93%. Contractor shall submit certification after project is complete indicatingminimum motor efficiency requirement has been met. All motors shall be rated for inverter duty.

Mechanical contractor shall furnish magnetic type starters for all motors regardless of horse power and phase.

Exception: Manual starters can be furnished for fractional horsepower motors that are not controlledautomatically or remotely. Refer to Section 15800 (Temperature Control) and mechanical drawings todetermine if fractional horsepower motors are controlled automatically or remotely.

SINGLE PHASE AC FRACTIONAL HORSEPOWER MANUAL STARTERS - 1HP OR LESS FHP MANUALSTARTERS SHALL BE SQUARE D CLASS 2150 OR ALLEN BRADLEY BULLETIN 600.

The manual starters shall consist of a manually operated toggle switch equipped with melting alloy typethermal overload relay. Thermal unit shall be of one-piece construction and interchangeable. Starter shallbe inoperative if thermal unit is removed. Contacts shall be double break, silver alloy visible from both sidesof starter.

All FHP MANUAL STARTERS shall be double-pole type with one thermal overload relay and general purposeenclosure and red pilot light.

SINGLE AND THREE PHASE AC MAGNETIC STARTERS - LINE VOLTAGE TYPE (ALL MOTORS BELOW10 HP

Motor starters shall be Square "D" Class 8536 or Allen Bradley Bulletin 509. Motor starters shall be across-the-line magnetic type rated in accordance with NEMA Standards, sizes and horsepower ratings. Startersshall be mounted in general purpose enclosures unless otherwise indicated on plans.

Across-the-line magnetic starters through NEMA Size seven shall be equipped with double break silver alloycontacts. Single break contacts shall be supplied on Size eight. All contacts shall be replaceable withoutremoving power wiring or removing starter from panel. The starter must have straight-through wiring.

Coils shall be of molded construction through NEMA Size seven. Coils on size eight starters shall be formwound, taped, varnished and baked. All coils shall be replaceable from the front without removing the starterfrom the panel.

Overload relays shall be them letting alloy type with a replaceable control circuit module. Thermal units shallbe of one-piece construction and interchangeable. The starter shall be inoperative if the thermal unit isremoved.

NEMA Size 0 thru 7 starters shall be suitable for the addition of at least four external auxiliary contracts of anyarrangement normally open or normally closed; Sizes 0-7 external auxiliary contacts shall be field convertible. Size 00 and Size 8 starters shall be suitable for the addition of up to three external auxiliary contacts of anyarrangement normally open or normally closed. A minimum of two auxiliary contacts (one normally open andone normally closed) shall be provided.

Single and Three-Phase Starter:

1. All magnetic starters shall be equipped with a "HAND-OFF-AUTO" SELECTOR SWITCH, A REDRUN PILOT LIGHT, and a control circuit transformer with two fuses in primary circuit and one fuse

15100-7

in secondary. Control voltage shall be coordinated with other trades.

Three Phase Starters:

1. All three phase starters shall be equipped with an individual phase relay for protection against phasefailures, phase voltage unbalance, and phase reversal. This relay shall have a response delayadjustable from ½ to 1 second and an adjustable unbalance voltage level of 5 of 30%.

REDUCED VOLTAGE AC MAGNETIC STARTERS - (ALL MOTORS 10 HP AND ABOVE)

All starters for motors 10 HP and above shall be autotransformer type containing a starter and contactors witha vertically actuated magnet and armature assembly, and horizontally actuated contacts through NEMA Size4, contacts, on NEMA Size 5 through NEMA size 7.

The controller will be supplied for use on an electrical system as indicated on drawings.

The Reduced Voltage Starter will be sized to control horsepower, as indicated on drawings.The Reduced Voltage Starter shall be Square "D" Class 8606 or Allen Bradley Belletin 570 and shall have thefollowing features: hand-off-automatic selector switch, pilot light (red), control circuit transformer with twofuses in the primary circuit, and one fuse in the secondary circuit. Control voltage shall be coordinated withother trades.

All three phase starters shall be equipped with an individual phase relay for protection against phase failures,phase voltage unbalance, and phase reversal. This relay shall have a response delay of approximately 3seconds. After either the undervoltage or voltage unbalance limits are exceeded.

REFER TO DESCRIPTION OF MAGNETIC STARTERS FOR DETAILS REGARDING CONTACTORS ANDSTARTERS INTERNAL TO THIS DEVICE.

Refer to electrical plans and provide combination starters and disconnects where required.

All starters which are to be energized from remote "start-stop" stations shall be equipped with a step-downtransformer to 120 volts.

ACCESS PANELS

Furnish and install access panels where valves, dampers, control boxes, etc. are concealed in walls, ceilings,floors, or otherwise inaccessible or where specifically called for on plans. Panels shall be Milcor Style DW,or Bar-Co. Model 500, J-L Industries Model WB, or equal sized as required and furnished with prime coatfinish.

PIPE MARKERS

Provide pipe markers and directional arrows on all piping in mechanical equipment rooms, or which isexposed in building, and on both sides of all valves located above ceiling. Markers shall be as manufacturedby W.H. Bradley Co., or the equivalent. All letters shall be color-coded and sized as recommended by OSHA. Samples of the type of letters to be used shall be submitted with shop drawings.

15100-8

The following pipe and valves shall be identified:

Piping Valves

Domestic Cold Water XDomestic Hot Water Supply XDomestic Hot Water Return X

Pipe markers with arrows shall indicate lines content and shall be located 20 feet on center and at eachchange of direction of line. Identification bands shall be color coded to match pipe markers and shall beprovided 10 feet on center. Pipe identification markers shall be taped at each end and shall be taped aroundthe entire circumference of pipe.

END OF SECTION

15100-9

SECTION 15200 INSULATION

GENERAL:Pipe insulation shall not begin until all work has been tested and found to be tight. All insulation adhesives, sealers, tapes and mastic shall meet the latest NFPA requirements and shall meet25/50/50 flame spread and smoke developed ratings.

All insulation shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

All pipe insulation where recommended by the manufacturer shall be banded with aluminum bands, three toa section and with one band on each side of each fitting, valve, etc.

Insulation shall be continuous through walls and ceilings.

All valves, strainers, etc. shall be insulated the same as its adjacent piping and the covering shall extend allthe way up to the equipment.

USE HIGH DENSITY INSULATION INSERTS AT HANGERS ON ALL PIPING 1-1/2" AND ABOVE TOPREVENT CRUSHING OF INSULATION.

THERMAL INSULATION: After all work has been tested and approved, insulate as follows:

INSULATION SHALL BE INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE MANUFACTURER'SRECOMMENDATIONS AND INSTRUCTIONS.

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING: Cover all domestic cold and hot water lines and hot water return lines above slab with 1" thick, high densityfiberglass insulation with Universal Fire Retardant Jacket, Owens/Corning "25 ASJ/SSL", Knauf ASJ-SSL, orequal. All laps are to be sealed and stapled in place. Fittings are to be mitered segments of insulation heldin place with white vapor barrier tape for concealed areas and Zeston 25/50 PVC, Knauf 25/50 rated PVC,pre-molded insulated fitting covers in exposed areas.

Domestic cold and hot water lines(2 -1/2" and above) shall be insulated with 1-1/2" thick fiberglass with jacket.

All water lines exposed in mechanical rooms shall be covered with 0.030 PVC jacket with solvent weldedseams and joints.

All water lines on the outside of the building exposed to the weather shall be covered with 0.160 smoothaluminum jacket and elbows.

Domestic cold and hot water lines run below slab within building shall be insulated with 3/4" thick closed celltube insulation. Apply two (2) coats of mastic on insulation.

CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING: Insulate with 1/2" Aerotube or Armaflex pipe insulation applied in accordance with manufacturer'srecommendations and instructions.

WASTE LINE P-TRAPS: P-traps receiving HVAC condensate (exposed to weather or above ceilings) shall be insulated with 2" thick3/4 # density fiberglass ductwrap insulation with aluminum foil vapor barrier. Insulation shall be sealed at allseams and joints.

15200 - 1

Brittany

Typewritten Text


HANDICAPPED LAVATORY P-TRAP & SUPPLY LINES: Insulate p-trap, tailpiece and water supplies on handicapped lavatories with white, Truebro Model 102 HandiLav-Guard, Pro-Wrap A.D.A. lavatory insulation kit, or approved equivalent insulating system to meet A.D.A.Requirements. Provide accessories for offset tailpiece as required.

REFRIGERANT LINES: Insulate with 3/4" closed cell, tube insulation, Aerotube, Armaflex or equivalent. Apply two coats ofweatherproof mastic on all piping below grade or exposed to weather. Contractor shall install refrigerant linesbelow grade in watertight PVC sleeve in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

AIR HANDLING ROOM WALLS: Furnish and install over entire areas of walls of air handling rooms containing a/c units a 1" thick ManvilleLinacoustic or equal acoustical type duct insulation 3# density, applied over Slick-Klips 12" on center. Stick-Klips shall be applied to wall with Miracle Adhesive. Acoustical material shall be applied over Stick-Klips withduct liner adhesive tape EC-104 spotted between pins. Stick-Klips with factor applied adhesive will not beacceptable.

AHU ROOMS: Furnish and install over entire areas of walls, doors and ceilings of mechanical rooms sound absorbing 2"thick, 3# density semi-rigid fiberglass board. The board shall be faced with reinforced mylar polyester filmlaminate composed of a mylar face, with fiberglass scrim, laminated with a flame retardant adhesive. Thefiberglass board and the facing shall meet flame speed of not greater than 25, and a smoke developed ratingof not greater than 50. This board shall be equal to Pelican Board Type RM as manufactured by Reilly-Benton, Peabody Noise Control Type S4 or equal. Insulation shall be installed by impaling on stick-pins witha suitable adhesive (no self-stick pins may be used). After material is impaled on pins, the tip of the pin shallbe covered with a white dome-cap washer. All joints, corners, and exposed edges shall be covered with thefacing material. Material shall be applied over curved walls and roof at AHU Rooms.

HVAC DUCTWORK INSULATION: Low Pressure supply, return transfer, fresh air and exhaust ductwork shall be wrapped on outside with 2" thick3/4# density fiberglass insulation with aluminum foil vapor barrier. Insulation shall be taped at all joints andinstalled per the manufacturer's recommendations.

Refer to air distribution section of mechanical specifications for low pressure duct insulation supplied by thesheet metal sub-contractor.

Transfer ductwork across walls shall be internally lined with 1" thick acoustical insulation as indicated inSection 15750.

HVAC FLEX-CONNECTIONS: Shall be wrapped on outside with 2" thick 3/4 # density fiberglass insulation with aluminum foil vapor barrier. Insulation shall be taped at all joints and installed per the manufacturer's recommendations.

REHEAT COILS: Shall be wrapped on outside with 2" thick 3/4 # density fiberglass insulation with aluminum foil vapor barrier. Insulation shall be taped at all joints and installed per the manufacturer's recommendations.

INSULATION THROUGH HANGERS AND SLEEVES: The insulation shall be continuous through pipe hangers and pipe sleeves. At hangers where the pipe issupported by insulation, provide a galvanized iron protection shield. Provide pipes 2-inch i.p.s. and larger ininsulation inserts at points of hanger supports. The inserts shall be of calcium silicate, cellular glass,prestressed molded glass fiber of minimum 13-pound density, or other approval material of the samethickness as adjacent insulation and not less than 13-pound density. The inserts shall have sufficientcompression strength to adequately support the pipe without compressing the inserts to a thickness less than

15200 - 2

the adjacent insulation. Inserts shall be 180 degrees and not less than the length of the protection shield. Vapor barrier facing of the insert shall be the same as the facing on the adjacent insulation. Where copperclad hangers are used on domestic copper pipe, insulation may cover pipe and hanger. Provide 18 gaugemetal saddles between all hangers and insulation.


15200 - 3

SECTION 15300 WATER SUPPLY

SERVICE: The Contractor shall extend water throughout the project as indicated on theDrawings.

CONTRACTOR SHALL CONTACT LOCAL UTILITY COMPANY PRIOR TO BID TO DETERMINE THEEXTENT OF THEIR REQUIREMENTS, PAY ALL COSTS FOR CONNECTION AND COMPLETE WORKINGINSTALLATION.

GENERAL:All water supply piping shall be of materials hereinbefore specified. Make provisions for expansion andcontraction of hot water lines by means of expansion bends or loops as required.

All water lines shall be disinfected in accordance with Section 14 of the State of Louisiana Sanitary Code,(1994 Standard Plumbing Code with latest amendments). Submit three (3) copies of "Certificate ofPerformance" at completion of the project.

Water lines run underground shall have a minimum of 30" cover to finished grade.

Make up the complete water supply system. Connect to all fixtures and outlets requiring water.

At each fixture or group of fixtures with lines 1-1/4" or below, furnish and install a 12" high air chamber ofsame size as branch feed line. On lines 1-1/4" and above and at fixtures with quick closing valves such asdishwashers, tempered water valves, etc., install "Shocktrol", "Precision Plumbing Products" or equal waterhammer arrester properly sized for each unit.

Domestic water cut-off valves on exterior of building shall be installed with cast iron frame and cover (marked"Water") in concrete pad as detailed on the Drawings.

TESTING: All domestic water lines, unless elsewhere specified, shall be tested under 200 psi hydrostatic pressure fora minimum of five hours.


15300 - 1

Brittany

Typewritten Text


SECTION 15350 WASTE WATER DISPOSAL

SERVICE:Extend sanitary sewer waste and vent lines as indicated on Plans.

CONTRACTOR SHALL CONTACT LOCAL UTILITY COMPANY PRIOR TO BID TO DETERMINE THEEXTENT OF THEIR REQUIREMENTS, PAY ALL COSTS FOR CONNECTIONS AND COMPLETEWORKING INSTALLATION.

CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY LOCATION AND ELEVATION OF SEWER MAIN PRIOR TO ROUGH-IN.

GENERAL: The system of sewage and drainage in general shall be as hereinbefore specified.

All work shall be in strict accordance with Chapter 14 of the State Plumbing Code (1994 Standard Code withlatest amendments) and in accordance with all local codes. Piping shall be routed as shown on Plans or inan acceptable manner to meet building conditions. Venting shall be as shown on plumbing riser diagrams.

Connections between traps and cast iron pipes are to be made with heavy brass ferrules or cast iron pipe.

All p-traps installed below slab shall be deep-seal p-traps.

Provide reducers, increasers, special flanges, and fittings where required between piping work and fixturesin order to connect and complete work and render it ready for use. Make any offsets required to avoidconstruction.

All water closets shall be mounted with 4" closet bends.

All lines 2" and smaller shall be sloped 1/4" per foot; all lines 3" and larger shall be sloped 1/8" per foot. Pipingshall be laid so slope is continuous.

All sewer vents shall extend 8" above roof and terminate in an appropriate flashing collar. No vents shallpenetrate roof within 48" of an exterior wall. Offset in ceiling as required. All back vents shall be taken off asnear trap as possible.

TESTING:Test all sanitary sewer waste and vent lines inside building with a minimum of 10' water head for 15 minutes,in accordance with Section 14:163-1 of the State Plumbing Code.

All exterior sewer piping shall be air tested under 5 psi for 15 minutes.


15350-1

Brittany

Typewritten Text


SECTION 15500 PLUMBING

GENERAL:Furnish all labor and materials as hereinbefore specified, indicated or reasonablyimplied for the complete installation of the following systems:

Domestic Cold Water SystemDomestic Hot Water SystemSanitary Drainage System

ROOF DRAIN (MARKED "R.D."): Josam Series 21000 coated cast iron leveleze flo-set roof drain with large cast iron secured dome, integralgravel stop, clamp ring, adjustable top with wide roof flange, large sump with anchor flange, and bottom orside outlet as required.

FLOOR DRAINS:All floor drains shall be constructed of cast iron and shall be complete with clamping devices as required. Equivalent drains as manufactured by Josam, J.R. Smith, Zurn or Wade will be acceptable. NO OTHERMANUFACTURERS WILL BE ACCEPTED WITHOUT PRIOR APPROVAL. All floor drains shall be providedwith 2# lead flashing extending a minimum of 24" all around drain except in certain areas where the GeneralContractor is providing a flashing membrane, in which case that membrane shall be flashed into the drain.

All floor drains shall be installed with 6" (six inch) deep seal p-traps.

FLOOR DRAINS (MARKED "FD-A"): J. R. Smith 2010A, Wade-1100-ST6 or equivalent, bottom outlet with dura-coated cast iron body, withclamping collar and 6" diameter nickel bronze strainer adjustable vertically to floor level, with SQUAREPERFORATIONS and VANDAL-PROOF SCREWS. Provide trap primer connection where shown on plans.

FLOOR DRAINS MARKED ("FD-B"): Shall be same as "FD", except supplied with 1" recessed grate, J. R. Smith E37, Wade W-1100-ER7 with topof rim set flush with finished floor.

CLEANOUTS:Cleanouts other than type listed below as manufactured by J.R. Smith, Josam, Zurn and Wade, will not beacceptable.

Cleanouts shall be provided where shown on plans, at each change of direction of the building drain greaterthan 45 degrees and at or near the foot of each vertical waste or soil stack. Location of all cleanouts for pipe3" in diameter and less shall be at no more than 50' intervals. Pipe 4" in diameter and larger shall be locatedat no more than 75' internals. Cleanouts shall be the same size as the piping. Every cleanout shall beinstalled so that the cleanout opens in the direction of the flow of the drainage line or at right angle thereto.

Floor cleanouts shall be an adjustable type with clamping collar and nickel bronze cover.

Top of cleanout shall be level with top of finished floor so there is a continuous surface.

Floor cleanouts shall be Wade 6000 Series or J.R. Smith 4020 Series.

Wall cleanouts shall have chrome plated frame and cover, Wade W-8550-S with W-8480-S access cover,J. R. Smith 4435, or equal.

Outside cleanouts shall be as detailed on the Plans.

15500 - 1

HP Z230

Typewritten Text


ELECTRIC WATER HEATER:Provide electric water heater with capacities indicated in the specifications and locations as shown on Plans. The heater shall be U.L. approved and listed, and shall have a five (5) year warranty. Heating elements shallbe of capacity and electrical characteristics indicated on Plans and shall be heavy-duty emersion type. Heaters shall be complete with fully automatic controls and ASME rated temperature and pressure reliefvalves.

WATER HEATER #1: Ruud Model ELDS30, 30 gallon storage, two (2) - 3.0 KW heating elements not wired for simultaneousoperation. Electric service 208/1/60.

PLUMBING FIXTURES:Plumbing Contractor shall furnish and install all plumbing fixtures shown on accompanying Drawings. Referto both Plumbing and Architectural, and provide all fixtures shown on either. Fixtures shall be complete withall necessary brass and accessories required for a complete installation, including traps, escutcheons, anglesupplies, basin cocks, etc. All fixtures shall be new and must be delivered to the building properly crated inperfect condition.

All brass must be of the best quality. Lightweight goods will not be accepted.

All brass pipe shall be seamless brass tubing and nipples shall be extra heavy.

All fittings and trim shall be chromium plated heavy brass unless otherwise specified.

"P" traps on lavatories and sinks shall be cast brass with cleanouts.

All exposed piping shall be chromium plated.

Provide cut-off valves at each fixture in both hot and cold water piping.

For the purpose of establishing type and class of fixtures required, the following plate numbers have beentaken from the Manufacturer's Catalog as indicated: Fixture manufacturer's and Model numbers with priorapproval will be acceptable, however fixtures and accessories shall meet standards and features indicatedbelow.

Refer to Architectural Drawings for mounting height and exact location of all plumbing fixtures. Handicappedfixtures shall be installed to meet the latest A.D.A. requirements.

WATER CLOSET (MARKED "WC-A"): (Handicapped)K-33493, white, vitreous china, 1.6 gallon pressure tank type, elongated bowl water closet. 10CC solid plastic,white, open-front seat less cover and with check hinge. Bolt caps and 3/8" angle supply with stop. Install perA.D.A. requirements.

URINAL (MARKED "U-A"): Kohler K-4904-ET vitreous china wall hung washout urinal with 3/4" top spud inlet. Sloan Royal 186-1.0 flushvalve with B-73-A handle assembly, vacuum breaker and stop. Unit shall be complete with wall hangers andremovable beehive strainer. Refer to architectural drawings and A.D.A. requirements for mounting heights. Provide Smith 0634 Carrier support.

LAVATORY (MARKED "L-A"): (Handicapped)Kohler K-2030, 20" x 18", white, vitreous china, wall mounted lavatory with 8" faucet centers. K-7443 faucetwith lever handles and K-7715 drain with perforated grate and 1-1/4" tailpiece. K-9000, 1-1/4" cast brass P-trap with cleanout plug; 3/8" angle supplies with stops; and Smith concealed arm floor anchored carrier.

15500 - 2

Insulated P-trap and supplies per insulation specification. Install per A.D.A. requirements.

SINK (MARKED “SK-A”)Elkay LR-1919, 19-1/2" x 19" x 7-1/2", single compartment, 18 gauge, Type 302, stainless steel sink. KohlerK-7304-5A faucet with gooseneck spout and wrist blade handles, LK-99 stainless steel drain outlet, cast brassP-trap with cleanout plug, and 3/8" angle supplies with stop.

SINK (MARKED “SK-B”)Elkay LR-3322, 33" x 22" x 8", double compartment, 18 gauge, Type 302, stainless steel sink. Kohler K-7304-5A faucet with gooseneck spout and wrist blade handles, LK-99 stainless steel drain outlet, cast brass P-trapwith cleanout plug, and 3/8" angle supplies with stop.

SINK (MARKED "SH-H"): (Handicapped)Shower mixing valve, vacuum breaker, hand held shower heat with hose, mounting bar and volume controlvalve (Bradley 405, VB, 478, Powers T426-C-6-VC-EVB) with floor drain "FD". Provide shower head similarto shower marked "SH" pipe in diverter valve to select hand held shower head or wall mounted shower head. Install per A.D.A. requirements.

SHOWER (MARKED “SH-A”):Fixed head to be mounted 6'-0" A.F.F. Aquiarius G3698BF 40-1/2"x39-1/2" (36"x36" I.D.) white acrylic shower,fold down seat, 1-1/2" O.D. 18 gauge type 304 stainless steel grab bars, self caulking brass shower drain, 1"O.D. 20 gauge type 304 stainless steel grab bars, self caulking brass shower drain, 1" O.D. 20 gauge type304 stainless steel curtain rod with commercial grade white shower curtain and S.S. rings. Install per A.D.A.Requirements with ½" curb. Lawler 3800-SC1-DV-HW-SH2 single handle thermostatic and pressurebalancing mixing shower valve, vacuum breaker, hand/wall shower head, diverter valve, 60" shower hose,24" glide bar.

SERVICE SINK (MARKED "SS-A"): Fiat MSB-2424, 24" x 24" x 10" white molded stone mop service basin with #302 stainless steel drain, bumperguard, #830-AA mixing faucet, #832-AA hose and hose bracket, #889-CC mop hanger, #833-AA siliconesealant and three (3) #MSG 2424 stainless steel wall guards (side and back).

ELECTRIC WATER COOLER (MARKED "EWC-H"): Elkay EZSTL-8C wall mounted electric water cooler for handicapped use, with a capacity of 7.5 gph of 50 Fo

water at a room temperature of 90 F and inlet water temperature of 80 F. Finish to be stainless steel, top ando o

cabinet. Refer to Architectural Drawings for mounting height.

ICE MAKER BOX (MARKED “IMB”):Provide 3/8" angle supply with stop in 20 GA. metal recessed, flush mounted box Guy Gray BIM875 at 12"A.F.F. provide Type “L” hard copper drain line to floor drain.


15500 - 3

SECTION 15535 - REFRIGERANT PIPING AND SPECIALTIES

SECTION INCLUDESPiping.

Refrigerant.

Moisture and liquid indicators.

Valves.

Strainers.

Check valves.

Pressure relief valves.

Filter-driers.

Solenoid valves.

Expansion valves.

Receivers.

Flexible connections.

RELATED SECTIONSSection 08305 - Access Doors.

Section 09900 - Painting.

Section 15260 - Piping Insulation.

Section 15280 - Equipment Insulation.

Section 15671 - Air Cooled Condensing Units.

Section 15790 - Air Coils.

Section 15985 - Sequence of Operation.

Section 16180 - Equipment Wiring Systems: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections.

REFERENCESARI 495 - Refrigerant Liquid Receivers.

ARI 710 - Liquid Line Dryers.

ARI 730 - Flow-Capacity Rating and Application of Suction-Line Filters and Filter-Driers

ARI 750 - Thermostatic Refrigerant Expansion Valves.

ARI 760 - Solenoid Valves for Use With Volatile Refrigerants.

15535 - 1

HP Z230

Typewritten Text

HP Z230

Typewritten Text


HP Z230

Typewritten Text

ASHRAE 15 - Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration.

ASHRAE 34 - Number Designation of Refrigerants.

ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.

ASME B16.26 - Cast Copper Alloy Fittings For Flared Copper Tubes.

ASME B31.5 - Refrigeration Piping.

ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping.

ASTM B280 - Seamless Copper Tube for Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Field Service.

ASTM F708 - Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers.

AWS A5.8 - Brazing Filler Metal.

MSS SP58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacturer.

MSS SP69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application.

MSS SP89 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices.

SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONWhere more than one piping system material is specified ensure system components are compatible andjoined to ensure the integrity of the system is not jeopardized. Provide necessary joining fittings. Ensureflanges, union, and couplings for servicing are consistently provided.

Provide pipe hangers and supports in accordance with ASTM B31.5 unless indicated otherwise.

Liquid Indicators:

Use line size liquid indicators in main liquid line leaving condenser.

If receiver is provided, install in liquid line leaving receiver.

Use line size on leaving side of liquid solenoid valves.

ValvesUse service valves on suction and discharge of compressors.Use gage taps at compressor inlet and outlet.Use gage taps at hot gas bypass regulators, inlet and outlet.Use check valves on compressor discharge.Use check valves on condenser liquid lines on multiple condenser systems.

Refrigerant Charging (Packed Angle) Valve: Use in liquid line between receiver shut-off valve andexpansion valve.

Strainers:Use line size strainer upstream of each automatic valve.

Where multiple expansion valves with integral strainers are used, use single main liquid line strainer.

15535 - 2

Use shut-off valve on each side of strainer.

Pressure Relief Valves: Use on ASME receivers [and pipe to outdoors].

Permanent Filter-Driers:

Use in low temperature systems.

Use in systems utilizing hermetic compressors.

Use filter-driers for each solenoid valve.

Solenoid Valves:Use in liquid line of systems operating with single pump-out or pump-down compressor control.

Use in liquid line of single or multiple evaporator systems.

Use in oil bleeder lines from flooded evaporators to stop flow of oil and refrigerant into the suction linewhen system shuts down.

Receivers:Use on systems 5 tons and larger, sized to accommodate pump down charge.

Use on systems with long piping runs.

Flexible Connectors: Utilize at or near compressors where piping configuration does not absorb vibration.

SUBMITTALSSubmit under provisions of Section 01300.

PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

Submit under provisions of Section 01700.

Record exact locations of equipment and refrigeration accessories on record drawings.

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATASubmit under provisions of Section 01700.

Maintenance Data: Include instructions for changing cartridges, assembly views, spare parts lists.

QUALIFICATIONSInstaller: Company specializing in performing the work of this section.

REGULATORY REQUIREMENTSConform to ASME B31.9 for installation of piping system.

Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME SEC 9.

Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL, as suitable for the purposeindicated.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGDeliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600.

15535 - 3

Deliver and store piping and specialties in shipping containers with labeling in place.

Protect piping and specialties from entry of contaminating material by leaving end caps and plugs in placeuntil installation.

MAINTENANCE MATERIALSProvide maintenance materials under provisions of 01700.

Provide containers each with refrigerant.

PRODUCTS

PIPINGCopper Tubing: ASTM B280, Type ACR hard drawn.

Fittings: ASME B16.22 wrought copper.Joints: Braze, AWS A5.8 BCuP silver/phosphorus/copper alloy with melting range 1190 to 1480degrees F (640 to 805 degrees C).

Pipe Supports and Anchors:

Conform to ASME B31.5.Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 Inch (13 to 38 mm): Malleable iron adjustable swivel, split ring.Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 Inches (50 mm) and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods.Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches (75 mm): Cast iron hook.Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier orsteel support.Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated.Hanger Rods: Mild steel threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuous threaded.Inserts: Malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded connectionwith lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to forms; size inserts to suitthreaded hanger rods.

REFRIGERANTRefrigerant: ASHRAE 34;

R-22: Monochlorodifluoromethane.

MOISTURE AND LIQUID INDICATORSIndicators: Single port type, UL listed, with copper or brass body, flared or solder ends, sight glass, colorcoded paper moisture indicator with removable element cartridge and plastic cap; for maximum workingpressure of 500 psig and maximum temperature of 200 degrees F.

VALVES

Ball Valves:Two piece forged brass body with teflon ball seals and copper tube extensions, brass [bonnet and] sealcap, chrome plated ball, stem with neoprene ring stem seals; for maximum working pressure of 500 psig(3450 kPa) and maximum temperature of 300 degrees F.

15535 - 4

Service Valves:Forged brass body with copper stubs, brass caps, removable valve core, [integral ball check valve,] flaredor solder ends, for maximum pressure of 500 psig (3450 kPa).

STRAINERSStraight Line or Angle Line Type:

Brass or steel shell, steel cap and flange, and replaceable cartridge, with screen of stainless steel wire ormonel reinforced with brass; for maximum working pressure of 430 psig (2960 kPa).

CHECK VALVES

Globe Type:Cast bronze or forged brass body, forged brass cap with neoprene seal, brass guide and disc

holder, phosphor-bronze or stainless steel spring, teflon seat disc; for maximum working pressure of 500psig and maximum temperature of 300 degrees F (149 degrees C).

PRESSURE REGULATORSBrass body, stainless steel diaphragm, direct acting adjustable over 0 to 80 psig (0 to 550 kPa) range, formaximum working pressure of 450 psig.

PRESSURE RELIEF VALVESStraight Through or Angle Type: Brass body and disc, neoprene seat, factory sealed and stamped withASME UV and National Board Certification NB; for standard 450 psig setting; selected to ASHRAE 15.

FILTER-DRIERSPermanent Straight Through Type:

ARI 710, UL listed, steel shell with molded desiccant filter core, for maximum working pressure of500 psig. Rating: ARI 710 moisture rating.

SOLENOID VALVESValve: ARI 760, pilot operated, copper or brass [or steel] body and internal parts, synthetic seat, stainlesssteel stem and plunger assembly, with flared, solder, or threaded ends; for maximum working pressure of500 psig. Stem shall permit manual operation in case of coil failure.

EXPANSION VALVESAngle or Straight Through Type: ARI 750; design suitable for refrigerant, brass body, internal or externalequalizer, non-adjustable superheat setting, replaceable inlet strainer, with non-replaceable capillary tubeand remote sensing bulb.

Selection: Evaluate refrigerant pressure drop through system to determine available pressure drop acrossvalve. Select valve for maximum load at design operating pressure and minimum 10 degrees F (6degrees C) superheat. Select to avoid being undersized at full load and excessively oversized at partload.

RECEIVERSInternal Diameter 6 inch (150 mm) and Smaller:

ARI 495, UL listed, steel, brazed; 400 psig maximum pressure rating, with tappings for inlet,outlet, and pressure relief valve.

15535 - 5

Internal Diameter Over 6 inch (150 mm):

ARI 495, welded steel, tested and stamped in accordance with ASME SEC 8D; 400 psig withtappings for liquid inlet and outlet valves, pressure relief valve.

EXECUTION

PREPARATIONReam pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs.

Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly.

Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.

INSTALLATIONInstall refrigeration specialties in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

Route piping in orderly manner, with plumbing parallel to building structure, and maintain gradient.

Install piping to conserve building space and not interfere with use of space.

Group piping whenever practical at common elevations and locations. Slope piping one percent indirection of oil return.

Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment.

Inserts:

Provide inserts for placement in concrete formwork.Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforcedconcrete beams.Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4 inches (100mm).Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface.Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide through-bolt withrecessed square steel plate and nut [above] [flush with top of] [recessed into and grouted flushwith slab.

Pipe Hangers and Supports:

Install in accordance with ASTM B31.5.Support horizontal piping as scheduled.Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch (13 mm) space between finished covering andadjacent work.Place hangers within 12 inches (300 mm) of each horizontal elbow.Support vertical piping at every floor. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontalpiping.Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapezehangers.

Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping.

Arrange piping to return oil to compressor. Provide traps and loops in piping, and provide double risers asrequired. Slope horizontal piping 0.40 percent in direction of flow.

15535 - 6

Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings.

Provide access to concealed valves and fittings.

Flood piping system with nitrogen when brazing.

Where pipe support members are welded to structural building frame, brush clean, and apply one coat ofzinc rich primer to welding.

Prepare unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories ready for finish painting. Refer to Section09900.

Insulate piping; refer to Section 15000 and Section 15200.

Follow ASHRAE 15 procedures for charging and purging of systems and for disposal of refrigerant.

Locate expansion valve sensing bulb immediately downstream of evaporator on suction line.

Provide external equalizer piping on expansion valves with refrigerant distributor connected to evaporator.

Fully charge completed system with refrigerant after testing.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROLField inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01400.

Test refrigeration system in accordance with ASME B31.5.

Pressure test system with dry nitrogen to 200 psig (1470 kPa).

SCHEDULESPipe Hanger Spacing

PIPE SIZE MAX. HANGER SPACING DIAMETERInches (mm) Feet (m) Inches (mm)

1/2 to 1-1/4 6.5 (2) 3/8 (9)(12 to 32)1-1/2 to 2 10 (3) 3/8 (9)(38 to 50)2-1/2 to 3 10 (3) 1/2 (13)(62 to 75)4 to 6 10 (3) 5/8 (15)(100 to 150)

8 to 12 10 (3) 5/8 (22)(100 to 150)


15535 - 7

SECTION 15700 AIR CONDITIONING, HEATING AND VENTILATING

GENERAL:The air conditioning system, in general, shall be for the entire building, providing coolingand dehumidification in summer and heating in winter. A constant amount of fresh air shallbe taken into the system and all air shall be filtered.

EMERGENCY DRAIN PAN:Provide an emergency drain pan below all air handling units. The pan shall be constructed of 18 gaugegalvanized steel, extending 6" beyond unit all around and turning up a minimum of 4" around the perimeterand water piping inlet valves at AHU. A 1-1/4" x 1-1/4" x 1/8" galvanized angle iron frame shall be weldedaround the top of the pan. Entire pan should be painted with black asphalt rust preventative paint. Extenda Type "L" hard copper drain line (minimum 1") to the floor drain in the mechanical room or as indicated onthe drawings.

Emergency drain pans for all water heaters shall be 20 gauge galvanized sheet metal with sides of panextending 4" above the bottom of the pan per detail.

THERMOMETERS AND WELLS:Furnish and install thermometers and wells as indicated on the plans. Thermometers shall be bi-metal,adjustable angle dial type. The dial shall be 3" (minimum) with sealed glass lens, white background and blacknumerals and graduations. Thermometer shall be complete with 3/4" separable wells for insulation in piping.

Thermometer and wells shall be as manufactured by Weksler Model AF/L3B, Marsh Model K6025 or equal.

LABELING EQUIPMENT: All equipment shall be labeled with permanent laminated plate riveted to unit. Units shall be labeled asindicated in schedules. Plate shall be black with white unit numbers. Height of unit number shall be minimumof one (1) inch. Label shall also indicate area serviced by unit as noted in schedules. Height of letters shallbe minimum of one-half (1/2) inch. Submit sample to Architect for approval.

VENTILATING SYSTEM: Contractor shall furnish and install all exhaust fans shown and scheduled on Plans. Fans shall be of the typeindicated in schedules.

All exhaust fans shall be equipped with bird screen, automatic back-draft dampers and integral disconnectswitch unless noted otherwise. Fan motors shall be of the 40 C ambient temperature rise type and shall deg

be suitable for continuous duty operation. The fan shall be U.L. listed.

Direct drive fans shall complete with solid state speed control switch mounted in unit housing. Switch shallbe used for final balancing of the system.

In-line fans shall complete with inlet guide vanes with manual adjustable level which shall be locked at finalbalanced position.

All roof mounted fans shall be complete with insulated roof curb. Curb shall be compatible with roofingmanufacturer’s requirements. Coordinate requirements with General Contractor and Roofing Manufacturer.

HIGH EFFICIENCY HEAT PUMP - OUTDOOR SECTION: Furnish and install high-efficiency, air-cooled reverse cycle top discharge heat pump where shown and withcapacities scheduled. UNIT SHALL BE COMPLETELY FACTORY ASSEMBLED, PRE-CHARGED ANDTESTED, AND SHALL BE SUPPLIED FROM THE FACTORY WITH ALL FEATURES LISTED BELOW. Min.SEER 11.0.

15700 - 1

HP Z230

Typewritten Text


Condenser coil shall be constructed of aluminum fins mechanically bonded to an aluminum coil and shall beprotected with stamped louvered panels on outside of unit.

Condenser fan shall be propeller type, direct driven. Motor shall have inherent protection and be of thepermanently lubricated type, resiliently mounted. Fans shall be complete with safety guards.

Compressor shall be a single speed serviceable hermetic or sealed hermetic design complete with crankcaseheater and external spring isolators and compressors, and shall have a 5-year warranty. Unit shall beequipped with time delay to prevent compressor from starting within five minutes of "off" time.

All controls shall be factory wired and shall consist of condenser fan overload devices, hard start kit (singlephase only), internal pressure relief valve, filter dryers, pressure taps for refrigerant check, quick connectrefrigerant couplings and liquid and suction line service valves. Unit shall also be furnished with outdoorexpansion valve or metering valve and check valve, switch-over valve, time and temperature defrost controlsystem, "thermister" outdoor temperature sensor and an evaporator defrost control kit to permit the coolingsystem to operate down to 30 F outdoor temperature.o

Unit shall be furnished complete with an adjustable outdoor thermostat with settings between 45 and 0 too o

prevent the auxiliary strip heater from being energized (except on defrost cycle), unless outdoor temperatureis below set point.

Casing shall be fully weatherproof for outdoor installation and shall be bonderized steel with baked enamelfinish. Panels shall be removable to provide access for servicing. Unit shall be set in place on rubbermounting pads.

Contractor shall advise the Electrical Contractor of the manufacturer's recommended fuse size if different fromthat specified on the Electrical Drawings. Mechanical Contractor shall pay any additional costs required tochange fuse sizes.

Unit shall be as manufactured by Trane, Lennox, Carrier, York or approved equivalent.

HIGH EFFICIENCY CONDENSING UNIT:Equipment to be same as "HIGH EFFICIENCY HEAT PUMP-OUTDOOR SECTION", except to be coolingonly in lieu of reverse cycle. Outdoor thermostat to lock out electric strip heater based on outdoor temperaturenot required.

HIGH EFFICIENCY AIR CONDITIONING UNIT/HEAT PUMP A/C - INDOOR SECTION:Furnish and install vertical discharge/bottom return, or horizontal type (as indicated on plans) air conditioningunit of size, type and capacities as scheduled. Units shall be Trane, Lennox, Carrier, York or approvedequivalent.

Units shall be complete with fan, multi-speed direct drive blower, motor, direct expansion cooling coil, lowvoltage control transformer, grease fittings, drain pan, etc. All units shall be factory insulated on the interiorwith not less than 3/4# density neoprene coated fiberglass cemented in place with waterproof adhesive.

Each unit shall be mounted on a suitable base as indicated on plans or 18" high painted angle iron baseapproved by the Engineer to allow for proper return air. Unit shall also be designed for continuous operationat the maximum rated static pressure. Fan capacities shall be rated with the fans in the units, and thehorsepowers specified shall include all losses.

Casings shall be suitable for operation at the pressures specified and constructed of bonderized steel.

Cooling coils shall be of aluminum or copper and shall be tested at 400 psi air pressure. Cooling coil face

15700 - 2

velocity shall not exceed that guaranteed by manufacturer for no moisture carry-over.

Electric strip heaters shall be as hereinafter specified and shall be mounted inside unit housing. Coordinateelectric service to heaters and blower with Electrical Contractor. Heater and air unit shall be internally wiredand fused to receive one electrical source of power.

Filter shall be 1" thick, pleated, throw-way mounted in an accessible factory filter rack at unit, or in R.A.ductwork as indicated on plans.

Contractor shall provide a new set of filters upon completion of project, to turn building over to Owner.

If the manufacturer's equipment is not available internally wired to receive one source of power, necessarymodifications to electric service shall be the responsibility of the equipment supplier. Any modificationsrequired shall be submitted in writing ten (10) days prior to the bid date.

DUCTLESS SPLIT SYSTEMThe ductless split system shall be a Mitsubishi Electric split system (or approved equal) with Variable SpeedInverter Compressor technology. The system shall consist of a horizontal discharge, single phase outdoor unit,a matched capacity indoor section that shall be equipped with a wired wall-mounted thermostat. Install permanufacturer’s installation instructions.

The units shall have a manufacturer's parts and defects warranty for a period five (5) year from date ofinstallation. The compressor shall have a warranty of seven (7) years from date of installation. If, during thisperiod, any part should fail to function properly due to defects in workmanship or material, it shall be replacedor repaired at the discretion of the manufacturer.

ELECTRIC STRIP HEATERS:Electric strip heaters shall consist of open coils made from Grade "A" resistant wire insulated by floatingceramic bushings and supported in an aluminum steel frame.

All terminal studs, nuts and washers shall be stainless steel, insulated with phenolic terminal bushings. Terminals shall be machine crimped to coils and heater shall be tested at 2000 volts before shipment. Allvoltages and phases shall be as scheduled.

Heater shall be provided with built-in contactors, with one terminal block furnished for each circuit andseparate contactors for each stage of heating. Heaters with air units supplying 2000 CFM or less shall beinternally wired with air unit to receive one electric source of power.

An automatic reset thermal cut-off shall be provided to break the heater load directly on over-temperature. In addition, provide manual reset thermal cut-off to break the heater load manually.

Control circuit transformer shall be built into heater terminal box and sized to carry full contactor holding coilload.

Heaters shall be listed by UL and shall be as manufactured by Chromalox, Electric Heaters, Inc., IndustrialEngineering and Equipment Co., or an approved equivalent.

Heater shall be equipped with built-in pressure type air flow switch. Heater shall be mounted inside unithousing.

Where indicated on drawings, heaters in ductwork shall be provided with duct flanges. Outside of heater shallbe wrapped with 2" thick fiberglass ductwrap with aluminum foil vapor barrier.

15700 - 3

TESTING REFRIGERANT PIPING SYSTEMS:Refrigerant lines shall be tested under 200 psi carbon dioxide pressure for 5 hours using soap suds at jointsto test for leaks. Evacuate system and charge with refrigerant.

AHU FILTERS:All new air handling units (i.e.: split systems or wall mounted packaged units) shall be furnished and installedwith permanent metal filter frames as manufactured by Airguard Series B or prior approved equivalent.

Frame shall be constructed of 22 gauge perimeter frame enclosing a preformed 16 gauge wire air leaving grid. The front support shall be a 10 gauge wire grid.

Filter media shall be Airguard PSF-11 or prior approved equivalent.

During construction, start-up and running units, units shall have 1" thick pleated disposable filters asmanufactured by FARR 30/30 or prior approved equivalent.

Final size of metal frames for filters shall be coordinated with each A/C unit equipment manufacturer.

ELECTRIC STRIP HEATERS:Electric strip heaters shall consist of open coils made from Grade "A" resistant wire insulated by floatingceramic bushings and supported in an aluminum steel frame.

All terminal studs, nuts and washers shall be stainless steel, insulated with phenolic terminal bushings. Terminals shall be machine crimped to coils and heater shall be tested at 2000 volts before shipment. Allvoltages and phases shall be as scheduled.

Heater shall be provided with built-in contactors, with one terminal block furnished for each circuit andseparate contactors for each stage of heating. Heaters with air units supplying 2000 CFM or less shall beinternally wired with air unit to receive one electric source of power.

An automatic reset thermal cut-off shall be provided to break the heater load directly on over-temperature. In addition, provide manual reset thermal cut-off to break the heater load directly.

Control circuit transformer shall be built into heater terminal box and sized to carry full contactor holding coilload.

Heaters shall be listed by UL and shall be as manufactured by Chromalox, Electric Heaters, Inc., IndustrialEngineering and Equipment Co., or an approved equivalent.

Heater shall be equipped with built-in pressure type air flow switch. Heater shall be mounted inside unithousing.

LABELING A/C UNITS:All indoor and outdoor a/c units shall be labeled with permanent laminated plate riveted to unit. Units shallbe labeled as indicated in schedules. Plate shall be black with white unit numbers. Height of unit numbershall be minimum of one (1) inch. Label shall also indicate area serviced by unit as noted in schedules. Height of letters shall be minimum of one-half (1/2) inch. Submit sample to Engineer for approval.

VENTILATING SYSTEM: This Contractor shall furnish and install all exhaust fans shown and scheduled on Plans. Fans shall be of thetype indicated and shall be Cook, Greenheck, Acme or approved equivalent.

15700 - 4

All exhaust fans shall be equipped with bird screen, automatic back-draft dampers and integral disconnectswitch unless noted otherwise. Fan motors shall be of the 40 C ambient temperature rise type and shall deg

be suitable for continuous duty operation. Direct drive fans shall be complete with solid state speed controlswitch mounted on unit for balancing. Interlock with remote on/off switch.

Roof mounted fans shall be complete with insulated factory roof curb. Coordinate requirements and heightwith roofing manufacturer's recommendation.

In-line exhaust fans shall be mounted with spring isolation hangers and threaded rod supports anchored tostructure.

Ceiling mounted fans shall be complete with white ceiling mounted grille. Grille shall be removable to provideservice access to fan, motor, etc.

EMERGENCY DRAIN PAN (DX Equipment):All vertical split system air handling units shall be installed on 18" high welded angle iron support in anemergency drain pan. Allow proper clearance for R.A. duct connection and removal of filters, etc.

Drain pans shall be constructed of 20 gauge galvanized metal. Pan shall extend 4" beyond the edge of theunit. The sides of the pan shall be 4" high with drain connection located inside of the pan.

Provide 3/4" Type "L" hard copper drain line with valve and pipe to floor drain in mechanical room.


15700 - 5

SECTION 15750 AIR DISTRIBUTION

GENERALFurnish and install all ducts for Air Conditioning, Heating and Ventilating System as shownon the plans and as may be required to provide complete system. Ductwork shall becomplete with grilles, vanes, flashings, hangers, flexible connections at equipment (A.H.U.'s, fan powered VAVboxes, etc.,), splitters, manual dampers, fresh air inlets, louvers, reinforcing angles, etc. All ductwork shallbe concealed and insulated as hereinafter specified.

ALL DUCTWORK SIZES INDICATED ON DRAWINGS ARE METAL-TO-METAL OUTSIDE DIMENSIONS.

DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTSAll ductwork shall be properly braced to prevent rattling, breathing or other unnecessary noise. No sharpedges or obstructions shall project into the air stream. (1" wide x 16 gauge minimum)

LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORKAll ductwork shall be galvanized steel and shall be of gauges and construction as recommended by ASHRAEGuide and Data Book. Gauges are as follows, with longest side governing. (Duct dimensions on Plans aremetal-to-metal dimensions).

Dimensions of longest side Sheet Metal Gauge0"-12" 26 Gauge13"-30" 24 Gauge31"-54" 22 Gauge55"-84" 20 Gauge

All ductwork shall be sealed at seams and joints with tape and hardcast duct sealant material.

Joints and reinforcing shall be as per ASHRAE Guide and Data Book and all slips shall be installed withoutedge of internal part of slip facing downstream.

Construction standards of Article 110 of the National Board of Fire Underwriters, Bulletin 90, latest edition,shall apply throughout.

Flashings shall be sheet copper, and shall be furnished and installed around all outside openings used forducts of fans and wherever required. Roof flashings shall extend at least 8" above roof.

All ducts shall be straight and true and installed in a neat and workmanlike manner.

All edges shall be straight and true, and all bends shall be made with vaned turns. Where long radius turnscannot be used, the Contractor shall use square turns and use air splitters spaced not more than 3" centerto center, and of a length so air will be properly distributed over the ducts.

ROUND DUCTWORK shall be constructed of 26 gauge galvanized sheet metal with screwed and tapedjoints. At contractor's option , pre-insulated flexible ductwork as manufactured by Thermaflex Model MKE,Omniaire 1200 or equal may be used to connect to ceiling diffusers (maximum 5'-0" length).

DUCTWORK SEALANTAll ductwork shall be air tight. All seams, both shop made and field installed, and shall be sealed with tapeand glue. All transverse joints shall be sealed as well as spin collar takeoffs and rough duct connections. All duct connections and seams shall be sealed with a UL approved non-flammable tape and mastic system. Strict adherence to manufacturers installation instruction is required. The duct sealant shall be equal toHardcast FTA20/DT5300, United McGill Unit-Sealer Tape and Glue or 3M Company Sealing System.

15750 - 1

HP Z230

Typewritten Text


DUCT ACCESSORIESDampers of the fusible link operated type shall be provided in all ductwork passing through the floor orfirewalls. In all cases, the time rating of damper shall be equal to or greater than the time rating of the wall.

Provide quadrant or adjustable splitters and mark shaft to give position of splitter damper in duct.

Provide vanes behind every supply grille or diffuser. Splitters shall be provided where shown on Plans andwhere located in concealed, non-accessible space, provide Young Regulators to operate splitter. Vanes shallbe Tuttle and Bailey "Ducturns", Barber Coleman Uniflo or equivalent. Shop fabricated vanes will beacceptable. All dampers shall be constructed of 14 gauge steel.

SPIN COLLARSAll round take-offs to round branch duct shall be made with 26 gauge spin-type collars with 26 gaugebalancing dampers. These spin-collars shall be as manufactured by Flexmaster Model FLD, Champagnemodel SD, or approved equivalent.

The mounting groove shall be die-formed to assure constant fit control. Balancing dampers shall be factory-installed with spring loaded, retractable bearings and a positive locking wing-nut for easy adjustment.

REGISTERS, GRILLES AND DIFFUSERS:Square or rectangular ceiling supply outlets, unless noted otherwise, shall be Anemostat, Price, Titus,Metalaire, or equal, as indicated in schedules. Color shall be white. Grilles shall be of aluminum constructionwith baked enamel finish. Where noted on plans, grilles with fire dampers in ceiling shall be steel constructionwith fire rated blanket behind grille as required by grille type scheduled.

All wall supply grilles shall be complete with horizontal and vertical adjustable deflectors and opposed bladevolume control damper. Grilles shall be manufactured by Titus, Price, Metalaire, Anemostat, or prior approvedequivalent.

Return air grilles shall be as manufactured by Anemostat, Metalaire, Price, Titus or equivalent, and shall beof the style called for on the Plans. Provide filters in filter back grilles.

All supply and return outlets shall be sealed to interior finish with a sponge rubber gasket.

All grilles, diffusers and registers shall be of sizes and type as indicated on Plans or scheduled on Drawings.

Unless otherwise shown on Drawings, all grilles installed in walls and doors shall be furnished with prime coatfinish suitable for painting by painting sub-contractor.

FIRE DAMPERS: Furnish and install, at locations shown on Plans, fire dampers constructed and tested in accordance with ULSafety Standard 555. Each fire damper shall have fire protection label in accordance with established ULlabeling procedures. Damper manufacturer's literature submitted for approval prior to installation shall includecomprehensive performance data developed from testing in accordance with AMCA Standard 500, and shallillustrate pressure drops for all sizes of dampers required at all anticipated air flow rates. Fire dampers shallbe equipped for vertical or horizontal installation as required by the location shown.

Fire dampers shall be 100% free area and installed in wall openings utilizing steel sleeves, angles or othermaterials and practices required to provide an installation equivalent to that utilized by the manufacturer whendampers are tested by UL. Installation shall be in accordance with the damper manufacturer's instructions. Fire dampers shall be Ruskin Type DIBD, Style B, Air Balance or approved equivalent.

DUCT ACCESS PANELSAccess panel shall be Flexmaster “Inspector Series” Model SDSM low leakage spin-in access door. Door

15750 - 2

shall be 1" insulated type and shall be 24 gauge steel with 24 gauge steel frame. A continuous 3/8" wide by3/16" thick open cell adhesive neoprene gasket shall be installed in the door frame to provide a positive sealupon insertion and locking of door. The door shall be held secure with every spaced cast aluminum camlatches for even pressure against the gasket.

FIRE DAMPERSThe contractor shall furnish and install UL rated 1-1/2 hour fire dampers at the locations indicated on thedrawings in new ducts and sound attenuators. The contractor shall provide dampers with sleeves and angleframes necessary to comply with the manufacturer's UL installation requirements. Dampers for vertical orhorizontal air flow shall be provided as required.

Fire damper shall be 100% free area and installed in wall and floor openings utilizing steel sleeves, angles, other materials and practice required to provide an installation equivalent to that utilized by the manufacturerw hen dampers are tested by UL. Installation shall be in accordance with the damper manufacturer'sinstructions.

Fire damper for rectangular ductwork and transfer openings shall be Ruskin type IBD or Air Balance 119BL3.

Fire dampers for round ductwork shall be Arrow Model 119AIS, Ruskin Model IBD-CR.

All fire dampers shall be installed per N.F.P.A. and U.L. requirements.

All fire dampers shall meet the latest Class 1 leakage requirements.

MOTORIZED DAMPERS

Mechanical Contractor shall furnish and install motorized dampers as indicated on mechanical andarchitectural drawings. Damper shall be opposed blade motorized type equivalent to Ruskin CD36/PB,Greenheck Model VCD-23, or equal. Motorized dampers shall be operated by 120/1/60 electric actuator asindicated on plans. Damper shall be complete with outboard support bearing, blade and jamb seals. Dampers shall be low - leakage type. Dampers shall go to closed position when units are off.

MANUAL DAMPERS

Mechanical contractor shall furnish and install manual dampers at outdoor air intakes and in other rectangularductwork as indicated on plans. Damper shall be complete with outboard support bearing, and manual lockingquadrant lever for balancing. Dampers shall be low - leakage type as manufactured by Greenheck MBD-15,Ruskin Model MD 35 or equal.


15750 - 3

SECTION 15800 TEMPERATURE CONTROLS

GENERAL:Provide an electric temperature Control system by Honeywell, Johnson, BarberColeman, Robertshaw or approved equal, to be installed by the MechanicalContractor.

THERMOSTAT:Provide fully automatic programmable room type thermostat with night setback per zone or as indicated onPlans to cycle compressor on cooling cycle, and compressor and/or electric strips in stages on heating cycleas required to maintain space conditions. Unit shall be wired for constant or automatic fan operation and shallbe electrically interlocked such that the compressor may not run nor the electric strip heaters be energizedunless the evaporator fan is operating. Thermostat shall be complete with fan "Auto-On" switch and system"Auto-Heat-Off-Cool" switch.

THERMOSTAT COVER:Provide heavy duty plastic, key-locked thermostat covers on all thermostats. One key shall be capable ofopening all covers.

FIRESTAT:Provide manual reset firestat in return air to each air handling unit. Firestat shall stop associated fan on a risein air temperature above 125 F.o

SMOKE DETECTOR:The Mechanical Contractor shall furnish and install a smoke detector in the supply duct of all air handlersdelivering 2000 C.F.M. or greater and shall be interlocked to de-energize fan on actuation of detector.

Smoke detectors shall have auxiliary contacts for interlock with the fire alarm system. Coordinate installationand selection of smoke detectors. Entire installation shall meet UL requirements for interlock with buildingfire alarm and security system.

Provide remote audible and visual alarm unit (one per AHU with smoke detector) in accordance with latestN.F.P.A. 90A requirements.

Dual-chamber, ionization smoke detectors: The combination detector head and twist-lock base shall be ULlisted compatible with a UL listed fire alarm panel.

The smoke detector shall have a flashing status indication LED or visual supervision. When the detector isactuated, the flashing LED shall latch on steady and at full brilliance. The detector may be reset by activatingthe control panel reset switch.

The sensitivity of the detector shall be monitored without removal of the detector head. Metering setting pointsshall be accessible on the exterior of the detector head. Field adjustment for the sensitivity shall be possiblewhen conditions require a change.

It shall be possible to perform a functional test of the detector without the need of generating smoke. The testmethod must simulate effects of products of combustion in the chamber to ensure testing of all detectorcircuits.

Voltage and RF transient suppression techniques shall be employed to minimize false alarm potential. A gated alarm output shall be used for additional detector stability.

Auxiliary SPDT relays and/or remote LED alarm indicators shall be installed as required.

15800 - 1

HP Z230

Typewritten Text


Duct mounted smoke detectors shall shut down the associated air handling unit fan motor an fire/smokedamper. This contractor shall provide all equipment and labor as required to accomplish same.

FLOAT SWITCH:Provide float switch to emergency drain pan of each AHU. Switch shall be interlocked with AHU to de-energize the unit when the water level in the pan rises above a set level.

MOTORIZED DAMPERS:O.A. motorized dampers shall be interlocked with A/C units in respective mechanical rooms to open when anyA/C unit is "on" and closed when all A/C units are "off". Provide all necessary relays, switches, transformers,etc. as required.

Motorized dampers shall be furnished and set in place by contractor installing the ductwork.

Damper actuators shall be 120/1/60 electric actuators specifically selected for damper manufacturer'srequirements. Controls contractor shall furnish and install actuators. Coordinate all work with contractorinstalling dampers.

EXHAUST FAN SEQUENCE OF OPERATION:Exhaust fans shall be interlocked as follows:

EXHAUST FAN 1-3,5 : Provide ceiling mounted occupancy control sensor with adjustable timer. Providepilot light to indicate operation of fan and a solid state speed control switch mounted in fan housing shall beused for balancing air flow.

EXHAUST FAN 4 : Provide combination starter/disconnect with push remote button on/off switch on wall tostart and stop exhaust fan and open corresponding combination louver with motorized damper simultaneously.When exhaust fan is started, corresponding motorized louver shall open. When exhaust fan is stoppedmotorized louver shall shut.

CONTROL WIRING:All wiring required in the control systems, including electrical connections for the thermostats, firestats, smokedetectors, exhaust fans and all interlocking motor control wiring shall be furnished and installed by MechanicalContractor.

All wiring shall be in conduit and in accordance with the National Electrical Code (N.E.C.).

All control wiring located outdoors shall be installed in rigid or intermediate metal conduit.

All control wiring located indoors where an accessible ceiling is not available shall be installed in E.M.T.conduit.

All control wiring located above accessible ceilings shall be N.E.C. approved cable. All control wiring locatedabove accessible ceilings used as air plenums shall be N.E.C. approved "plenum cable".

All conductors shall be copper. Conductors used for power circuits shall be #12 TW minimum. Conductorsused for control circuits shall be #14 TW minimum. Conductors used for sensor circuits shall be #18 TWminimum.

CONTROL WIRING:All wiring required in the control systems, including electrical connections for electric-pneumatic andpneumatic-electric switches, firestats, air compressors, smoke detectors, and all interlocking motor controlwiring and start-up wiring shall be furnished and installed by the control sub-contractor.

All wiring shall be in conduit and accordance with the National Electrical Code.

15800 - 2

Raceways used shall be hot dipped, galvanized rigid steel conduit, P.V.C., E.M.T. or intermediate metalconduit (IMC) for construction of the project. IMC must be galvanized if run underground or in concrete. P.V.C. shall be run below grade only.

All control wiring located outdoors shall be installed in rigid or intermediate metal conduit.

All control wiring located indoors where an accessible ceiling is not available shall be installed in E.M.T.conduit.

All control wiring located above accessible ceilings shall be N.E.C. approved cable. All control wiring locatedabove accessible ceilings used as air plenums shall be N.E.C. approved "plenum" cable.

All conductors shall be copper. Conductors used for power circuits shall be #12 TW minimum. Conductorsused for control circuits shall be #14 TW minimum. Conductors used for sensor circuits shall be #18 TWminimum.

All conductors shall be color coded as required by NEC and further identified and coded as required by theenergy management system supplier. Color coding shall be by means of a colored insulating material, coloredbraid or jacket over the insulation or means of suitable colored, permanent, non-aging, insulating tape appliedto conductors at each outlet, cabinet or junction point. The color coding shall be accomplished as conductorsare installed.

All conductors shall be labeled at each junction box, sub-panel, etc., indicating the load on the control panel,equipment identification label (example: AHU 1, etc.). A list with identification labels and equipment locationshall be furnished to owner at the completion of the project.

Provide terminal strips at all junction boxes to terminate conductors. Mechanical fasteners (.e.g., wire nuts)will not be acceptable.

DAMPER AND VALVE OPERATIONS:All operators shall be sized for at least 15% more thrust than required for operation of the respective devicein order to insure ease positive operation.

Sequencing by utilizing split spring ranges will not be allowed, positive positioning devices are required forsequencing.

VALVES:All modulating valves shall be 2 or 3-way type (as indicated on plans) and shall be equipped with equalpercentage characteristics throttling plugs and removable composition discs. Valves 2" and smaller shall bescrewed and valves 2-1/2" and larger shall be flanged end type. Pressure drop through automatic valves shallnot exceed 4 psig. Valves shall be complete with polished stainless steel stems and spring loaded packing.

THERMOSTATS:AHU, V.A.V. box, reheat coil, and FCU thermostats, unless noted otherwise, shall be the 2-pipe tamper-proofpneumatic type with separate internal adjustable high and low setpoint controller. The thermostat shall haveadjustable set point from space and shall be a metal, tamper-proof type.

All thermostats shall have plug-in port for easy calibration and lockable settings.

Two (2) pipe pneumatic thermostats shall be as manufactured by Robertshaw Model T18/19, HoneywellModel 970 A/B or equal.

Pneumatic thermostats shall have a conversion kit with wall mounting plate for retrofit of existing thermostatsas required.

15800 - 3

Provide two (2) pressure gauges with adaptor, adjustment tools and tools to remove thermostat covers.

One (1) thermostat shall be required per V.A.V. box, control box, reheat coil, AHU, etc.

SENSOR-RECEIVER CONTROLLERS:Where sensor and receiver controllers are specified, the sensors shall be factory calibrated, non-adjustable. Duct and water line sensors shall have a temperature span of 200 F. Room type sensors shall have a spano

of 50 F. All receiver-controllers shall have integral means to adjust temperature set point and modulatingo

range and integral gauges to indicate the temperature or relative humidity at the respective sensor and thebranch line pressure from the controller. All submaster type receiver controllers, in addition to the above,shall have integral means to adjust the reset ratio and an integral gauge to indicate the temperature at thesecond sensor. Where receiver-controllers are reset from a remote location, they shall have integral set pointadjustment ports.

The controllers and the 2-1/2" flush mounted gauges shall be housed inside a unitized steel cabinet withhinged door and keyed lock, wall mounted adjacent to each A.H. unit.

Receiver-controllers shall be proportional plus integral type.

TEMPERATURE CONTROL WIRING INTERLOCK:The control sub-contractor shall make complete and coordinated interlock wiring and supervisory centralsystem wiring diagrams. The sub-contractor shall obtain the necessary diagrams from the successfulmanufacturer and shall completely coordinate the interlock diagram.

Interlocks by control contractor shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

1. Interlock all cooling A/C units with respective motorized fresh air intakes. Modify as required formorning start-up sequence.

2. Interlock all firestats with respective fans or air units.3. Provide all interlocks required for proper operation of control system for chilled and hot water system.4. Interlock system so that whenever an air unit is energized, either the chilled water system and/or hot

water system will be energized if the equipment is in the operating range above or below its adjustableoutdoor sensor and the respective system is in the automatic position.

5. Entire air conditioning, heating and ventilating system, plus the water heater, shall be programmedthrough time clocks located in the central mechanical control panel.

6. Provide all interlocks between AHU and associated fan powered V.A.V. boxes to function as specifiedin sequence of operation

7. Provide manual reset "kill-switch" in drainpan at each air handler to be wired to stop respective unitupon rise of water in drain pan.

8. Interlock smoke detectors in supply ducts at respective units.9. Provide interlock and controls to vary unit fan speed based on supply duct static pressure. Frequency

inverters shall be utilized to control fan speed.10. Provide interlocks with energy management panel as hereinafter specified with interlocks to the

equipment.11. Provide sub-panel to EMS which will include "Hand-Off-Auto" switches and pilot lights for each

respective piece of equipment controlled by the EMS, including: AHU's pumps, water heaters, etc.

NAME TAGS:All temperature control devices, located on/in local panels, on equipment, etc., shall be labeled with a phenolicface engraved name tag, screw-on or riveted type, located underneath the device to identify the devicefunction as referenced in the control drawings.

END OF SECTION

15800 - 4

SECTION 15900 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING

SECTION INCLUDESAll Division 15 specifications, drawings, and general provisions of the contract apply towork of this section, as do other documents referred to in this section.

SCOPE OF WORKThe Mechanical Contractor shall obtain the services of an independent Test and Balance Company whichspecializes in the testing and balancing of heating, ventilating and air conditioning (HVAC) systems to test,adjust and balance all HVAC systems in the construction area.

The work included in this section consists of furnishing labor, instruments, and tools required in testing,adjusting and balancing the HVAC systems, as described in these specifications or shown on accompanyingdrawings. Services shall include checking equipment performance, taking the specified measurements, andrecording and reporting the results.

Representatives of the Test and Balance Company shall visit the job site at 90% completion of installation ofthe HVAC equipment, piping and ductwork to review the installation. After each site visit, the Test andBalance Company shall report to the Architect any items that are not installed properly, are missing from theContract Documents or items that are required to enable him to perform the testing and balancing of theHVAC systems as per normal standard practice. After review, the Architect shall of the HVAC systems asper normal standard practice. After review, the Architect shall instruct the Contractor to implement therecommendations at no additional cost to the Owner if these items were specified in the original scope of theproject.

Upon completion of the HVAC system installation, the Test and Balance Company shall perform all requiredtesting and balancing with the full cooperation of the Contractor and his Sub-contractors. The Contractor shallmake changes and/or adjustments to the HVAC system components that are required by the Test andBalance Company to accomplish proper balancing. The TAB agency shall not supply or install any materialsor balancing devices such as pulleys, drives, belts, etc. All of this work by the Contractor shall be performedat no additional cost to the Owner.

The test and balance report shall be submitted to the Architect for review by his Mechanical Engineer. If theMechanical Engineer agrees with the report, he shall meet with the Test and Balance Company to determinewhat needs to be done to obtain a properly balanced system.

After the Mechanical Engineer signs the testing and balancing report, the Test and Balance Company shallsupply four (4) copies of the final and complete report to the Architect for inclusion in the Operation andMaintenance Manuals.

The items requiring testing, adjusting, and balancing include (but are not restricted to) the following:

AIR SYSTEMS:Supply Fan AHU

Exhaust Fans, Fresh Air Fans

Zone branch and main ducts

Diffusers, Registers, Grilles and Dampers

Coils (Air Temperatures)

Valves

15900 - 1

HP Z230

Typewritten Text


Vibration Isolators

DEFINITIONS, REFERENCES, STANDARDSAll work shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) NationalStandards or the latest standards of the National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB). If these contractdocuments set forth more stringent requirements than the AABC National Standards or the NEBB Standards,these contract documents shall prevail.

QUALIFICATIONSAgency Qualifications: The TAB Agency shall be a current member of the AABC or the NEBB.

SUBMITTALSQualifications: The TAB agency shall submit a company resume listing personnel and project experience inair and hydronic system balancing and a copy of the agency’s test and balance engineer (TBE) certificate.

Procedures and Agenda: The TAB agency shall submit the TAB procedures and agenda proposed to be used.

Sample Forms: The TAB agency shall submit sample forms, which shall include the minimum data requiredby the AABC National Standards or the NEBB Standards.

TAB PREPARATION AND COORDINATIONShop drawings, submittal data, up-to-date revisions, change orders, and other data required for planning,preparation, and execution of the TAB work shall be provided when available and no later than 30 days priorto the start of the TAB work.

System installation and equipment startup shall be complete prior to the TAB agency’s being notified to begin..

The building control system (BCS) contractor shall provide and install the control system, including alltemperature, pressure and humidity sensors. These shall be calibrated for accurate control. If applicable,the BCS contractor shall install all necessary computers and computer programs, and make these operational. Assistance shall be provided as required for reprogramming, coordination, and problem resolution.

All test points, balancing devices, identification tags, etc., shall be accessible and clear or insulation and otherobstructions that would impede TAB procedures.

Qualification installation or startup personnel shall be readily available for the operation and adjustment of thesystems. Assistance shall be provided as required for coordination and problem resolution.

If, upon commencing the work, the TAB contractor finds that the systems are not ready, or if a dispute occursas to the readiness of the systems, the TAB contractor may request an inspection to be made by theDesigner’s Mechanical Engineer. This inspection shall establish to the satisfaction of the represented partieswhether or not the systems meet the basic requirements for testing and balancing. Items that are determinedto be not ready for testing and balancing shall be completed by the Mechanical Contractor and placed inoperational readiness before TAB services are again requested.

REPORTSFinal TAB Report - The TAB agency shall submit the final TAB report for review by the Architect. On plansprovide, all outlets, devices, HVAC equipment, etc., shall be identified, along with a numbering systemcorresponding to report unit identification. The TAB agency shall submit an AABC “National ProjectPerformance Guaranty” (or similar NEBB Guarantee) assuring that the project systems were tested, adjustedand balanced in accordance with the project specifications and AABC National Standards (or similar NEBBStandards).

15900 - 2

Submit 4 copies of the Final TAB Report to the Architect for inclusion in the Operation and MaintenanceManuals.

INSTRUMENTATIONAll instruments used for measurements shall be accurate and calibrated. Calibration and maintenance of allinstruments shall be in accordance with the requirements of AABC National Standards (or similar NEBBStandards).

EXECUTION

GENERALThe specified systems shall be reviewed and inspected for conformance to design documents. Testing,adjusting and balancing on each identified system shall be performed. The accuracy of measurements shallbe in accordance with AABC National Standards (or similar NEBB Standards). Adjustment tolerances shallbe + or - 10% unless otherwise stated.

Equipment settings, including manual damper quadrant positions, valve indicators, fan speed control levers,and similar controls and devices shall be marked to show final settings.

All information necessary to complete a proper TAB project and report shall be per AABC or NEBB standardsunless otherwise noted. The descriptions of work required, as listed in this section, are a guide to theminimum information needed.

TAB contractor shall cut insulation, ductwork and piping for installation of test probes to the minimum extentnecessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. Upon completion, patch insulation, ductwork andhousings using materials identical to those removed. Seal insulation to reestablish integrity of the vaporbarrier.

TAB work shall include additional inspection and adjustment of components during the season following theinitial balance to include re-balance of any items influenced by seasonal changes or as directed by the Owner.

AIR SYSTEMSThe TAB agency shall verify that all ductwork, splitters, extractors, dampers, grilles, registers, and diffusershave been installed per design, are functional and set full open. Any leakage in the ductwork shall be repairedprior to the test. The TAB agency shall perform the following TAB procedures in accordance with the AABCNational Standards or NEBB Standards:

For Supply Fans:Fan speeds - Test and adjust fan RPM to achieve design CFM requirements.

Current and Voltage - Test and record motor voltage and amperage, and compare data with the nameplatelimits to ensure fan motor is not in or above the service factor.

Pitot-Tube Traverse - Perform a Pitot-tube traverse of main supply and return ducts, as applicable to obtaintotal CFM. If a Pitot-tube traverse is not practical an explanation of why a traverse was not made must appearon the appropriate data sheet.

Outside Air - Test and adjust the outside air on applicable equipment using a Pitot-tube traverse. If a traverseis not practical, an explanation of why a traverse was not made must appear on the appropriate data sheet. If a traverse is not practical use the mixed-air temperature method if the inside and outside temperaturedifference is at least 20 degrees Fahrenheit or use the difference between Pitot-tube traverses of the supplyand return air ducts.

15900 - 3

Static Pressure - Test and record system static pressure, including the static pressure profile of each supplyfan.

For Exhaust Fans and Fresh Air Fans:Fan speeds - test and adjust fan RPM to achieve design CFM requirements.

Current and Voltage - Test and record motor voltage and amperage, and compare data with the nameplatelimits to ensure motor is not in or above the service factor.

Pitot-Tube Traverse - Perform a Pitot-tube traverse of main exhaust ducts to obtain total CFM. If a Pitot-tubetraverse is not practical, an explanation of why a traverse was not made must appear on the appropriate datasheet.

Static Pressure - Test and record system static pressure, including the static pressure profile of each exhaustfan.

For Zone, Branch and Main Ducts:Adjust ducts to within design CFM requirements. As applicable, at least one zone balancing damper shall becompletely open. Multi-diffuser branch ducts shall have at least one outlet or inlet volume damper completelyopen.

For Diffusers, Registers and Grilles:Tolerances - Test, adjust, and balance each diffuser, grille, and register to within 10% of design requirements. Minimize drafts include required CFM, initial test CFM and final CFM.

Identification - Identify the type, location, and size of each grille, diffuser, and register. This information shallbe recorded on air outlet data sheets.

For Coils:Air Temperature - Once air flows are set to acceptable limits, take wet bulb and dry bulb air temperatures onthe entering and leaving side of each cooling coil. Dry-bulb temperature shall be taken on the entering andleaving side of each heating coil.

For System Mains and Branches:Adjust water flow in pipes to within design GPM requirements. As applicable, at least one branch balancingvalve shall be completely open.

For Coils:Tolerances - Test, adjust, and balance all chilled-water and hot water coils within 10% of design requirements.

Verification - Verify the type, location, final pressure drop and GPM of each coil. This information shall berecorded on coil data sheets.

INDOOR AIR QUALITY VERIFICATIONThe Tab agency shall take measurements at minimum outside air. It shall measure temperature and humidityuniformity throughout the space, check filter installation for proper fit, seal, and operation, and verifycondensate drain operation. The TAB agency shall note any water damage or obvious contamination sourcesfrom inside or outside.

The TAB agency shall conduct the following air sampling tests using TWA limits shown in ASHRAE Standard62-1989, Table C-1:

Carbon Dioxide - Air Handling Unit

15900 - 4

The TAB agency shall prepare a short report showing the results and location of each test, a summary of theHVAC operating conditions, and a listing of any discrepancies.

ADDITIONAL TAB SERVICESJob Site Inspections: During construction, the TAB agency shall inspect the installation of pipe systems,sheet metal work, temperature controls, and other component parts of the HVAC systems. Inspections shallbe conducted a minimum of two times. (Typically, these are performed when 60% of the total system isinstalled and again when 90% of the total system is installed, prior to insulation of the duct and piping). TheTAB agency shall submit a written report of each inspection to the Architect.

Verification of HVAC Controls: The TAB agency shall be assisted by the building control systems contractorin verifying the operation and calibration of all HVAC and temperature control systems. The following testsshall be conducted:

Verify that all control components are installed in accordance with project requirements and arefunctional, including all electrical interlocks, damper sequences, air and water resets, fire and freezestats, and other safety devices.

Verify that all controlling instruments are calibrated and set for design operating conditions.

Temperature Testing: To verify system control and operation, a series of three temperature tests shallbe taken at approximately two-hour intervals in each separately controlled zone. The resultingtemperatures shall not vary more than two degrees Fahrenheit from the thermostat or control setpoint during the tests. Outside temperature and humidity shall also be recorded during the testingperiods.

TAB Report Verification: At the time of final inspection, the TAB agency may be required to recheck,in the presence of the owner’s representative, specific and random selections of data, air quantities,and air motion recorded in the certified report. Points and areas for recheck shall be selected by theowner’s representative. Measurements and test procedures shall be the same as approved for theinitial work for the certified report. Selections for recheck, specific plus random, will not exceed 10%of the total number tabulated in the report.

Fire and Smoke Testing: The TAB agency shall test fire/smoke dampers to assure operation. Itshall verify that an access door has been installed for each fire and smoke damper. For fire dampers,the TAB agency shall open the access door, disconnect the fusible link, and allow the damper toclose. Operation should be smooth and the damper must close completely. The TAB agency shallthen reset the damper.

For the smoke damper, the TAB agency shall open the access door, activate the damper, andobserve operation. The damper must close quickly and completely. The TAB agency shall then resetthe damper and observe its complete opening.

Life Safety Controls: The TAB agency shall test and record life safety control operation of the HVACequipment. It shall verify the installation of required smoke detectors in air handling equipment(AHE), and shall verify operation of the smoke detector by activating the smoke detector andobserving air handler shutdown. With the controls and alarm contractors, the TAB agency shall verifythe operation of interconnected systems such as the AHE smoke detector’s activation of the fire alarmsystem and the alarm system’s activation of the life safety control sequences.


15900 - 5

16001- 1

SECTION 16001 - ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 - GENERAL


A. The general provisions of the Contract, including the Conditions of the Contract (General,

Supplementary, and other Conditions as appropriate, apply to the Work specified in this Section.

B. Refer to all Electrical Divisions of the Specifications as well as the Specifications for the

other various trades and materials and be thoroughly familiar with all provisions regarding electrical work.

1.2 BIDDING REQUIREMENTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Prime bidder is responsible for all work, of all trades and sub-contractors bidding this

project. It is the prime bidders responsibility, prior to submitting a bid to ensure that sub-contractors coordinate all aspects of the work between trades, sub-contractors, etc. to the fullest extent possible.

B. Prime bidder shall ensure that all sub-contractors, suppliers, equipment vendors, etc.,

obtain all necessary and pertinent contract document information pertaining to their work prior to the submission of a bid. Contractor shall realize that different sub-contractors may furnish equipment, accessories, devices, etc. necessary for a complete and working installation, that require provision of services by another sub-contractor or trade.

C. Bidders of all or any portions of this section or division are required to review all contract

documents including but not limited to Architectural drawings, Structural drawings, Mechanical drawings, Plumbing drawings, Electrical drawings, etc. to coordinate requirements and responsibilities with and through prime bidder.

D. Bidders of all or any portions of this section or division, by furnishing a bid on a portion of

the prime contract are indicating that they have received all contract documents and coordinated services provided under their portion of the work with the prime bidder; they are indicating that they have expressed any pertinent questions (which would result from a detailed, thorough review of the entire set of contract documents) to the prime bidder in accordance with the general provisions of the Specifications requirements, prior to bidding.

E. All timely, pertinent, questions provided in writing prior to bids, in accordance with the

general provisions of the Specifications requirements, will be clarified, defined, or otherwise explained in a written addendum and/or addendums prior to bids, in accordance with the general provisions of the Specifications requirements.

F. It is not the intention of these contract documents to leave any issue relating to

coordination between trades or sub-contractors vaguely defined. The intention is to define all issues, coordination matters, equipment requirements, sizes, routing, etc. to the satisfaction of the prime bidder, prior to receipt of bids.

G. Bidders of all or any portions of this section or division, by virtue of the submission of a

bid to the prime bidder, are indicating that they have reviewed the entire set of contract documents with due diligence and regard for the Owner's desire for a comprehensive and complete bid proposal; that they have expressed all concerns or questions requiring clarification on matters of coordination between trades and/or sub-contractors; that they

HP Z230

Typewritten Text


16001- 2

have expressed any such concerns or questions in writing in accordance with contract document’s General Provisions requirements.

H. Prime bidders, by submission of a comprehensive bid on the project are indicating that

the subcontractors selected in their bid have complied with all contract document’s General Provisions requirements, that they have indicated in writing, prior to bidding, all questions or concerns requiring clarification and/or explanation and have documented any and all specific exclusions involving work that would generally be considered to be work of their trade. The prime bidder shall coordinate all work so that anything excluded by the bidder of all or any portions of this section or division, have been addressed prior to bids in one of the following manners:

1. The work has been confirmed, by the prime bidder, to be work of another trade or

subcontractor whose proposal is also being accepted. 2. Clarification of the matter has been made through the prime design professional

via written addendum and is clearly and mutually understood by the prime bidder and the party raising the issue/question, or seeking clarification.

3. The work has been accepted as the responsibility of the prime contractor directly.

1.3 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT A. The term "provide" when used in the Contract Documents includes all items necessary

for the proper execution and completion of the work.

B. Specific reference in the Specifications to any article, device, product, material, fixture, form or type of construction by name, make or catalog number, shall be interpreted as establishing a standard of quality and shall not be construed as limiting competition; and the Contractor, in such cases, may at his option use any article, device, product, material, fixture, form or type of construction which in the judgement of the Architect expressed in writing is equivalent to that specified.

C. Coordinate and properly relate all work of this Division to building structure and work of

all other trades.

D. Visit premises and become thoroughly familiar with existing conditions; verify all dimensions in field. Advise Architect of any discrepancies prior to Bid Date in accordance with contract document’s General Provisions.

E. Do not rough-in for any item or equipment furnished by others or noted "Not in Contract"

(NIC), without first receiving rough-in information or determining rough-in requirements from other trades and/or Architect.

F. Provide storage and protection for all equipment and materials in accordance with

requirements of contract document’s General Provisions.. Replace any equipment and materials damaged by improper handling, storage, or protection, at no additional cost to the Owner.

G. Keep premises clean in accordance with requirements of contract document’s General

Provisions.

1.4 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Substitutions are allowed under La. R.S. 38:2291 and La R.S. 38:2292. Any requests for

prior approval (as provided for under La. R.S. 38:2295) including any re-submitted data, shall be received by the Architect/Engineer a minimum of ten (10) working days prior to bid date. Submittals sent via facsimile and/or electronic mail will not be accepted. The

16001- 3

Contractor shall recognize that it may be necessary to submit certain requests for prior approval sooner than the final date listed in the Instructions to Bidders, depending upon the complexity and completeness of the submittal. If, in the opinion of the Architect/Engineer, there is neither sufficient time available nor adequate descriptive data attached to the submittal, the submittal will not be considered. Except as otherwise specified, materials and equipment shall be new and bear the approval label of the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. for the type of installation required.

B. Basis of design of systems is based on specific equipment for performance, size, shape,

color, construction material, etc... If the use of other manufacturer's equipment, even though approved by Architect, involves additional cost due to space requirements, foundation requirements, increased mechanical or electrical services, the cost of such extra work shall be borne by the contractor. Even though a manufacturer's name appears in the Contract Documents as having acceptable equipment, his equipment shall be classified as being a substitute to the equipment originally designed for and named in the Contract Documents. Substitute equipment, materials, etc., will not be allowed to deviate from basis of design requirements.

C. All requests for prior approval shall identify where proposed material matches or exceeds

the performance of the equipment specified. In addition, such submittal shall also clearly identify all deficiencies compared to specified product. Submittal of general cut sheets will be returned rejected.

1.5 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS

A. The specific intent of these Contract Documents is to provide the various systems,

equipment, etc. to the Owner complete and in a thoroughly calibrated and functional condition.

B. The Drawings shall not be construed as shop drawings. In the event of a possible

interference with piping or equipment of another trade, items requiring set grade and elevations shall have precedence over other items. Should any major interference develop, immediately notify the Architect.

C. In laying out Work, refer to mechanical, electrical, structural, and architectural drawings at

all times in order to avoid interference and undue delays in the progress of the Work.

1.6 CODES AND REGULATIONS A. Work shall be in full accord with the LA State Sanitary Code, 2014 N.E.C. (NFPA 70),

local ordinances, building codes, and other applicable national, state, and local regulations.

B. Equipment shall conform to requirements and recommendations of the National Bureau

of Fire Underwriters and National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).

C. Items provided under this Division shall comply with the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) "Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by Physically Handicapped People," ANSI A 117.1, and the Americans with Disabilities Act (A.D.A.).

D. Work called for in these Plans and Specifications shall be executed by competent

workmen.

E. In the possible event of conflict between codes or regulations and Contract Documents, notify the Architect/Engineer immediately.

16001- 4

F. The drawings show approximate locations only of feeders, branch circuits, outlets, etc., except where specific routing or dimensions are indicated. The Architect reserves the right to make reasonable changes in locations indicated, before roughing-in, without additional cost to the Owner.

G. Because of the small scale of the drawings, it is not possible to indicate all of the offsets,

fittings, and accessories required. The Contractor shall investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting his work and shall arrange such work accordingly, fittings, bends, junction boxes, pull boxes, access panels, and accessories required to meet such conditions at no additional costs to the Owner.

1.7 FEES, PERMITS, AND TAXES

A. Obtain and pay for permits required for the Work of this Division. Pay fees in connection

therewith, including necessary inspection fees.

B. Pay any and all taxes levied for Work of this Division, including municipal and/or state sales tax where applicable.

1.8 MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS

A. Install and operate equipment and material in strict accord with manufacturer's

installation and operating instructions. The manufacturer's instructions shall become part of the Contract Documents and shall supplement Drawings and Specifications.

1.9 SUBMITTAL DATA

A. Submit shop drawings, project data, and samples in accordance with requirements of the

General Provisions of the contract documents. Submittals shall be received no later than thirty (30) consecutive calendar days from effective date of “Notice to Proceed”.

B. Shop drawings shall consist of published ratings or capacity data, detailed construction drawings for fabricated items, wiring and control diagrams, performance curves, installation instructions, manufacturer's installation drawings, and other pertinent data. Submit drawings showing revisions to equipment layouts due to use of alternate or substitute equipment.

C. Where manufacturers and suppliers of equipment, materials, etc. are unable to fully comply with Contract Document basis of design requirements, specifically call such deviations to attention of Architect/Engineer on submittals. Typed deviations on a separate sheet; underlined statements or notations on standard brochures, equipment fly sheets, etc. will not be accepted. Submittals shall clearly indicate where material submitted meets and/or exceeds the performance criteria of the equipment used as the basis of design of the project. Failure to note compliance with the basis of design material/equipment shall result in rejection of submittals.

D. Approval of submittals shall not relieve Contractor from furnishing required quantities and verifying dimensions. In addition, approval shall not waive original intent of Contract Documents.

E. Failure to obtain written approval of equipment shall be considered sufficient grounds for rejection of said equipment regardless of the stage of completion of the project.

F. Contractor shall submit Submittals/Shop Drawings on all equipment listed below. In

16001- 5

addition, contractor shall refer to subsequent sections of the Electrical portion of the specifications for additional shop drawing submittal requirements. 1. Lighting Fixtures 2. Electrical Gear (Panelboards, Transformers, Safety Switches, Circuit Breakers).

This includes Short-Circuit Study, Coordination Study and Arc-Flash Study. 3. Dimmer Switches 4. Fire Detection and Alarm System 5. Receptacles 6. Toggle Switches 7. Wiring Device Box Support Brackets 8. Photocells 9. Cover Plates 10. Pull Boxes 11. Wire 12. Occupancy/Motion Sensors 13. Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors (TVSS) 14. Generator 15. Automatic Transfer Switch 16. Generator Fuel System

G. Shop Drawings/submittals shall be submitted in individual books as grouped together and

stated below and shall be submitted simultaneously. Electrical gear shop drawings shall not be submitted until approval is obtained for all HVAC and plumbing equipment. Prior to submission of electrical gear shop drawings, contractor shall obtain a copy of the approved mechanical and plumbing submittals. Any modifications required to be made to the electrical gear due to changes in electrical requirements (increases and/or decreases) of the mechanical and plumbing equipment shall be clearly notated in the electrical gear submittals. 1. Light Fixtures, Occupancy/Motion Sensors, Photocells, 2. Electrical Gear and Overcurrent Protective Device Studies 3. Fire Detection and Alarm System 4. Dimmer Switches, Receptacles, Toggle Switches, Cover Plates, Device Box

Support Brackets, Pull Boxes 5. Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors (TVSS) 6. Generator Automatic Transfer Switch, Generator Fuel System

1.10 PROJECT COORDINATION

A. Refer to applicable Electrical Specification Sections for products work of this Division.

B. Refer to all plumbing, mechanical and fire protections specifications sections for related

products affecting work of these electrical sections.

C. Coordinate handling of all products, materials, etc., through the Contractor. Coordinate space, access, clearances, etc., through the Contractor prior to preparation of shop drawing submittal.

D. The Contractor is herein cautioned to note that the work involved is a complicated renovation and a new addition project requiring continuous owner occupancy. The Contractor should review the phasing plans/descriptions and visit the project site to determine existing conditions. The Contractor will be held responsible for allowing for these conditions in his bid.

16001- 6

1.11 SERVICE CONTINUITY A. At all times during the construction of the project, electric service shall be maintained to

all portions of the site and existing facility, except with prior written approval from the Architect/Engineer of interruptions. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to provide, install and maintain (fuel included) any required rental generators to accomplish said task. Any required interruptions of electric service due to work being performed under this Contract shall be scheduled in writing a minimum of forty-eight (48) hours in advance after consultation with the Architect/Engineer and the Owner, and shall occur when permitted by the Architect/Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible for any overtime pay required to meet these requirements, at no additional cost to the Owner.

1.12 VALUE ENGINEERING (V/E): A. While it may be in the Owner’s interest to consider the first cost money saving that may

be generated via alternatives and options generated via participation in Value Engineering, contractor shall realize that substantive offers of Value Engineering (V/E), if accepted by the Owner, constitute a design-build agreement (offer and acceptance) with the owner, and drastically change the design concept of the project, as developed by the Professional of Record identified on the Contract Documents.

B. Should contractor offer, and the owner accept value engineering options that alter aspects of the system design, equipment, performance and/or performance verification or monitoring of respective systems, the contractor shall provide duly licensed professional engineering consultants working on behalf of the contractor (including sub-contractors and equipment vendors/manufacturers) to review, approve and take professional responsibility for performance and suitability of V/E hybrid systems, materials or operational changes related to respective V/E items. The contractor’s licensed professional engineering consultants and the contractor assume any and all responsibility for the design and suitability in terms of performance, of hybrid systems installed, as contractor’s Professional of Record, absolving the original project Professional of Record (identified on the original Contract Documents, released for the original project Bid/Negotiation) from responsibility for the V/E hybrid systems portion of the work.

C. The contractor, via the offer and acceptance of value engineering items on the project agrees to provide professional engineering design services and take full and complete responsibility for the hybrid design. Further, the contractor’s (V/E Items)professional of record (either employees, or independent consultants to the contractor) through the offer and acceptance of V/E items, agree to indemnify and hold harmless the project owner, the owner’s original A/E team (Professional of Record on behalf of the owner for the original Contract Documents) their heirs and assigns in regard to the V/E changes and their impact on the systems altered, affected or modified, in whole or in part. The Professional of Record shown on the original Contract Documents in regard to the systems altered, adjusted, revised, modified or otherwise affected by the value engineering items implemented, shall be absolved of design responsibility as a result of implementation of V/E items, and their original use of Engineering Seals used for original Contract Documents, shall not apply.

1.13 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Keep Project Record Documents in accordance with general provision requirements of

the specifications.

B. During construction period, keep accurate records of installations paying particular attention to major interior and exterior underground and concealed piping, ductwork, etc.

16001- 7

C. The Contractor shall obtain a minimum of one (1) set of the contract documents including all addenda and change orders as prepared by the Architect/Engineer.

D. If the Contractor elects to vary from the Contract Documents and secures prior approval from the Architect/Engineer for any phase of the work, he shall record in a neat and readable manner all such variances on the contract documents in red ink. Prior to requesting substantial completion the marked-up set of contract documents shall be returned to the Architect/Engineer for approval.

E. All deviations from sizes, locations and from all other features of the installation shown in the Contract Documents shall be recorded.

F. In addition, it shall be possible using these drawings to correctly and easily locate, identify and establish sizes of all piping, directions, and the like, as well as other features of work which will be concealed underground and/or in the finished building.

G. Locations of underground work shall be established by dimensions to columns, lines or walls, locating all turns, etc. and by properly referenced centerline or invert elevations and rates of fall.

H. For work concealed in the building, sufficient information shall be given so it can be located with reasonable accuracy and ease. In some cases this may be by dimension. In others, it may be sufficient to illustrate the work on the drawings in relation to the spaces in the building near which it was actually installed. The decision of the Architect/Engineer in this matter will be final.

I. The following requirements apply to all Record Drawings: 1. They shall be maintained at the Contractor's expense. 2. All such drawings shall be done carefully and neatly. 3. Additional drawings shall be obtained at the Contractor's expense. 4. They shall be kept up-to-date during the entire course of the work and shall be

available upon request for examination by the Architect/ Engineer and when necessary, by other trades, to establish clearances for other parts of the work.

5. Record Drawings shall be returned to the Architect/Engineer upon completion of the work and are subject to approval of the Architect/ Engineer.

1.14 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Refer to the specification Sections related to PROJECT CLOSEOUT or OPERATION

AND MAINTENANCE DATA for procedures and requirements for preparation and submittal of maintenance manuals.

B. Provide the Owner with three (3) copies of printed instructions indicating various pieces of equipment by name and model number, complete with parts lists, maintenance and repair instructions and test and balance report.

C. COPIES OF SHOP DRAWINGS WILL NOT BE ACCEPTABLE AS OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS.

D. This information shall be bound in plastic hardbound notebooks with the job name, Architect and Engineer names permanently embossed on the cover. Rigid board dividers with labeled tabs shall be provided for different pieces of equipment. Submit manuals to the Architect for approval.

16001- 8

E. In addition to the operation and maintenance brochure, the Contractor shall provide a separate brochure which shall include registered warranty certificates on all equipment, especially any pieces of equipment which carry warranties exceeding one (1) year.

F. As part of the O & M binders, contractor shall include copies of all studies and test reports performed as part of this project, including but not limited to, the following: 1. Acceptance Testing Reports

a. Grounding Tests b. Thermographic Tests c. Torque Values d. Rotation Tests

2. Fire Alarm System 100% Test Report 3. Short Circuit Study Report 4. Coordination Study Report 5. Arc Flash Study Report

G. The operation and maintenance brochure shall be furnished with a detailed list of all equipment furnished to the project, including the serial number and all pertinent nameplate data such as voltage, amperage draw, recommended fuse size, rpm, etc. The Contractor shall include this data on each piece of equipment furnished under this contract including but not limited to those items listed below. 1. Lighting Fixtures 2. Electrical Gear (Panelboards, Transformers, Safety Switches, Circuit Breakers).

This includes Short-Circuit Study, Coordination Study and Arc-Flash Study. 3. Dimmer Switches 4. Fire Detection and Alarm System 5. Receptacles 6. Toggle Switches 7. Wiring Device Box Support Brackets 8. Photocells 9. Cover Plates 10. Pull Boxes 11. Wire 12. Occupancy/Motion Sensors 13. Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors (TVSS) 14. Generator 15. Automatic Transfer Switch 16. Generator Fuel System

1.15 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING

A. Provide excavating and backfilling necessary for Work of this Division. Comply with

provisions of specification section pertaining to Site Work, if applicable.

B. Trenches shall be inspected by Code Authorities and/or Owner's Representative before and after piping is laid. Give Owner' Representative 24-hour notice for each inspection. If any trenches are filled without Owner's Representative and/or authority having jurisdiction inspection and as subsequently found to be deficient, the trenches shall be uncovered, inspected, and then re-filled, if requested by Owner's Representative. Prior to covering any and all underground facilities, including but not limited to conduit, ground rods, terminations, etc., Contractor shall take clear and concise digital photos and shall forward said photos to Engineer prior to covering said utilities.

16001- 9

C. Provide minimum 24 inches of cover to finish grades or paving at raceways.

D. Protect and maintain trenches in dry condition until piping has been inspected and approved. Immediately after approval, backfill trenches in tamped layers. Repeat backfill and tamping 6 months after initial coverage has been accomplished to avoid swale development from sinking soils.

E. Compact fill to satisfaction of Architect and/or Owner's Representative.

F. Prior to any excavating, Contractor shall be responsible for having all utilities in the area of excavation located and marked by an approved company with a minimum of five (5) years’ experience locating underground facilities. This includes all owner owned utilities on their site.

G. Approximate locations shown on the drawings shall not be used. Any facility damaged by the Contractor's underground work shall be repaired and/or replaced at no additional cost to the Owner

1.16 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Comply with requirements of the Specifications regarding cutting and patching. Locate

and timely install sleeves as required to minimize cutting and patching.

B. Cutting, fitting, repairing, patching, and finishing of Work shall be done by craftsmen skilled in their respective trades. Where cutting is required, cut in such a manner as not to weaken structure, partitions, or floors. Holes required to be cut must be cut or drilled without breaking out around the holes. Where patching is necessary in finished areas of the building, the Architect will determine the extent of such patching and refinishing.

C. Repairing Roadways and Walks: Where this contractor cuts or breaks roadways or walks to lay the piping, he shall repair or replace these sections to match existing, unless specifically identified as the responsibility of others.

1.17 PAINTING A. Painting shall be provided under the Specification section regarding painting, unless

specified otherwise. Leave exposed piping, materials, and equipment clean and free of rust, grease, dirt, etc. before and after painting.

B. Factory finished equipment, fixtures, and materials which are marred, chipped, scratched, or otherwise unacceptable shall be repaired or replaced under this Division to Architect satisfaction, at no additional cost to Owner.

C. Coordinate all painting requirements with prime bidder prior to bids.

D. All exposed conduit, materials, hangers, anchors, etc., are to be primed and painted. Color shall match adjacent surfaces where not specifically designated otherwise. All galvanized materials shall be suitably treated prior to painting to ensure adhesion.

1.18 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. The Electrical Contractor shall visit the building site to determine existing conditions and

will be held responsible for allowing for these conditions in his bid.

B. Note that this area of work will have storm drainage, mechanical and electrical utilities located underground and within and under the buildings. It is part of this work for the

16001- 10

Contractor to determine the scope and location of all utilities to be installed with this project and arrange his work around others. There will be no extra consideration for work discovered as being hidden after the bid, and no change orders for extra cost that may be caused by unknown after bid conditions. The drawings show approximate locations only of feeders, branch circuits, outlets, etc., except where specific routing or dimensions are indicated. The Architect reserves the right to make reasonable changes in locations indicated, before roughing-in, without additional cost to the Owner.

1.19 PROTECTION OF APPARATUS A. The Contractor shall take precautions necessary at all times to properly protect his

apparatus from damage. Failure on the part of the Contractor to comply with the above to the Architect's satisfaction shall be sufficient cause for the rejection of the particular piece of apparatus in question.

1.20 MINOR DEVIATIONS A. The Contractor shall realize that the drawings cannot delve into every step, sequence, or

operation necessary for the completion of the project without drawing on the Contractor's experience. Only typical details are shown on the plans. In cases where the Contractor is not certain about the method of installation of his work, he shall ask for details. Lack of details will not be an excuse for improper installation.

1.21 SALVAGED MATERIALS A. The Owner shall have priority for the selection of salvaged material and equipment. Any

equipment, light fixtures, devices, ballasts, materials, etc. selected to remain property of the Owner shall be removed and delivered to a location on the site as designated by the Owner. Material and equipment not retained by the Owner shall become the property of this Contractor and shall be removed from the site by him.

B. The Contractor shall obtain written approval of all material and equipment determined not to be salvaged by the Owner.

1.22 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS A. Work methods and project safety are the Contractor's sole responsibility.

B. Contractor shall furnish and place proper guards for prevention of accidents. He should

provide and maintain any other necessary construction required to secure safety of life or property, including maintenance of sufficient lights during all day and night hours as required to secure such protection.

C. Temporary electrical services during construction should be maintained in perfect condition. Frayed, lose or opened connections should not be used for temporary services. The Contractor should use only equipment in first class working condition for construction services.

1.23 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION LIGHTING A. The Contractor should provide and install construction lighting as required by General

Contractor and other trades. The installation shall conform to requirements of the National Electrical Code.

16001- 11

1.24 SUPERVISION A. Contractor shall personally, or through an authorized and competent representative,

constantly supervise the work done from beginning to completion and final acceptance. To the best of his ability he shall keep the same foreman and workmen throughout the project duration. Foreman shall be present at project site at all times while work under this section of the contract documents is being performed. Foreman shall be accessible by cellular phone at all times. Respective telephone numbers shall be forwarded to Architect/Engineer prior to commencement of work on this project.

1.25 CAD FILES A. ADG will provide, upon request, AutoCAD files to the contractors for use in preparing

submittals and record drawings. Plans will be provided at a cost of $10.00 per drawings sheet requested. Prior to release of the AutoCAD files, contractor will be required to complete the CAD Release form found in the drawing details.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS

A. Panelboards, safety switches, equipment cabinets, motor starters and other equipment

shown on the drawings and furnished and/or installed under this section of the Specifications shall be labeled with laminated plastic nameplates inscribed to identify equipment with description shown on the drawings for panels, the name of the equipment controlled for motor starters or the system or function involved for other equipment. Provide typewritten panelboard directories indicating the equipment served and its location using final approved room numbers, etc., as directed by the Architect. Refer to specification section – Electrical Distribution System for additional requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 COORDINATION OF TRADES

A. Where work is in close proximity to the work of other contractors, the Contractor shall

review plans of other contractors and coordinate his work with theirs. The Electrical Contractor shall verify the location of lighting fixtures, beams, structural members, conduit, ductwork, pipes or other obstructions before beginning his work in the area. Notify the Architect where proper clearances do not occur or where the work of others would interfere with the safe and/or proper operation of this work.

3.2 HARMONIC DISTORTION A. IEEE 519-1992 - Harmonic Control in Electrical Power Systems shall be a requirement of

this project. Harmonic filters (passive or active), phase multiplication devices, or any other components required to mitigate harmonic voltage THD to 5% and current THD to 8% maximum levels shall be an integral part of the VFD system. Compliance measurement shall be based on THD added (during VFD full load operation compared to across-the-line operation) at the VFD circuit breaker terminals or actual THD measurement at the VFD circuit breaker terminals during full load VFD operation. Designs which employ shunt tuned filters must be designed to prevent the importation of outside harmonics which could cause system resonance or filter failure. Calculations supporting the design, including a system harmonic flow analysis, must be provided as part of the submittal process for shunt tuned filters. Any filter designs which cause voltage rise at the VFD terminals must include documentation in compliance with the total system voltage variation of plus or minus 10%. Documentation of Power Quality

16001- 12

compliance shall be part of the commissioning required by the VFD supplier. Actual job site measurement testing shall be conducted at full load and documented in the operation and maintenance manuals. Harmonic measuring equipment utilized for certification shall carry a current NiTS calibration certificate. The final test report shall be reviewed and compliance certification stamped by a licensed professional engineer (PE).

3.3 SUPPORTS AND FOUNDATIONS A. Support all items covered by this Specification directly from building structural members

independent of any ceilings or any other installed item. Panelboards and switches may be attached to suitably reinforced walls. Ground or slab mounted equipment shall be mounted on a separate four inch high concrete slab. Extending 6" beyond equipment footprint on all sides

B. Do not attach items of this Specification to HVAC ductwork, ceiling grids and ceiling support members, piping or other equipment unless specifically shown otherwise. Where applicable, all equipment including conduit shall be supported from overhead wall, floor or roof structures using galvanized channel or angle members for a rigid support. Position supports and equipment such that access through lay-in ceilings or panels is not impaired and all Code required clearances are maintained.

C. Where applicable, under no circumstances is the Contractor to attach to or support from any bar joist bridging. Any supports to the bar joists or any structural systems shall be approved by the Architect. All supplemental angle or channel iron required to support equipment of this Specification shall be furnished by the Electrical Contractor.

3.4 EQUIPMENT LAYOUT A. The physical location and arrangements of electrical equipment is shown on the Plans

and is to be used by the Contractor as a guideline in construction. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to review the Plans with the proposed equipment and equipment of other contractors that are affected, and to ensure that all Code required clearances, wiring distances and maintenance accesses, including equipment heights, of all items are maintained. Alternate arrangements to accomplish the above due to field conditions or changes in physical size of the equipment proposed for the project are to be submitted to the Architect for review before any work is begun or equipment ordered.

B. All electrical gear arrangements shall be presented in a 1/4 inch scaled drawing showing all equipment, including those of other contractors. This includes all electrical rooms, mechanical rooms, mechanical yards, electrical yards, service platforms, boiler rooms, etc… Include shop drawing cut sheets and applicable information. Indicate on the drawing by dimension all required Code clearances, wiring distances and maintenance access requirements. Where equipment heights are required to be coordinated with architectural or other items, indicate revised heights. Refer to "MOUNTING HEIGHTS."

3.5 GUARANTEE A. The Contractor shall guarantee all materials, equipment and workmanship for a period of

one (1) year from the date of final acceptance of the project. This guarantee shall include furnishing of all labor and material necessary to make any repairs, adjustments or replacement of any equipment, parts, etc. necessary to restore the project to first class condition. This guarantee shall include the replacement of lamps. Warranties exceeding one (1) year are hereinafter specified with individual pieces of equipment.

B. If the Contractor’s office is in excess of a fifty (50) mile radius of the project, he shall appoint a local qualified contractor to perform any emergency repairs or adjustments

16001- 13

required during the guarantee period. The name of the contractor appointed to provide emergency services shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer for approval.

3.6 CLEANING A. Refer to the Specification Section relating to PROJECT CLOSEOUT or FINAL

CLEANING for general requirements for final cleaning.

B. Clean all light fixtures, lamps and lenses prior to final acceptance. Replace all inoperative lamps.


16030 - 1

SECTION 16030 - ACCEPTANCE TESTING PART 1 - GENERAL


A. The general provisions of the Contract apply to the Work specified in this Section.

B. Refer to all Electrical Sections of the Specifications, as well as the Specifications for the


1.2 SUMMARY A. This section outlines the acceptance testing requirements and division of responsibility.

1.3 SCOPE

A. Contractor shall engage the services of a recognized independent NETA Certified testing

firm or professional electrical engineering firm for the purpose of performing inspections and tests as herein specified.

B. The testing firm shall provide all materials, equipment, labor and technical supervision to perform such test and inspections.

C. It is the intent of these tests to assure that all electrical equipment is operational and within industry and manufacturer’s tolerances and is installed in accordance with design specifications.

D. The tests and inspections shall determine suitability for energization.

1.4 REFERENCES A. All inspections and tests shall be in accordance with the latest editions following

applicable codes and standards except as provided otherwise herein. 1. National Electrical Code – NEC 2. National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association - NEMA. 3. American Society for Testing and Materials - ASTM 4. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers – IEEE 5. National Electrical Testing Association – NETA 6. American National Standards Institute – ANSI 7. State Codes and Ordinances 8. Insulation Cable Engineers Association – ICEA 9. National Electrical Safety Code – NESC

B. All inspections and tests shall utilize the following references:

1. Project Design Specifications 2. Project Design Drawings 3. Manufacturer’s Instruction Manuals applicable to each particular apparatus.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS OF TESTING AGENCY

A. The testing/engineering firm shall be a corporately independent testing organization that

can function as an unbiased testing authority, professionally independent of the

HP Z230

Typewritten Text


16030 - 2

manufacturers, suppliers and installers of equipment or systems evaluated by the testing firm.

B. The testing firm shall be regularly engaged in the testing of electrical equipment devices, installations and systems.

C. The testing firm shall have been engaged in such practices for a similar size project.

D. The testing firm shall utilize only full-time technicians who are regularly employed by the firm. Electrically unskilled employees are not permitted to perform testing or assistance of any kind. Electricians and/or linemen may assist, but may not perform testing and/or inspection services.

E. The testing firm shall submit the “on site” foreman’s qualifications and experience through the Contractor at the pre-construction conference for review and approval by the Engineer.

F. Contractor shall submit statement of qualifications of proposed testing firm at the pre-construction conference for approval and acceptance by the Engineer.

1.6 DIVISION OF RESPONSIBILITY A. Testing firm shall perform the following tests as outlined in these specifications:

1. Ground Resistance Tests 2. Thermographic Survey

B. Contractor shall perform the following tests as outlined in these specifications:

1. Low Voltage Cable 2. Phasing and Rotation Tests

1.7 TEST REPORT

A. The test report shall include the following:

1. Summary of project. 2. Description of project. 3. Description of test 4. Test results. 5. Conclusions and recommendations. 6. Appendix, including appropriate test forms. 7. Identification of test equipment used. 8. Signature of responsible test organization authority.

B. Furnish three (3) copies of the complete report to the Engineer prior to requesting

substantial completion and no later than thirty (30) days after completion of testing procedures unless directed otherwise. After acceptance of the report, Contractor shall submit an electronic copy of the report in PDF format.

C. All tests shall be performed with apparatus de-energized except where otherwise specifically required.

D. The testing firm shall have a designated safety representative on the project to supervise operations with respect to safety.

16030 - 3

E. The testing firm shall have a calibration program that assures that all applicable test instrumentation is maintained within rated accuracy. The accuracy shall be directly traceable to the National Bureau of Standards. Instruments shall be calibrated in accordance with the following frequency schedule:

F. Field Instruments: Analog - 6 months maximum Digital - 12 months maximum

G. Laboratory Instruments: 12 months

H. Leased specialty equipment: 12 months

I. Dated calibration labels shall be visible on all test equipment.

J. Records must be kept up to date which show date and results of instruments calibrated or tested.

K. An up-to-date instrument calibration instruction and procedure will be maintained for each test instrument.

L. Calibrating standard shall be of higher accuracy than that of the instrument tested.

1.8 GENERAL A. An outline of tests required is included in this section. Refer to applicable NETA, ANSI,

NEMA, IEEE and other test standards for exact procedures, methods and requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Not Applicable

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TESTS A. Upon completion of the work, the entire electrical system shall be tested and shall be

shown to be in perfect working condition, in accordance with the intent of the specifications.

3.2 EQUIPMENT TESTS

A. Testing Agency shall perform thermographic study of all terminations in the new electrical system prior to acceptance. Thermographic study shall be performed after load is placed on the system

B. All 600 volt and below cables shall be tested as specified after being installed but prior to being terminated.

C. Ground resistance tests shall be performed at the pad mounted transformer, at the Service Entrance and at each step-down/step-up transformer as specified.

D. All terminations (lugs, split-bolts, etc.) shall have their “tightness” torque values measured

and verified against NEC and manufacturer’s requirements.

16030 - 4

3.3 GROUND RESISTANCE TESTS A. Inspect ground system for compliance with plans and specifications.

B. Perform 3-point fall-of-potential test per IEEE Standard No. 81, Section 9.04 on the main

grounding electrode or system.

C. The main ground electrode system resistance to ground shall be no greater than one (1) ohm at the pad mounted transformer at the Service Entrance and at all step-down/step-up transformers.

3.4 LOW VOLTAGE CABLE, 600 V MAXIMUM A. Compare cable data with drawings and specifications. Inspect exposed sections of

cables for physical damage and correct connection in accordance with one-line diagram.

B. Verify tightness of accessible bolted connection by calibrated torque wrench in accordance with manufacturer’s published data. Perform thermographic survey.

C. Inspect compression-applied connectors for correct cable match and indentation.

D. Verify cable color-coding with applicable Engineer’s specifications.

E. For all service entrances, switchboards, MCC and all panelboard feeders, perform insulation-resistance test on each conductor with respect to ground and adjacent conductors. Applied potential shall be 1000 volts dc for one minute.

F. Perform continuity test to insure correct cable connection.

G. Bolt-torque levels shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s requirements. Measure and record results.

H. Minimum insulation-resistance values shall be not less than 50 mega-ohms.

I. Investigate and report on all deviations between adjacent phases.

3.5 PHASING AND ROTATION: A. Perform phasing test on each circuit tie section energized by separate sources.

B. Perform tests from permanent source.

C. Damage caused due to omission of this test shall be corrected at Contractor’s expense.

3.6 THERMOGRAPHIC SURVEY:

A. Thermographic survey shall be performed with equipment utilizing long wave technology

that provides photo record of deficient areas.

B. Equipment to be inspected shall include all current-carrying devices installed under this contract, generally, all new high and low voltage cable terminations and splices. Specific equipment to be surveyed includes the following. 1. Panelboards 2. TVSS Units 3. Safety Switches (fused and non-fused)

16030 - 5

4. Generator 5. Automatic Transfer Switch

C. Inspect physical, electrical and mechanical condition. Remove all necessary covers prior

to thermographic inspection.

D. Provide report including the following: 1. Discrepancies. 2. Temperature difference between the area of concern and the reference area. 3. Cause of temperature difference. 4. Areas inspected. Identify inaccessible and/or unobservable areas and/or

equipment. 5. Identify load conditions at time of inspection. 6. Provide photographic thermograms of all equipment (non-deficient and deficient

areas). Provide corresponding digital photograph (non-thermal image) of electrical equipment scanned.

7. Inspect distribution systems with imaging equipment capable of detecting a minimum temperature difference of 1 degree C at 30 degrees C.

8. Equipment shall detect emitted radiation and convert detected radiation to visual signal.

9. Thermographic surveys should be performed during periods of maximum possible loading but not less than 40 percent of rated load of the electrical equipment being inspected. Refer to NFPA 70B-1994, Section 18-16 (Infrared Inspection).

10. Temperature differences for 1 degree C to 3 degrees C indicate possible deficiency and warrant investigation.

11. Temperature differences of 4 degrees C to 15 degrees C indicated deficiency; repair as time permits.

12. Temperature differences of 16 degrees C and above indicate major deficiency; repair immediately.


16050 - 1

SECTION 16050 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. The general provisions of the Contract, including the Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary, and other Conditions; as appropriate, apply to the work specified in this section.

B. Refer to all portions of the Contract Documents as well as the plans and specifications for the other various trades and materials and be thoroughly familiar with all provisions regarding electrical work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WIRE (600 VOLT AND BELOW)

A. All conductors used in the work shall be soft drawn annealed copper having a

composition of not less than 98% of pure copper. Conductors shall be standard code gauge in size, insulated, and shall have insulation rated for use at 600 volts. The contractor’s bid shall reflect the use of all copper conductors. When aluminum conductors are used as part of the V.E. process, their use shall be limited to circuits, feeders and services rated 200 Amperes and larger and shall be of the high alloy, compact stranded type, Southwire SIM pull THHN, SIM pull THWN or equivalent. It shall be the contractor’s responsibility for properly upsizing the conductors and associated conduit to achieve the equivalent ampere rating of the circuit/feeder/service as specified for copper conductors.

B. Unless otherwise noted or specified, insulation shall be Type THWN. Wires shall be of the single conductor type and shall be stranded. Wire insulation shall not contain any asbestos materials.

C. Wire #8 AWG and smaller may be type MC-cable.

D. Throughout the system, conductors shall be identified as to phase and voltage of system by color-coding. Color-coding shall be continuous the full length of wire for all wire sizes. Identification by permanent paint bands or tags at outlets will not be acceptable. Surface printing at regular intervals on all conductors shall indicate manufacturer, size, voltage, and insulation type. White and/or gray colored insulation shall be used for grounded conductors and only for grounded conductors.

E. The color code assigned to each phase wire shall be consistently followed throughout the project. The following systems of color-coding shall be strictly adhered to: 1. 208/120 V Systems

a. Grounding leads green b. Grounded neutral leads white c. Ungrounded phase wires black, red and blue

2. 277/480 V Systems a. Grounding leads green b. Grounded neutral leads gray c. Grounded phase wires brown, orange, yellow

HP Z230

Typewritten Text


16050 - 2

F. Where multiple neutral conductors are installed in a common raceway, the neutral conductor for each circuit shall be separately identified in accordance with the National Electric Code (NEC).

2.2 CONDUIT A. Unless otherwise specified or shown on the drawings, all conduit shall be rigid galvanized

steel (RGS), electrical metallic tubing (EMT), or rigid nonmetallic conduit (PVC) as allowed in the paragraphs below.

B. RGS may be used for conduit shown run underground (red concrete encasement required), may be used in concrete slabs, and shall be used for conduit run exposed to the weather (locations defined as damp locations and wet locations in Article 100 of the NEC) and shall be run in hazardous areas.

C. EMT shall be used for conduit not encased in concrete, not exposed to the weather, not run underground, and not run in hazardous areas.

D. PVC may be used for conduit run in concrete slabs or may be run underground (underground only where permitted by NEC and local ordinances). Concrete encasement will not be required on underground runs unless specifically noted or specified elsewhere. PVC shall not be run exposed nor concealed in walls nor above ceilings nor in hazardous areas. When rigid nonmetallic conduit (PVC) is installed underground, it shall be Schedule 80 at all underground road crossings, at all underground driveway crossings, and when required by the NEC or local ordinance or specified otherwise. PVC Schedule 40 may be used at all other underground locations. The only use of exposed above ground PVC conduit shall be for telephone service entrance use up utility poles (schedule 80 required), for CATV service entrance use up utility pole (schedule 80 required) or for power utility service entrance use up utility pole (scheduled 80 required).

E. Where PVC is utilized for underground installations, RGS 90 ̊ elbows and conduit shall be utilized to turn conduit vertical and to rise up to above grade/slab. Red concrete encasement shall be required for all elbows and vertical conduits. Refer to detail on plans.

F. All conduit shall be new and shall bear the inspection label of the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (U.L.).

G. Where multiple conduits are installed underground in the same trench, carlon snap-n-stac spacers, or approved equivalent, shall be utilized and spaced a maximum of 5'-0" apart. Provide pre-cast, 4" thick, concrete bases at each spacer and where conduits are turned to be installed in a vertical orientation. Provide spacers immediately before and after all elbows and where conduit transitions from underground to above ground.

H. Fittings for rigid steel conduit and EMT shall be hot-dipped galvanized and shall be of an approved type specially designed and manufactured for their purpose.

I. All flexible conduit, where installed indoors and outdoors, shall be of the flexible liquid tight metallic type. Flexible weatherproof electrical conduit is prohibited from use on this project.

J. Metallic conduit shall be metallized, sheradized, or hot-dipped galvanized.

K. Where conduit is installed exposed in finished spaces (excluding mechanical, equipment and electrical rooms), conduit shall be painted to match adjacent surfaces (color as

16050 - 3

selected by the Architect/Engineer). All other conduit installations such as gymnasiums, auditoriums, church sanctuaries shall be complete with factory applied paint finish as manufactured by Allied Tube and Conduit (True Color EMT) or Wheatland Tube Company (Color Check Conduit). All fittings, couplings, boxes, covers, etc. shall match color of conduit. Color of conduit shall comply with color code noted below.

Power and Lighting Standard Conduit Finish 2.3 METAL-CLAD CABLE (600 VOLTS AND BELOW)

A. Where permitted by NEC and local codes and ordinances, metal-clad (MC) cables may

be used in lieu of conduit and wiring specified elsewhere herein.

B. Installation of MC cables shall be in compliance with the National Electric Code (NEC).

C. Conductors shall be softdrawn annealed copper having a composition of not less than 98% of pure copper.

D. Conductors shall be solid -type, standard Code gauge in size, insulated, and shall be rated for use at 600 volts or below. Minimum size shall be No. 12.

E. Conductor insulation shall be of a type listed in the NEC and be rated for 75 deg. C (167 deg. F) as a minimum and shall be of a type approved for use in MC cable.

2.4 EXPANSION FITTINGS

A. Each conduit that is buried in or rigidly secured to the building construction on opposite

sides of a building expansion joint and each long run of exposed conduit that may be subject to excessive stresses shall be provided with an expansion fitting. Expansion fittings shall be made of hot-dipped galvanized malleable iron and shall have a factory-installed packing, which will prevent the entrance of water, a pressure ring, and a grounding ring

B. In addition to the grounding ring, a separate grounding conductor shall be provided. This grounding conductor shall be an external flexible copper ground securely bonded by approved grounding straps on each end of the fitting. Grounding conductor may be omitted when expansion fitting includes an approved integral grounding conductor or device.

C. Where conduits are buried in concrete, they shall cross the building expansion joints at right angles. Ends of conduit shall be provided with insulated bushings.

2.5 OUTLET BOXES A. Outlet boxes in concealed conduit systems shall be flush mounted. Boxes shall be

galvanized steel of sufficient size to accommodate devices shown and shall have raised covers. Requirements of the NEC shall be minimum.

B. Boxes for lighting fixtures shall be four inch (4") octagon, not less than 1-1/2" deep. Where boxes are installed in concrete, boxes designed for this application shall be used.

C. Outlet boxes for switches and receptacles in concealed work shall be 4" square, and not less than 1-1/2" deep. Flush mounted outlet boxes shall be installed with plaster rings.

D. Outlet boxes for switches and receptacles installed in exposed conduit system shall be cast iron or cast aluminum Type FD or approved equivalent.

16050 - 4

E. Where multiple outlet boxes are shown to be installed at the same location, they shall be

installed using B-Line Series BB8 mounting bracket or approved equivalent. Where single boxes are shown to be installed, the B-Line Series BB2 mounting bracket or approved equivalent shall be used.

F. Outlet boxes for adjacent rooms shall not be installed in the same stud space to minimize sound transmission.

G. Outlet boxes used for lighting toggle switches shall have outlet box stabilizer(s) installed.

2.6 PULL BOXES A. Furnish and install pull boxes. Boxes shall be code gauge galvanized steel with screw

attached access panels unless noted otherwise in top, side or bottom as required.

2.7 OUTLET COVER PLATES A. Unless otherwise noted, all outlets including telephone outlets, television outlets,

computer outlets, etc. shall be fitted with cover plates of the type indicated below.

B. Cover plates shall be uniform in design and finish for switches, receptacles, and other outlets requiring cover plates. Plates shall be one (1) piece of the required number of gangs. Sectional plates shall not be used.

C. Cover plates shall be smooth plastic with gray, white, black, brown or ivory finish. Color shall be selected by the Architect/Engineer to suit the wall finish.

D. Provide blank coverplates for all un-used/empty device boxes including, but not limited to

tele/data, CATV, access controls, etc....boxes.

2.8 WIRING DEVICES A. Wiring devices shall be as listed in the following table, except that color of device shall

match color of outlet cover plate. Where cover plates are aluminum, device color shall be as selected by the Architect. Provide and install hospital grade devices in all areas as required by NEC Article 517.

1. Leviton / Hubbell (or equivalent by Pass and Seymour)

Single Pole-20A (CS120-2 / CS120) Toggle Switch Three Way-20A (CS320-2 / CS320) Toggle Switch Four Way-20A (CS420-2 / CS420) Toggle Switch 20A 125V 2P 3W Duplex (CR020 / CR020) Smooth Face Grounded Receptacle 20A 125V 2P 3W Duplex (7899 / GFR5352) GFCI Receptacles

16050 - 5

2.9 WEATHERPROOF RECEPTACLES A. Weatherproof receptacles shall be duplex receptacles of the ground fault current

interrupting type as specified under WIRING DEVICES, mounted in a cast iron or cast aluminum Type FD (or approved equivalent) conduit fitting with Leviton No. 5977-DCL, (or approved equivalent) clear, extra deep GFCI Style weather resistant cover. Weatherproof receptacles shall be flush mounted in exterior walls whenever possible.

2.10 PHOTOELECTRIC CONTROLS A. Unless otherwise noted on the drawings, photoelectric controls shall be Tork 2100 Series

or equivalent by Precision Multiple or Paragon to suit voltage and power requirements of circuits controlled.

2.11 DIMMER SWITCHES A. Dimmer switches shall be Pass and Seymour Radient series or approved equivalent.

Ratings shall be of appropriate wattage for the circuits to be controlled. Provide and install all required 0-10V. control interface units for all LED lighting circuits. Dimmer loading shall not exceed 80% of the dimmer rating. Dimmers shall be UL listed.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MOUNTING HEIGHTS

A. Unless otherwise noted on the drawings or required by the Architect/Engineer, the

mounting heights set forth below shall apply. Dimensions given are from finished floor to the centerline of the device. 1. Toggle Switches 4'-0" 2. Receptacles 1'-6" 3. Panelboards 6'-7" to top of can 4. Tele/Data Outlets 1'-6" 5. Fire Alarm Hand Stations 4'-0" 6. Electric Water Cooler Concealed behind unit **

** Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating exact location in field with the plumbing contractor

B. Where overcurrent or safety switch devices are shown to serve exterior equipment, the Contractor shall review in detail with the Architect/Engineer proposed exterior mounting locations, mounting heights, conduit routing, etc., and receive approval prior to rough-in.

C. Where overcurrent or safety switch devices are shown to serve condensing units, the top of the overcurrent device shall be 3’- 0” AFG or level with the top of the condensing unit(s) whichever is lower. Refer to detail on plans for additional requirements.

3.2 WIRE (600 VOLT AND BELOW) A. Service entrance, feeders, and motor circuit conductors shall be run their entire length

without joints or splices. Splices and joints in branch circuit wiring shall be only at outlets or in accessible junction boxes.

B. Joints and splices in branch circuit wiring shall be made with compression type solderless connectors. Connectors of the nonmetallic screw on type are not acceptable.

16050 - 6

C. Terminations or splices for conductors # 6 AWG and larger shall utilize Burndy Unitap, Polaris Black or equivalent connectors.

D. Unless otherwise specified, all wiring shall be installed in conduit.

E. No wire shall be smaller than No. 12 for power or lighting service, fixture whips or for switch legs. Wire for each branch circuit shall be of a single size and type from the branch circuit protective device to the last outlet on the circuit unless noted otherwise.

F. Not more than three (3) branch circuits shall be installed in a raceway for three-phase electrical systems. For single phase electrical systems, the number of circuits in any one raceway shall be limited to two (2).

G. Type THWN conductors may be connected directly to recessed fixtures only when the

fixtures are equipped with outlet boxes approved by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. for use with wires having insulation rated for maximum operating temperature of 75o C., (167o F.); otherwise, conductors with Type SF2 insulation shall be run from fixture terminal connections to an outlet box placed at least one foot (1') from the fixture, such a tap shall extend for at least four feet (4'), but not more than six feet (6'), in flexible metal conduit.

H. Branch circuit home run numbers shown on the drawings shall be used for connection of circuit wiring to similarly numbered protective devices in branch circuit panelboards.

I. Where the length of a home run, from panel to the first outlet exceeds 75 feet (75') for 120 volt circuits or 175 feet (175') for 277 volt circuits, the conductor size shall be No. 10 AWG or that shown on the drawings, whichever is larger.

J. For all 3-phase circuits, contractor shall provide and install a full size neutral conductor and a grounding conductor for a complete 5-wire circuit. If the neutral conductor is not required by the equipment, contractor shall install wire nuts on each end of the neutral conductor for future use.

3.3 CONDUIT A. When conduits are shown to be installed in the floor slab, under the floor slab, or

underground, whenever possible and approved by the Architect/Engineer, conduits one inch (1") trade size and smaller shall be installed in the concrete floor slab. Conduits embedded in concrete slabs shall have lateral spacing not less than three diameters except where the slab has been specially designed to accommodate closer spacing.

B. Conduits larger than one-inch (1") trade size shall not be installed in the floor slab and shall be installed a minimum of twelve inches (12") below the floor slab.

C. Conduits shown underground but not in or under a floor slab shall be installed not less than thirty inches (30") below grade. Conduit locations shall be identified by means of 4" wide, detectable, Red warning/ marker tape installed in trench in accordance with NEC requirements

D. Prior to backfilling of trenches and /or providing concrete encasement, contractor shall take photographs of conduit installation including spacers/supports and concrete support blocks. In addition, prior to backfilling trenches and after concrete encasement, take additional photographs of installation. Submit photographs to engineer upon request.

E. Rigid conduit joints shall be made with threaded fittings made up tight with at least five threads fully engaged. Compression type threadless fittings and setscrew type fittings

16050 - 7

shall not be used for RGS unless specifically approved in writing by the Architect/Engineer.

F. Couplings and connectors for EMT shall be compression type or cast iron set screw type.

G. Where conduits enter boxes or cabinets that do not have threaded hubs the conduit shall be secured in place with galvanized locknuts inside and outside and shall have bushings inside for interior locations. All exterior terminations shall be made with Meyers hubs or approved equivalent. Conduits larger than one inch (1") shall have galvanized insulating bushings.

H. All conduits shall be installed as indicated or scheduled on the drawings and shall be of sufficient size to accommodate the required number of insulated conductors including equipment-grounding conductor. A grounding conductor shall be pulled in every raceway and properly terminated. The Contractor shall increase the conduit size from that shown on the drawings where necessary to accommodate the equipment-grounding conductor and/or where to comply with the NEC.

I. Unless otherwise noted, conduit shall be run concealed. Conduit runs from wall mounted receptacles, toggle switches, etc. shall be run concealed in walls whenever possible.

J. Conduit runs shall be straight; elbows and bends shall be uniform, symmetrical, and free from dents or flattening. All conduit shall be installed with runs parallel or perpendicular to walls, ceilings and structural members.

K. Conduit shall not be run nearer than three inches (3") to hot water or steam pipes except where crossings are unavoidable. Conduit shall be kept at least one inch (1") from covering of pipe crossed and the conductor size shall be increased one (1) size

L. Conduit shall be held securely in place by approved hangers and fasteners of appropriate design and dimensions for the particular application. Support shall be such that no strain will be transmitted to the outlet box and/or pull box supports. Conduit shall be secured only to the building structure.

M. All conduit runs shall be installed in accordance with all applicable sections of the National Electrical Code and local codes or ordinances.

N. Where empty conduits are shown, a #14 pull wire shall be installed and conduits shall be capped.

O. Terminations to all mechanical equipment and to all dry-type transformers shall be made using a minimum of 12" to a maximum of 24" liquid-tight flexible metallic conduit.

P. At each concealed junction box in the power and lighting system, identify the panel and circuit number(s) contained in the junction box by writing in permanent marker on the outside of the junction box cover.

Q. Where conduits are run from condition spaces to/thru un-conditioned spaces, the ends of the conduits shall be sealed (after conductor installation) to prevent the transmission of air from non-conditioned spaces in to the conditioned spaces. Expanding spray foam and EYS seals are approved methods of sealing conduits.

R. For all surface mounted devices, including fire alarm, intercom and nurse call systems, device boxes shall be Wiremold No. R5752 and R5753 or approved equivalent style boxes sized such that device does not overhang edge(s) of back box. Color of box shall match device.

16050 - 8

3.4 METAL-CLAD CABLE (600 VOLTS AND BELOW)

A. The metallic sheath shall be galvanized steel or aluminum corrugated sheath type and

shall be terminated at outlet boxes, cabinets, etc. with fittings specifically approved for such use, which shall properly ground the metallic sheath.

B. Each metal-clad cable assembly shall have one (1) green insulated ground conductor sized as required by NEC for the application as a minimum size.

C. Where run in walls, cable shall be fastened using B-Line Series BX4 or approved equivalent cable fasteners. Cable shall be fastened to wall stud not more than 8" from entry into device box .

3.5 WIRING DEVICES A. All wiring devices installed shall be identified as to which panel serves it and which

overcorrect protection device protects the wiring device. This shall be accomplished via panel name and circuit number being written using a permanent marker on the back side of the coverplate. In health-care facilities, panel name and circuit number shall be permanently engraved into each receptacle coverplate.

3.6 MANUFACTURER’S DIRECTION A. Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating all aspects of equipment electrical

service installation for all electrical gear, devices, mechanical, plumbing, fire protection, architectural, and owner furnished equipment including any and all medical equipment. Contractor shall obtain and review actual manufacturer’s installation instructions and shall install electrical facilities to said equipment in accordance with the instructions, NEC, NFPA and contract documents. Should a discrepancy exist between the manufacturer’s installation directions and the contract documents, the engineer shall be notified in writing immediately.

3.7 COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES A. Prior to purchasing and installing any wire and/or conduit for all circuitry to mechanical

equipment, medical equipment, owner furnished equipment, and other equipment requiring electrical power furnished by other trades as part of this project, contractor shall review equipment cut sheets and shall verify exact equipment electrical requirements. Any discrepancies between contract documents and equipment submittals shall be immediately brought to the architect/engineer’s attention for clarification.


16400 - 1

SECTION 16400 - ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS


Supplementary, and other Conditions); as appropriate, apply to the work specified in this section.

B. Refer to all Electrical specification sections, as well as the plans and specifications for the other various trades and materials and be thoroughly familiar with all provisions regarding electrical work.

1.2 ELECTRIC SERVICE

A. Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining a new 277/480 volt 3 phase 4 wire

underground electric service from the local power company, Entergy, as specified herein and as shown on the Drawings. The Contractor shall be responsible for all utility company fees and for the timely coordination of all utility company work.

1.3 GENERAL A. All electrical gear furnished as part of this project, panelboards, dry-type transformers,

safety switches, etc. shall be of the same manufacturer unless specified otherwise. Electrical equipment manufactured by a subsidiary or parent company of manufacturer that is prior approved is not itself prior approved unless its own manufacturer's name specifically is listed as being prior approved.

1.4 ARC-FLASH; COORDINATION AND FAULT CURRENT STUDIES A. As part of the electrical gear shop drawings, the contractor shall perform and submit

complete arc–flash, coordination and fault current studies, including phase-to-phase and ground faults for coordinating all elements of the distribution system. These three studies shall be performed and furnished by the successful electrical gear manufacturer. Contractor shall refer to these specification sections for specific study requirements: These studies shall be submitted simultaneously with the gear submittal or the gear submittal will be returned un-reviewed. 1. Overcurrent Protective Device Short-Circuit Study (Cannot be VE’d from project) 2. Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study 3. Overcurrent Protective Device Arc-Flash Study (Cannot be VE’d from project)

B. Provide all arc-flash safety and short circuit current stickers on all panels, switchboards,

safety switches, motor control center, etc. as required/specified. Refer to details for additional requirements. Proposed stickers for each individual piece of gear shall be submitted for review as part of shop drawings.

C. Provide and install a fully coordinated electrical distribution system as directed by the Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study at no additional costs to the Owner.

D. In addition, this study shall indicate all required settings for adjustable circuit breakers and motor circuit protectors. These settings include instantaneous, short time, long time, ground fault trip characteristics and all time based pick-up, drop-out and re-close parameters.

HP Z230

Typewritten Text


16400 - 2

E. The contractor shall provide all breakers, trip plugs, solid state breakers, etc. to provide a fully coordinated electrical system as identified in the coordination study. This shall be accomplished as part of the Base Bid and all alternates at no additional costs to the owner and/or design team.

F. Refer to individual specification sections of each specified study for additional requirements.

1.5 SERIES RATING OF EQUIPMENT

A. The electrical gear provided and installed as part of this project shall not be series rated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PANELBOARDS

A. Panelboards shall be circuit breaker type using quick-make, quick-break, trip free,

thermal magnetic trip indicating, bolt-on circuit breakers. Two and three pole branches and mains shall be common trip. Panelboards shall be dead front safety type with main breaker or main lugs, and number and size of branches as shown on the drawings. Panelboards shall have single, feed through, or double lugs, to accommodate feeder conductors as shown on the drawings, and shall have neutral and ground bus for termination of conductors. Bussing shall be copper.

B. Doors shall be fitted with flush cylinder locks, keys to which shall all on project be alike. Two (2) keys shall be furnished for each lock. Cabinet fronts shall be finished as directed by the Architect/Engineer. Cabinet fronts shall not be removable with door in the locked position. Provide for each panel a directory frame with waterproof transparent plastic window on inside of door and place therein a typewritten identification of all circuits.

C. Directories shall be made only after permanent room numbers have been assigned. Room numbers shown on the construction drawings shall not be used for making directories. Each circuit shall be clearly identified as to use and location (ex: Receptacles Rooms 201, 202 or Lighting Rooms 207, 209, 211, and 213).

D. Cabinets shall be galvanized steel not less than twenty inches (20") in width. Gutters shall not be smaller than minimum dimensions required by the National Electrical Code.

E. Double section panelboards shall be comprised of cabinets of equal dimensions.

F. All panels rated NEMA 1, shall be of the door-in-door type construction providing tool-less access to interior of the panelboard(s).

G. Panelboards shall be as shown in the schedules and shall be completely factory assembled. Do not purchase panelboards or cabinets until shop drawings have been approved. Approved manufacturers include: 1. General Electric 2. Square D 3. Eaton-Cutler Hammer 4. Siemens 5. Approved Equivalent

16400 - 3

H. Minimum short circuit current interrupting ratings for circuit breakers shall be 10,000

amps. Where a specific interrupting rating is shown on the drawings, in the panel schedules, or as required by the coordination and fault current study, panelboards and associated circuit breakers shall be rated for that value as a minimum at no additional cost to the owner.

I. In branch circuit panelboards having two (2) vertical columns of devices, circuit numbers shall be such that, starting at the top, odd numbers shall be used in sequence down the left hand side. See Schedule of Panelboards on drawings for circuit device sizes and number of poles.

J. Construction of panelboards shall be such that, where applicable, any three (3) adjacent single-pole devices are individually connected to each of the three different phases in such a manner that 2 or 3 pole devices, when available, can be installed at any location.

K. UL Listing: Panelboards shall be listed by UL and bear the UL label.

L. Interior panelboards shall be NEMA I unless noted otherwise. All exterior panelboards shall be rated NEMA 3R.

2.2 LABELS

A. All switchboards, panelboards, starters, VFD’s, contactors, transformers, safety switches and fused safety switches installed by this contractor shall have plastic tags with 1/4" characters embossed thereon identifying the equipment by name, voltage, ampacity, phase and number of current carrying conductors such as:

Panel Name 120/208 V - 400A 3 Phase - 4 Wire

Fed From Panel:_____________, Circuit _______________ The tags shall be fixed to the center of the equipment cover/door with a suitable heavy duty industrial grade adhesive.

B. Color Coding of labels shall be as follows:

Normal Power White Background with Black Letters Emergency Power (Life Safety Branch) Red Background with White Letters Emergency Power (Critical Branch) Blue Background with White Letters Emergency Power (Equipment Branch) Yellow Background with Black Letters

2.3 DRY-TYPE TRANSFORMERS A. Dry-type transformers shall be three phase, 60 cycle with 480 volt delta primary windings

and 120/208 volt, 4-wire wye secondary windings with capacities and mounting arrangements as indicated on the drawings. Each transformer shall have four (4) 2-1/2%

16400 - 4

FCBN taps, except that two (2) full current taps above normal and two (2) below normal will be acceptable where this is manufacturer's standard for the particular size.

B. Transformers shall have internally isolated core and coil and shall be built with 220 Class insulation and shall have a temperature rise not to exceed 115o C where installed indoors or not to exceed 150 C where installed outdoors. Where shown on plans where transformers are stacked, both transformers shall have a temperature rise not to exceed 80 C, under full load in an ambient temperature of 40o C. Windings shall be copper.

C. Units shall be designed for quiet operation with core and coil completely isolated from the enclosure by vibration absorbing mounts. Sound levels shall not exceed 45 db for 75 KVA or below, or 50 db for units above 75 KVA in an ambient of 24 db.

D. Enclosures shall be NEMA I for secured interior locations, NEMA 3R for secured exterior locations, and totally enclosed for all unsecured locations.

E. Enclosures shall be constructed of heavy code gauge steel with terminal compartments located at the bottom of each unit. Circuit connections shall be made through flexible metallic conduit.

F. Transformers shall be as manufactured by Square D, General Electric, Eaton Electrical, Siemens, or approved equivalent.

2.4 SAFETY SWITCHES

A. Furnish and install safety switches at locations and in capacities shown on the drawings,

as hereinafter specified and/or as required by the latest edition of the National Electrical Code.

B. Safety switches shall be rated heavy duty and fusible.

C. Safety switches exposed to the weather shall be rated NEMA 3R.

D. Safety switches shall be of the solid neutral type where required by circuit or feeder specified.

E. Safety switch covers shall be internally mechanically held closed when in the ON position and shall be allowed to open in the OFF position. The switch shall come equipped with provisions to allow the switch to be padlocked in the off position.

F. Galvanized angle or other suitable supports shall be provided for switches that cannot be mounted on walls or other rigid surfaces. Switches shall not be supported by conduit alone and shall not be mounted on HVAC or other equipment unless specifically approved by the Architect/Engineer. Verify mounting heights for all exterior locations with Architect/Engineer prior to roughin.

G. Safety switches shall be General Electric, Square "D", Eaton Electrical, Siemens or approved equivalent.

2.5 FUSES

A. Unless otherwise noted or specified, all fuse holders shall be equipped with dual-element,

time-lag, and current limiting fuses. Provide one (1) spare set of fuses for each size initially installed, with a minimum of three (3) fuses of each size. Spare fuses shall be turned over to the Owner's maintenance supervisor prior to requesting substantial completion inspection.

16400 - 5

B. Fuses shall be Gould, Bussman, or approved equivalent.

2.6 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICE

A. The Surge Protection Device (SPD) covered under this section includes all service

entrance type surge protection devices suitable for use as Type 1 or Type 2 devices per UL1449 3rd Edition, applied to the line or load side of the utility feed inside the facility.

B. An SPD shall be located at Service Entrance and Distribution and Branch Panels.

C. Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals as shown, specified and required to finish and install surge protection devises.

D. Quality Assurance 1. Reference Standard: Comply with the latest edition of the applicable provisions

and recommendations of the following, except as otherwise stated in this document: a. UL 1449 3rd Edition I Nominal rating of no lower than 20kA. b. UL 1283. c. ANSI/IEEE C62.41, Recommended Practice for Surge Voltages in Low-

Voltage AC Power Circuits d. ANSI/IEEE C62.45, Guide for Surge Testing for equipment connected to

Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits. e. UL96A f. IEEE 1100 Emerald Book g. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA 70: National Electrical Code) h. Device shall 3rd party testing to verify surge current rating

E. Approved Manufacturer

1. Current Technology – Select SL3. 2. Vertiv - 570 Series 3. Approved equivalent.

F. Manufactured Units/ Electrical Requirements

1. Declared Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage (MCOV) shall be greater than

115 percent of the nominal system operating voltage and in compliance with test and evaluation procedures outlined in the nominal discharge surge current test of UL1449 3rd Edition, section 37.7.3. MCOV values claimed based on the component’s value or on the 30-minute 115% operational voltage test, section 38 in UL1449 will not be accepted.

2. Unit shall have no more than 10% deterioration or degradation of the UL1449 3rd Edition Voltage Protection Rating (VPR) when exposed to a minimum of 15,000 repeated category C3 (20kV/10kA) surges. The SPD manufacturer must provide a test report validating the repetitive surge test was performed.

3. Protection Modes UL1449 3rd Edition VPR(6kV, 3kA) for grounded WYE/delta and High Leg Delta circuits with voltages of (480Y/277), (208Y/120), (600Y/347). 3-Phase, 4 wire circuits, (120/240) split phase shall be as follows and comply with test procedures outlined in UL1449 3rd Edition section 37.6:

SYSTEM VOLTAGE MODE MCOV

B3 RINGWAVE 6kV, 500A

C3 Comb. Wave 20kV,

10kA

UL 1449 Third Edition VPR

Rating

16400 - 6

120/240 L-N 150 490 980 700

120/208 L-G 150 570 980 700

N-G 150 640 1170 700

L-L 300 500 1600 1200

277/480 L-N 320 450 1420 1200

L-G 320 540 1540 1200

N-G 320 570 1600 1000

L-L 552 530 2600 2000

TVSS LEVEL OF PROTECTION

Panel/Equipment Rating

TVSS Surge Rating

0-225 Ampere 400-600 Ampere 800-1220 Ampere 1600-2500 Ampere 3000 Ampere and above

80 kA per mode / 160 kA per phase 125 kA per mode / 250 kA per phase 160 kA per mode / 320 kA per phase 200 kA per mode / 400 kA per phase 200 kA per mode / 400 kA per phase

4. Electrical Noise Filter- each unit shall include a high performance EMI/RFI noise rejection filter with a maximum attenuation of 54dB per MIL-STD-220B. a. SPD shall include a EMI/RFI noise rejection filter for all L-N modes as

well as a removable filter in the N-G mode. 5. Integral Disconnect Switch

a. The device shall have a NEMA compliant safety interlocked integral disconnect switch with an externally mounted metal manual operator.

b. The switch shall disconnect all ungrounded circuit conductors from the distribution system to enable testing and maintenance without interruption to the facility’s distribution system.

c. The switch shall be rated for 600Vac. d. The SPD device shall be tested to UL1449 3rd Edition listed with the

integral disconnect switch and the UL1449 VPR ratings shall be provided.

e. The integral disconnect switch shall be capable of withstanding, without failure, the published maximum surge current magnitude without failure or damage to the switch.

f. The line side of the integral disconnect shall be blocked off so that when the SPD is opened there is no direct access to the voltage present on the line side of the disconnect.

6. The UL1449 Voltage Protective Rating (VPR) shall be permanently affixed to the SPD unit.

7. The UL1449 Nominal Discharge Surge Current Rating shall be 20ka 8. The SCCR rating of the SPD shall be 200kAIC without the need for upstream

over current protection. 9. The SPD shall be listed as Type1 SPD, suitable for use in Type1 or Type2

applications.

16400 - 7

10. The SPD shall include the following monitoring features: a. Time Date stamp, duration and magnitude for the following power quality

events (sags, swells, surges, dropouts, outages, THD, frequency, Volts RMS per phase)

b. SPD monitoring shall track surge protection and display it as a percentage

c. SPD shall provide a surge counter with three categories to be defined as d. Low Level surge (100A-500A) Medium Level surge (500A-3,000A)

High Level surge (>3,000A) e. Remote communications via ModBus or Ethernet

11. Warranty on defective material and workmanship shall be for 10 years parts including 5 years on-site labor. Devices that must be removed and sent to the manufacturer for repair will not be accepted.

12. Copy of Warranty to be sent with shop drawing submittal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MANUFACTURER’S DIRECTION

A. All electrical gear shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions.

Contractor shall review these directions prior to rough-in. Should any discrepancies exist between the contract documents and the manufacturer’s direction, contractor shall advise the engineer in writing.

B. All electrical terminations shall be properly tightened to manufacturer’s specifications. Where manufacturer’s specifications are not available, contractor shall refer to the NEC and adjust tightness valves (torque) to the NEC published values.

C. Install all safety switches, breakers, disconnects, etc., in accordance with manufacturer’s directions and maintain all required NEC clearances. Coordinate exact locations in field with applicable contractors.


16401 - 1

SECTION 16401 - OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes a computer-based, fault-current study to determine the minimum

interrupting capacity of circuit protective devices.

1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are

not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.

B. One-Line Diagram: A diagram which shows, by means of single lines and graphic symbols, the course of an electric circuit or system of circuits and the component devices or parts used therein.

C. Protective Device: A device that senses when an abnormal current flow exists and then removes the affected portion from the system.

D. SCCR: Short-circuit current rating.

E. Service: The conductors and equipment for delivering electric energy from the serving utility to the wiring system of the premises served.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For computer software program to be used for studies.

B. Other Action Submittals: Submit the following after the approval of system protective

devices submittals. Submittals shall be in digital form. 1. Short-circuit study input data, including completed computer program input data

sheets. 2. Short-circuit study and equipment evaluation report; signed, dated, and sealed by

a qualified professional engineer. a. Submit study report for action prior to receiving final approval of the

distribution equipment submittals. If formal completion of studies will cause delay in equipment manufacturing, obtain approval from Architect for preliminary submittal of sufficient study data to ensure that the selection of devices and associated characteristics is satisfactory.

b. Revised single-line diagram, reflecting field investigation results and results of short-circuit study.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Short-Circuit Study Specialist and Field Adjusting Agency.

HP Z230

Typewritten Text


16401 - 2

B. Product Certificates: For short-circuit study software, certifying compliance with IEEE 399.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Studies shall use computer programs that are distributed nationally and are in wide use.

Software algorithms shall comply with requirements of standards and guides specified in this Section. Manual calculations are unacceptable.

B. Short-Circuit Study Software Developer Qualifications: An entity that owns and markets computer software used for studies, having performed successful studies of similar magnitude on electrical distribution systems using similar devices. 1. The computer program shall be developed under the charge of a licensed

professional engineer who holds IEEE Computer Society's Certified Software Development Professional certification.

C. Short-Circuit Study Specialist Qualifications: Professional engineer in charge of performing the study and documenting recommendations, licensed in the state where Project is located. All elements of the study shall be performed under the direct supervision and control of this professional engineer.

D. Field Adjusting Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to adjust overcurrent devices and to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the International Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 COMPUTER SOFTWARE

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the

following: 1. SKM Systems Analysis, Inc. 2. ETAP

B. Comply with IEEE 399 and IEEE 551.

C. Analytical features of fault-current-study computer software program shall have the

capability to calculate "mandatory," "very desirable," and "desirable" features as listed in IEEE 399.

D. Computer software program shall be capable of plotting and diagramming time-current-characteristic curves as part of its output.

2.2 SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDY REPORT CONTENTS A. Executive summary.

B. Study descriptions, purpose, basis, and scope. Include case descriptions, definition of

terms, and guide for interpretation of the computer printout.

16401 - 3

C. One-line diagram, showing the following: 1. Protective device designations and ampere ratings. 2. Cable size and lengths. 3. Transformer kilovolt ampere (kVA) and voltage ratings. 4. Motor and generator designations and kVA ratings. 5. Switchgear, switchboard, motor-control center, and panelboard designations.

D. Comments and recommendations for system improvements, where needed.

E. Protective Device Evaluation:

1. Evaluate equipment and protective devices and compare to short-circuit ratings. 2. Tabulations of circuit breaker, fuse, and other protective device ratings versus

calculated short-circuit duties. 3. For 600-V overcurrent protective devices, ensure that interrupting ratings are

equal to or higher than calculated 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current. 4. For devices and equipment rated for asymmetrical fault current, apply

multiplication factors listed in the standards to 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current. 5. Verify adequacy of phase conductors at maximum three-phase bolted fault

currents; verify adequacy of equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductors at maximum ground-fault currents. Ensure that short-circuit withstand ratings are equal to or higher than calculated 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current.

F. Short-Circuit Study Input Data: As described in "Power System Data" Article in the Evaluations.

G. Short-Circuit Study Output: 1. Low-Voltage Fault Report: Three-phase and unbalanced fault calculations,

showing the following for each overcurrent device location: a. Voltage. b. Calculated fault-current magnitude and angle. c. Fault-point X/R ratio. d. Equivalent impedance.

2. Momentary Duty Report: Three-phase and unbalanced fault calculations, showing the following for each overcurrent device location: a. Voltage. b. Calculated symmetrical fault-current magnitude and angle. c. Fault-point X/R ratio. d. Calculated asymmetrical fault currents:

1) Based on fault-point X/R ratio. 2) Based on calculated symmetrical value multiplied by 1.6. 3) Based on calculated symmetrical value multiplied by 2.7.

3. Interrupting Duty Report: Three-phase and unbalanced fault calculations, showing the following for each overcurrent device location: a. Voltage. b. Calculated symmetrical fault-current magnitude and angle. c. Fault-point X/R ratio. d. No AC Decrement (NACD) ratio. e. Equivalent impedance. f. Multiplying factors for 2-, 3-, 5-, and 8-cycle circuit breakers rated on a

symmetrical basis. g. Multiplying factors for 2-, 3-, 5-, and 8-cycle circuit breakers rated on a

total basis.

16401 - 4

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Obtain all data necessary for the conduct of the study. 1. Verify completeness of data supplied on the one-line diagram. Call any

discrepancies to the attention of Engineer. 2. For equipment provided that is Work of this Project, use characteristics submitted

under the provisions of action submittals and information submittals for this Project.

3. For relocated equipment and that which is existing to remain, obtain required electrical distribution system data by field investigation and surveys, conducted by qualified technicians and engineers. The qualifications of technicians and engineers shall be qualified as defined by NFPA 70E

B. Gather and tabulate the following input data to support the short-circuit study. Comply with recommendations in IEEE 551 as to the amount of detail that is required to be acquired in the field. Field data gathering shall be under the direct supervision and control of the engineer in charge of performing the study, and shall be by the engineer or its representative who holds NETA ETT Level III certification or NICET Electrical Power Testing Level III certification. 1. Product Data for Project's overcurrent protective devices involved in overcurrent

protective device coordination studies. Use equipment designation tags that are consistent with electrical distribution system diagrams, overcurrent protective device submittals, input and output data, and recommended device settings.

2. Obtain electrical power utility impedance at the service. 3. Power sources and ties. 4. For transformers, include kVA, primary and secondary voltages, connection type,

impedance, X/R ratio, taps measured in percent, and phase shift. 5. For reactors, provide manufacturer and model designation, voltage rating, and

impedance. 6. For circuit breakers and fuses, provide manufacturer and model designation. List

type of breaker, type of trip, SCCR, current rating, and breaker settings. 7. Generator short-circuit current contribution data, including short-circuit reactance,

rated kVA, rated voltage, and X/R ratio. 8. Busway manufacturer and model designation, current rating, impedance, lengths,

and conductor material. 9. Motor horsepower and NEMA MG 1 code letter designation. 10. Cable sizes, lengths, number, conductor material and conduit material (magnetic

or nonmagnetic).

3.2 SHORT-CIRCUIT STUDY A. Perform study following the general study procedures contained in IEEE 399.

B. Calculate short-circuit currents according to IEEE 551.

C. Base study on the device characteristics supplied by device manufacturer.

D. The extent of the electrical power system to be studied is indicated on Drawings.

E. Begin short-circuit current analysis at the service, extending down to the system

overcurrent protective devices as follows:

16401 - 5

1. To normal system low-voltage load buses where fault current is 10 kA or less. 2. Exclude equipment rated 240-V ac or less when supplied by a single transformer

rated less than 125 kVA.

F. Study electrical distribution system from normal and alternate power sources throughout electrical distribution system for Project. Study all cases of system-switching configurations and alternate operations that could result in maximum fault conditions.

G. The calculations shall include the ac fault-current decay from induction motors, synchronous motors, and asynchronous generators and shall apply to low- and medium-voltage, three-phase ac systems. The calculations shall also account for the fault-current dc decrement, to address the asymmetrical requirements of the interrupting equipment. 1. For grounded systems, provide a bolted line-to-ground fault-current study for

areas as defined for the three-phase bolted fault short-circuit study.

H. Calculate short-circuit momentary and interrupting duties for a three-phase bolted fault at each of the following: 1. Electric utility's supply termination point. 2. Incoming switchgear. 3. Unit substation primary and secondary terminals. 4. Low-voltage switchgear. 5. Motor-control centers. 6. Control panels. 7. Standby generators and automatic transfer switches. 8. Branch circuit panelboards. 9. Disconnect switches.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Make minor modifications to equipment as required to accomplish compliance with short-

circuit study.

3.4 DEMONSTRATION A. Train Owner's operating and maintenance personnel in the use of study results.


16402 - 1

SECTION 16402 - OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS


Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes computer-based, overcurrent protective device coordination studies to

determine overcurrent protective devices and to determine overcurrent protective device settings for selective tripping.








B. Other Action Submittals: Submit the following after the approval of system protective

devices submittals. Submittals shall be in digital form. 1. Coordination-study input data, including completed computer program input data

sheets. 2. Study and equipment evaluation reports. 3. Overcurrent protective device coordination study report; signed, dated, and

sealed by a qualified professional engineer. a. Submit study report for action prior to receiving final approval of the


1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Coordination Study Specialist and Field Adjusting Agency.

HP Z230

Typewritten Text

HP Z230

Typewritten Text


16402 - 2

B. Product Certificates: For overcurrent protective device coordination study software, certifying compliance with IEEE 399.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For the overcurrent protective devices to include in

emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance

Data," include the following: a. The following parts from the Protective Device Coordination Study

Report: 1) One-line diagram. 2) Protective device coordination study. 3) Time-current coordination curves.

b. Power system data.



B. Coordination Study Software Developer Qualifications: An entity that owns and markets computer software used for studies, having performed successful studies of similar magnitude on electrical distribution systems using similar devices. 1. The computer program shall be developed under the charge of a licensed


C. Coordination Study Specialist Qualifications: Professional engineer in charge of performing the study and documenting recommendations, licensed in the state where Project is located. All elements of the study shall be performed under the direct supervision and control of this professional engineer.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 COMPUTER SOFTWARE DEVELOPERS

A. Software Developers:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the

following: a. SKM Systems Analysis, Inc. b. ETAP

B. Comply with IEEE 242 and IEEE 399.

16402 - 3

C. Analytical features of device coordination study computer software program shall have the capability to calculate "mandatory," "very desirable," and "desirable" features as listed in IEEE 399.

D. Computer software program shall be capable of plotting and diagramming time-current-characteristic curves as part of its output. Computer software program shall report device settings and ratings of all overcurrent protective devices and shall demonstrate selective coordination by computer-generated, time-current coordination plots. 1. Optional Features:

a. Arcing faults. b. Simultaneous faults. c. Explicit negative sequence. d. Mutual coupling in zero sequence.

2.2 PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY REPORT CONTENTS

A. Executive summary.

B. Study descriptions, purpose, basis and scope. Include case descriptions, definition of

terms and guide for interpretation of the computer printout.

C. One-line diagram, showing the following: 1. Protective device designations and ampere ratings. 2. Cable size and lengths. 3. Transformer kilovolt ampere (kVA) and voltage ratings. 4. Motor and generator designations and kVA ratings. 5. Switchgear, switchboard, motor-control center, and panelboard designations.

D. Study Input Data: As described in "Power System Data" Article.

E. Short-Circuit Study Output: As specified in "Short-Circuit Study Output" Paragraph in

"Short-Circuit Study Report Contents" Article in Section 260572 "Overcurrent Protective Device Short-Circuit Study."

F. Protective Device Coordination Study: 1. Report recommended settings of protective devices, ready to be applied in the

field. Use manufacturer's data sheets for recording the recommended setting of overcurrent protective devices when available. a. Phase and Ground Relays:

1) Device tag. 2) Relay current transformer ratio and tap, time dial, and

instantaneous pickup value 3) .Recommendations on improved relaying systems, if applicable.

b. Circuit Breakers: 1) Adjustable pickups and time delays (long time, short time,

ground). 2) Adjustable time-current characteristic. 3) Adjustable instantaneous pickup. 4) Recommendations on improved trip systems, if applicable.

c. Fuses: Show current rating, voltage, and class.

G. Time-Current Coordination Curves: Determine settings of overcurrent protective devices to achieve selective coordination. Graphically illustrate that adequate time separation

16402 - 4

exists between devices installed in series, including power utility company's upstream devices. Prepare separate sets of curves for the switching schemes and for emergency periods where the power source is local generation. Show the following information:

1. Device tag and title, one-line diagram with legend identifying the portion of the

system covered. 2. Terminate device characteristic curves at a point reflecting maximum

symmetrical or asymmetrical fault current to which the device is exposed. 3. Identify the device associated with each curve by manufacturer type, function,

and, if applicable, tap, time delay, and instantaneous settings recommended. 4. Plot the following listed characteristic curves, as applicable:

a. Power utility's overcurrent protective device. b. Medium-voltage equipment overcurrent relays. c. Medium- and low-voltage fuses including manufacturer's minimum melt,

total clearing, tolerance, and damage bands. d. Low-voltage equipment circuit-breaker trip devices, including

manufacturer's tolerance bands. e. Transformer full-load current, magnetizing inrush current, and ANSI

through-fault protection curves. f. Cables and conductors damage curves. g. Ground-fault protective devices. h. Motor-starting characteristics and motor damage points. i. Generator short-circuit decrement curve and generator damage point. j. The largest feeder circuit breaker in each motor-control center and

panelboard. 5. Series rating on equipment allows the application of two series interrupting

devices for a condition where the available fault current is greater than the interrupting rating of the downstream equipment. Both devices share in the interruption of the fault and selectivity is sacrificed at high fault levels. Maintain selectivity for tripping currents caused by overloads.

6. Provide adequate time margins between device characteristics such that selective operation is achieved.

7. Comments and recommendations for system improvements.


A. Examine Project overcurrent protective device submittals for compliance with electrical

distribution system coordination requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Devices to be coordinated are indicated on Drawings. 1. Proceed with coordination study only after relevant equipment submittals have

been assembled. Overcurrent protective devices that have not been submitted and approved prior to coordination study may not be used in study.

3.2 PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY A. Comply with IEEE 242 for calculating short-circuit currents and determining coordination

time intervals.

B. Comply with IEEE 399 for general study procedures.

C. The study shall be based on the device characteristics supplied by device manufacturer.

D. The extent of the electrical power system to be studied is indicated on Drawings.

16402 - 5

E. Begin analysis at the service, extending down to the system overcurrent protective

devices as follows: 1. To normal system low-voltage load buses where fault current is 10 kA or less. 2. Exclude equipment rated 240-V ac or less when supplied by a single transformer

rated less than 125 kVA.

F. Study electrical distribution system from normal and alternate power sources throughout electrical distribution system for Project. Study all cases of system-switching configurations and alternate operations that could result in maximum fault conditions.

G. Transformer Primary Overcurrent Protective Devices: 1. Device shall not operate in response to the following:

a. Inrush current when first energized. b. Self-cooled, full-load current or forced-air-cooled, full-load current,

whichever is specified for that transformer. c. Permissible transformer overloads according to IEEE C57.96 if required

by unusual loading or emergency conditions. 2. Device settings shall protect transformers according to IEEE C57.12.00, for fault

currents.

H. Motor Protection: 1. Select protection for low-voltage motors according to IEEE 242 and NFPA 70. 2. Select protection for motors served at voltages more than 600 V according to

IEEE 620.

I. Conductor Protection: Protect cables against damage from fault currents according to ICEA P-32-382, ICEA P-45-482, and protection recommendations in IEEE 242. Demonstrate that equipment withstands the maximum short-circuit current for a time equivalent to the tripping time of the primary relay protection or total clearing time of the fuse. To determine temperatures that damage insulation, use curves from cable manufacturers or from listed standards indicating conductor size and short-circuit current.

J. Generator Protection: Select protection according to manufacturer's written recommendations and to IEEE 242.

K. The calculations shall include the ac fault-current decay from induction motors, synchronous motors, and asynchronous generators and shall apply to low- and medium-voltage, three-phase ac systems. The calculations shall also account for the fault-current dc decrement, to address the asymmetrical requirements of the interrupting equipment. 1. For grounded systems, provide a bolted line-to-ground fault-current study for

areas as defined for the three-phase bolted fault short-circuit study.

L. Calculate short-circuit momentary and interrupting duties for a three-phase bolted fault and single line-to-ground fault at each of the following: 1. Electric utility's supply termination point. 2. Switchgear. 3. Unit substation primary and secondary terminals. 4. Low-voltage switchgear. 5. Motor-control centers. 6. Standby generators and automatic transfer switches.

16402 - 6

7. Branch circuit panelboards.

M. Protective Device Evaluation: 1. Evaluate equipment and protective devices and compare to short-circuit ratings. 2. Adequacy of switchgear, motor-control centers, and panelboard bus bars to

withstand short-circuit stresses.

3.3 LOAD-FLOW AND VOLTAGE-DROP STUDY A. Perform a load-flow and voltage-drop study to determine the steady-state loading profile

of the system. Analyze power system performance two times as follows: 1. Determine load-flow and voltage drop based on full-load currents obtained in

"Power System Data" Article. 2. Determine load-flow and voltage drop based on 80 percent of the design capacity

of the load buses. 3. Prepare the load-flow and voltage-drop analysis and report to show power

system components that are overloaded, or might become overloaded; show bus voltages that are less than as prescribed by NFPA 70.

3.4 MOTOR-STARTING STUDY A. Perform a motor-starting study to analyze the transient effect of the system's voltage

profile during motor starting. Calculate significant motor-starting voltage profiles and analyze the effects of the motor starting on the power system stability.

B. Prepare the motor-starting study report, noting light flicker for limits proposed by IEEE 141 and voltage sags so as not to affect the operation of other utilization equipment on the system supplying the motor.

3.5 POWER SYSTEM DATA A. Obtain all data necessary for the conduct of the overcurrent protective device study.

1. Verify completeness of data supplied in the one-line diagram on Drawings. Call

discrepancies to the attention of Engineer. 2. For new equipment, use characteristics submitted under the provisions of action

submittals and information submittals for this Project. 3. For existing equipment, whether or not relocated obtain required electrical

distribution system data by field investigation and surveys, conducted by qualified technicians and engineers. The qualifications of technicians and engineers shall be qualified as defined by NFPA 70E.

B. Gather and tabulate the following input data to support coordination study. The list below is a guide. Comply with recommendations in IEEE 551 for the amount of detail required to be acquired in the field. Field data gathering shall be under the direct supervision and control of the engineer in charge of performing the study, and shall be by the engineer or its representative who holds NETA ETT Level III certification or NICET Electrical Power Testing Level III certification. 1. Product Data for overcurrent protective devices specified in other Sections and

involved in overcurrent protective device coordination studies. Use equipment designation tags that are consistent with electrical distribution system diagrams, overcurrent protective device submittals, input and output data, and recommended device settings.

16402 - 7

2. Electrical power utility impedance at the service. 3. Power sources and ties. 4. Short-circuit current at each system bus, three phase and line-to-ground. 5. Full-load current of all loads. 6. Voltage level at each bus. 7. For transformers, include kVA, primary and secondary voltages, connection type,

impedance, X/R ratio, taps measured in percent, and phase shift. 8. For reactors, provide manufacturer and model designation, voltage rating, and


type of breaker, type of trip and available range of settings, SCCR, current rating, and breaker settings.

10. Generator short-circuit current contribution data, including short-circuit reactance, rated kVA, rated voltage, and X/R ratio.

11. For relays, provide manufacturer and model designation, current transformer ratios, potential transformer ratios, and relay settings.

12. Maximum demands from service meters. 13. Busway manufacturer and model designation, current rating, impedance, lengths,

and conductor material. 14. Motor horsepower and NEMA MG 1 code letter designation. 15. Low-voltage cable sizes, lengths, number, conductor material, and conduit

material (magnetic or nonmagnetic). 16. Medium-voltage cable sizes, lengths, conductor material, and cable construction

and metallic shield performance parameters. 17. Data sheets to supplement electrical distribution system diagram, cross-

referenced with tag numbers on diagram, showing the following: a. Special load considerations, including starting inrush currents and

frequent starting and stopping. b. Transformer characteristics, including primary protective device,

magnetic inrush current, and overload capability. c. Motor full-load current, locked rotor current, service factor, starting time,

type of start, and thermal-damage curve. d. Generator thermal-damage curve. e. Ratings, types, and settings of utility company's overcurrent protective

devices. f. Special overcurrent protective device settings or types stipulated by

utility company. g. Time-current-characteristic curves of devices indicated to be

coordinated. h. Manufacturer, frame size, interrupting rating in amperes rms

symmetrical, ampere or current sensor rating, long-time adjustment range, short-time adjustment range, and instantaneous adjustment range for circuit breakers.

i. Manufacturer and type, ampere-tap adjustment range, time-delay adjustment range, instantaneous attachment adjustment range, and current transformer ratio for overcurrent relays.

j. Panelboards, switchboards, motor-control center ampacity, and SCCR in amperes rms symmetrical.

k. Identify series-rated interrupting devices for a condition where the available fault current is greater than the interrupting rating of the downstream equipment. Obtain device data details to allow verification that series application of these devices complies with NFPA 70 and UL 489 requirements.

16402 - 8

3.6 FIELD ADJUSTING A. Adjust relay and protective device settings according to the recommended settings

provided by the coordination study. Field adjustments shall be completed by the engineering service division of the equipment manufacturer under the Startup and Acceptance Testing contract portion.

B. Make minor modifications to equipment as required to accomplish compliance with short-circuit and protective device coordination studies.

C. Testing and adjusting shall be by a full-time employee of the Field Adjusting Agency, who holds NETA ETT Level III certification or NICET Electrical Power Testing Level III certification. 1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA

Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. Perform NETA tests and inspections for all adjustable overcurrent protective devices.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage the Coordination Study Specialist to train Owner's maintenance personnel in the

following: 1. Acquaint personnel in the fundamentals of operating the power system in normal

and emergency modes. 2. Hand-out and explain the objectives of the coordination study, study descriptions,

purpose, basis, and scope. Include case descriptions, definition of terms, and guide for interpreting the time-current coordination curves.

3. Adjust, operate, and maintain overcurrent protective device settings. END OF SECTION 16402

16403 - 1

SECTION 16403 - OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE ARC-FLASH STUDY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS


Conditions and Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes a computer-based, arc-flash study to determine the arc-flash hazard

distance and the incident energy to which personnel could be exposed during work on or near electrical equipment.








B. Other Action Submittals: Submit the following submittals after the approval of system

protective devices submittals. Submittals shall be in digital form. 1. Arc-flash study input data, including completed computer program input data

sheets. 2. Arc-flash study report; signed, dated, and sealed by a qualified professional

engineer. a. Submit study report for action prior to receiving final approval of the



A. Qualification Data: For Arc-Flash Study Specialist and Field Adjusting Agency.

B. Product Certificates: For arc-flash hazard analysis software, certifying compliance with

IEEE 1584 and NFPA 70E.

HP Z230

Typewritten Text

Addition and Renovations to Office Building for Calcasieu Parish School Board Lake Charles, Louisiana

16403 - 2

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance procedures according to requirements in NFPA 70E shall be provided in the

equipment manuals.

B. Operation and Maintenance Procedures: In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," provide maintenance procedures for use by Owner's personnel that comply with requirements in NFPA 70E.



B. Arc-Flash Study Software Developer Qualifications: An entity that owns and markets computer software used for studies, having performed successful studies of similar magnitude on electrical distribution systems using similar devices. 1. The computer program shall be developed under the charge of a licensed


C. Arc-Flash Study Specialist Qualifications: Professional engineer in charge of performing the study, analyzing the arc flash, and documenting recommendations, licensed in the state where Project is located. All elements of the study shall be performed under the direct supervision and control of this professional engineer.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 COMPUTER SOFTWARE DEVELOPERS

A. Software Developers:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the

following: a. SKM Systems Analysis, Inc. b. ETAP

B. Comply with IEEE 1584 and NFPA 70E.

C. Analytical features of device coordination study computer software program shall have

the capability to calculate "mandatory," "very desirable," and "desirable" features as listed in IEEE 399.

2.2 ARC-FLASH STUDY REPORT CONTENT A. Executive summary.

B. Study descriptions, purpose, basis and scope.

16403 - 3

C. One-line diagram, showing the following: 1. Protective device designations and ampere ratings. 2. Cable size and lengths. 3. Transformer kilovolt ampere (kVA) and voltage ratings. 4. Motor and generator designations and kVA ratings. 5. Switchgear, switchboard, motor-control center and panelboard designations.

D. Study Input Data: As described in "Power System Data" Article.

E. Short-Circuit Study Output: As specified in "Short Circuit Study Output" Paragraph in

"Short-Circuit Study Report Contents" Article in Section 260572 "Overcurrent Protective Device Short-Circuit Study."

F. Protective Device Coordination Study Report Contents: As specified in "Protective Device Coordination Study Report Contents" Article in Section 260573 "Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study."

G. Arc-Flash Study Output: 1. Interrupting Duty Report: Three-phase and unbalanced fault calculations,

showing the following for each overcurrent device location: a. Voltage. b. Calculated symmetrical fault-current magnitude and angle. c. Fault-point X/R ratio. d. No AC Decrement (NACD) ratio. e. Equivalent impedance. f. Multiplying factors for 2-, 3-, 5-, and 8-cycle circuit breakers rated on a

symmetrical basis. g. Multiplying factors for 2-, 3-, 5-, and 8-cycle circuit breakers rated on a

total basis

H. Incident Energy and Flash Protection Boundary Calculations: 1. Arcing fault magnitude with and without required Arc Energy Reduction methods. 2. Protective device clearing time. 3. Duration of arc. 4. Arc-flash boundary. 5. Working distance. 6. Incident energy. 7. Hazard risk category. 8. Recommendations for arc-flash energy reduction.

I. Fault study input data, case descriptions, and fault-current calculations including a

definition of terms and guide for interpretation of the computer printout.

2.3 ARC-FLASH WARNING LABELS A. Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

Produce a 3.5-by-5-inch thermal transfer label of high-adhesion polyester for each work location included in the analysis.

B. The label shall have an orange header with the wording, "WARNING, ARC-FLASH HAZARD," and shall include the following information taken directly from the arc-flash hazard analysis:

16403 - 4

1. Location designation. 2. Nominal voltage. 3. Flash protection boundary. 4. Hazard risk category. 5. Incident energy. 6. Working distance. 7. Engineering report number, revision number, and issue date.

C. Labels shall be machine printed, with no field-applied markings.


A. Examine Project overcurrent protective device submittals. Proceed with arc-flash study

only after relevant equipment submittals have been assembled. Overcurrent protective devices that have not been submitted and approved prior to arc-flash study may not be used in study.

3.2 ARC-FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS A. Comply with NFPA 70E and its Annex D for hazard analysis study.

B. Preparatory Studies:

1. Protective Device Coordination Study Report Contents: As specified in

"Protective Device Coordination Study Report Contents" Article in Section 260573 "Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study."

C. Calculate maximum and minimum contributions of fault-current size. 1. The minimum calculation shall assume that the utility contribution is at a

minimum and shall assume no motor load. 2. The maximum calculation shall assume a maximum contribution from the utility

and shall assume motors to be operating under full-load conditions.

D. Calculate the arc-flash protection boundary and incident energy at locations in the electrical distribution system where personnel could perform work on energized parts.

E. Include medium- and low-voltage equipment locations, except equipment rated 240-V ac or less fed from transformers less than 125 kVA.

F. Safe working distances shall be specified for calculated fault locations based on the calculated arc-flash boundary, considering incident energy of 1.2 cal/sq.cm.

G. Incident energy calculations shall consider the accumulation of energy over time when performing arc-flash calculations on buses with multiple sources. Iterative calculations shall take into account the changing current contributions, as the sources are interrupted or decremented with time. Fault contribution from motors and generators shall be decremented as follows: 1. Fault contribution from induction motors should not be considered beyond three

to five cycles. 2. Fault contribution from synchronous motors and generators should be decayed

to match the actual decrement of each as closely as possible (e.g., contributions

16403 - 5

from permanent magnet generators will typically decay from 10 per unit to three per unit after 10 cycles).

H. Arc-flash computation shall include both line and load side of a circuit breaker as follows: 1. When the circuit breaker is in a separate enclosure. 2. When the line terminals of the circuit breaker are separate from the work

location. I. Base arc-flash calculations on actual overcurrent protective device clearing time. Cap

maximum clearing time at two seconds based on IEEE 1584, Section B.1.2.

3.3 POWER SYSTEM DATA A. Obtain all data necessary for the conduct of the arc-flash hazard analysis.

1. Verify completeness of data supplied on the one-line diagram on Drawings and

under "Preparatory Studies" Paragraph in "Arc-Flash Hazard Analysis" Article. Call discrepancies to the attention of Engineer.

2. For new equipment, use characteristics submitted under the provisions of action submittals and information submittals for this Project.

3. For existing equipment, whether or not relocated, obtain required electrical distribution system data by field investigation and surveys, conducted by qualified technicians and engineers.

B. Electrical Survey Data: Gather and tabulate the following input data to support study. Comply with recommendations in IEEE 1584 and NFPA 70E as to the amount of detail that is required to be acquired in the field. Field data gathering shall be under the direct supervision and control of the engineer in charge of performing the study, and shall be by the engineer or its representative who holds NETA ETT Level III certification or NICET Electrical Power Testing Level III certification. 1. Product Data for overcurrent protective devices specified in other Sections and

involved in overcurrent protective device coordination studies. Use equipment designation tags that are consistent with electrical distribution system diagrams, overcurrent protective device submittals, input and output data, and recommended device settings.

2. Obtain electrical power utility impedance at the service. 3. Power sources and ties. 4. Short-circuit current at each system bus, three phase and line-to-ground. 5. Full-load current of all loads. 6. Voltage level at each bus. 7. For transformers, include kVA, primary and secondary voltages, connection type,

impedance, X/R ratio, taps measured in per cent, and phase shift. 8. For reactors, provide manufacturer and model designation, voltage rating and


type of breaker, type of trip and available range of settings, SCCR, current rating, and breaker settings.

10. Generator short-circuit current contribution data, including short-circuit reactance, rated kVA, rated voltage, and X/R ratio.

11. For relays, provide manufacturer and model designation, current transformer ratios, potential transformer ratios, and relay settings.

12. Busway manufacturer and model designation, current rating, impedance, lengths, and conductor material.

13. Motor horsepower and NEMA MG 1 code letter designation.

16403 - 6

14. Low-voltage cable sizes, lengths, number, conductor material and conduit material (magnetic or nonmagnetic).

15. Medium-voltage cable sizes, lengths, conductor material, and cable construction and metallic shield performance parameters.

3.4 LABELING A. Apply one arc-flash label for 600-V ac, 480-V ac, and applicable 208-V ac panelboards

and disconnects and for each of the following locations: 1. Motor-control center. 2. Low-voltage switchboard. 3. Switchgear. 4. Medium-voltage switch. 5. Control panel.

3.5 APPLICATION OF WARNING LABELS

A. Install the arc-fault warning labels under the direct supervision and control of the Arc-

Flash Study Specialist.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage the Arc-Flash Study Specialist to train Owner's maintenance personnel in the

potential arc-flash hazards associated with working on energized equipment and the significance of the arc-flash warning labels.


16455 - 1

SECTION 16455 - GROUNDING PART 1 - GENERAL


A. The general provisions of the Contract, including the Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary, and other Conditions) as appropriate, apply to the Work specified in this Section.

B. Refer to all Electrical portions of the specifications, as well as the Specifications for the other various trades and materials and be thoroughly familiar with all provisions regarding electrical work.

1.2 GENERAL A. Contractor shall provide grounding of service equipment, transformers, non-current

carrying conductive surfaces of equipment, cable tray, metallic raceways, fencing, metal buildings, structures and other equipment as specified herein and as shown on the drawings.

1.3 SCOPE A. The equipment shall be grounded as shown on the plans and as specified herein. All

metal structures and equipment, including fences, shall be connected to the systems ground grid. Ground conductors must be as short and straight as possible, protected from mechanical injury and, if practicable, without splice or joint

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUCTORS

A. Main grounding conductors shall be bare, soft drawn, stranded, single conductor copper

wire, and generally sized as follows: 1. Ground grid cable: #3/0 AWG 2. Equipment and structures to grid conductor: #3/0 AWG 3. Fence grid conductor: #3/0 AWG 4. Fence-to-fence post conductor: #2 AWG (Stranded) 5. Fence post to grid conductor: #2 AWG (Stranded)

2.2 CONNECTORS

A. All connectors shall be of the exothermic weld type.

2.3 GROUND RODS

A. Ground electrodes shall be copper-clad steel rods nominal 3/4 inch in diameter and ten

feet (10’) long.

2.4 EXOTHERMIC WELD PROCESS A. All wire-to-wire exothermic welds shall be the parallel type. Wire-to-wire rod connections

shall be “T” type. The following is a partial list of approved Cadweld type connections. Prior approved equivalent connectors by other manufacturers may be utilized.

HP Z230

Typewritten Text


16455 - 2

Connections Cadweld Type

Parallel cable-to-cable PG Cable to ground rod GR, FT, NT or NX Cable to steel VN Cable to lug LA Cable to rebar Consult factory (similar to RR)

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXPOSED NON-CURRENT-CARRYING METAL PARTS

A. Ground connections to equipment or devices shall be made as close to the current-

carrying parts as possible; that is, to the main frame rather than supporting structures, bases or shields. Grounding connections shall be made only to surfaces that are clean and dry. Steel surfaces shall be ground or filed to remove all scale, rust, grease and dirt. Copper and galvanized steel shall be cleaned to remove oxide before making welds or connections. Code size ground conductors shall be run in all conduits containing circuits protected by overcurrent devices; then properly terminated.

B. All raceways, cable racks, cable trays, conduits, armored or shielded cable or cables with ground and all exposed non-current carrying metal parts shall be grounded. Such items shall be bonded together and permanently grounded to the equipment ground bus. Conduits shall be connected by the grounding bushings or clamps to ground bus. Flexible “jumpers” shall be provided around all raceway expansion joints. Bonding straps for steel conduit shall be copper. Jumper connections shall be provided to effectively ground all sections of rigid conduit connected into plastic pipe. No metallic conduit shall be left underground. In conduit systems interrupted by junction or switch boxes where locknuts and bushings are used to secure the conduit in the box, the sections of conduit and box must be bonded together using grounding bushings.

C. Any conduits entering low voltage (600 volts or below) equipment through sheet metal

enclosure and effectively grounded to enclosure by hub need not be otherwise bonded. Both ends of ground buses in switchboards, etc., shall be separately connected to the main ground bus to form two (2) separate paths to ground.

D. All metal buildings shall be grounded by separate grounding conductor and ground rods.

Fencing (existing and new) shall be grounded as specified herein and as shown on the drawings. Where exposed to physical damage, the ground wires shall be suitably protected with PVC conduit enclosures. Cables below grade shall be laid with a reasonable amount of slack to reduce the possibility of breakage.

3.2 EXOTHERMIC WELD PROCESS

A. The grounding grid shall be installed and connected as specified herein and as shown on

the drawings using an exothermic weld process (Cadweld or other approved manufacturer). Where bolted connections are required, brass/bronze 2 hole pads exothermically welded to the grounding conductor shall be used.

B. All exothermic weld grounding connections shall be made using exothermic welded

Cadweld (or other approved manufacturer) connections, tools and materials.

C. Unless noted otherwise, all copper-to-copper or copper-to-steel splices and terminating specified shall be made with exothermic welds.

16455 - 3

D. Steel surfaces shall be ground or filed to remove the galvanizing coating and the surface cleaned and dried thoroughly prior to making the welds. All welds shall be repainted with an approved galvanized paint after the welds are made.

E. Copper surfaces shall be sanded to remove oxides and the surface cleaned and dried

thoroughly prior to making the welds. All welds shall be painted with an approved anti-oxide manufactured by T&B or Burndy (or other approved manufacturer) to prevent corrosion.

F. Brass/bronze split bolts shall be used to connect the fence grounding conductors where

shown on the drawings.

G. Where bolted connections are specified, brass/bronze 2 hole pads shall be utilized except for equipment manufactured neutral and ground busses. The equipment to be grounded shall be cleaned of all paint, dirt, and rust prior to making the bolted connection. All bolts, nuts, washers, and lock washers shall be stainless steel. All such connections shall be coated with an approved anti-oxide compound. Only one (1) 2-hole pad shall be terminated on one (1) set of bolts, nuts and washers.

H. Where approved in writing by the Engineer, brass/bronze pipe ground clamps or 2 set

screw 2 hole pads may be used for special conditions.

I. Where grounding conductors or PVC conduits penetrate walls, floors, etc., these openings and conduits shall be sealed with Dow Corning No. 2001 Silicone RTV (or other prior approved manufacturer) after installation is complete.

J. Provide gradual bends for all grounding grid cables wherever possible. Sharp bends will

not be permitted. The minimum being radius should be 8 inches.

K. The Contractor shall notify the Architect/Engineer when the buried grounding grid is completed for inspection by the Engineer prior to backfilling. Notification should be no less than 24 hours prior to scheduling the backfill of trenches.

L. The Contractor shall test the grounding grid resistance and continuity. The testing shall

be performed after all underground and above ground connections have been made. Refer to “Acceptance Testing” specification section for additional requirements.

3.3 ELECTRICAL SERVICE ENTRANCE A. Grounding conductor shall be installed from one (1) ground rod to the next and then

looped back to the service equipment. Both ends of the grounding conductor loop shall be properly terminated on the service equipment’s neutral bus. Provide all required lugs to accomplish this. Properly bond to ground buss per NEC requirements.

B. Ground rods shall be spaced a minimum of 6'0" from each other.

C. Extend grounding conductor to all metallic water piping, building steel, concrete

reinforcing steel, all other building steel for adjacent buildings services from main electrical service and properly terminate.

D. Grounding conductor shall be installed using 1" schedule 80 PVC conduit.

E. Prior to pouring of slab(s) and prior to covering grounding grid, contractor shall take

digital photographs of all ground rods, terminations, conductors and overall photo and shall submit to engineer prior to requesting substantial completion.

16455 - 4

F. Provide and install hand-hole (inspection well) with bolt-down removable cover at all ground rods to allow visual inspection of the terminations of the grounding conductors to the grounding electrode(s). Refer to details for additional requirements.


16472 - 1

SECTION 16472 - TELE/DATA RACEWAY SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS


Supplementary, and other Conditions), as appropriate, apply to the Work specified in this Section.

B. Refer to all , Electrical specification sections, as well as the Specifications for the other

various trades and materials and be thoroughly familiar with all provisions regarding electrical work.

1.2 GENERAL

A. Furnish and install a system of outlet boxes and empty conduit for a telephone raceway

system as shown on the drawings and as specified herein. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 OUTLET BOXES

A. Outlet boxes shall be 4-11/16" square.

B. Outlet boxes shall have raised covers with telephone outlet cover plate to match electrical device cover plate.

2.2 CONDUIT

A. Conduit runs shall be run concealed in walls from outlet box up through ceiling to four inches (4") above top of wall partition, turn ninety degrees using long radius ninety, and stop. Provide and install a nylon bushing at ends of conduits.

B. Leave a No. 14 fish wire in each conduit run.

C. Conduit shall be 3/4" unless specified otherwise on the drawings.

D. Install two (2) conduits from each outlet box to above ceiling.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Provide and install system raceways in accordance with cable, jack, patch panel manufacturer’s recommendations and requirements.


HP Z230

Typewritten Text

Additions and Renovations to Office Building for Calcasieu Parish Sheriffs Office Lake Charles, Louisiana

16495 - 1

SECTION 16495 - TRANSFER SWITCHES PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Automatic transfer switch (ATS).

1.2 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and all Specification

Sections.

B. Shop drawings or published product data for each transfer switch, including dimensioned plans, sections, and elevations showing minimum clearances; conductor entry provisions; gutter space; installed features and devices; and materials lists.

C. Wiring diagrams, elementary or schematic, differentiating between manufacturer-installed

and field-installed wiring.

D. Single-line diagrams of transfer switch units showing connections between automatic transfer switch, bypass/isolation switch, power source, and load, plus interlocking provisions.

E. Operation and maintenance data for each type of product, for inclusion in Operating and

Maintenance Manual specified in Division 1. Include all features and operating sequences, both automatic and manual. List all factory settings of relays and provide relay setting and calibration instructions.

F. Manufacturer's certificate of compliance to the referenced standards and tested short-

circuit closing and withstand ratings applicable to the protective devices and current ratings used in this Project, as indicated and as specified in paragraph "Tested Fault Current Ratings."


A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms are experienced in manufacturing equipment of the

types and capacities indicated and have a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Emergency Service: Manufacturer maintains a service center capable of providing emergency maintenance and repairs at the Project site with an 8-hour maximum response time.

C. Comply with NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code," for components and installation.

D. Comply with NFPA 110, "Standard for Emergency and Standby Power Systems."

E. Comply with NEMA ICS 1, "General Standards for Industrial Control," ICS 2, "Industrial

Control Devices, Controllers and Assemblies," and ICS 6, "Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems."

F. UL Compliance: Comply with UL Standard 1008, "Automatic Transfer Switches," except

where requirements of these Specifications are stricter.

HP Z230

Typewritten Text


16495 - 2

G. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain generator (s) ATSs, paralleling gear, and remote annunciators, fuel system(s) from a single manufacturer that assumes responsibility for all system components furnished.

H. The automatic transfer switch shall be warranted by its manufacturer for five (5)

consecutive calendar years from the date of substantial completion. This warranty shall be in full, non-limited, non-pro-rated warranty and shall cover all parts, labor, trip charges and incidental materials .

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

1. Cummins 2. Asco 3. Caterpillar 4. Kohler 5. Approved Equivalent

2.2 TRANSFER SWITCH PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Current and Voltage Ratings: As indicated on the drawings.

B. Tested Fault-Current Ratings: Closing and withstand ratings exceed the indicated available rms symmetrical fault current at the equipment terminals based on testing according to UL Standard 1008, conducted at full-rated system voltage and 20 percent power factor. Rate each product for withstand duration time as follows when tested for rated short-circuit current correlated with the actual type of circuit protective device indicated for transfer switches for this Project:

1. Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, 150 Amperes or Smaller: 1.5 closing and

withstand duration cycles. 2. Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Larger than 150 Amperes: 3 closing and

withstand duration cycles.

C. Solid-State Controls: Repetitive accuracy of all settings is plus or minus 2 percent or better over an operating temperature range of minus 20 deg C to 70 deg C.

D. Resistance to Damage by Voltage Transients: Components meet or exceed voltage

surge withstand capability requirements when tested according to ANSI C37.90.1, IEEE Guide for Surge Withstand Capability (SWC) Tests. Components meet or exceed voltage impulse withstand test of NEMA ICS 1.

E. Four-Pole Switches: 4-pole switches shall be provided and shall provide full-capacity

over-lapping neutral switching.

F. Enclosures: General-purpose NEMA 3R gasketed, conforming to UL Standard 508, "Electric Industrial Control Equipment," except as otherwise indicated.

G. Heater: Within enclosure of units exposed to outdoor temperature and humidity

conditions, connect thermostat within enclosure to control heater.

16495 - 3

H. Factory Wiring: Train and bundle factory wiring and identify consistently with shop drawings, either by color code or by numbered or lettered wire and cable tape markers at terminations.

1. Designated terminals accommodate field wiring. 2. Power Terminals Arrangement and Field Wiring Space: Suitable for top, side, or

bottom entrance of feeder conductors as indicated. 3. Terminals: Pressure-type, suitable for copper or aluminum conductors of sizes

indicated. 4. Control Wiring: Equipped with lugs suitable for connection to terminal strips.

I. Electrical Operation: Where indicated, accomplish by a non-fused, momentarily

energized solenoid or electric motor-operated mechanism, mechanically and electrically interlocked in both directions. Switches using components of molded-case circuit breakers or contactors not designed for continuous-duty, repetitive switching between active power sources are not acceptable.

J. Switch Action: Mechanically held in both directions for double-throw switches.

K. Switch Contacts: Use silver composition for switching load current. Units rated 225

amperes and more have separate arcing contacts.

L. Overcurrent devices are not part of switch products.

M. Refer to electrical riser diagram for voltage and amperage of switch(s).

2.3 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES (ATSs)

A. Comply with Level 1, Type 10 equipment according to NFPA 110, "Standard for Emergency and Standby Power Systems." Emergency power system shall start and assume load within ten (10) seconds of a power outage.

B. Switching Arrangement: Double-throw type, with synchronized (in-phase monitoring to

prevent switching when phase angle between sources is greater than thirty degrees) transition normal functioning.

C. Manual Switch Operation: Manually operated under load with the door closed with either

or both sources energized. Transfer time is same as for electrical operation. Control circuit automatically disconnects from electrical operator during manual operation.

2.4 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH FEATURES

A. Voltage sensing for each phase of normal source. Pick-up voltage is adjustable from 85 percent to 100 percent nominal, and drop-out voltage is adjustable from 75 percent to 98 percent pick-up value. Factory set for pick-up at 90 percent and drop-out at 85 percent.

B. Time-delay override of normal source voltage-sensing delays transfer and engine start

signals. Adjustable 0 to 6 seconds, and factory set at 1 second.

C. Voltage/Frequency Lockout Relay: Prevent premature transfer. Voltage pick-up is adjustable from 85 percent to 100 percent nominal. Factory set to pick-up at 90 percent. Pick-up frequency is adjustable from 90 percent to 100 percent nominal. Factory set to pick-up at 95 percent.

16495 - 4

D. Retransfer Time Delay: Adjustable from 0 to 30 minutes and factory set at 10 minutes. Provides automatic defeat of the delay upon loss of voltage or sustained under-voltage of the emergency source, provided the normal supply has been restored.

E. Test Switch: Simulates normal source failure.

F. Switch-Position Pilot Lights: Indicate source to which the load is connected.

G. Source-Available Indicating Lights: Supervise sources via the transfer switch normal and

emergency source-sensing circuits.

1. Normal Power Supervision: Green light with nameplate engraved "Normal Source Available."

2. Emergency Power Supervision: Red light with nameplate engraved "Emergency Source Available."

H. Unassigned Auxiliary Contacts: Two normally open SPDT contacts for each switch

position.

1. Rating: 10 amperes at 240 V a.c.

I. Transfer Override Switch: Overrides automatic retransfer control so the ATS will remain connected to the emergency power source regardless of the condition of the normal source. A pilot light indicates the override status.

J. Engine Starting Contacts: One isolated normally closed and 1 isolated normally open.

Contacts are gold flashed or gold plated and rated 10 amperes at 32 V d.c. minimum.

K. Engine Shut-Down Contacts: Time delay adjustable from 0 to 5 minutes; factory set at 5 minutes.

2.5 FINISHES

A. Enclosures: Indoor NEMA I installations. Manufacturer's standard enamel over corrosion-resistant pretreatment and primer.

B. Enclosures: Outdoor NEMA 3R (Gasketed) installations. Custom color enamel (as

selected by Architect) over corrosion resistant pre-treatment and primer


A. Factory test components, assembled switches, and associated equipment to ensure proper operation. Check transfer time and voltage, frequency, and time-delay settings for conformance with specified requirements. Perform dielectric strength test conforming to NEMA ICS 1.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Floor Mounting of Transfer Switches: Level and anchor the unit to the 4" thick concrete housekeeping pad..

B. Wall mounting of Transfer Switches; Level and anchor the unit to the wall.

16495 - 5

3.2 WIRING TO REMOTE COMPONENTS A. Match the type and number of cables and conductors to the control and communications

requirements of the transfer switches used. Increase raceway sizes at no additional cost to the Owner if necessary to accommodate required wiring.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Tighten factory-made connections, including connectors, terminals, bus joints, mountings, and grounding. Tighten field-connected connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, according to equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values. When manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standards 486A and 486B. Provide and install all required raceways and conductors/cables for a complete and fully operational system.

3.4 GROUNDING

A. Make equipment grounding connections for transfer switch units as indicated and as required by the NEC.


A. Manufacturer's Field Services: Provide services of a factory-authorized service representative to supervise field tests.

B. Preliminary Tests: Perform electrical tests as recommended by the manufacturer and as

follows:

1. Measure phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground insulation resistance levels with insulation resistance tester, including external annunciator and control circuits. Use test voltages and procedure recommended by the manufacturer. Meet manufacturer's specified minimum resistance.

2. Check for electrical continuity of circuits and for short circuits.

C. Field Tests: Give 7-day advance notice of the tests and perform tests in presence of Owner's representative.

D. Coordinate tests with tests of generator plant and run them concurrently.

E. Tests: As recommended by the manufacturer and as follows:

1. Contact Resistance Test: Measure resistance of power contacts for ATSs,

NATSs, and BP/ISs. Resolve values in excess of 500 micro-ohms and differences between adjacent poles exceeding 50 percent.

2. Ground Fault Tests: Coordinate with testing specified in Division 16 Section "Overcurrent Protective Devices" to ensure sensors are properly selected and located to optimize ground-fault protection where power is being delivered from either source. a. Verify grounding points and sensor ratings and locations. b. Apply simulated fault current at the sensors and observe reaction of

circuit interrupting devices. 3. Operational Tests: Demonstrate interlock, sequence, and operational function

for each switch at least 3 times. a. Simulate power failures of normal source to ATSs and of emergency

source with normal source available.

16495 - 6

b. Simulate low phase-to-ground voltage for each phase of normal source of ATSs.

c. Verify time-delay settings and pick-up and drop-out voltages.

F. Test Failures: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and prepare for retest. Verify that equipment meets the specified requirements.

G. Reports: Maintain a written record of observations and tests. Report defective materials

and workmanship and retest corrected items. Record adjustable relay settings and measured insulation and contact resistances and time delays. Attach a label or tag to each tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Training: Furnish the services of a factory-authorized service representative to instruct Owner's personnel in the operation, maintenance, and adjustment of transfer switches and related equipment. Provide a minimum of 4 hours of instruction scheduled 7 days in advance. As part of project close-out documents, Contractor shall submit original sign-in sheet of all persons present at instruction session.


16500 - 1

SECTION 16500 - LIGHTING FIXTURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS


B. Refer to other Electrical specifications, as well as the Specifications for the other various

trades and materials and be thoroughly familiar with all provisions regarding electrical work.

1.2 GENERAL

A. The Contractor shall furnish and install lighting fixtures and accessories as shown on the

drawings and/or described herein. The Contractor shall also furnish and install new lamps for all new fixtures and existing fixtures to be re-used in project area.

B. Unless otherwise specified, lighting fixtures shall be permanently installed and connected to the wiring system.

C. The Contractor shall support each new fixture independently, from the building structure. Ceiling framing members shall not be used to support fixtures except in specific areas where ceiling supports for this purpose have been specified elsewhere in these specifications.

D. Catalog numbers scheduled on the drawings or descriptions of lighting fixtures contained herein may indicate fixture compatibility with certain types of ceiling construction. The Contractor shall determine exact type of ceilings actually to be furnished in each area and shall obtain fixtures to suit, deviating from specified catalog numbers or descriptions only where necessary, and only to the extent necessary to insure fixture-ceiling compatibility. The Contractor shall notify the Architect/Engineer in writing where such changes are to be made. Contractor shall clean all lighting fixtures of dirt and debris upon completion of project prior to requesting substantial completion inspection.

E. Incandescent fixtures for recessed locations shall have a thermal cutout and be installed in accordance with manufacturer's requirements and in accordance with NEC.

F. Unless noted otherwise on the drawings, lamps installed in each fixture shall be of the type specifically recommended by the manufacturer of the fixture for use in the fixture. Fixtures shall not be wired with or have any parts constructed using asbestos materials.

G. All requests for prior approval shall contain the following: 1. Photometric data for each fixture being submitted. 2. For all exterior lighting, point by point foot candle levels shall be submitted.

(Exception: Wall packs, ground mounted flood lights, landscape lighting). 3. Listing of all deviations of fixtures proposed as compared to fixtures specified. 4. For interior lighting point by point foot-candle levels shall be submitted for typed

interior spaces (offices, classrooms, corridors) and for spaces with indirect and/or specialty lighting.

HP Z230

Typewritten Text

HP Z230

Typewritten Text


16500 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 LED FIXTURES

A. Manufacturers of LED luminaires shall demonstrate a suitable testing program

incorporating high heat, high humidity and thermal shock test regimens to ensure system reliability and to substantiate lifetime claims.

B. The use of IESNA LM-80 data to predict luminaire lifetime is not acceptable.

C. At time of manufacture, electrical and light technical properties shall be recorded for each luminaire. At a minimum, this should include lumen output, CCT, and CRJ. Each luminaire shall utilize a unique serial numbering scheme. Technical properties mu be made available for a minimum of 5 years after the date of manufacture.

D. Luminaires shall be provided with a 5 year warranty covering LEDs, drivers, paint and mechanical components. 1. Each luminaire shall consist of an assembly that utilizes LEDs as the light

source. In addition, a complete luminaire shall consist of a housing, LED array and electronic driver (power supply).

2. The rated operating temperature range shall be 30°C to +40°C. 3. Each luminaire is capable of operating above 100°F° (37°C), but not expected to

comply with photometric requirements at elevated temperatures. 4. Photometry must be compliant with IESNA LF-79 and shall be conducted at 25°C

ambient temperature. 5. The individual LEDs shall be constructed such that a catastrophic loss or the

failure of one LED will not result in the loss of the entire luminaire. 6. Luminaire shall be constructed such that LED modules may be replaced or

repaired without replacement of whole luminaire. 7. Each luminaire shall be listed with Underwriters Laboratory, Inc. under UL 1598

for luminaires, or an equivalent standard from a nationally recognized testing laboratory.

8. Power Consumption: Maximum power consumption allowed for the luminaire shall be determined by application. The luminaire shall not consume power in the off state.

9. Operation Voltage: The luminaire shall operate from a 60 HZ ± 3HZ AC line over a voltage ranging from 108 VAC to 305 VAC. The fluctuation of line voltage shall have no visible effect on the luminous output.

10. Power Factor: The luminaire shall have a power factor of 0.90 or greater. 11. THD: Total harmonic distortion (current and voltage) induced into an AC power

line by a luminaire shall not exceed 20 percent. 12. Surge Suppression: The luminaire onboard circuitry shall include fused surge

protection devices (SPD) to withstand high repetition noise transients as a result of utility line switching, nearby lightning strikes, and other interference. The SPD shall protect the luminaire from damage and failure for common mode transient peak voltages up to 10 kV (minimum) and transient peak currents up to 5 kA (minimum) SPD shall conform to UL 1449 depending on the components used in the design. SPD performance shall be tested per the procedures in ANSI/IEEE C62.41-1992 (or current edition for category C (standard). The SPD shall fail in such a way as the luminaire will no longer operate. The SPD shall be field replaceable.

13. Each luminaire shall have integral UL Listed Class II power supplies. Class I power supplies will not be acceptable.

14. Operational Performance: The LED circuitry shall prevent visible flicker to the unaided eye over the voltage range specified above.

16500 - 3

15. RF Interference: LED drivers must meet Class A emission limits referred in Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Title 47, Subpart B, Section 15 regulations concerning the emission of electronic noise.

16. Drivers shall have a Class A sound rating. 17. Illuminance: The illuminance shall not decrease by more than 30% over the

expected operating life. The measurements shall be calibrated to standard photopic calibrations.

18. Light Color Quality: The luminaire shall have a correlated color temperature (CCT) range of 3300K to 3700K, The color rendition index (CRI) shall be 80 or greater. Binning of LEDS shall conform to ANSI/G.NEMA SSL 3-2010.

19. Backlight –Uplight-Glare: the luminaire shall not allow more than 10 percent of the rated lumens to project above 80 degrees from vertical. The luminaire shall not allow more than 2.5 percent of the rated lumens to project above 90 degrees from vertical. Backlight and Glare ratings as per fixture schedule and calculated per IESNA TM-15.

20. The thermal management (of the heat generated by the LEDs) shall be of sufficient capacity to assure proper operation of the luminaire over the expected useful life.

21. The LED manufacturer’s maximum thermal pad temperature for the expected life shall not be exceeded.

22. Thermal management shall be passive by design. The use of fans or other mechanical devices shall not be allowed.

23. The luminaire shall have a minimum heat sink surface such that LED manufacturer’s maximum junction temperature is not exceeded at maximum rated ambient temperature.

24. The heat sink shall be aluminum. 25. The luminaires shall be dimmable from 100 percent output to 0 percent output. 26. Driver shall be internal to fixture.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. All surface mounted fixtures shall be properly anchored so that all sides of the fixture are butted up against the mounting surface. A minimum of two (2) anchors shall be used; however, where additional anchors are required to properly install fixture (all sides evenly spaced from ceiling), the Contractor shall provide and install them at no additional cost to the Owner.

1. Anchor types shall be as follows: Mounting Surface Material Anchor type * Gypsum board (wall) Toggle bolts or blocking with screws Gypsum board (ceiling) Expansion type anchor Concrete/concrete block Expansion type anchor ** Wood Screws

*Anchor type shall be determined in field by Architect/Engineer as dictated by fixture weight. ** Any fixture installed on combustible material shall be installed on ½ minimum spacers unless prior approved, otherwise in writing by Architect/Engineer.

B. All recessed fixtures in suspended ceiling shall be supported by a minimum of two (2)

support wires, at opposite corners of the fixture. Each support wire shall be continuous

16500 - 4

without splices to the building structure and separately anchored. Fixture support wires shall support only the light fixture and not the ceiling. Surface mounted fixtures installed on lay-in ceiling shall be supported as lay-in fixtures. Refer to details for additional requirements.


16550 - 1

SECTION 16550 - OCCUPANCY SENSORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS


B. Refer to all other Electrical specification sections, as well as the Specifications for the


1.2 GENERAL

A. Contractor shall provide and install motion sensors in accordance with the plans and

specifications herein. System shall be installed to provide detection system coverage of the entire space the sensors are located in. It is understood that due to some manufacturer's devices providing different coverage patterns, the plans represent a generic system. Contractors shall evaluate each space individually and shall at no additional costs to the owner, provide additional detection sensors where required to provide a complete coverage pattern and shall also adjust installation locations to retain the coverage while reducing false triggers of the sensors.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WALL MOUNTED SENSORS

A. For single-pole/single switch applications wall mounted motion sensors shall be Sensor

Switch No. WSD-PDT, Watt Stopper No.: DW-100 or approved equivalent.

B. For two-pole/dual switch applications, wall mounted motion sensors shall be Sensor Switch No. WSD-PDT-2P or Watt Stopper No.: DW-200 or approved equivalent.

C. Color of sensor shall be selected by Architect/Engineer during shop drawing submittal.

2.2 CEILING MOUNTED SENSORS

A. Ceiling mounted motion sensors shall be Sensor Switch CM- PDT-10, Watt Stopper No. DT-300 Series or approved equivalent ultrasonic sensors.

B. All relays, contactors, and power packs required to provide a fully operational system

shall be provided and installed at no additional cost to the owner.

C. Install device using properly sized device box recessed in ceiling. Utilize MC-cable to run all conductors. Install power pack in properly rated junction box.

D. Color of sensor shall be selected by Architect/Engineer during shop drawing submittal.

2.3 POWER/SWITCH PACKS

A. Power packs shall employ zero crossing circuit to limit inrush current. Contacts shall be dry-type (Isolated) twenty-ampere (20A). Leads shall be Class 2 Teflon insulated for use in plenums. Power pack shall be rated for both 120 volt and 277 volt operation.

HP Z230

Typewritten Text


16550 - 2

B. Install device using properly sized device box recessed in ceiling. Utilize flexible conduit to run all control voltage conductors. Install power pack in properly rated junction box.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Should a particular manufacturer’s product require that additional sensors and associated wiring and accessories be provided to allow full and complete coverage of the space, the additional sensors and associated wiring and accessories shall be provided at no additional cost to the owner.

B. Installation of motion sensor shall be such that motion is detected as soon as a person

enters the particular room and with the sensor being a minimum of four feet (4’) from any HVAC diffuser/register.

C. All sensors shall be installed on the line side of all toggle switches so that power is

maintained to the sensor at all times.

3.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Contractor shall submit a proposed layout in shop drawings indicating all sensor and power pack locations. The sensor Contractor shall be responsible for such layout.

3.3 MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS

A. Contractor shall be responsible for providing all relays, contactors, power packs, etc. to provide a complete motion detecting lighting switching circuit.


16621 - 1

SECTION 16621 - EMERGENCY GENERATOR - DIESEL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. It is the intent of this specification to secure an emergency generator system that has been prototype tested, factory built, site tested, of the latest commercial design, together with all accessories necessary for a complete installation as shown on the plans and drawings and specified herein. The equipment supplied and installed shall meet the requirements of the National Electric Code and all applicable codes and regulations. All equipment shall be new, of current production by a national firm which manufactures the generator and controls, and assembles the generator set as a matched unit so that there is one-source responsibility for warranty, parts, and service through a local representative with factory-trained service personnel. Emergency power system shall include all parts and accessories to provide a NFPA 110 Level 2 Class 48 hours Type 10 installation.

1.2 SUBMITTAL A. Submittal shall include specification sheets showing all standard and optional

accessories to be supplied, schematic wiring diagrams, dimension drawings, and interconnection diagrams identifying by terminal number each required interconnection between the generator set, the transfer switch, and other remote devices if included elsewhere in these specifications.

B. Where a “Standard Specification” (i.e. ANSI, UL, etc.) is referenced and no manufacturers are listed the Contractor shall submit manufacturers for Prior Approval in adherence with the specified standard.

1.3 TESTING A. To assure that the equipment has been designed and built to the highest reliability and

quality standards, the manufacturer shall be responsible for design prototype tests as described herein: Components of the emergency system, such as the engine/generator set, transfer switch, and accessories shall not be subjected to prototype tests since the tests are potentially damaging. Rather, similar design prototypes which will not be sold, shall be used for these tests. Prototype test programs shall include the requirements of NFPA-110 and the following:

1. Maximum power (kW). 2. Maximum starting (kVA) at 35% instantaneous voltage dip. 3. Alternate temperature rise by embedded thermocouple and by resistance method

per NEMA MG1-22.40 and 16.40. 4. Governor speed regulation under steady-state and transient conditions. 5. Voltage regulation and generator transient response. 6. Fuel consumption at 1/4, ½, 3/4, and full load. 7. Harmonic analysis, voltage waveform deviation, and telephone influence factor. 8. Three-phase line-to-line short circuit test. 9. Cooling air flow. 10. Torsional analysis testing to verify that the generator set is free to harmful

torsional stresses. 1.4 WARRANTY AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

A. The emergency generator system (including but not limited to paralleling gear, automatic

transfer switches, fuel system, generator, engine, enclosure, annunciator, etc.) shall be

HP Z230

Typewritten Text


16621 - 2

warrantied by the manufacturer for five (5) years from the date of substantial completion. This warranty shall be a full, non-limited, non-pro-rated warranty and shall cover all parts, labor, trip charges, and incidental materials.

B. As part of this five year warranty/preventive maintenance program, the contractor shall provide a full preventive maintenance program providing all recommended and required maintenance care on the complete generator, transfer switch (s) and fuel system. This program shall be based upon an annual run-time of one hundred fifty (150) hours. Program shall include but not be limited to all fluid changes, filter changes, inspections, belts, hoses, trip charges, materials, labor, disposal fee, etc....for a complete and all-inclusive maintenance program. For service intervals where the manufacturer indicates to replace oil and oil filters, contractor shall provide a complete oil and filter change. Simple testing of the oil (and replacement determined by the testing) is not acceptable. Similarly, this applies to all manufacturer recommended fluid changes.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL

A. The standby generator set shall be rated standby power (defined as continuous operation

for the duration of any power outage) 277/480 volts, 3 phase, 4 wire, .8 power factor, (Power ratings as indicated on plans) at 5000 feet altitude, 104 degrees Fahrenheit. Vibration isolators shall be provided between the engine-generator and welded steel base or between the base and the floor.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

1. Cummins 2. Caterpillar 3. Kohler 4. Approved Equivalent

2.3 FINAL PRODUCTION TESTS

A. Each generator set shall be tested under varying loads with guards and exhaust system in place. Tests shall include:

1. Single-step load pickup. 2. Transient and steady-state governing. 3. Safety shutdown device testing. 4. Voltage regulation. 5. Rated Power. 6. Maximum Power. 7. As part of this project, generator manufacturer shall provide factory witness

testing of the generator unit. Witness testing shall be provided for two (2) owner’s representatives, one (1) electrical contractor representative, and two (2) design team members. Generator manufacturer shall be responsible for all travel costs including but not limited to air fare, hotel, meals and ground transportation costs.

16621 - 3

2.4 ENGINE

A. The engine shall be equipped with the following:

1. Engine: Engine shall be stationary, liquid cooled, with a fuel system that is compatible with #2 ULSD diesel fuel. Design shall be four cycle, turbo charged and after-cooled. Engine equipment shall include, but not be limited to the following: a. 50 gallon day tank with auxiliary fuel pumps solenoid fuel shut off valve,

fuel filter, battery, batteries charger and flexible fuel connection. 2. Engine protection devices shall have sensing elements located on the engine to

initiate the following preliminary alarms and shutdowns: a. Low coolant temperature alarm. b. Low lube oil pressure alarm. c. High coolant temperature alarm. d. Low lube oil pressure shutdown. e. High coolant temperature shutdown. f. Overspeed shutdown. g. Overcrank lockout and shutdown.

3. Electronic governing system to control generator system frequency, speed regulation of +/- .25% minimum from no load to full load with automatic overspeed shutdown.

4. Provide low coolant level shutdown which shall activate high coolant temperature lamp.

5. Engine starting batteries - Optima Red Label or equivalent AGM type. 6. Static duel rate 10 ampere automatic battery charger. 7. Engine mounted thermostatically controlled jacket water heater to maintain jacket

water temperature of 90 degrees F. minimum. 8. Positive displacement, mechanical full pressure lube oil pump, full flow lube oil

filter with replaceable element, pressure relief valve, and oil drain valve with hose extension.

9. An engine mounted radiator sized for operation in a 122 degree F. ambient temperature shall be provided. Also include a 50/50 mix of ethylene glycol. Where radiator is remote type, provide and install NEMA 3R variable frequency drive unit on leg of radiator. VFD shall be complete with integral fusible disconnect switch.

10. A critical grade exhaust silencer shall be provided along with a stainless steel flexible exhaust connection as recommended by generator set manufacturer.

11. Heavy duty, dual element air cleaner 12. Water separator 13. Duplex fuel filter 14. Deep sump oil pan 15. Duplex oil filter 16. Heavy duty starting motor 17. All required fluids and lubricants for proper operation of system.

2.5 GENERATOR

A. The alternator shall be salient-pole, 2/3 pitch, 4 busbar, self-ventilated of drip-proof construction with amortiser rotor windings and skewed for smooth voltage waveform The insulation material shall meet the NEMA standard (MGI-22.40 and 16.40) for Class H and be vacuum impregnated with epoxy varnish non-hygroscopic varnish with a final dip of epoxy. The excitation system shall be of brushless construction controlled by a solid-state voltage regulator with adjustable Volts-per-Hertz operation capable of maintaining voltage within + or - 0.5% at any constant load from 0 to 100% of rating. the regulator must be sealed from the environment and isolated from the load to prevent tracking when

16621 - 4

connected to SCR loads. Generator shall be rated for 130C temperature rise on 40 ̊C ambient. Provide and install 120/240V anti-condensation heater.

B. On application of any load up to the rated load, the instantaneous voltage dip shall not exceed 20% and shall recover to = or - 0.5% of rated voltage within one second.

C. The generator shall be capable of sustaining at least 250% of rated current for at least

10 seconds under a 3 phase symmetrical short by inherent design or by the addition of an optional current boost system.

D. The generator shall be capable of accepting the loads that were specified with the stated

rated load being the largest running loads and 10% being the largest instantaneous voltage dip when loads are started as specified on the loads report.

E. A resettable line current sensing circuit breaker with inverse time versus current response

shall be furnished and shall not automatically reset preventing restoration of voltage if maintenance is being performed. This breaker shall protect the generator from damage due to its own high current capability and shall not trip within the 10 seconds specified above to allow selective tripping of down-stream fuses or circuit breakers under a fault condition.

F. The generator, having a single maintenance free bearing, shall be directly connected to

the flywheel housing with a semi-flexible coupling between the rotor and the flywheel.

2.6 CONTROLLER

A. Set-mounted controller capable of facing right, left, or rear shall be vibration isolated on the generator enclosure. The microprocessor control board shall be moisture proof and capable of operation from -40c to 85c. Relays will only be acceptable in high current circuits.

B. Circuitry shall be of plug-in design for quick replacement. Controller shall be equipped to

accept a plug-in device capable of allowing maintenance personnel to test controller performance without operating the engine. The controller shall include:

1. Fused DC circuits. 2. Complete two-wire start/stop control which shall operate on closure of a remote

contact. 3. Speed sensing and a second independent starter motor disengagement systems

shall protect against the starter engaging with a moving flywheel. Battery charging alternator voltage will not be acceptable for this purpose.

4. The starting system shall be designed for restarting in the event of a false engine start, by permitting the engine to completely stop and then re-engage the starter.

5. Cranking cycler with 15-second ON and OFF cranking periods. 6. Overcrank protection designed to open the cranking circuit after 75 seconds if the

engine fails to start. 7. Circuitry to shut down the engine when signal for high coolant temperature, low

oil pressure, or overspeed are received. 8. Adjustable engine cool down timer factory set at five minutes to permit unloaded

running of the standby set after transfer of the load to normal. 9. Three-position (Automatic - OFF - TEST) selector switch. In the test position, the

engine shall start and run regardless of the position of the remote starting contacts. In the automatic position, the engine shall start when contacts in the remote control circuit close and stop five minutes after those contacts open. In the off position, the engine shall not start even though the remote start contacts close. This position shall also provide for immediate shutdown in case of an

16621 - 5

emergency. Reset of any fault lamp shall also be accomplished by putting the switch to the off position.

10. Indicating lights to signal: a. (Not-in-auto (flashing red) ) b. (Overcrank (red) ) c. (Emergency stop (red) ) d. (High engine temperature/low coolant level (red) ) e. (Overspeed (red) ) f. (Air damper (red) ) g. (Battery charger malfunction (red) ) h. (Low battery voltage (red) ) i. (Low fuel (red) ) j. (System ready (green) ) k. (Pre-alarm high engine temp. (yellow) ) l. (Pre-alarm low oil pressure (yellow) )

11. Test button for indicating lights. 12. Alarm horn with silencer switch per NFPA-110. 13. Terminals shall be provided for each signal in 10 above for connection to remote

monitoring devices. 14. Remote annunciator indicating conditions listed in Item 10 above shall be

installed where shown on the plans.

2.7 INSTRUMENT PANEL

A. A set mounted instrument panel shall include:

1. Dual range voltmeter, 3 ½ inch, = or - 2% accuracy. 2. Dual range ammeter, 3 1/2/inch, = or - 2% accuracy. 3. Voltmeter-ammeter phase selector switch. 4. Lights to indicate high or low meter scale. 5. Direct reading pointer-type frequency meter, 3 ½ inch, + or - 5% accuracy, 45 to

65 Hz scale. 6. Panel illuminating lights. 7. Battery charging meter. 8. Coolant temperature gauge (liquid cooled models). 9. Oil pressure gauge. 10. Running time meter. 11. Voltage adjust rheostat (+ or - 5% range).

2.8 ACCESSORIES

A. The following accessories shall be provided:

1. Overvoltage protection will shut down the unit after one second of 15% or more overvoltage

2. Battery rack, battery cables, 12-volt battery(ies) capable of delivering the minimum cold-cranking amps required at zero degrees Fahrenheit per SAE Standard J-537.

3. Gasproof, seamless, stainless steel, flexible exhaust connector(s) ending in pipe thread.

4. Flexible fuel line(s) rated 300 degrees F and 100 PSI ending in pipe thread. 5. Engine exhaust silencer, coated to be temperature and rust resistant, rated for

critical applications. Exhaust noise shall be limited to 85 dba as measured at 10 feet in a free-field environment.

16621 - 6

6. Block heater thermostatically controlled to maintain engine coolant at 90 degrees Fahrenheit (32 degrees Celsius) to meet the start-up requirement of NFPA-99 or NFPA-110 Regulations.

7. 10-Ampere automatic float and equalize battery charger with + - 1% constant voltage regulation from no load to full load over + - 10% AC input line variation, current limited during engine cranking and short circuit conditions, temperature compensated for ambient temperatures from -40 degrees C to + 60 degrees C, 5% accurate voltmeter and ammeter, fused, reverse polarity and transient protected. Provide alarm circuit board to meet the requirements of NFPA-110 for low battery voltage, high battery voltage, and battery charger malfunction.

8. 16-light remote annunciator shall monitor all controller functions described in Article 10 of the controller section plus line power and generator power monitoring. An integral lamp test and horn silence switch shall be included that meets NFPA-110.

9. Main-line circuit breaker 480 V., 3 pole with parallel output lugs. 10. Spring-type, heavy duty, vibration isolators shall be provided between

engines/generator and frame and between frame and concrete pads.

2.9 OUTDOOR GENERATOR SET ENCLOSURE

A. Description: Weatherproof aluminum housing. Multiple panels are lockable and provide adequate access to components requiring maintenance. Panels are removable by one person without tools.

B. Fixed Louvers: At air inlet and discharge. Louvers prevent entry of rain and snow.

C. Fixed Dampers: At air inlet and discharge

D. Air Flow Through Housing: Adequate to maintain temperature rise of system

components within required limits when unit operates at 110 percent of rated load for 2 hours with ambient temperature at the top of the range specified under "System Service Conditions."

E. Rated for windload of 150 mph sustained winds with 15mph gust factor.

F. When generator unit is installed on a sub-base fuel tank provide and install a 4’ wide

welded aluminum work platform on all four (4) sides of unit complete with ADA compliant hand-rails and fixed stairs. Provide 18" diameter 4' deep, 3500 psi concrete footings for all support legs of platform.

G. Provide and install two (2) Lithonia No, VAP-6000LM-PCL-WD-MVOLT-35k-80CRI-STSL

fixtures (one on each long side of generator). Provide and install one (1) 120V weatherproof. GFCI receptacle adjacent to generator control panel.

H. Enclosure shall be of the sound attenuating type. Enclosure shall limit total unit noise at 7 meters to a maximum sound pressure level of 74 db and a maximum 8-position average of 71.2 db.

2.10 FINISHES

A. Outdoor Enclosures: Custom color (color shall be selected by Architect during shop drawing submittals) Field applied final finish over corrosion-resistant pretreatment and manufacturer's standard primer.

16621 - 7

2.11 SUB-BASE FUEL TANK

A. Unit shall be complete with factory, double-wall, containment sub-base fuel tank.

B. UL 2085 listed.

C. Emergency tank and rupture basin vents.

D. Tank mounted mechanical fuel gauge.

E. Low and high level fuel switches (interface with generator set annunciator).

F. Basin drain.

G. Integral 5-gallon spill basin.

H. Sized for a continuous run-time of forty-eight (48) consecutive run-hours at 100% of unit’s rated maximum load.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

A. The equipment shall be installed as shown on the plans, in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation and all applicable codes.

3.2 SITE TEST

A. An installation check, start-up and building load test shall be performed by the manufacturer's local representative. The engineer, regular operators, and the maintenance staff shall be notified a minimum of one (1) calendar week prior to test of the time and date of the site test. The tests shall include: 1. Fuel, lubricating oil, and antifreeze (liquid cooled models) shall be checked for

conformity to the manufacturer's recommendations under the environmental conditions present and expected.

2. Accessories that normally function while the set is standing by shall be checked prior to cranking the engine. This shall include: engine heaters, battery charger, generator strip heaters, remote annunciator, etc.

3. Start-up under test mode to check for exhaust leaks, path of exhaust gases outside the building, cooling air flow, movement during starting and stopping, vibration during running, normal and emergency line-to-line voltage and phase rotation.

4. Automatic start-up by means of simulated power outage to test remote-automatic starting, transfer of the load, and automatic shutdown. Prior to this test, all transfer switch timers shall be adjusted for proper systems coordination. Engine temperature, oil pressure and battery charge level along with generator voltage, amperes, and frequency shall be monitored throughout the test.

5. Load Bank test at 25% power for ½ hour, 50% power for ½ hour, 75% power for 1 hour and at full power for two (2) hours. Contractor shall be responsible for all costs to refill fuel tank to maximum capacity three (3) times complete.

6. During load bank test, record the following parameters in fifteen minute intervals. Submit results prior to requesting substantial completion for project. a. Voltage L-L b. Voltage L-N c. Current/Phase d. Oil Pressure e. Coolant Temperature

16621 - 8

f. Generator mounted volt meter readings (all settings) g. Generator mounted amp meter readings (all settings) h. Hour meter readings

3.3 TRAINING

A. Provide six (6) hours of factory authorized training. These six (6) hours shall be divided in to two (2) three hour training sessions.

B. Field training shall cover all the items contained in the Operation and Maintenance

Manuals.

C. As part of project close-out documents, submit original sign-in sheets of both training sessions.


16722 - 1

SECTION 16722 - INTELLIGENT COMMUNICATING FIRE DETECTION SYSTEM (FIRE WARDEN 100)

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION:

A. This section of the specification includes the furnishing, installation, connection and testing of the microprocessor controlled, intelligent reporting fire alarm equipment required to form a complete, operative, coordinated system. It shall include, but not be limited to, alarm initiating devices, alarm notification appliances, Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP), auxiliary control devices, annunciators, and wiring as shown on the drawings and specified herein.

B. The fire alarm system shall comply with requirements of NFPA Standard No. 72 for Local

Protected Premises Signaling Systems except as modified and supplemented by this specification. The system field wiring shall be supervised either electrically or by software-directed polling of field devices.

1. The Secondary Power Source of the fire alarm control panel will be capable of

providing at least 24 hours of backup power with the ability to sustain 5 minutes in alarm at the end of the backup period.

C. The fire alarm system shall comply with requirements of NFPA Standard No. 72 for

Auxiliary Protected Premises Signaling Systems except as modified and supplemented by this specification. The system field wiring shall be supervised either electrically or by software-directed polling of field devices.



2. The Secondary Power Source installed in a system backed up by a generator need to supply 4 hours of backup power.

D. The fire alarm system shall comply with requirements of NFPA Standard No. 72 for Local

Protected Premises Signaling Systems except as modified and supplemented by this specification. The system field wiring shall be supervised either electrically or by software-directed polling of field devices.



E. The fire alarm system shall comply with requirements of NFPA Standard No. 72 for

Remote Station Protected Premises Signaling Systems except as modified and supplemented by this specification. The system field wiring shall be supervised either electrically or by software-directed polling of field devices.



2. The Secondary Power Source installed in a system backed up by a generator need to supply 4 hours of backup power.

F. The fire alarm system shall comply with requirements of NFPA Standard No. 72 for Local

Protected Premises Signaling Systems except as modified and supplemented by this

HP Z230

Typewritten Text


16722 - 2

specification. The system field wiring shall be supervised either electrically or by software-directed polling of field devices.



G. The fire alarm system shall be manufactured by an ISO 9001 certified company and meet

the requirements of BS EN9001: ANSI/ASQC Q9001-1994.

H. The FACP and peripheral devices shall be manufactured 100% by a single U.S. manufacturer (or division thereof).

I. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) - USA:

1. No. 38 Manually Actuated Signaling Boxes 2. No. 50 Cabinets and Boxes 3. No. 864 Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems 4. No. 268 Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems 5. No. 268A Smoke Detectors for Duct Applications 6. No. 346 Waterflow Indicators for Fire Protective Signaling Systems 7. No. 464 Audible Signaling Appliances 8. No. 521 Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems 9. No. 1971 Visual Notification Appliances

J. The installing company shall employ NICET (minimum Level III Fire Alarm Technology)

technicians on site to guide the final check-out and to ensure the systems integrity. 1.2 SCOPE

A. An intelligent, microprocessor-controlled, fire alarm detection system shall be installed in accordance to the project specifications and drawings.

B. Basic Performance:

1. Alarm, trouble and supervisory signals from all intelligent reporting devices shall

be encoded on NFPA Style 4 (Class B), NFPA Style 6 (Class A) or NFPA 7 (Class A) Signaling Line Circuits (SLC).

2. Initiation Device Circuits (IDC) shall be wired Class B (NFPA Style B) or Class A (NFPA Style D) as part of an addressable device connected by the SLC Circuit.

3. Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC) shall be wired Class B (NFPA Style Y) or Class A (NFPA Style Z) as part of an addressable device connected by the SLC Circuit.

4. All circuits shall be power-limited, UL864 9th edition requirements. 5. A single ground fault or open circuit on the system Signaling Line Circuit shall not

cause system malfunction, loss of operating power or the ability to report an alarm when wired NFPA Style 6/7.

6. Alarm signals arriving at the main FACP shall not be lost following a primary power failure or outage of any kind until the alarm signal is processed and recorded.

1.3 BASIC SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL OPERATION

A. When a fire alarm condition is detected and reported by one of the system initiating devices, the following functions shall immediately occur:

16722 - 3

1. The system Alarm LED on the FACP shall flash. 2. A local sounder with the control panel shall sound. 3. A backlit 80-character LCD display on the FACP shall indicate all information

associated with the fire alarm condition, including the type of alarm point and its location within the protected premises.

4. In response to a fire alarm condition, the system will process all control programming and activate all system outputs (alarm notification appliances and/or relays) associated with the point(s) in alarm.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. General:

1. Eight identical copies of all submittals shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer for review.

2. All references to manufacturer's model numbers and other pertinent information herein is intended to establish minimum standards of performance, function and quality. Equivalent compatible UL-listed equipment from other manufacturers may be substituted for the specified equipment as long as the minimum standards are met.

3. For equipment other than that specified, the contractor shall supply proof that such substitute equipment equals or exceeds the features, functions, performance, and quality of the specified equipment.. This submission shall occur a minimum of ten working days prior to bid and shall comply with all requirements for prior approval as specified in Section 16001 - Electrical General Provisions. Equivalent equipment (compatible UL Listed) from other manufacturers may be substituted for the specified equipment as long as the minimum standards are met.

B. Prior Approvals:

1. All submissions for prior approvals shall include the following information as a

minimum. a. Standard Manufacturer’s cut sheets on every piece of equipment to be

provided as part of this project. Cut sheets shall indicate performance, physical sizes, construction materials, expand ability, etc.

b. Listing of all differences (deficiencies and betterment) between the proposed system and the specified system.

c. Any other supporting information required to demonstrate equivalency to system specified.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Contractor shall be responsible for submitting printed copies through the

Architect/Engineer for review and obtaining approval from the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) for installation of the Fire Alarm System. Submittal to the State Fire Marshal shall occur after Contractor has obtained a "No Exceptions Taken", or "Make Corrections Noted" comment on Fire Detection And Alarm System Shop Drawings from the Architect/Engineer. No payment will be made to the contractor for any fire alarm system work until submittal is forwarded to the AHJ for approval. All submittals to the Architect/Engineer shall include the following as a minimum: a. System Riser Diagram - include all devices and components of the

system by zone, group or individual device. Each device shall be labeled indicating location in the facility.

16722 - 4

b. System Wiring Diagram - Include diagrams for equipment and for system with all terminals and interconnections identified. Make all diagrams specific to this project and distinguish between field and factory wiring.

c. System Component Data Sheets - Indicating current draw-in alarm mode and in standby mode. Also submit component data sheets to indicate UL compatibility with system and compatibility with rest of system. Indicate all applicable data by highlighting on ALL submittal booklets.

d. Zone Designations, group(s) or individual device(s). e. Battery Load Calculations for sizing battery for sixty (60) hours of

continuous system operation in standby mode followed by five (5) minutes of continuous full evacuation alarm condition(fifteen (15) minutes of continuous full evacuation alarm if a voice evacuation alarm system is present in the system.) Calculations shall be on equipment manufacturer's standard form and shall clearly indicate capacity of batteries proposed to be installed.

f. Master list of system components by model number, description and quantity of each.

g. Shop Drawings showing details of graphic annunciator h. Device Address List i. Annunciator Lay-out, configurations. j. Review Application - Contractor's portion completed k. Review Application Fee - If Required l. Blueline or xerox copies of plans complying with the following criteria:

1) Drawn to scale 2) Identify each room or area 3) Show all system components, identifying each 4) Show all exits, door swings, ceiling height, light fixtures, exit

lights (with direction arrows), HVAC openings in ceilings, whether ceilings are sloped or flat, and show all projections 0’-4” below ceilings

5) Shall not have Architect’s/Engineer’s titlebox and/or professional stamp

6) No markings showing additions, deletions or revisions after copies are made

7) Highlight in yellow or blue all system components 8) Proposed conductor routings 9) Includes north arrow 10) Graphic scale

m. Statement on type of system - must be one of the following: 1) Local 2) Auxiliary 3) Remote Station 4) Proprietary

n. Description of this project’s specific Sequence of Operation. o. Description of wiring. p. Designation of type q. Color of insulation

2. Manufacturer's certificate certifying supplier is an authorized factory representative along with mileage distance of office to job site.

3. Certificate showing that supplier/installer is licensed by the State Fire Marshal's Office to install, modify and maintain fire detection and alarm system.

D. Be aware that State Fire Marshal requirements do not allow work to occur on any portion of the fire alarm system prior to receipt of their approval on shop drawings.

16722 - 5

E. Manuals:

1. Submit simultaneously with the shop drawings, complete operating and maintenance manuals listing the manufacturer's name(s), including technical data sheets.

2. Wiring diagrams shall indicate internal wiring for each device and the interconnections between the items of equipment.

3. Provide a clear and concise description of operation that gives, in detail, the information required to properly operate the equipment and system.

F. Software Modifications

1. Provide the services of a qualified technician to perform all system software

modifications, upgrades or changes. Response time of the technician to the site shall not exceed 4 hours.

2. Provide all hardware, software, programming tools and documentation necessary to modify the fire alarm system on site. Modification includes addition and deletion of devices, circuits, zones and changes to system operation and custom label changes for devices or zones. The system structure and software shall place no limit on the type or extent of software modifications on-site. Modification of software shall not require power-down of the system or loss of system fire protection while modifications are being made.

G. Certifications:

1. Together with the shop drawing submittal, submit a certification from the major

equipment manufacturer indicating that the proposed supervisor of the installation and the proposed performer of contract maintenance is an authorized representative of the major equipment manufacturer. Include names and addresses in the certification.

1.5 GUARANTY:

A. All work performed and all material and equipment furnished under this contract shall be free from defects and shall remain so for a period of at least one (1) year from the date of acceptance. The full cost of maintenance, labor and materials required to correct any defect during this one year period shall be included in the submittal bid.

1.6 APPLICABLE STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS:

A. The specifications and standards listed below form a part of this specification. The system shall fully comply with the latest issue of these standards, if applicable.

B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) - USA:

1. No. 13 Sprinkler Systems 2. No. 70 National Electric Code (NEC) 3. No. 72 National Fire Alarm Code 4. No. 101 Life Safety Code

C. The system and its components shall be Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. listed under the

appropriate UL testing standard as listed herein for fire alarm applications and the installation shall be in compliance with the UL listing.

D. Local and State Building Codes.

16722 - 6

E. All requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). 1.7 APPROVALS:

A. The system shall have proper listing and/or approval from the following nationally recognized agencies:

1. UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc 2. ULC Underwriters Laboratories Canada 3. FM Factory Mutual 4. MEA Material Equipment Acceptance (NYC) 5. CSFM California State Fire Marshal

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL, GENERAL:

A. All equipment and components shall be new, and the manufacturer's current model. The materials, appliances, equipment and devices shall be tested and listed by a nationally recognized approvals agency for use as part of a fire protective signaling system, meeting the National Fire Alarm Code.

B. All equipment and components shall be installed in strict compliance with manufacturers'

recommendations. Consult the manufacturer's installation manuals for all wiring diagrams, schematics, physical equipment sizes, etc., before beginning system installation.

C. All equipment shall be attached to walls and ceiling/floor assemblies and shall be held

firmly in place (e.g., detectors shall not be supported solely by suspended ceilings). Fasteners and supports shall be adequate to support the required load.

2.2 CONDUIT AND WIRE:

A. Conduit:

1. Conduit shall be in accordance with The National Electrical Code (NEC), local and state requirements.

2. All wiring shall be installed in red conduit. Conduit fill shall not exceed 40 percent of interior cross sectional area where three or more cables are contained within a single conduit.

3. Cable must be separated from any open conductors of power, or Class 1 circuits, and shall not be placed in any conduit, junction box or raceway containing these conductors, per NEC Article 760-55.

4. Wiring for 24-volt DC control, alarm notification, emergency communication and similar power-limited auxiliary functions may be run in the same conduit as initiating and signaling line circuits. All circuits shall be provided with transient suppression devices and the system shall be designed to permit simultaneous operation of all circuits without interference or loss of signals.

5. Conduit shall not enter the fire alarm control panel, or any other remotely mounted control panel equipment or backboxes, except where conduit entry is specified by the FACP manufacturer.

6. Conduit shall be 3/4-inch (19.1 mm) minimum.

B. Wire:

1. All fire alarm system wiring shall be new.

16722 - 7

2. Wiring shall be in accordance with local, state and national codes (e.g., NEC Article 760) and as recommended by the manufacturer of the fire alarm system. Number and size of conductors shall be as recommended by the fire alarm system manufacturer, but not less than 18 AWG (1.02 mm) for Initiating Device Circuits and Signaling Line Circuits, and 14 AWG (1.63 mm) for Notification Appliance Circuits.

3. All wire and cable shall be listed and/or approved by a recognized testing agency for use with a protective signaling system.

4. Wiring used for the multiplex communication circuit (SLC) shall be twisted and support a minimum wiring distance of 10,000 feet when sized at 12 AWG. The design of the system shall permit use of IDC and NAC wiring in the same conduit with the SLC communication circuit. Shielded wire shall not be required.

5. All field wiring shall be electrically supervised for open circuit and ground fault. 6. The fire alarm control panel shall be capable of T-tapping Class B (NFPA Style 4)

Signaling Line Circuits (SLCs). Systems which do not allow or have restrictions in, for example, the amount of T-taps, length of T-taps etc., is not acceptable.

C. Terminal Boxes, Junction Boxes and Cabinets:

1. All boxes and cabinets shall be UL listed for their use and purpose.

D. The fire alarm control panel shall be connected to a separate dedicated branch circuit,

maximum 20 amperes. This circuit shall be labeled at the main power distribution panel as FIRE ALARM. Fire alarm control panel primary power wiring shall be 12 AWG. The control panel cabinet shall be grounded securely to either a cold water pipe or grounding rod. The control panel enclosure shall feature a quick removal chassis to facilitate rapid replacement of the FACP electronics.

1. The FACP shall be capable of coding Notification Appliance Circuits in March

Time Code (120 PPM), Temporal (NFPA 72 ), and California Code. Main panel notification circuits (NACs 1 & 2) shall also automatically synchronize any of the following manufacturer's notification appliances connected to them: System Sensor, Wheelock, or Gentex with no need for additional synchronization modules.

2.3 MAIN FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL:

A. The FACP shall be a NOTIFIER NFW2-100 (FireWarden-100-2) and shall contain a microprocessor-based Central Processing Unit (CPU). The CPU shall communicate with and control the following types of equipment used to make up the system: intelligent addressable smoke and thermal (heat) detectors, addressable modules, annunciators, and other system controlled devices.

B. Operator Control

1. Acknowledge Switch:

a. Activation of the control panel Acknowledge switch in response to new alarms and/or troubles shall silence the local panel piezo electric signal and change the alarm and trouble LEDs from flashing mode to steady-ON mode. If multiple alarm or trouble conditions exist, depression of this switch shall advance the 80-character LCD display to the next alarm or trouble condition.

b. Depression of the Acknowledge switch shall also silence all remote annunciator piezo sounders.

16722 - 8

2. Alarm Silence Switch: a. Activation of the alarm silence switch shall cause all programmed alarm

notification appliances and relays to return to the normal condition after an alarm condition. The selection of notification circuits and relays that are silenceable by this switch shall be fully field programmable within the confines of all applicable standards. The FACP software shall include silence inhibit and auto-silence timers.

3. Alarm Activate (Drill) Switch: a. The Alarm Activate switch shall activate all notification appliance circuits.

The drill function shall latch until the panel is silenced or reset. 4. System Reset Switch:

a. Activation of the System Reset switch shall cause all electronically-latched initiating devices, appliances or software zones, as well as all associated output devices and circuits, to return to their normal condition.

5. Lamp Test: a. The Lamp Test switch shall activate all system LEDs and light each

segment of the liquid crystal display.

C. System Capacity and General Operation

1. The control panel shall provide, or be capable of, expansion to 198 intelligent/addressable devices.

2. The control panel shall include Form-C Alarm, Trouble and Supervisory relays rated at a minimum of 2.0 amps @ 30 VDC. It shall also include programmable Notification Appliance Circuits (NACs) capable of being wired as Class B (NFPA Style Y) or Class A (NFPA Style Z).

3. The fire alarm control panel shall include an operator interface control and annunciation panel that shall include a backlit Liquid Crystal Display (LCD), individual color-coded system status LEDs, and an alphanumeric keypad for the field programming and control of the fire alarm system.

4. All programming or editing of the existing program in the system shall be achieved without special equipment and without interrupting the alarm monitoring functions of the fire alarm control panel. The system shall be fully programmable, configurable, and expandable in the field without the need for special tools, PROM programmers or PC based programmers. It shall not require replacement of memory ICs to facilitate programming changes. The control unit will support the ability to upgrade its operating program using FLASH memory technology. The unit shall provide the user with the ability to program from either the included keypad, a standard PS2-style PC keyboard or from a computer running upload/download software.

5. The system shall allow the programming of any input to activate any output or group of outputs. Systems which have limited programming (such as general alarm), have complicated programming (such as a diode matrix), or REQUIRE a laptop personal computer are not considered suitable substitutes.

6. The FACP shall provide the following features: a. Drift compensation to extend detector accuracy during the accumulation

of dust and foreign material. b. Detector sensitivity test, meeting requirements of NFPA 72, Maintenance

alert, with two levels (maintenance alert/maintenance urgent), to warn of excessive smoke detector dirt or dust accumulation.

c. The ability to display or print system reports. d. Alarm verification. e. Positive Alarm Sequence (PAS pre-signal), meeting NFPA 72 (2002

Edition) 6.8.1.3 requirements. f. Rapid manual station reporting. g. Non-alarm points for general (non-fire) control.

16722 - 9

h. Periodic detector test, conducted automatically by the software. i. Walk test, with a check for two detectors set to same address.

7. The FACP shall be capable of coding Notification Appliance Circuits in March Time Code (120 PPM), Temporal (NFPA 72 A-2-2.2.2), and California Code. Main panel notification circuits (NACs 1 & 2) shall also automatically synchronize the following manufacturer's notification appliances connected to them: System Sensor, Wheelock, or Gentex with no need for additional synchronization modules.

D. Central Microprocessor

1. The microprocessor shall be a state-of-the-art, high speed, 16-bit RISC device

and it shall communicate with, monitor and control all external interfaces. It shall include an EPROM for system program storage, non-volatile memory for building-specific program storage, and a "watch dog" timer circuit to detect and report microprocessor failure.

2. The microprocessor shall contain and execute all specific actions to be taken in the condition of an alarm. Control programming shall be held in non-volatile programmable memory, and shall not be lost even if system primary and secondary power failure occurs.

3. The microprocessor shall also provide a real-time clock for time annotation of system displays, printer, and history file.

4. A special program check function shall be provided to detect common operator errors.

5. An auto-programming capability (self-learn) shall be provided to quickly identify devices connected on the SLC and make the system operational.

6. For flexibility and to ensure program validity, an optional Windows(TM) based program utility shall be available. This program shall be used to off-line program the system with batch upload/download. This program shall also have a verification utility which scans the program files, identifying possible errors. It shall also have the ability to compare old program files to new ones, identifying differences in the two files to allow complete testing of any system operating changes. This shall be in incompliance with the NFPA 72 requirements for testing after system modification.

E. Local Keyboard Interface

1. In addition to an integral keypad, the fire alarm control panel will accept a

standard PS2-style keyboard for programming, testing, and control of the system. The keyboard will be able to execute the system functions ACKNOWLEDGE, SIGNALS SILENCED, DRILL and RESET.

F. Display

1. The display shall provide all the controls and indicators used by the system

operator and may also be used to program all system operational parameters. 2. The display shall include status information and custom alphanumeric labels for

all intelligent detectors, addressable modules, internal panel circuits, and software zones.

3. The display shall contain an alphanumeric, text-type display and dedicated LEDs for the annunciation of AC POWER, FIRE ALARM, SUPERVISORY, TROUBLE, MAINTENANCE, ALARM SILENCED, DISABLED, BATTERY, and GROUND conditions.

4. The display keypad shall be part of the standard system and have the capability to command all system functions, entry of any alphabetic or numeric information,

16722 - 10

and field programming. Two different password levels shall be provided to prevent unauthorized system control or programming.

5. The display shall include the following operator control switches: ACKNOWLEDGE, ALARM SILENCE, DRILL (alarm activate), and SYSTEM RESET.

G. Signaling Line Circuit (SLC)

1. The SLC interface shall provide power to and communicate with up to 99

intelligent detectors (ionization, photoelectric or thermal) and 99 intelligent modules (monitor or control) for a system capacity of 198 devices. Each SLC shall be capable of NFPA 72 Style 4, Style 6, or Style 7 (Class A or B) wiring.

2. The CPU shall receive information from all intelligent detectors to be processed to determine whether normal, alarm, or trouble conditions exist for each detector. The software shall automatically compensate for the accumulation of dust in each detector up to allowable limits. The information shall also be used for automatic detector testing and for the determination of detector maintenance conditions.

3. The detector software shall meet NFPA 72, Chapter 7 requirements and be certified by UL as a calibrated sensitivity test instrument.

H. Serial Interfaces

1. The system shall provide a means of interfacing to UL Listed Electronic Data

Processing (EDP) peripherals using the EIA-232 communications standard. 2. One EIA-232 interface shall be used to connect an UL-Listed 80-column printer.

The printer shall communicate with the control panel using an interface complying with Electrical Industries Association standard EIA-232D. Power to the printer shall be 120 VAC @ 60 Hz.

I. The control panel will have the capability of Reverse Polarity Transmission or connection

to a Municipal Box for compliance with applicable NFPA standards.

J. Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter (DACT). The DACT is an interface for communicating digital information between a fire alarm control panel and a UL-Listed central station.

1. The DACT shall be an integral component of the fire alarm control panel

requiring no interconnecting wiring, plug-in module or supervisory circuitry. 2. The DACT shall include connections for dual telephone lines (with voltage

detect), per UL/NFPA/FCC requirements. It shall include the ability for split reporting of panel events up to two different telephone numbers.

3. The DACT shall be completely field programmable locally from the control panel keypad or via PC software connected to the panel serial port. The DACT shall support upload/download of programming parameters from a remote location over a phone line using upload/download PC software.

4. The DACT shall be capable of transmitting events in at least 15 different formats. This ensures compatibility with existing and future transmission formats.

5. Communication shall include vital system status such as: a. Independent Zone (Alarm, trouble, non-alarm, supervisory) b. Independent Addressable Device Status c. AC (Mains) Power Loss d. Low Battery and Earth Fault e. System Off Normal f. 12 and 24-Hour Test Signal g. Abnormal Test Signal (per UL requirements)

16722 - 11

h. EIA-485 Communications Failure i. Phone Line Failure

6. The DACT shall support independent zone/point reporting when used in the Contact ID format. In this format, the DACT shall support the transmission of up addressable points with the system. This format shall enable the central station to have exact details concerning the location of the fire for emergency response.

K. Enclosures:

1. The control panel shall be housed in a UL-listed cabinet suitable for surface or

semi-flush mounting. The cabinet and front shall be corrosion protected, given a rust-resistant prime coat, and manufacturer's standard finish.

2. The back box and door shall be constructed of steel with provisions for electrical conduit connections into the sides and top.

3. The door shall provide a key lock and shall provide for the viewing of all indicators.

4. The cabinet shall accept a chassis containing the PCB and to assist in quick replacement of all the electronics including power supply shall require no more than two bolts to secure the panel to the enclosure back box.

L. Field Charging Power Supply: The FCPS is a device designed for use as either a remote

24-volt power supply or as a booster for powering Notification Appliances.

1. The FCPS shall offer up to 8.0 amps (6.0 amps continuous) of regulated 24-volt power. It shall include an integral charger designed to charge 18.0 amp hour batteries.

2. The Field Charging Power Supply shall have two input triggers. The input trigger shall be a Notification Appliance Circuit (from the fire alarm control panel) or a control relay. Four NAC outputs, wired NFPA Style Y or Z, shall be available for connection to the Notification devices.

3. The FCPS shall optionally provide synchronization of all connected strobes or horn strobe combinations when System Sensor, Wheelock, or Gentex devices are installed.

4. The FCPS shall function as a sync follower as well as a sync generator. 5. The FCPS shall include a surface mount backbox. 6. The Field Charging Power Supply shall include the ability to delay the reporting

of an AC fail condition per NFPA requirements. 7. The FCPS shall provide 24 VDC regulated and power-limited circuitry per 1995

UL standards.

M. Power Supply:

1. The main power supply for the fire alarm control panel shall provide up to 6.0 amps of available power for the control panel and peripheral devices.

2. Provisions will be made to allow the audio-visual power to be increased as required by adding modular expansion audio-visual power supplies.

3. Positive-Temperature-Coefficient (PTC) thermistors, circuit breakers, or other over-current protection shall be provided on all power outputs. The power supply shall provide an integral battery charger or may be used with an external battery and charger systems. Battery arrangement may be configured in the field.

4. The main power supply shall continuously monitor all field wires for earth ground conditions.

5. The main power supply shall operate on 120 VAC, 60 Hz, and shall provide all necessary power for the FACP.

16722 - 12

N. Programmable Electronic Sounders:

1. Electronic sounders shall operate on 24 VDC nominal. 2. Electronic sounders shall be field programmable without the use of special tools,

to provide slow whoop, continuous, or interrupted tones with an output sound level of at least 90 dBA measured at 10 feet from the device.

3. Shall be flush or surface mounted as show on plans. 4. Where shown to be installed outside, device shall be of the weatherproof design. 5. Where installed surface mounted, provide factory backbox and/or backbox skirt

so that edge of device does not overhang installation box.

O. Strobe lights shall meet the requirements of the ADA, UL Standard 1971 and shall meet the following criteria:

1. The maximum pulse duration shall be 2/10 of one second. 2. Strobe intensity shall meet the requirements of UL 1971. 3. The flash rate shall meet the requirements of UL 1971. 4. Where shown to be installed outside, device shall be of the weatherproof design. 5. Where installed surface mounted, provide factory backbox and/or backbox skirt


P. Audible/Visual Combination Devices:

1. Shall meet the applicable requirements of Section A listed above for audibility. 2. Shall meet the requirements of Section B listed above for visibility. 3. Where shown to be installed outside, device shall be of the weatherproof design. 4. Where installed surface mounted, provide factory backbox and/or backbox skirt


Q. Manual Fire Alarm Stations

1. Manual fire alarm stations shall be non-code, double action, non-breakglass type, equipped with key lock so that they may be tested without operating the handle.

2. Stations must be designed such that after an actual activation, they cannot be restored to normal except by key reset.

3. An operated station shall automatically condition itself so as to be visually detected, as operated, at a minimum distance of 100 feet (30.5 m) front or side.

4. Manual stations shall be constructed of aluminum, with operating instructions provided on the cover. The word FIRE shall appear on the manual station in letters one half inch (12.7 mm) in size or larger.

5. All manual stations installed outdoors, in non-conditioned spaces and/or wet environments shall be installed with STI No. STI-3150-R weather stopper cover.

6. Surface mounted manual stations shall be complete with factory backbox such as the Notifier BG-2. Typical wiring device backboxes will not be accepted.

R. Conventional Photoelectric Area Smoke Detectors

1. Photoelectric smoke detectors shall be a 24 VDC, two-wire, ceiling-mounted,

light scattering type using an LED light source. 2. Each detector shall contain a remote LED output and a built-in test switch. 3. The detector shall be of a separate head-in-base design. 4. The detector shall automatically provide drift compensation to minimize nuisance

alarms. 5. The detector shall be capable of generating a signal when maintenance is

required.

16722 - 13

6. It shall be possible to read the sensitivity of the device in percent obscuration per foot without the need for the generation of smoke.

7. A visual indication of an alarm shall be provided by dual latching Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs), on the detector, which may be seen from ground level over 360 degrees. These LEDs shall flash every 5 seconds, indicating that power is applied to the detector.

8. The detector shall not go into alarm when exposed to air velocities of up to 3000 feet (914.4 m) per minute.

9. The detector screen and cover assembly shall be easily removable for field cleaning of the detector chamber.

10. All field wire connections shall be made to the base through the use of a clamping plate and screw.

S. Duct Smoke Detectors

1. Duct smoke detectors shall be a 24 VDC type with visual alarm and power

indicators, and a reset switch. Each detector shall be installed upon the composite supply/return air ducts(s), with properly sized air sampling tubes.

T. Specific System Operations

1. Alarm Verification: Each of the intelligent addressable smoke detectors in the

system may be independently programmed for verification of alarm signals. The alarm verification time period shall not exceed 2 minutes.

2. Point Disable: Any addressable device or conventional circuit in the system may be enabled or disabled through the system keypad.

3. Point Read: The system shall be able to display the following point status diagnostic functions: a. Device status b. Device type c. Custom device label d. Device zone assignments

4. System Status Reports: Upon command from an operator of the system, a status report will be generated and printed, listing all system status.

5. System History Recording and Reporting: The fire alarm control panel shall contain a history buffer that will be capable of storing up to 1000 events. Each of these activations will be stored and time and date stamped with the actual time of the activation. The contents of the history buffer may be manually reviewed, one event at a time, or printed in its entirety.

6. The history buffer shall use non-volatile memory. Systems that use volatile memory for history storage are not acceptable substitutes.

7. Automatic Detector Maintenance Alert: The fire alarm control panel shall automatically interrogate each intelligent detector and shall analyze the detector responses over a period of time. If any intelligent detector in the system responds with a reading that is above or below normal limits, then the system will enter the trouble mode, and the particular detector will be annunciated on the system display. This feature shall in no way inhibit the receipt of alarm conditions in the system, nor shall it require any special hardware, special tools or computer expertise to perform.

8. The fire alarm control panel shall include Silent and Audible Walk Test functions - Silent and Audible. It shall include the ability to test initiating device circuits and Notification Appliance Circuits from the field without returning to the panel to reset the system. The operation shall be as follows: a. The Silent Walk Test will not sound NACs but will store the Walk Test

information in History for later viewing.

16722 - 14

b. Alarming an initiating device shall activate programmed outputs, which are selected to participate in Walk Test.

c. Introducing a trouble into the initiating device shall activate the programmed outputs.

d. Walk Test shall be selectable on a per device/circuit basis. All devices and circuits which are not selected for Walk Test shall continue to provide fire protection and if an alarm is detected, will exit Walk Test and activate all programmed alarm functions.

e. All devices tested in walk test shall be recorded in the history buffer. 9. Supervisory Operation

a. An alarm from a supervisory device shall cause the appropriate indication on the control panel display, light a common supervisory LED, but will not cause the system to enter the trouble mode.

10. Signal Silence Operation a. The FACP shall have the ability to program each output circuit

(notification circuit or relay) to deactivate upon depression of the Signal Silence switch.

11. Non-Alarm Input Operation a. Any addressable initiating device in the system may be used as a non-

alarm input to monitor normally open contact type devices. Non-alarm functions are a lower priority than fire alarm initiating devices.

2.4 SYSTEM COMPONENTS:

A. Addressable Pull Box (manual station)

1. Addressable pull boxes shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the panel representing the state of the manual switch and the addressable communication module status. They shall use a key operated test-reset lock, and shall be designed so that after actual emergency operation, they cannot be restored to normal use except by the use of a key. Manual stations shall be of the double action type.

2. All operated stations shall have a positive, visual indication of operation and utilize a key type reset.

3. Manual stations shall be constructed of aluminum with clearly visible operating instructions provided on the cover. The word FIRE shall appear on the front of the stations in raised letters, 1.75 inches (44 mm) or larger.

4. All manual stations installed outdoors, in non-conditioned spaces and/or wet environments shall be installed with STI No. STI-3150-R weather stopper cover.

5. Surface mounted manual stations shall be complete with factory backbox such as the Notifier BG-2. Typical wiring device backboxes will not be accepted.

B. Intelligent Photoelectric Smoke Detector

1. The detectors shall use the photoelectric (light-scattering) principal to measure

smoke density and shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the panel representing the analog level of smoke density.

2. The detectors shall be ceiling-mounted and available in an alternate model with an integral fixed 135-degree heat-sensing element.

3. Each detector shall contain a remote LED output and a built-in test switch. 4. Detector shall be provided on a twist-lock base. 5. It shall be possible to perform a calibrated sensitivity and performance test on the

detector without the need for the generation of smoke. The test method shall test all detector circuits.

6. A visual indication of an alarm shall be provided by dual latching Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs), on the detector, which may be seen from ground level over 360

16722 - 15

degrees. These LEDs shall periodically flash to indicate that the detector is in communication with the control panel.

7. The detector shall not go into alarm when exposed to air velocities of up to 1500 feet per minute (fpm).

8. The detector screen and cover assembly shall be easily removable for field cleaning of the detector chamber.

9. All field wire connections shall be made to the base through the use of a clamping plate and screw.

C. Intelligent Ionization Smoke Detector

1. The detectors shall use the dual-chamber ionization principal to measure

products of combustion and shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the panel representing the analog level of products of combustion.

D. Intelligent Thermal Detectors

1. Thermal detectors shall be intelligent addressable devices rated at 135 degrees

Fahrenheit (58 degrees Celsius) and have a rate-of-rise element rated at 15 degrees F (9.4 degrees C) per minute. It shall connect via two wires to the fire alarm control panel signaling line circuit.

E. Intelligent Duct Smoke Detector

1. The smoke detector housing shall accommodate an intelligent photoelectric

detector that provides continuous monitoring and alarm verification from the panel.

2. When sufficient smoke is sensed, an alarm signal is initiated at the FACP, and appropriate action taken to change over air handling systems to help prevent the rapid distribution of toxic smoke and fire gases throughout the areas served by the duct system.

F. Addressable Dry Contact Monitor Module

1. Addressable monitor modules shall be provided to connect one supervised IDC

zone of conventional alarm initiating devices (any normally open dry contact device) to one of the fire alarm control panel SLCs.

2. The monitor module shall mount in a 4-inch square (101.6 mm square), 2-1/8 inch (54 mm) deep electrical box.

3. The IDC zone shall be suitable for Style D or Style B operation. An LED shall be provided that shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the monitor module is operational and in regular communication with the control panel.

4. For difficult to reach areas, the monitor module shall be available in a miniature package and shall be no larger than 2-3/4 inch (70 mm) x 1-1/4 inch (31.7 mm) x 1/2 inch (12.7 mm). This version need not include Style D or an LED.

G. Two-Wire Detector Monitoring

1. Means shall be provided for the monitoring of conventional Initiating Device

Circuits populated with 2-wire smoke detectors as well as normally open contact alarm initiating devices (pull stations, heat detectors, etc).

2. Each IDC of conventional devices will be monitored as a distinct address on the polling circuit by an addressable module. The module will supervise the IDC for alarms and circuit integrity (opens).

3. The monitoring module will be compatible, and listed as such, with all devices on the supervised circuit.

16722 - 16

4. The IDC zone may be wired for Class A or B (Style D or Style B) operation. An LED shall be provided that shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the monitor module is operational and in regular communication with the control panel.

5. The monitoring module shall be capable of mounting in a 4-inch square (101.6 mm square), 2-1/8 inch (54 mm) deep electrical box or in a surface mount backbox.

H. Addressable Control Relay Module

1. Addressable control relay modules shall be provided to control the operation of

fan shutdown and other auxiliary control functions. 2. The control module shall mount in a standard 4-inch square, 2-1/8 inch deep

electrical box, or to a surface mounted backbox. 3. The control relay module will provide a dry contact, Form-C relay. The relay coil

shall be magnetically latched to reduce wiring connection requirements, and to insure that 100% of all auxiliary relays may be energized at the same time on the same pair of wires.

4. The control relay module shall be suitable for pilot duty applications and rated for a minimum of 0.6 amps at 30 VDC.

I. Isolator Module

1. Isolator modules shall be provided to automatically isolate wire-to-wire short circuits on an SLC Style 6 (Class A) or Style 4 (Class B branch). The isolator module shall limit the number of modules or detectors that may be rendered inoperative by a short circuit fault on the SLC loop segment or branch. At least one isolator module shall be provided for each floor or protected zone of the building.

2. If a wire-to-wire short occurs, the isolator module shall automatically open-circuit (disconnect) the SLC. When the short circuit condition is corrected, the isolator module shall automatically reconnect the isolated section.

3. The isolator module shall not require any address setting, and its operations shall be totally automatic. It shall not be necessary to replace or reset an isolator module after its normal operation.

4. The isolator module shall mount in a standard 4-inch (101.6 mm) deep electrical box or in a surface mounted backbox. It shall provide a single LED that shall flash to indicate that the isolator is operational and shall illuminate steadily to indicate that a short circuit condition has been detected and isolated.

J. Serially Connected Annunciator

1. The annunciator shall communicate with the fire alarm control panel via a two

wire EIA 485 (multi-drop) communications circuit. 2. The annunciator shall require no more than four wires for operation. Annunciation

shall include: intelligent addressable points, system software zones, control relays, and notification appliance circuits. The following operations shall also be provided: a. Up to 32 annunciators, each with up to 64 points may be installed on the

system. b. The annunciator shall include a single electrical key switch to disable all

switch functions. c. The annunciator shall provide alarm and trouble resound, with flash for

new conditions. d. This unit shall provide for each zone: alarm indications, using a red alarm

and yellow trouble LEDs, and switches for the control of fire alarm control

16722 - 17

panel functions. The annunciator will also have an ON-LINE LED, local piezo electric signal, local acknowledge/lamp test switch, and custom slide-in zone/function identification labels.

e. Switches shall be available for remote annunciation and control of output points in the system, system acknowledge, telephone zone select, speaker select, global signal silence, and global system reset within the confines of all applicable standards.

3. This system shall provide a means of interfacing to graphic style annunciator. 4. The graphic annunciator interface will possess the capability of individually

annunciating each individual addressable device in the system.

K. Alphanumeric LCD Type Annunciator: 1. The alphanumeric display annunciator shall be a supervised, remotely located

backlit LCD display containing a minimum of eighty (80) characters for alarm annunciation in clear English text.

2. The LCD annunciator shall display all alarm and trouble conditions in the system. 3. An audible indication of alarm shall be integral to the alphanumeric display. 4. The display shall be UL listed for fire alarm application. 5. It shall be possible to connect up to 32 LCD displays and be capable of wiring

distances up to 6,000 feet from the control panel. 6. The annunciator shall connect to a separate, dedicated "terminal mode" EIA-485

interface. This is a two-wire loop connection and shall be capable of distances to 6,000 feet. Each terminal mode LCD display shall mimic the main control panel.

2.5 SYSTEM COMPONENTS - ADDRESSABLE DEVICES

A. Addressable Devices - General

1. Addressable devices shall employ the simple-to-set decade addressing scheme. Addressable devices which use a binary-coded address setting method, such as a DIP switch, are not an allowable substitute.

2. Detectors shall be addressable and intelligent, and shall connect with two wires to the fire alarm control panel signaling line circuits.

3. Addressable smoke and thermal (heat) detectors shall provide dual alarm and power/polling LEDs. Both LEDs shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the detector is operational and in regular communication with the control panel, and both LEDs shall be placed into steady illumination by the control panel, indicating that an alarm condition has been detected. An output connection shall also be provided in the base to connect an external remote alarm LED.

4. Using software in the FACP, detectors shall automatically compensate for dust accumulation and other slow environmental changes that may affect their performance. The detectors shall be listed by UL as meeting the calibrated sensitivity test requirements of NFPA Standard 72, Chapter 7.

5. Detectors shall be ceiling-mount and shall include a separate twist-lock base with tamper proof feature. Base options shall include a base with a built-in (local) sounder rated for a minimum of 85 DBA, a relay base and an isolator base designed for Style 7 applications.

6. Detectors shall provide a test means whereby they will simulate an alarm condition and report that condition to the control panel.

7. Detectors shall also store an internal identifying type code that the control panel shall use to identify the type of device (ION, PHOTO, THERMAL).

8. Detectors shall provide address-setting means using decimal switches.

16722 - 18

2.6 BATTERIES:

A. Upon loss of Primary (AC) power to the control panel, the batteries shall have sufficient capacity to power the fire alarm system for required standby time (24 or 60 hours) followed by 5 minutes of alarm.

B. The batteries are to be completely maintenance free. No liquids are required. Fluid level

checks for refilling, spills, and leakage shall not be required.

C. If necessary to meet standby requirements, external battery/charger systems may be used.

2.7 SURGE SUPPRESSION

A. Provide and install Ditek No. 2MHLPB-WS on all initiating circuits entering/leaving the building. Provide and install devices in junction box concealed above accessible ceiling immediately at building exterior wall. Properly ground device per manufacturer’s instruction.

B. Provide and install Ditek No. DTK-120SRD-A on all 120V circuits providing power to any

and all fire alarm system components. Provide and install empty cabinet adjacent to respective fire alarm system (match fire alarm system device cabinet). Cabinet to house surge protection device.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION:

A. Installation shall be in accordance with the NEC, NFPA 72, local and state codes, as shown on the drawings, and as recommended by the major equipment manufacturer.

B. All conduit, junction boxes, conduit supports and hangers shall be concealed in finished

areas and may be exposed in unfinished areas. Smoke detectors shall not be installed prior to the system programming and test period. If construction is ongoing during this period, measures shall be taken to protect smoke detectors from contamination and physical damage. All fire detection and alarm system devices, control panels and remote annunciators shall be flush mounted when located in finished areas and may be surface mounted when located in unfinished areas.

C. Manual pull stations shall be suitable for surface mounting or semi flush mounting as

shown on the plans, and shall be installed not less than 42 inches (1067 mm), nor more than 48 inches (122 mm) above the finished floor.

3.2 TEST

A. The service of a competent, factory-trained engineer or technician authorized by the manufacturer of the fire alarm equipment shall be provided to technically supervise and participate during all of the adjustments and tests for the system. All testing shall be in accordance with NFPA 72 Chapter 10. Testing shall be personally supervised by NICET Level III Certified Personnel

B. Before energizing the cables and wires, check for correct connections and test for short

circuits, ground faults, continuity, and insulation.

C. Close each sprinkler system flow valve and verify proper supervisory alarm at the FACP.

16722 - 19

D. Verify activation of all waterflow switches.

E. Open initiating device circuits and verify that the trouble signal actuates.

F. Open and short signaling line circuits and verify that the trouble signal actuates.

G. Open and short notification appliance circuits and verify that trouble signal actuates.

H. Ground all circuits and verify response of trouble signals.

I. Check presence and audibility of tone at all alarm notification devices.

J. Check installation, supervision, and operation of all intelligent smoke detectors using the walk test.

K. Each of the alarm conditions that the system is required to detect should be introduced

on the system. Verify the proper receipt and the proper processing of the signal at the FACP and the correct activation of the control points.

L. When the system is equipped with optional features, the manufacturer's manual shall be

consulted to determine the proper testing procedures. This is intended to address such items as verifying controls performed by individually addressed or grouped devices, sensitivity monitoring, verification functionality and similar.

3.3 SPARE PARTS

A. Contractor shall furnish the extra materials listed below, prior to installation that match products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents:

1. Lamps for Strobe units 2. Smoke Detectors 3. Heat Detectors 4. Duct Detectors 5. Detector Bases 6. Audio/Visual Units 7. Visual Only Units 8. Monitor Modules 9. Control Modules 10. Isolation Modules 11. Manual Fire Alarm Pull Stations (Conventional or Addressable as applicable to

job)

B. Provide a quantity equal to no less than five percent (5%) of the number of units of each type installed but not less than one (1) of each type.

C. Each spare part shall be complete with 50" of 3/4" EMT conduit, system wiring and

required system programming. 3.4 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Existing Fire Alarm Equipment: Maintain fully operational until new equipment has been tested and accepted. As new equipment is installed, label it “NOT IN SERVICE” until new equipment is accepted. Remove tags from new equipment when put into service and tag existing fire alarm equipment “NOT IN SERVICE” until removed from the building.

16722 - 20

B. Equipment Removal: After acceptance of the new fire detection and alarm system,

remove existing disconnected fire alarm equipment and restore damaged surfaces. Package operational fire alarm and detection equipment that has been removed; deliver to Owner. Remove from site and legally dispose of remainder of existing material.

3.5 PROGRAM CODE

A. At the end of the project and prior to requesting substantial completion, the Contractor shall provide on CD-Rom a copy of the current program code for the system.

1. During program upload or download the system shall retain the capability for

alarm reporting. 2. The system shall download to a PC for program editing. System program shall

be stored on a CD-Rom and all programming shall be multi-level password protected. A duplicate-copy of the CD-Rom shall be turned over to the Owner’s personnel prior to requesting substantial completion. All system passwords shall also be turned over to the Owner at this time.

3.6 SYSTEM TESTING

A. After installation of the Fire Detection and Alarm System is complete, the contractor shall align, adjust and balance the system and perform complete 100% operational testing as herein before described to determine conformance of the system to the requirements of the contract documents. Correct deficiencies observed in testing and replace malfunctioning or damaged items with new ones and retest until satisfactory performance and conditions are achieved. Record results using the fire alarm system printer of the testing and submit to the Engineer as part of the close-out documentation. Should the installation of a permanent printer not be part of the project, contractor shall provide and install a temporary printer and all required interface hardware, paper, toner (ink), software and programming to provide the required test reports. This temporary printer shall be available for printing test reports as required until final acceptance of the fire detection system has been issued by the engineer.

B. In addition to the testing requirements herein before specified, testing shall also include

the following as a minimum:

1. Verify the absence of unwanted voltages between circuit conductors and the ground conductor(s).

2. Test all conductors for short circuits. 3. With each circuit pair, short circuit at the far end of the circuit and measure the

circuit resistance with an ohmmeter. Record the circuit resistance of each circuit on the record drawings.

4. Test each and every initiation and signaling device for alarm operation and proper response at the control unit. Test smoke detectors with actual products of combustion.

5. Test both primary and secondary power sources for proper operation. 6. Test the system to ensure that all specified functions operate as specified. This

includes all function switches and indications at all Fire Detection and Alarm System control and monitoring points.

3.7 FIRE MARSHAL'S CHECKOUT

A. Upon completing the entire installation of the Fire Detection and Alarm System, the Contractor shall perform a demonstration of the operation of the complete system in the presence of the Architect/Engineer. The above demonstrations shall encompass the

16722 - 21

work performed under this Contract. Any deficiencies found with the Fire Detection and Alarm System installed as part of this project shall be corrected with no additional expense to the Owner prior to demonstration to “Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ)”. After successful and accepted demonstration of the entire system to the Architect/Engineer, the Contractor shall schedule demonstration of the system with the Authority having Jurisdiction (AHJ).

B. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating this demonstration with the

Architect/Engineer and “Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ)” a minimum of forty-eight (48) hours prior to the meeting.

3.8 CLOSE-OUT DOCUMENTATION

A. Upon successful completion of installation of the Fire Detection and Alarm System, the Contractor shall submit to the AHJ’s office through the Architect/Engineer, a copy of the Fire Alarm System Certifications and Description form as described and required in NFPA 72.

B. Contractor shall also label the Fire Detection and Alarm System as being certified by a

Louisiana State Fire Marshal licensed contractor.

C. Equipment Manuals: As part of the equipment manual submittals, the Contractor shall include the following information as a minimum:

1. All information required to be submitted as part of the shop drawing submittal 2. Operation and Maintenance Manual 3. Device Address List 4. Record of field tests of the system including the 100% operational test. 5. Names, addresses, and telephone numbers of service department including

nighttime and holiday access. 3.9 WARRANTY PERIOD REQUIRED WORK

A. Three (3) months after date of substantial completion of the entire system, the Contractor shall provide a complete checkout and calibration of entire Fire Detection and Alarm System. A detailed report of this checkout shall be immediately submitted to the Architect/Engineer for review and acceptance.

B. When requested by the owner within one (1) year of date of Substantial Completion, the

contractor shall provide on-site assistance in adjusting sound levels, controls, and sensitivities to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to three (3) requested adjustment visits to the site for this purpose.

C. At a period between eleven (11) and twelve (12) months from the date of substantial

completion, contractor shall provide complete checkout and calibration of entire Fire Detection and Alarm System and shall certify the system as being fully operational.

3.10 TRAINING

A. Contractor shall provide one (1) on-site training session with a minimum of four (4) hours of instructions on system operation to Owner's representative(s) upon completion of construction phase of the work. Contractor shall conduct instruction session prior to use by the Owner or requesting substantial completion.

B. Contractor shall submit to the Engineer through the Architect, a sign-in sheet with the

instructor's signature and signatures of all persons present during the instructional

16722 - 22

session. The sign-in sheet shall indicate time of instruction session. This sheet shall be submitted prior to use by the Owner or requesting substantial completion. Training session shall be requested in writing to the Engineer a minimum of seven (7) consecutive calendar days prior to time requested.

C. Items to instruct the Owner's personnel on include startup, shutdown, troubleshooting,

servicing, adjusting, and preventive maintenance.

D. At the same time as the three (3) month check-out and calibration listed above, the contractor shall also provide one (1) additional training session consisting of a maximum of four (4) hours for owner's personnel. Sign-in sheets shall be submitted as hereinbefore specified. This session shall also be scheduled a minimum of seven (7) consecutive calendar days prior to requested time.
